Trumbull Pool Guards Save Drowning Girl

By Susan Silvers, Connecticut Post, Bridgeport

Jul. 13–TRUMBULL — In his brief career as a lifeguard, Cody Hutchinson has seen plenty of kids bob up and down in the water, holding their breath for a time as they go under.

So when the 15-year-old noticed a young girl in the pool at Beach Memorial Park about 5:25 p.m. Wednesday, he was not overly concerned at first.

But when the dark-haired youngster clad in a yellow swimsuit decorated with roses sank to the bottom in about 7 feet of water and stayed submerged in a fetal position an estimated 15 seconds, Hutchinson quickly realized something was wrong.

Hutchinson, perched on a high chair at the deep end of the pool, blew three times on his whistle — the emergency signal. Then, he dove into the pool — a diagonal distance of about 20 feet — as colleagues called 911 and sprinted to help from their nearby station where they had been preparing to give swim classes.

Thanks to Hutchinson and others who joined the rescue, a week filled with eight tragic deaths across the region — five of them drownings — finally was blessed by joy.

After about two minutes of life-saving efforts, rescuers and the girl’s parents finally heard the sweet sounds of her cries.

“It kind of goes along with what I hope to be doing in the future,” said Matthew Cellini, the lifeguard who helped Hutchinson pull the child from the pool.

A 20-year-old junior at Allegheny College, Cellini plans to become a doctor.

When the youngster — whose name was not released by officials — was first pulled from the pool, Cellini said he didn’t have time to think about how things might turn out.

“Her eyes were rolling in the back of her head,” he said.

He responded by doing what he’s been trained to do, placing a big valve mask over the girl’s face while volunteer medical professionals who happened to be at the park — a nurse from Bridgeport Hospital and a physician’s assistant at Norwalk Hospital — did chest compressions and took her pulse.

The volunteer Samaritans’ names also were not released by police.

“It was a relief to have them there,” Cellini said of the helpers. “They had done it before.”

But even the young Hutchinson, a Trumbull High School junior who hasn’t picked a career and who got his lifeguard certification last December, expressed confidence that they could have handled the emergency by themselves, if necessary.

The girl wanted to go home after she was revived, but emergency medical personnel whisked her to Bridgeport Hospital, where she remained under observation Thursday in fair condition.

The head lifeguard at the Beach pool, Michaela Walsh, said she posted a Connecticut Post article about last week’s drowning at Seaside Park in Bridgeport to remind her staff how serious their job is.

“She’s the head lifeguard for a reason,” Mary Markham, the town recreation director, said of Walsh, a seven-summer employee who makes sure five guards are stationed around the pool at all times.

Markham said Wednesday’s rescue came two days after Walsh conducted an emergency drill at the 10,000-square-foot pool.

Walsh, a senior at Susquehanna University, said the lifeguards have had to deal with other medical emergencies this season, including an out-of-pool seizure, but nothing of this magnitude.

Though gratified they were able to help, Hutchinson and Cellini on Thursday were taking no bows for their actions, instead focusing on the girl’s condition.

“I feel great that she’s alive,” Hutchinson said.

Susan Silvers, who covers regional issues, can be reached at 330-6426.

—–

To see more of the Connecticut Post, or to subscribe to the newspaper, go to http://www.connpost.com/.

Copyright (c) 2007, Connecticut Post, Bridgeport

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

UCLA Unveils State-of-the-Art Emergency Center to Serve Westside Community

SANTA MONICA, Calif., July 13 /PRNewswire/ — Physicians, hospital employees and hospital leadership will join community members at an open-house event on Sunday, July 15, to celebrate the opening of Santa Monica-UCLA Medical Center and Orthopaedic Hospital’s new emergency center. Known as the Nethercutt Emergency Center, the new ER will serve the Westside community and beyond, and will feature new life-saving, top-of-the-line technology in much larger, more comfortable rooms to provide even better care to patients. The preview event will include tours of the facility, health screenings, children’s activities and food and entertainment for community members of all ages. The new facility officially opens to patients on July 25.

“Given that so many other emergency rooms across the country and especially here in Los Angeles have been forced to shut down, we’re very proud to be opening this new facility,” said Dr. Wally Ghurabi, medical director of Nethercutt Emergency Center. “This is truly the ER of the future — and it will set a new standard for emergency medicine in West Los Angeles.”

The 16,000-square-foot Nethercutt Emergency Center contains several innovative features that will enable Santa Monica-UCLA to better meet the needs of the nearly 30,000 patients who annually seek emergency care at the hospital. Revolutionizing how emergency patients are evaluated and treated, the facility is equipped with an onsite 64-slice CT Scanner that generates better, faster images while exposing patients to less radiation. In doing so, it enables more rapid diagnosis of conditions such as chest pain, stroke and breathing disorders. Additional features include digital X-ray technology, state-of-the-art monitoring equipment, decontamination showers, isolation rooms and an automated medication dispensing system.

The center will open simultaneously with a new, 9,000-square-foot laboratory featuring the latest chemistry, hematology and blood-bank analyzers. The two facilities will be linked by a pneumatic tube system that should result in faster turnaround times for lab results and, ultimately, better service.

“Every patient who comes to us deserves the best,” said Dr. David Feinberg, CEO of UCLA Hospital System and interim associate vice chancellor. “And every one of them, when they leave us, should be an ambassador to tell others about the great care and service they received at our new Nethercutt Emergency Center.”

The entire ER has been designed to provide more private, compassionate and efficient care to all patients. Examples of upgrades range from a special, child-friendly pediatrics room to exam rooms that offer better privacy and versatility, to a clinical decision unit where patients will be continuously monitored before being admitted to the hospital or discharged home.

Santa Monica-UCLA Medical Center and Orthopaedic Hospital Rebuilding Project

After the 1994 Northridge earthquake damaged portions of Santa Monica-UCLA’s existing medical complex, hospital leadership embarked on a mission to bring the medical center up to the latest seismic safety standards and better serve the community’s changing demographics and healthcare needs. When completed, the 271-bed replacement hospital will contain 315,000 square feet of new space and connect to the existing Merle Norman Pavilion, which is undergoing renovation as part of the project.

Boasting an inviting, user-friendly design compatible with the hospital’s neighborhood setting, the new Santa Monica-UCLA Medical Center and Orthopaedic Hospital was designed by prominent New York architect Robert A.M. Stern, who is dean of the Yale School of Architecture, in conjunction with CO Architects (formerly Anshen + Allen Los Angeles). The unique design features a modified Northern Italian architectural style similar to original buildings on the UCLA campus. Envisioned as a patient and family-focused environment, the new facility emphasizes daylight and views to outdoor gardens. More than 25 percent of the new medical campus will be devoted to green and open spaces.

“This is an exciting introduction to our new medical campus coming online in the next three years,” said Posie Carpenter, chief administrative officer of Santa Monica-UCLA Medical Center and Orthopaedic Hospital. “We have always been committed to providing the best care possible. Now, we have a top-of-the-line facility equipped with cutting-edge technology to match the expertise of our outstanding emergency care team.”

Located on the ground level of the new Southwest Wing on 15th Street, just north of Arizona Avenue, the opening of the new Nethercutt Emergency Center on July 25 will trigger a series of events instrumental to the completion of the new hospital. Officials expect the rest of the new hospital, including the Orthopaedic, North and Central wings, to be completed in 2010. Final project completion will occur in 2011, following demolition of the existing 9-story Tower building on 15th Street.

   Project highlights include:   --  The Orthopaedic Hospital facility, featuring an outpatient clinic,       UCLA Department of Orthopaedics administrative and faculty offices,       other administrative offices and a library.   --  A new Birthing Center, featuring a 16-bassinet Neonatal Intensive Care       Unit and a new Labor and Delivery Unit with comfortable, homelike       rooms   --  A new Critical Care Unit with state-of-the-art medical equipment and       360-degree access to patients.   --  Six new, state-of-the-art Operating Rooms.   --  Patient rooms featuring family space and comfortable sleeper chairs       for rooming-in.   --  Cutting-edge medical equipment and integrated communications       technology.   --  A new cafeteria with both indoor and outdoor seating areas.   

*The community open house celebration will be held on Sunday, July 15 from 1 p.m. to 4 p.m. at the new Nethercutt Emergency Center on 15th Street between Arizona Ave. and Wilshire Blvd. in Santa Monica. Parking is available in the structure located at 1311 16th Street.

About UCLA Health System

Since 1955, UCLA has been recognized as a leader in patient care, medical research and teaching, and its medical center has been ranked the No. 1 hospital in the western U.S. for the past 17 years by U.S. News & World Report. Offering patients of all ages a wide range of services and comprehensive care, from routine to highly specialized medical and surgical treatment and programs in geriatric, adult, adolescent and child psychiatry, UCLA Health System includes the UCLA Medical Center (soon to be recognized as the Ronald Regan UCLA Medical Center), Santa Monica-UCLA Medical Center and Orthopaedic Hospital, the Stewart and Lynda Resnick Neuropsychiatric Hospital, and Mattel Children’s Hospital UCLA.

   SM-UCLA & OH: Ted Braun   (310) 319-4567   Hill & Knowlton: Summer Macey   (310) 633-9428  

UCLA Health System

CONTACT: Ted Braun of Santa Monica-UCLA Medical Center and OrthopaedicHospital, +1-310-319-4567; Summer Macey of Hill & Knowlton, +1-310-633-9428,for UCLA Health System

Dozen Arrested in Major Drug Raid — Authorities Catch Gang Members, Confiscate $1 Million, Ton of Pot

By Lawrence Buser buser@commercialappealcom

A dozen members of three gangs have been arrested in a major drug bust involving the seizure of marijuana, cocaine, illegal weapons and $1 million in cash, authorities said Wednesday.

Speaking at a press conference, U.S. Atty. David Kustoff said raids were carried out at 15 locations with the primary focus at homes on Mayflower and Vernon, both near Jackson and National in the Nutbush area.

In addition to bales of packaged marijuana, authorities found a sophisticated growing operation with fully developed marijuana plants ready for harvest, he said.

The seizures, carried out Tuesday, included $1 million in cash, more than a ton of marijuana, 20 pounds of cocaine, 15 illegal firearms and dozens of vehicles.

Authorities estimated that a pound of marijuana could be sold for $700 on the streets and that a kilogram of cocaine – 2.2 pounds – would bring $20,000.

The multi-agency investigation was the culmination of several months of work and ranks as “one of the biggest busts in the history of the city,” said Memphis Police Director Larry Godwin.

“It’s certainly one of the top five ever,” he said.

The 12 men indicted in the case include gang members of the Vice Lords, the Gangster Disciples and the Almighty Latin Kings. Ten of the 12 are in custody.

Drug conspiracy carries punishment from 10 years to life in prison and up to $4 million in fines.

The FBI-led investigation, which is ongoing, also involves the Memphis Police, Shelby County Sheriff’s Office and Immigration and Customs Enforcement.

– Lawrence Buser: 529-2385

——————–

Busted

Named in federal drug conspiracy indictments Wednesday are: Argeo Gonzalez-Perez, a.k.a. ‘Nicolas,’ ‘El Enano;’ Reyler Sanchez-Perez, a.k.a. ‘Pezuna;’ Juan Carlos Coss; Juan Jose Hernandez, a.k.a. ‘Mario,’ ‘Vato;’ Porfirio Montejano; Antowine Conway; Terrell Walls, a.k.a. ‘C,’ ‘Crackrah;’ Gregory Mabone; Roderick Tucker; Ray Alexander; Reginald Bean Jr., a.k.a. ‘Marcus D. Jones,’ ‘Marcus D. Allen;’ and David Staples.

——————–

(c) 2007 Commercial Appeal, The. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Summa Mourns Death of Former Vice President: Susan Deveny Pavloff, 50, Remembered As Caring

By Cheryl Powell, The Akron Beacon Journal, Ohio

Jul. 13–Even after her death, Susan “Sue” Deveny Pavloff is raising money for the hospital she loved in the community she passionately supported.

The longtime Akron resident and former vice president of development for Summa Health System died Wednesday at age 50.

Although she never smoked, Pavloff died from lung cancer.

At her request, her family is asking memorials be made to the Summa Center for Cancer Care through the Summa Hospitals Foundation.

“Here she is, still fundraising for Summa,” said her husband, Jon. “That was what we talked about, and that’s what she wanted to do.”

Pavloff started volunteering at Akron City Hospital in 1972.

In 2000, she joined Summa as a consultant to spearhead the inaugural Sapphire Ball, the health system’s largest annual fundraising event. The following year, she became Summa’s director of development and later was promoted to vice president of development.

She also volunteered for numerous community boards and at her church, St. Paul’s Episcopal Church.

“She was passionate about Akron — making Akron a better place,” said her brother, Dr. T. Clifford Deveny, Summa’s vice president for physician alignment. “It was all about pride in Akron and giving back and doing the right thing.”

After being diagnosed with cancer, she stepped down from her job and served as special assistant to the president of the Summa Hospitals Foundation.

The flags at Akron City and St. Thomas hospitals are being flown at half-staff in her honor.

“Sue was a dear friend and trusted colleague to many, and we will miss her energy, her laughter and her passion,” Thomas J. Strauss, Summa’s president and chief executive, wrote in a letter to Summa’s staff Thursday. “Sue made an indelible mark on Summa Health System and this community.”

When Pavloff was diagnosed with lung cancer two years ago, doctors gave her about five months to live, her husband said. But with a new treatment and a determined spirit, she gained more time with the couple’s three children: Alexander, 18; Andrew, 16; and Tatiana, 12.

Even while dying, Pavloff put others first, her husband said.

When two of her close friends visited her a couple of weeks ago, she reminded them about another friend who needed their help, he recalled.

“There she was on her deathbed, thinking of other people,” he said. “She always cared about what she could do for others.”

Calling hours will be from 3 to 6 p.m. Sunday at Billow funeral home, 85 N. Miller Road, Fairlawn.

A memorial service will be at 11 a.m. Monday at St. Paul’s Episcopal Church, 1361 W. Market St., Akron, with the Rev. Sandra Selby officiating.

Memorials can be sent to Summa Hospitals Foundation/Center for Cancer Care, 525 E. Market St., P.O. Box 2090, Akron, OH 44309-2090.

Cheryl Powell can be reached at 330-996-3902 or [email protected].

—–

To see more of the Akron Beacon Journal, or to subscribe to the newspaper, go to http://www.ohio.com.

Copyright (c) 2007, The Akron Beacon Journal, Ohio

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

Undetectable Basal Ovarian Stromal Blood Flow in Infertile Women is Related to Low Ovarian Reserve

By Younis, Johnny S Haddad, Sami; Matilsky, Moshe; Radin, Orit; Ben- Ami, Moshe

Abstract To gain insight into the physiological significance of basal ovarian stromal blood flow and to assess whether its detection ability is related to ovarian reserve in infertility patients undergoing in vitro fertilization (IVF)-embryo transfer (ET) treatment. Thirty two consecutive infertile women scheduled for IVF- ET treatment were prospectively evaluated. Basal ovarian hormonal, ovarian volume and stromal blood flow studies were performed on day 3 of a natural cycle before treatment. The performer of the ultrasound studies was blinded to the clinical data. Women in the study were divided into two groups in accordance with estradiol level on the day of administration of human chorionic gonadotropin. Day-3 follicle-stimulating hormone and ovarian volume were significantly poorer in the women with low (group A) as compared with good (group B) ovarian reserve. Likewise, the numbers of follicles >/=14 mm in diameter, oocytes retrieved and embryos achieved were significantly lower in group A than group B. Six clinical pregnancies were obtained in group B, whereas no pregnancy was obtained in group A. Nine out of the 15 (60%) women in group A had undetectable basal stromal blood flow in at least one of the ovaries, whereas only one of the 17 (6%) women in group B had undetectable flow (p

Keywords: Ovarian stroma, blood flow, ovarian reserve, in vitro fertilization-embryo transfer, Doppler

Introduction

The mass of primordial follicles in the human female is considered the biomarker of ovarian age [I]. Indeed, quantitative histological studies of human ovaries have confirmed that the total number of follicles declines through out life, and that very few, if any, remain shortly after menopause [2]. The physiological decrease of primordial follicles in the human ovary in conjunction with the decline in oocyte quality is referred to as low ovarian reserve [3]. Although the occurrence of this event is age-related, its onset in women is highly variable and its duration before ovarian senescence is usually unpredictable. It is estimated that the number of primordial follicles at menarche is about 300 000 and that it drops to only a few hundreds or thousands at the end of reproductive life [4]. Moreover, it is estimated that there is an accelerated loss of primordial follicles beginning at the age of 37-38 years, when a critical number of about 25 000 follicles is reached [1,2]. This typically precedes the menopause by 10-12 years. However, there is still a large, distinct variation between women, making it difficult to predict individual reproductive performance. Our understanding of the mechanisms that control ovarian reserve is still developing. One explanation could be related to life in utero; that is, the timing of oogonial stem cell elimination before birth could designate the size of the primordial follicle store in the ovary and therefore determine an upper limit on reproductive life span [5]. However, other mechanisms could also be involved.

In the current era of assisted reproduction and with die introduction of intracytoplasmic sperm injection to treat severe male-factor infertility, ovarian reserve has turned out to be the major determinant of reproductive performance. Therefore, it has become exceptionally important to evaluate the ovarian reserve before counseling for such treatments. Indeed, several studies in the last decade have focused on the ability to assess ovarian reserve as a means of predicting assisted reproduction potential. Endocrine studies proposed for examining ovarian reserve can be divided into static and dynamic tests [6]. Static studies generally are agreed to be undertaken on day 3 of a natural cycle and commonly are termed ‘basal tests’. High basal levels of follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) [7] and estradiol (E2) [8], in addition to low inhibin B [9], are usually considered to be related to low ovarian reserve. Dynamic studies have been performed to assess ovarian reserve after challenge with clomiphene citrate [10], gonadotropins [11] or gonadotropin-releasing hormone (GnRH) agonist [12]. However, it seems that these tests do not have absolute sensitivity and specificity [3]. Moreover, hormonal determinations may have inter- cycle variability [13], are laborious and expensive, and have not achieved wide clinical acceptance. Therefore, the search for more accurate, simple and agreeable parameters of ovarian reserve is still ongoing.

The combination of transvaginal ultrasound and pulsed color Doppler is increasingly used in gynecology to assess the hemodynamic changes in various physiological and pathological situations of the pelvic organs [14,15]. Moreover, in the last few years, some investigators have examined the feasibility of employing this technique in the uterine as well as the intraovarian circulations, in order to predict the outcome of in vitro fertilization (IVF)- embryo transfer (ET) treatment [16-26]. In addition, more recentiy three-dimensional power Doppler technology has been employed within the ovarian stroma to investigate its relationship with IVF-ET outcome [27,28] .

Employing two-dimensional color Doppler and addressing the intraovarian vasculature, studies have evaluated blood flow following pituitary downregulation [19,20], during superovulation [21-23] and oocyte pick-up [21-24], or through the luteal phase [21- 23]. Other studies have evaluated stromal blood flow in the early follicular phase [21,25,26], specifically in a natural cycle and before administering any hormonal therapy. However, the results of the previously published reports are still conflicting [1926] . Moreover, to the best of our knowledge, the issue of detection or not of the basal stomal ovarian blood flows in infertile women and its relationship with ovarian reserve has not yet been investigated in a targeted study.

Therefore we undertook the present study in order to evaluate, in a prospective fashion, the physiological significance of basal ovarian stromal blood flow employing two-dimensional transvaginal pulsed Doppler and color Doppler technologies. Specifically, we wished to assess whether detection or non-detection of basal stromal flow is related to ovarian reserve in infertility patients undergoing rVF-ET treatment.

Methods

Thirty-two consecutive women attending the Poriya Reproductive Medicine Unit in Tiberias, Israel, and scheduled for IVF-ET treatment, were prospectively evaluated in this preliminary work. AU women were spontaneously menstruating and had no clinical signs of menopause. Both ovaries were present in all women. Women with poor visualization of the ovaries (e.g. abdominal position) or with ovarian cyst >25 mm were excluded from the study. Infertile women eligible for IVF with day-3 FSH >10 IU/1 but still with regular menstruation were not excluded from this study. The etiologies of infertility in these patients were mechanical factor in six, male factor in eight, ovulatory dysfunction in six, unexplained infertility in ten and endometriosis in two cases. AU of the women were determined to have normal uterine cavities by hysterosalpingography and/or hysteroscopy. The results of the ovarian flow studies did not affect the course of IVF treatment in any patient.

Basal ovarian reserve studies including serum FSH and E2 as well as luteinizing hormone (LH) levels were obtained on day 3 of a natural cycle, one month prior to initiating IVF-ET treatment and following at least 3 months of no hormonal therapy.

On the same day as blood sampling, ovarian volume and basal stromal ovarian blood flow studies were performed in all women. Basal ultrasound studies were performed by one performer (S.H.) blinded to the clinical and endocrinological data as well as previous infertility treatment results. Ovarian volume and blood flow scans were performed employing a two-dimensional endovaginal probe with pulsed Doppler and color Doppler facilities (Acuson 128- P-10; Acuson, Mountain View, CA, USA). Ovarian volumes were calculated as the volume of an ellipsoid, i.e. length ? width ? depth ? p/6. The total basal volume of both ovaries was evaluated in each patient. The ultrasound frequency for B-mode, pulsed Doppler and color Doppler was 7 MHz and the high-pass filter was set on 100 Hz. Intraovarian blood flow was assessed in each ovary by examining blood vessels in the ovarian stroma (i.e. any small artery in the ovarian stroma not close to the surface of the ovary or near the wall of a follicle). Areas of maximum color intensity, representing the greatest Doppler frequency shifts, were selected for pulsed Doppler examination. Peak systolic blood flow velocity waveforms were dius detected and optimal flow velocity waveforms were selected for analysis. A recording was considered satisfactory for measurement when there were at least three equally intense waveforms in a row (Figure 1). An ovary that did not show waveforms for accurate analysis was concluded as an ovary with no detectable flow. The pulsatility index (PI), resistance index (RI), and peak systolic blood flow velocity were measured. These values were calculated electronically from smooth curves fitted to the maximum envelope of good-quality waveforms over three cardiac cycles. The formulas used to calculate the angle-independent PI and RI were: PI = (S-D)ZA and BI = (S-D)IS, respectively, where S is the maximum, D the end- diastolic and A the mean maximum Doppler shift frequency throughout the cardiac cycle.

The long protocol, starting on day 21 of the cycle, with GnRH agonist (GnRH-a) for IVF-ET, was similarly employed in each patient. Downregulation was achieved after intramuscular administration of GnRH-a (Decapeptyl CR(R) 3.75 mg; Ferring, Malmo, Sweden) and was assured by serum E2 levels 1468 pmol/1. Transvaginal oocyte retrieval was performed 34-36 h after hCG administration under ultrasound guidance. The treatments of oocytes, sperm and embryos, as well as the ET technique, were performed as described previously [29]. Luteal support was administered in all patients employing intramuscular injection of progesterone (P) in oil (Gestone(R) Paines and Byrne Limited, Greenford, UK), 50 mg/day.

Figure 1 . Normal color Doppler image of the basal stromal blood flow in a natural cycle. Note that areas of maximum color intensity within the ovary, representing the greatest Doppler frequency shifts, are selected for pulsed Doppler examination. Please see colour online.

Women in the study were divided into two groups in accordance with E^sub 2^ level on hCG administration day. Group A included women with E2 level 5505 pmol/ 1. Ovarian reserve parameters, IVFET results and basal ovarian stromal flow data were compared between the two groups.

Sera obtained for basal FSH and LH measurements were analyzed by microparticle enzyme immunoassay (IMx; Abbott, Abbott Park, IL, USA). The intra-assay and inter-assay coefficients of variation were

Data were analyzed using Student’s t test, the X2 test and the Mann-Whitney two sample test (unpaired, non-parametric), wherever appropriate. Significance was interpreted as p

Results

Of the 32 women participating in the study, 15 were included in group A (low reserve) and 17 in group B (good reserve). Patients’ characteristics, including age, body mass index, duration and degree of infertility, were similar between group A and group B of the study (Table I).

Day-3 FSH level was significantiy higher in group A than group B: 10.3 +- 4.3 vs. 6.9 +- 1.5 IU/1, respectively. Moreover, total ovarian volume was significantiy lower in group A than group B, corresponding to 9.1+-4.7 and 18.2 +- 8.2 cm^sup 3^, respectively. Day-3 E2 and LH levels were similar in both groups (Table II).

As anticipated from the inclusion criteria of this study, the mean E2 level on hCG day was significantly higher in group B compared with group A: 9586 +- 3975 vs. 3197 +- 1380 pmol/1, respectively. Moreover, as expected, the number of >/=14 mm follicles on hCG day, number of oocytes retrieved and number of embryos achieved were significantly higher in group B than group A, being 12.8 + 4.9, 15.7 +- 5.5 and 8.4 +- 6.9 in group B and 6.2 +- 3.9, 4.0 +- 3.2 and 2.7 +- 3.4 in group A, respectively (Table II). Three patients in group A and none in group B had no oocytes retrieved on the pick-up day, despite the ultrasound-guided aspiration of more than two follicles in all women. Moreover, the hMG dosage required to achieve stimulation was significantly lower in group B compared with group A: 39.3 + 14.1 vs. 51.1 + 19.4 ampoules, respectively (all p

Table I. Patients’ characteristics in groups A and B.

Table II. Basal hormonal ovarian reserve and ovarian volume studies, and clinical data from in vitro fertilization treatment, in groups A and B.

Table III. Basal ovarian stromal blood flow characteristics in groups A and B.

Six clinical pregnancies were achieved in group B (clinical pregnancy rate 35%); however no pregnancy occurred in group A during the study period.

Twenty-two of the 32 (69%) women in the study had detectable stromal ovarian blood flow in both ovaries on day 3 of a natural cycle, while nine (28%) women had detectable flow in only one ovary. One woman (3%) had no detectable flow in both ovaries. Nine out of the 15 (60%) women in group A had no detectable stromal blood flow on day 3 of the cycle in at least one of die ovaries, whereas this was the case for only one of the 17 (6%) women in group B (Table III). This difference was statistically significant (p

The mean values of peak systolic blood flow velocity, PI and RI did not differ significantly between groups A and B (Table III). Moreover, these values did not differ between right and left ovaries in both groups.

Discussion

Our results indicate that undetectable ovarian stromal blood flow, on day 3 of a natural cycle, is related to low ovarian reserve in infertile women undergoing IVF-ET treatment. In 60% of women with low reserve, as compared with only 6% (p /=14 mm follicles (on hCG day), greater numbers of oocytes retrieved and embryos achieved, and also a substantially lower hMG requirement. The fact that the pregnancy rate was significandy higher in group B than group A reinforces these findings.

Moreover, the finding that all three women with no oocytes during retrieval (despite follicular development and adequate E2 elevation) came from the low ovarian reserve group further strengthens our conclusion. Our group has recendy presented a study showing that complete absence of oocytes during retrieval is a manifestation of low ovarian reserve [30].

It could be argued that undetectable ovarian stromal blood flow could also be the result of bias or a technical problem related to the performance of the transvaginal ultrasound and/or the color Doppler. However, since our study was prospectively designed, flow studies were performed before basal hormonal studies results were received and actual IVF-ET treatment concluded. Therefore, the clustering of women with no detectable stromal flow in the low ovarian reserve group seems to be real. Moreover, the fact that die performer of the flow studies was blinded to all clinical data strengthens our conclusion. Furthermore, these arguments support the assumption that undetectable basal stromal blood flow is not solely a technical issue, but rather is linked to the pathophysiology of low ovarian reserve.

It is currently well accepted that the follicle destined to ovulate is recruited with many odier primordial follicles, in the early follicular phase. Some of these follicles will be committed to growth, developing to preantral and antral follicles; however only one follicle (in most cases of natural cycles) will be selected to ovulate. All other follicles will become atretic. Although the mechanism responsible for reinitiating follicular recruitment remains an enigma, it is acceptable to assume that it is not purely an FSH-dependent action, but local regulators, mainly growth factors, chiefly mediate it [4] . Moreover, it is believed that die number of follicles that are recruited in each cycle depends upon the size of the residual pool of inactive primordial follicles [4], i.e. ovarian reserve. It is our belief that the larger is the ovarian reserve, the more the stromal vasculature is developed. Therefore, women with good ovarian reserve will show optimal blood flow studies while women with low reserve will not.

Our results are conceptually in agreement with other published papers reporting an association between ovarian volume [31,32], and number of small follicles [33], before gonadotropin administration, with ovarian responsiveness during IVF-ET. Syrop and colleagues [31] in a retrospective study and Lass and associates [32] in a prospective study suggested that ovarian volume of

Several studies have examined the feasibility of using ovarian flow studies before gonadotropin stimulation [19,20,25,26] to assess ovarian response during IVF-ET treatment. Although some studies did find a correlation between flow studies and ovarian response [19,25,26], others did not [20]. Several explanations could clarify the differences in the results. The first is related to the timing of performing the flow studies. Some of these studies performed the flow procedure following GnRH-a downregulation [19,20], while others determined the flow in die early follicular phase in a natural cycle before starting any hormonal treatment [25,26] . The second is linked to patient selection criteria. Some studies have excluded infertile women with day-3 FSH >10 IU/1 [19,20] or >12.5 IU/1 [26], and one excluded women >40 years of age [20] . The third may be connected to the methodology of performing the flow studies. While some have used the pulsed and color Doppler facilities [19,20,25], others have used only the power Doppler technology employing a semi- quantitative score [26].

Our study was performed in a prospective manner during a natural cycle, one month preceding IVF-ET treatment. Patients older than 40 years and women with day-3 FSH >10 IU/1 were not excluded. Women included were eligible for IVF-ET treatment, had spontaneous menstruation, and were capable of achieving at least two mature follicles and E2 >1468 pmol/l on hCG day. Most importantly, the issue of detection or not of stromal ovarian flow was specifically looked for in our study. Basal stromal peak systolic blood flow velocity, PI and RI did not differ between the patients with low and good ovarian reserve in our study. However, flow detection was the only significant parameter that differed between the low and good ovarian reserve infertile women.

Women with low ovarian reserve are noted to have spontaneous ovulation. However, in each cycle the primary cohort of recruited follicles seems to get smaller and smaller. It is possible that, under these circumstances, only the ovary that is selected to have the dominant follicle will show stromal activity and therefore will have stromal blood flow that could be detected by pulsed color Doppler. This could explain why nine out of ten women who did not show basal stromal blood flow in our study had no flow in only one ovary. This speculation needs to be further explored by future targeted studies.

In conclusion, this preliminary work suggests that basal ovarian stromal blood flow is related to ovarian reserve in infertile women undergoing IVF-ET treatment. Undetectable basal ovarian stromal blood flow, in at least one of the ovaries, is associated with low ovarian reserve. The fact that the flow studies were performed blinded to the clinical data strengthens the assumption that undetectable basal stromal blood flow is not solely a technical issue, but related to the physiology of ovarian aging.

References

1. Faddy MJ, Gosden RG A mathematical model of follicle dynamics in the human. Hum Reprod 1995;10:770-775.

2. Richardson SJ, Senikas V, Nelson JF. Follicular depletion during the menopausal transition: evidence for accelerated loss and ultimate exhaustion. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1987;65:1231-1237.

3. Scott RT, Hofmann GE. Prognostic assessment of ovarian reserve. Fertil Steril 1995;63:1-11.

4. Speroff L, Glass RH, Kase NG. Clinical gynecologic endocrinology and infertility. 5th ed. Baltimore (MD): Williams & Wilkins; 1994. pp 183-230.

5. Faddy MJ, Gosden RG. A model conforming the decline in follicle numbers to the age of menopause in women. Hum Reprod 1996;11:1484-1486.

6. Younis JS, Haddad S, Matilsky M, Ben-Ami M. Premature luteinization: could it be an early manifestation of low ovarian reserve? Fertil Steril 1998;69:461-465.

7. Muasher SJ, Oehninger S, Simonetti S, Matta J, Ellis LM, Liu H- C, Jones GS, Rosenwaks Z. The value of basal and/or stimulated serum gonadotropin levels in prediction of stimulation response and in vitro fertilization outcome. Fertil Steril 1988;50:298-307.

8. Licciardi FL, Liu H-C, Rosenwaks Z. Day 3 estradiol serum concentrations as prognosticators of ovarian stimulation response and pregnancy outcome in patients undergoing in vitro fertilization. Fertil Steril 1995;64:991-994.

9. Seifer DB, Lambert-Messerlian G, Hogan JW, Gardiner AC, Blazar AS, Berk CA. Day 3 serum inhibin-B is predictive of assisted reproductive technologies outcome. Fertil Steril 1997;67:110-114.

10. Navot D, Rosenwaks Z, Margalioth EJ. Prognostic assessment of female fecundity. Lancet 1987;2:645-647.

11. Fanchin R, de Ziegler D, Olivennes F, Taieb J, Dzik A, Frydman R. Exogenous follicle stimulating hormone ovarian reserve test (EFORT): a simple and reliable test for detecting ‘poor responders’ in m-OTtro-fertilization. Hum Reprod 1994;9:1607-1611.

12. Padilla SL, Bayati J, Garcia JE. Prognostic value of the early serum estradiol response to leuprolide acetate in in vitro fertilization. Fertil Steril 1990;53:288-294.

13. Scott RT Jr, Hofmann GE, Oehninger S, Muasher SJ. Intercycle variability of day 3 follicle-stimulating hormone levels and its effect on stimulation quality in in vitro fertilization. Fertil Steril 1990;54:297-302.

14. Kurjak A, Zalud I, Jurkovic D, Alfirevic Z, Miljan M. Transvaginal color Doppler for the assessment of the pelvic circulation. Acta Obstet Gynecol Scand 1989;68:131-135.

15. Campbell S, Bourne TH, Waterstone J, Reynolds K, Crayford TJB, Jurkovic D, Okokon EV, Collins WP. Transvaginal color blood flow imaging of the peri-ovulatory follicle. Fertil Steril 1993;60:433-438.

16. Steer CV, Campbell S, Tan SL Crayford T, Mills C, Mason BA, Collins WP. The use of transvaginal color flow imaging after in vitro fertilization to identify optimum uterine conditions before embryo transfer. Fertil Steril 1992; 57:372-376.

17. Favre R, Bettahar K, Grange G, OhI J, Arbogast E, Moreau L, Dellenbach P. Predictive value of transvaginal uterine Doppler assessment in an in-vitro fertilization program. Ultrasound Obstet Gynecol 1993;3:350-353.

18. Weiner Z, Thaler I, Levron J, Lewit N, Itskovitz-Eldor J. Assessment of ovarian and uterine blood flow by transvaginal color Doppler in ovarian-stimulated women: correlation with the number of follicles and steroid hormone levels. Fertil Steril 1993;59:743- 749.

19. Engmann L, Sladkevicius P, Agrawal R, Bekir JS, Campbell S, Tan SL. Value of ovarian stromal blood flow velocity measurement after pituitary suppression in the prediction of ovarian responsiveness and outcome of in vitro fertilization treatment. Fertil Steril 1999;71:22-29.

20. Ng EHY, Tang OS, Chan CCW, Ho PC. Ovarian stromal blood flow in the prediction of ovarian response during in vitro fertilization treatment. Hum Reprod 2005;20:3147-3151.

2 1 . Tekay A, Martikainen H, Jouppila P. Blood flow changes in uterine and ovarian vasculature, and predictive value of transvaginal pulsed color Doppler ultrasonography in an in-vitro fertilization program. Hum Reprod 1995;10:688-693.

22. Lunenfeld E, Schwartz I, Meizner I, Potashnik G, Glezerman M. Intraovarian blood flow during spontaneous and stimulated cycles. Hum Reprod 1996;11:2481-2483.

23. Bassil S, Wyns C, Toussaint-Demylle D, Nisolle M, Gordts S, Donnez J. The relationship between ovarian vascularity and the duration of stimulated in in-vitro fertilization. Hum Reprod 1997;12:1240-1245.

24. Chui DKC, Pugh ND, Walker SM, Gregory L, Shaw RW. Follicular vascularity – the predictive value of transvaginal power Doppler ultrasonography in an in-oitro fertilization program: a preliminary report. Hum Reprod 1997;12:191-196.

25. Zaidi J, Barber J, Kyei-Mensah A, Bekir J, Campbell S, Tan SL. Relationship of ovarian stromal blood flow at baseline ultrasound scan to subsequent follicular response in an in vitro fertilization program. Obstet Gynecol 1996;88:779-784.

26. Popovic-Todorovic B, Loft A, Lindhard A, Bangsboll S, Andersson AM, Andersen AN. A prospective study of predictive factors of ovarian response in ‘standard’ IVF/ICSI patients treated with recombinant FSH. A suggestion for a recombinant FSH dosage normogram. Hum Reprod 2003; 18:781-787.

27. Jarvela IY, Sladkevicius P, Kelly S, Ojha K, Campbell S, Nargund G. Quantification of ovarian power Doppler signal with tree- dimensional ultrasonography to predict response during in vitro fertilization. Obstet Gynecol 2003;102:816-822.

28. Pan HA, Wu MH, Cheng YC, Wu LH, Chang FM. Quantification of ovarian stromal Doppler signals in poor responders undergoing in vitro fertilization with three-dimensional power Doppler ultrasonography. Am J Obstet Gynecol 2004;190:338-344.

29. Laufer N, Grunfeld L, Garrisi GJ. In-vitro fertilization. In: Seibel MM, editor. Infertility – a comprehensive text. Norwalk (CT): Appleton and Lange; 1990. pp 481-511.

30. Younis JS, Skournik A, Radin O, Haddad S, Bar-Ami S, BenAmi M. Poor oocyte retrieval is a manifestation of low ovarian reserve. Fertil Steril 2005;83:504-507.

31. Syrop CH, Wilhoite A, Van-Voorhis BJ. Ovarian volume: a novel outcome predictor for assisted reproduction. Fertil Steril 1995;64:1167-1171.

32. Lass A, Skull J, McVeigh E, Margara R, Winston R. Measurement of ovarian volume by transvaginal sonography before ovulation induction with human menopausal gonadotrophins for in-vitro fertilization can predict poor response. Hum Reprod 1997;12:294- 297. 33. Tomas C, Nuojua-Huttunen S, Martikainen H. Pretreatment transvaginal ultrasound examination predicts ovarian responsiveness to gonadotrophins in in-vitro fertilization. Hum Reproduc 1997;12:220-223.

JOHNNY S. YOUNIS, SAMI HADDAD, MOSHE MATILSKY, ORIT RADIN, & MOSHE BEN-AMI

Reproductive Medicine Unit, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Poriya Medical Center, Tiberias, Israel, affiliated with the Bruce Rappaport Faculty of Medicine, Technion – Israel Institute of Technology, Haifa, Israel

(Received 14 November 2006; revised 26 February 2007; accepted 5 March 2007)

Correspondence: J. S. Younis, Reproductive Medicine Unit, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Poriya Medical Center, Tiberias 1 5208, Israel. Tel: 972 4 6652490. Fax: 972 4 6080405. E- mail: [email protected]

Copyright Taylor & Francis Ltd. May 2007

(c) 2007 Gynecological Endocrinology. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

A Patient With Combined Polycystic Ovary Syndrome and Autoimmune Polyglandular Syndrome Type 2

By Lee, Seung-Hwan Kim, Mee-Ran; Kim, Ji-Hyun; Kwon, Hyuk-Sang; Et al

Abstract We report a patient with combined polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS) and autoimmune polyglandular syndrome (APS) type 2. A 26-year-old female presented with polyuria, polydipsia and acute weight loss. She was diagnosed with: (1) type 1 diabetes, with hyperglycemia, impaired insulin secretion, and positive autoantibodies for GAD-65 and IA-2; (2) autoimmune thyroiditis, with hypothyroidism, positive anti-microsomal and antithyroglobulin antibodies; and (3) PCOS, with hyperandrogenic signs that had developed 5 years earlier, amenorrhea for the previous 6 months, and characteristic multiple microcystic appearance of both ovaries on ultrasonography. She is being treated with multiple subcutaneous insulin injections, thyroxine replacement, and cyclic medroxyprogesterone for the aforementioned diseases, respectively. Although several investigations have reported a relationship between PCOS and the individual components of APS, this is the first report of both syndromes occurring simultaneously. Potential mechanisms for their interrelation and the possibility that PCOS is an autoimmune disease are discussed.

Keywords: Polycystic ovary syndrome, autoimmune polyglandular syndrome, diabetes, thyroiditis, amenorrhea

Introduction

Polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), characterized by chronic anovulation and hyperandrogenism, is associated with several conditions arising from insulin resistance, such as type 2 diabetes. Autoimmune polyglandular syndrome (APS) should be considered when immune dysfunction affects two or more endocrine glands and other non-endocrine immune disorders are present. The components of APS type 2 include adrenal insufficiency, type 1 diabetes, hypothyroidism, Graves’ disease, hypogonadism, vitiligo, alopecia and pernicious anemia. The association between these two disorders has recentiy been investigated. There have been several reports of PCOS occurring either with type 1 diabetes or autoimmune thyroiditis. However, there has been no report of APS type 2, involving both type 1 diabetes and autoimmune thyroiditis, in a patient with PCOS.

We report a 26-year-old female with PCOS, also suffering from APS type 2 that comprises type 1 diabetes and Hashimoto’s thyroiditis, and review several papers.

Case report

A 26-year-old female presented with polyuria and polydipsia for the preceding 4 months and a weight loss of 4 kg over 1 month. She had been previously healthy and had no past medical history other than menstrual abnormalities. Since menarche at the age of 15 years her menstrual cycles had been irregular, with amenorrhea eventually developing 6 months before presentation, although this problem had not been evaluated. Hyperandrogenic signs such as acne and hirsutism had developed 5 years previously and progressed slowly since then. She also complained of diffuse hair loss, which had increased a month earlier. There was no family history of significant diseases, including diabetes.

When she was admitted her vital signs were stable, with alert mental status. She did not look ill and signs of dehydration were absent. Her body mass index (BMI) was 19 kg/m2 and her waist-to-hip ratio was 0.76 (waist 68 cm, hip 90 cm), indicating the absence of obesity. On physical examination, her thyroid gland was enlarged (approximately 40 g) and firmly palpable. Hyperandrogenic skin changes such as acne (moderate, according to the classification system of the American Academy of Dermatology) with seborrhea, hirsutism (modified Ferriman-Gallwey score 7) and diffuse alopecia (diagnosed as telogen effluvium) were observed. Acanthosis nigricans was not present.

Her fasting and postprandial blood sugar levels were 234 and 380 mg/dl, respectively, and glycated hemoglobin (HbAIc) was 17.3%. She was diagnosed with diabetes mellitus. On the basis of fasting and meal-stimulated C-peptide levels (0.11 and 0.14 ng/ml, respectively) and autoantibodies positive for glutamic acid decarboxylase (GAD)- 65 (43.5 U/ml; normal range,

A thyroid function test showed mild hypothyroidism, with triiodothyronine of 0.39 ng/ml (normal range, 0.78-1.82 ng/ml), free thyroxine of 0.80 ng/dl (normal range, 0.85-1.86 ng/dl) and thyroid- stimulating hormone of 4.61 mIU/1 (normal range, 0.17-4.05 mIU/1). Anti-microsomal antibody (1:25 600) and antithyroglobulin antibody (1:2560) were strongly positive, suggesting Hashimoto’s thyroiditis. Findings on thyroid scanning (Figure IA) and ultrasonography (Figure IB) were also compatible with thyroiditis. Daily thyroxine (50 [mu]g) was prescribed and she is now in a euthyroid state. With evidence of type 1 diabetes and autoimmune thyroiditis, she was diagnosed with APS type 2. A rapid adrenocorticotropic hormone stimulation test was performed to rule out adrenal insufficiency, commonly found with APS type 2, although she had no suspicious symptoms. After an intravenous injection of 250 [mu]g of cosyntropin, her plasma Cortisol levels were 15.3, 23.2, 23.5 and 28.1 /ig/dl at 0, 30, 60 and 90 min, respectively. With the exclusion of adrenal insufficiency, she would have been classified into APS type 2b or type 3, according to previous definition [I].

Figure 1. (A) 99m-Tc scanning showed a moderately enlarged thyroid gland with increased and uneven uptake. (B) The thyroid ultrasonogram showed low and inhomogeneous parenchymal echogenecity with small, multiple nodules. These findings were consistent with Hashimoto’s thyroiditis. (C) The pelvic ultrasonogram revealed multiple small follicles in both ovaries and increased volume with increased echogenecity in the ovarian stroma, which was consistent with polycystic ovary syndrome.

In evaluating the cause of die patient’s amenorrhea, PCOS was initially suspected because of signs of androgen excess. The ultrasonographic findings were consistent with PCOS, showing more than 12 small follicles in both ovaries and an increased volume with increased echogenicity in the ovarian stroma (Figure IC). Hyperprolactinemia and congenital adrenal hyperplasia were excluded after measurement of prolactin (6.13 ng/ml; normal range, 2-26 ng/ ml) and early-morning 17-hydroxyprogesterone (1.16 ng/ml; normal range, 0.09-4.0 ng/ml). Cushing’s syndrome and androgen-secreting tumor were also excluded by tests for 24-h urine free Cortisol (41.7 [mu]g/day; normal range,

Discussion

This case report presents a unique patient with PCOS and also suffering from APS type 2, comprising type 1 diabetes and Hashimoto’s thyroiditis. Clinical hyperandrogenism, including hirsutism, acne and alopecia, combined with anovulation and polycystic ovary morphology led to a definite diagnosis of PCOS.

It is well known that the prevalence of impaired glucose tolerance and type 2 diabetes is significantly higher in patients with PCOS than in their unaffected counterparts, resulting from underlying insulin resistance, which is thought to be a main pathogenic feature of PCOS [5] . Besides type 2 diabetes, some investigators have observed that type 1 diabetes is also associated with PCOS. Escobar-Morreale and colleagues reported the high prevalence of PCOS (18.8%) in women with type 1 diabetes compared with the incidence in non-diabetic women [6], using the NIH 1990 diagnostic criteria. Using the revised 2003 Rotterdam consensus, which includes polycystic ovary morphology (PCOM) as a key element in the diagnostic triad [2], Codner and associates reported the frequencies of PCOS (40.5%) and PCOM (54.8%) in women with type 1 diabetes to be significantly higher than those in the control group [7]. The close association between type 1 diabetes and PCOS can be explained by hyperinsulinism. Because intensive insulin therapy is recommended for the strict metabolic control of type 1 diabetic patients, supraphysiological doses of insulin are used in a non- physiological way in many cases, leading to hyperinsulinism. Type 1 diabetic patients may also have underlying insulin resistance, aggravating this hyperinsulinism, especially in obese subjects [8]. Insulin plays a central role in androgen metabolism by enhancing the androgen production of theca cells synergistically with LH and by inhibiting the hepatic synthesis of sex hormone-binding globulin (SHBG), thus increasing the proportion of free testosterone [9] . However, the synthesis and secretion of SHBG, which is suppressed by the insulin delivered into the portal circulation, is not reduced by exogenous hyperinsulinism [10]. A recent study demonstrated a threefold higher prevalence of autoimmune thyroiditis in patients with PCOS [H]. As both conditions are clustered in families, a common genetic defect may be suspected, although it has not yet been found. An increase in the estrogen-to-progesterone ratio is thought to be one of the most important causes, because estrogen enhances humoral immunity, thus promoting B-cell-mediated autoimmune diseases, whereas progesterone plays a protective role as a natural immune suppressor [12,13]. The depletion of progesterone resulting from anovulatory cycles in patients with PCOS may stimulate die immune system, leading to autoimmune thyroiditis. Therefore, the restoration of the ovulatory cycle would be an appropriate strategy to prevent autoimmune thyroiditis in patients with PCOS. Once hypothyroidism develops, it can aggravate PCOS by increasing the conversion of androstenedione to testosterone and its aromatization to estradiol, and by reducing the metabolic clearance rates of androstenedione and estrone [14].

Whether an autoimmune reaction contributes to the development of PCOS is still contentious. Some reports indicate that autoantibodies to steroid-producing cells and to their specific enzymes are closely related to ovarian failure and infertility in patients with autoimmune diseases [15]. In some cases of PCOS, autoimmune disturbances have been demonstrated, with high concentrations of antiovarian antibodies [16,17], although disagreement exists about whether the autoimmune mechanism is of prime importance [18]. A study by an Estonian group revealed that one or more common autoantibodies were detected in 40.7% of female patients with reproductive failure. Antinuclear antibody and anti-smooth muscle antibody were the most frequent autoantibodies in patients with PCOS, presenting another potential autoimmune mechanism [19].

Clinical and/or biochemical evidence of hyperandrogenism is an important feature of patients with PCOS. Hirsutism is thought to be the primary clinical indicator of androgen excess, whereas the presence of acne is less prevalent. The prevalence of androgenic alopecia in PCOS is still unclear, but Cela and co-workers reported the prevalence of PCOS to be as high as 67% in women witii androgenic alopecia [20] . A considerable proportion of patients with PCOS may demonstrate elevated circulating androgen levels, especially free testosterone, whereas 20-40% will have androgen levels within the normal range, although the inaccuracy and variability of the laboratory measurements should be considered. Our patient is an example of clinical hyperandrogenism without biochemical hyperandrogenemia. This is probably due to increased local tissue sensitivity to circulating androgens or ethnic differences in the phenotypic expression of peripheral androgen excess [21]. Alopecia is associated with both PCOS and APS type 2, although its pathogenesis and manifestations are somewhat different. It is a minor component of APS with an immunological mechanism, and in some cases tyrosine hydroxylase is recognized as the relevant autoantigen [22]. Telogen effluvium was diagnosed in our patient, which is thought to be a sign of early androgenic alopecia, although there is a possible link to hypothyroidism. Treatment measures for hyperandrogenism include weight reduction, oral contraceptives, antiandrogens (spironolactone, cyproterone acetate), insulin sensitizers (metformin, thiazolidinedione), etc. Medroxyprogesterone acetate is another option because it directly affects the hypothalamicpituitary axis by decreasing gonadotropin-releasing hormone production and the release of gonadotropins, thereby reducing testosterone and estrogen production by the ovary [23] .

Hyperandrogenic type 1 diabetic patients have several characteristics that differ from those of nondiabetic patients [7,24,25]. As in our patient, a relatively small increase in the LH/ FSH ratio is observed, which reflects ovarian hyperandrogenism in women with type 1 diabetes. Normal serum SHBG levels might reduce the delivery of androgen to the tissues. This prevents androgen excess in patients with type 1 diabetes, resulting in relatively low hirsutism scores.

To our knowledge, there has been no report of patients with PCOS and APS simultaneously. In our patient, it was difficult to define whether PCOS influenced APS type 2 or vice versa, because both were diagnosed at the same time. Because she had never used insulin before, it is hard to infer that PCOS was the result of exogenous hyperinsulinism. Other pathogenic mechanisms, such as insulin resistance, increased fat mass and abnormalities in the growth hormone/insulin-like growth factor-I axis, could have contributed to the relationship between PCOS and type 1 diabetes, although her low BMI and lack of metabolic syndrome lessen this possibility. It is unclear whether Hashimoto’s thyroiditis is influenced by PCOS.

The interrelation between die components of APS and PCOS, as in our patient, suggests that patients with PCOS may possibly have APS synchronously. It would be reasonable to screen for components of APS, especially type 1 diabetes and autoimmune thyroiditis, if clinically warranted. However, the precise mechanism of the association between APS and PCOS remains to be elucidated.

References

1. Neufeld M, Blizzard RM. Polyglandular autoimmune diseases. In: Pinchera A, Doniach D, Fenzi GF, Basschieri L, editors. Symposium on autoimmune aspects of endocrine disorders. New York: Academic Press; 1980. pp 357-365.

2. The Rotterdam ESHRE/ASRM-Sponsored PCOS Consensus Workshop Group. Revised 2003 consensus on diagnostic criteria and long-term health risks related to polycystic ovary syndrome. Fertil Steril 2004;81:19-25.

3. Azziz R, Carmina E, Dewailly D, Diamanti-Kandarakis E, Escobar- Morreale HF, Futterweit W, Janssen OE, Legro RS, Norman RJ, Taylor AE, et al. Criteria for defining polycystic ovary syndrome as a predominandy hyperandrogenic syndrome: an Androgen Excess Society guideline. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2006;91:4237-4245.

4. Zawadski JK, Dunaif A. Diagnostic criteria for polycystic ovary syndrome: towards a rational approach. In: Dunaif A, Givens JR, Haseltine FP, Merriam GR, editors. Polycystic ovary syndrome. Boston (MA): Blackwell Scientific Publications; 1992. pp 377-384.

5. Ehrmann DA, Barnes RB, Rosenfield RL, Cavaghan MK, Imperial J. Prevalence of impaired glucose tolerance and diabetes in women with polycystic ovary syndrome. Diabetes Care 1999;22:141-146.

6. Escobar-Morreale HF, Roldan B, Barrio R, Alonso M, Sancho J, de la Calle H, Garcia-Robles R. High prevalence of the polycystic ovary syndrome and hirsutism in women with type 1 diabetes mellitus. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2000;85: 4182-4187.

7. Codner E, Soto N, Lopez P, Trejo L, Avila A, Eyzaguirre FC, Iniguez G, Cassorla F. Diagnostic criteria for polycystic ovary syndrome and ovarian morphology in women with type 1 diabetes mellitus. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2006;9 1:2250-2256.

8. Pedersen O, Beck-Nielsen H. Insulin resistance and insulin- dependent diabetes mellitus. Diabetes Care 1987;10:516-523.

9. Ehrmann DA. Polycystic ovary syndrome. N Engl J Med 2005;352:1223-1236.

10. Ykijarvinen H, Makimattila S, Utriainen T, Rutanen EM. Portal insulin concentrations rather than insulin sensitivity regulate serum sex hormone-binding globulin and insulin-like growth factor binding protein 1 in vivo. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1995;80:3227- 3232.

1 1 . Janssen OE, Mehlmauer N, Hahn S, Offner AH, Gartner R. High prevalence of autoimmune thyroiditis in patients with polycystic ovary syndrome. Eur J Endocrinol 2004; 150:363-369.

12. Olsen NJ, Kovacs WJ. Effects of androgens on T and B lymphocyte development. Immunol Res 2001;23:281-288.

13. Paavonen T. Hormonal regulation of immune responses. Ann Med 1994;26:255-258.

14. Ghosh S, Kabir SN, Pakrashi A, Chatterjee S, Chakravarty B. Subclinical hypothyroidism: a determinant of polycystic ovary syndrome. Horm Res 1994;41:43-44.

15. Hoek A, Schoemaker J, Drexhage HA. Premature ovarian failure and ovarian autoimmunity. Endocr Rev 1997;18:107-134.

16. Fenichel P, Gobert B, Carre Y, Barbarino-Monnier P, Hieronimus S. Polycystic ovary syndrome in autoimmune disease. Lancet 1999;353:2210.

17. van Gelderen CJ, Gomes dos Santos ML. Polycystic ovarian syndrome. Evidence for an autoimmune mechanism in some cases. J Reprod Med 1993;38:381-386. 18. Rojansky N, Roll D, Meirow D. Polycystic ovary syndrome. An autoimmune disease? J Reprod Med 1997;42:325-328.

19. Reimand K, Talja I, Metskula K, Kadastik U, Matt K, Uibo R. Autoantibody studies of female patients with reproductive failure. J Reprod Immunol 2001;51:167-176.

20. Cela E, Robertson C, Rush K, Kousta E, White DM, Wilson H, Lyons G, Kingsley P, McCarthy MI, Franks S. Prevalence of polycystic ovaries in women with androgenic alopecia. Eur J Endocrinol 2003;149:439-442.

21. Yildiz BO. Diagnosis of hyperandrogenism: clinical criteria. Best Pract Res Clin Endocrinol Metab 2006;20:167-176.

22. Hedstrand H, Ekwall O, Haavik J, Landgren E, Betterle C, Perheentupa J, Gustafsson J, Husebye E, Rorsman F, Kampe O. Identification of tyrosine hydroxylase as an autoantigen in autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome type 1. Biochem Biophys Res Commun 2000;267:456-461.

23. Gordon GG, Southren AI, Calanog A, Olivo J, Rafii F. The effect of medroxyprogesterone acetate on androgen metabolism in the polycystic ovary syndrome. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1972;35:444-447.

24. Roldan B, Escobar-Morreale HF, Barrio R, de la Calle H, Alonso M, Garcia-Robles R, Sancho J. Identification of the source of androgen excess in hyperandrogenic type 1 diabetic patients. Diabetes Care 2001;24:1297-1299.

25. Virdis R, Zampolli M, Street ME, Vanelli M, Potau N, Terzi C, Ghizzoni L, Ibanez L. Ovarian 17a-hydroxyprogesterone responses to GnRH analog testing in oligomenorrheic insulin-dependent diabetic adolescents. Eur J Endocrinol 1997;136:624-629.

SEUNG-HWAN LEE1, MEE-RAN KIM2, JI-HYUN KIM1, HYUK-SANG KWON1, KUN- HO YOON1, HO-YOUNG SON1, & BONG-YUN CHA1

1 Division of Endocrinology and Metabolism, Department of Internal Medicine, The Catholic University of Korea, Seoul, South Korea, and 2 Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, The Catholic University of Korea, Seoul, South Korea

(Received 26 September 2006; revised 12 February 2007; accepted 21 February 2007)

Correspondence: B.-Y. Cha, Kangnam St. Mary’s Hospital, 505 Banpo- dong, Seocho-gu, Seoul, South Korea. Tel: 82 2 590 2205. Fax: 82 2 599 3589. E-mail: [email protected]

Copyright Taylor & Francis Ltd. May 2007

(c) 2007 Gynecological Endocrinology. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Polycystic Ovary Syndrome and Hyperprolactinemia Are Distinct Entities

By Filho, Roberpaulo Barboza Domingues, Lucilia; Naves, Luciana; Ferraz, Elenice; Et al

Abstract The aims of the present study were to identify the cause of hyperprolactinemia in polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS) and to compare prolactin (PRL) levels between PCOS women without hyperprolactinemia and women with insulin resistance and without PCOS. A group of 82 women (age: 27.1 +- 7.6 years) with PCOS was included in the study. Their PRL levels were measured and compared with those of women with insulin resistance without PCOS (controls; n = 42; age: 29.2 +- 8.2 years). Among the 82 PCOS women, 13 (16%) presented high PRL levels (103.9 +- 136.0 [mu]g/l). The causes of hyperprolactinemia were: pituitary tumor (responding to cabergoline) in nine cases (69%; PRL range: 28.6-538 [mu]g/l); oral hormonal contraceptive treatment in two cases (15%; PRL: 46 and 55 [mu]g/l, respectively); and use of buspirone and tianeptine in one case (8%; PRL: 37.1 [mu]g/l); one case (8%; PRL: 34.4 [mu]g/l) had macroprolactinemia. In drug-induced hyperprolactinemic patients PRL levels normalized after treatment interruption. The average PRL level in the 69 remaining patients was 12.1 +- 5.5 [mu]g/l, a value not statistically different from that of the control group (11.8 +- 4.9 [mu]g/l). This result leads us to conclude that PCOS patients with increased PRL levels must be investigated for other causes of hyperprolactinemia, because hyperprolactinemia is not a clinical manifestation of PCOS.

Keywords: Hyperprolactinemia, polycystic ovary syndrome, insulin resistance, ovary, macroprolactinemia

Introduction

Polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS) is the most frequent endocrine disorder among women at reproductive age [1,2]. This syndrome is frequently associated with obesity, menstrual irregularity, infertility, hirsutism and insulin resistance [3]. Hyperinsulinemia is present in patients with PCOS, the result of the body’s attempt to compensate its resistance to insulin. Hyperinsulinemia plays an important role in the physiopathology of PCOS because it stimulates ovarian androgen production, reduces circulating levels of sex hormone-binding globulin and inhibits ovulation [4,5] .

Similarly to PCOS, hyperprolactinemia, either of tumor origin or due to the use of medications, may also cause chronic anovulation and the appearance of polycystic ovaries upon ultrasonographic examination [6-10] . Thus, many researchers associate PCOS with hyperprolactinemia. A number of literature reviews show this association, with ranges from 17 to 50% [11], 17 to 43% [12], and 3 to 67% [13]. It has been suggested that the high luteinizing hormone (LH) levels frequently observed in PCOS are due to a lack of dopamine, the main regulator of prolactin (PRL) secretion [14-16]. However, clinical studies have suggested independence between LH and PRL secretions in these patients, as dopaminergic inhibition causes increases in PRL levels without changing LH levels [17]. Furthermore, women with PCOS receiving dopamine agonists showed no alterations in LH secretion [18]. On the other hand, significantly higher PRL levels have been observed in patients with PCOS, even in those witiiout hyperprolactinemia, compared with the levels found in controls without PCOS [19].

The objectives of the present study were to identify the cause of hyperprolactinemia in patients with PCOS and to compare PRL levels between PCOS women without hyperprolactinemia and women with insulin resistance and no PCOS.

Methods

This was a case-control, retrospective analytical study involving patients widi PCOS and subjects witih insulin resistance without PCOS. The included patients had an average age of 27.1 + 7.6 years and were attending the endocrinological gynecology clinic of the Hospital Universitario de Brasilia. Group 1 included 82 women in whom PCOS was clinically diagnosed according to the following parameters: irregular menstrual cycles (secondary amenorrhea and/or oligomenorrhea) since menarche; hirsutism (Ferriman-Gallwey index score >8) and/ or acne; and presence of micropolycystic ovaries by ultrasound imaging (ten or more follicular cysts with diameter ranging from 2 to 10 mm). This group was stratified on the basis of PRL level: >27 [mu]g/l (group 2) and / =80 cm, body mass index (BMI; weight in kg divided by the square of height in m) >/=25 kg/m2, and homeostasis model assessmentinsulin resistance index (HOMA-IR) >2.7.

Basal level of 17-hydroxyprogesterone in patients with PCOS was normal (1.5 +- 1.2 nmol/1), thus excluding congenital adrenal hyperplasia.

PRL, insulin, follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) and LH levels were analyzed by chemiluminescence methods using Immulite 2000 DPC reagents (Medlab, Sao Paulo, Brazil). Thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH) was measured by a chemiluminescence method using ADVIA Centaur reagents (Bayer, Sao Paulo, Brazil). Glucose level was evaluated by a colorimetric enzymatic technique using ADVIA 1650 reagents (Bayer). The reference values were: PRL,

The HOMA-IR index, which assesses the level of insulin resistance, was calculated using the following formula [20]: HOMA- IR= [fasting insulin ([mu]ml) x blood glucose level (mmol/l)]/ 22.5. The HOMA-ss index, which defines the function of die ss cell, was calculated by die following formula: HOMA-j? = 20 x insulin ([mu]/ml)/ [blood glucose level (mmol/1) – 3.5].

Table I. Clinical characteristics of patients with polycystic ovary syndrome (group 1), with (group 2) and without hyperprolactinemia (group 3), and with insulin resistance (control).

Abdominal ultrasonography was utilized to diagnose micropolycystic ovaries. Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) of the sellar region was performed whenever necessary using gadolinium as contrast medium.

The study was performed according to the Helsinki Declaration (2000) for studies in human subjects.

Statistical analysis was performed utilizing the unpaired Student t test. The level of significance was fixed at p

Results

Patient characteristics

Of the 82 patients with PCOS (group 1), 13 (16%) had PRL level >27 [mu]g/l (group 2). The following causes of hyperprolactinemia were diagnosed: pituitary tumor (PRL range: 28.6-538 [mu]g/l), established by MRI of the sellar region, in nine (69%) patients (improved by cabergoline treatment, 0.5 mg twice a week); drug- induced in three (23%) patients – two used oral hormonal contraceptives (PRL: 46 and 55 [mu]g/l, respectively) and one used buspirone and tianeptine (PRL: 37.1 [mu]g/l) – whose PRL levels normalized after withdrawing medication. The remaining patient in group 2 presented macroprolactinemia (PRL: 34.4 [mu]g/l) and required no specific treatment. Group 3 was composed of 69 (84%) patients with PCOS, with PRL levels =27 jug/1. The control group consisted of 42 patients without PCOS but with insulin resistance.

The clinical characteristics of the included patients are presented in Table I. The mean age of the control group was significantly higher than tiiat of groups 1 0 = 0.03), 2 (p = 0.03) and 3 (p = 0.04), but no significant differences were observed among these last groups. Age at menarche was not significandy different among the groups. BMI was significantly higher in the control group than in groups 1 (p = 0.0006), 2 0 = 0.01) and 3 (p = 0.001), but no significant differences were present among these three groups. Waist circumference was not significandy different among groups, while hip circumference was significantly higher in the control group than in group 1 O = O-Ol), group 2 (p = 0.02) and group 3 (p = 0.02). The waist/hip ratio was significantly higher in the control group than in groups 1 (p = 0.02) and 3 (p = 0.005), but not significandy different from that of group 2 O = 0.77).

Laboratory parameters

As shown in Table II, PRL levels in the control group and group 3 were significantly lower compared with those in groups 1 and 2 ? = 0- 03). However, no statistically significant difference was observed between group 3 and the control group 0 = 0.78) or between groups 1 and 2 0 = 0.06). LH level in the control group was lower than that in groups 1 0 = 0.002) and 3 0 = 0.004), while there were no significant differences in FSH levels among groups. The LH/FSH ratio was lower in controls than in group 1 O = 0.02), but no statistical difference was observed among the other groups. Blood glucose levels were higher in the control group than in group 2 0 = 0.003), but no significant difference was observed between die otiier groups. HOMA- IR and HOMA-/? indices were similar among groups.

Discussion

Our results showed that patients with a clinical history compatible with PCOS and with high PRL levels must be investigated for other causes of hyperprolactinemia, such as pituitary tumor, use of medications or macroprolactinemia, because hyperprolactinemia is not part of the PCOS laboratory condition. As shown in this study, PRL levels in patients with primary PCOS were not different from those of the control group with insulin resistance. These results are in agreement with previous studies reporting similar basal PRL levels between women with PCOS and normal controls [11,12,21-24]. Furthermore, Venturoli and colleagues [21] showed no differences in either mean PRL levels or PRL pulsatility between women with PCOS and normal controls. On the other hand, Bahceci and associates [19], in disagreement with our observations and previously quoted results, reported that patients with PCOS showed significantly higher PRL levels than a control group: 18.4 +- 8.4 vs. 14.0 +- 4.0 [mu]g/l p

In several other studies, an association between PCOS and hyperprolactinemia has been described with the following frequencies: 7% [16], 13% [26], 17% [27], 22% [28], 28% [29] and 30% [30,31]. Alterations in the lactotrophic function in patients with PCOS have been suggested by a number of authors [28,31-37]. An increased PRL response to TRH has also been described in PCOS [35], a condition which could be predictive of the response of PCOS patients to bromocriptine [32,34]. However, these observations are not corroborated by other authors [H]. Falaschi and co-workers [38] showed that the PRL responses to TRH and haloperidol (a dopamine antagonist) were similar in PCOS patients without hyperprolactinemia and normal women, whereas only the hyperprolactinemic PCOS patients reacted with an excessive PRL discharge. In addiction, the PRL response to both secretagogue agents was blunted in patients with galactorrhoea and amenorrhea, condition defined by some authors as idiopathic hyperprolactinemia due to the normal radiographic image of the sella turcica [38] . These observations suggest that PCOS and other hyperprolactinemia states are distinct conditions.

According to data presented in this study, one could suppose that die association described by these authors could be biased because the origin of the hyperprolactinemia was not systematically investigated; in particular, image resources (like MRI, capable of detecting a 3-mm microadenoma) were not utilized [39,40] sometimes because the investigations were conducted before the availability of sophisticated imaging techniques [41] such as highresolution computed tomography (CT) or MRI. As shown in Figure 1, a small pituitary tumor localized above the sellar floor can be demonstrated by MRI but it cannot be seen by X-ray or former CT machines.

The high PRL basal levels in women with PCOS compared with tiiose of control women [42] can be explained by analyzing the data of the present study. This observation may be due to the increase in basal PRL levels in women with polycystic ovaries (group 1) that we have observed, which is in agreement with previously published data suggesting that these women would have higher PRL levels in relation to normal women. However, when patients with a compatible clinical history with PCOS but with welldefined causes of hyperprolactinemia (group 2) were separated from those with normoprolactinemia (group 3), the latter presented values similar to those observed in the control group with insulin resistance.

Another possibility to explain die reported association between PCOS and hyperprolactinemia could be the presence of macroprolactinemia [43] . In the present study among patients wim PCOS and hyperprolactinemia, one presented macroprolactinemia as cause for the elevation in circulating PRL levels. This cause of hyperprolactinemia has almost never been investigated. In a retrospective study, Suliman and collaborators [44] demonstrated that frequently patients with hyperprolactinemia are submitted to inadequate investigation. For example, these audiors observed that 87% of the patients widi hyperprolactinemia due to macroprolactin received unnecessary treatment with dopaminergic agonists [44] . A retrospective study among 109 patients with a history of chronic anovulation and signs of androgen hypersecretion revealed elevated PRL levels in eight of them [45]. More detailed investigation on the origin of hyperprolactinemia indicated the presence of macroprolactinemia in four of these patients. This information further stresses the necessity of investigating more thoroughly patients with PCOS associated with hyperprolactinemia, always including the evaluation of macroprolactin.

Figure 1. A small pituitary tumor localized near the pituitary stalk demonstrated by magnetic resonance imaging that may not be observed in the simple X-ray or earlier computed tomography image.

Possibly, the wrong inclusion of PCOS as a possible cause of high PRL levels began with the publication of the classic work of Forbes and colleagues [46], in which the association among galactorrhea, amenorrhea and the polycystic ovary was described. Other authors have confirmed these observations, describing the association between galactorrhea and polycystic ovary in some infertile women [47,48] . This misunderstanding is based on the fact that women with chronic anovulation from other etiologies may present multicystic ovarian images during an ultrasound examination [6-10]. Moreover, some women with prolactinoma also present amenorrhea-associated hirsutism [16,48] like women with PCOS.

A theory advanced to explain PCOS-associated hyperprolactinemia is the lack of hypothalamusoriginated dopamine in patients with this syndrome. Dopamine infusion in pharmacological doses (4 [mu]g/ kg per min) in patients with PCOS has been reported to reduce LH secretion more intensely than in normal women [15]. However, these data were not confirmed by other authors [49] with the same experimental approach. Even dopamine infusions in doses considered as physiological did not produce differences in the LH responses in women with PCOS and normal controls [49] .

Bromocriptine, a dopamine agonist widely used to treat hyperprolactinemia, was also used in the treatment of PCOS with conflicting results [50]. Double-blind randomized studies against placebo did not demonstrate a higher effect of bromocriptine vs. placebo in the PCOS treatment [11,12,18,5155] . This finding, in agreement with the observations of the present study, indicates that patients with PCOS do not respond to bromocriptine treatment because they do not have alterations in hypothalamic dopamine secretion. However, it should be mentioned that some uncontrolled studies [53,56,57] and case reports [58-61] have demonstrated the return of menstrual cyclicity in patients with PCOS treated with bromocriptine.

In conclusion, our data show the importance and necessity of systematic investigation on die origin of hyperprolactinemia in women with chronic anovulation in order to distinguish it from PCOS. In all of the women with a history compatible with PCOS and with hyperprolactinemia, a well-defined cause for the high PRL level was identified: tumors, drugs or the presence of macroprolactinemia. Furthermore, this investigation also shows that the PRL levels in patients with PCOS are similar to those found in women with insulin resistance.

Acknowledgements

We would like to thank Adewale Adeniyi for technical assistance.

References

1 . Slowey MJ. Polycystic ovary syndrome: new perspective on an old problem. South Med J 2001;94:190-196.

2. Carmina E, Lobo RA. Polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS): arguably the most common endocrinopathy is associated with significant morbidity in women. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1999;84:1897-1899.

3. Sharma A, Atiomo W. Recent developments in polycystic ovary syndrome. Curr Obstet Gynaecol 2003;13:281-286.

4. Panidis DK, Rousso DH, Matalliotakis IM, Kourtis AI, Vlassis GD, Koumantakis EE. Hyperinsulinemia does not influence androgens/ estrogens ratio in patients with polycystic ovary syndrome. Int Fertil Womens Med 1999;44:301-306.

5. Legro RS, Gnatuk CL, Kunselman AR, Dunaif A. Changes in glucose tolerance over rime in women with polycystic ovary syndrome: a controlled study. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2005;90:3236-3242.

6. Yen SSC. The polycystic ovary syndrome. Clin Endocrinol (Oxf) 1980;12:207-208.

7. Hull MGR. Epidemiology of infertility and polycystic ovarian disease: endocrinological and demographic studies. Gynecol Endocrinol 1987;1:235-245.

8. Franks S. Polycystic ovary syndrome. N Eng J Med 1995;333: 853- 861.

9. Motta LDC, Motta LACR. Sindrome dos ovarios policisticos. J Bras Ginecol 1999;109:3-8.

10. Motta LDC, Motta LACR. Sindrome dos ovarios policisticos: fisiopatologia e tratamento. Brasilia Med 2000;37:31-37.

1 1 . Buvat J, Herbaut MB, Marcolin G, Racadot A, Fourlinnie JC, Beuscart R, Fossati P. A double blind controlled study of the hormonal and clinical effects of bromocriptine in the polycystic ovary syndrome. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1986;63:119-124.

12. Parsanezhad ME, Alborzi S, Jahromi BN. A prospective, double- blind, randomized, placebo-controlled clinical trial of bromocriptine in clomiphene-resistant patients with polycystic ovary syndrome and normal prolactin level. Int J Fertil Womens Med 2002;47:272-277.

13. Zacur HA, Foster GV. Hyperprolactinemia and polycystic ovary syndrome. Semin Reprod Endocrinol 1992;10:236-242. 14. Leblanc H, Lachelin GC, Abu-Fadil S, Yen SSC. Effect of dopamine infusion on pituitary hormone secretion in humans. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1976;43:668-735.

15. Quigley ME, Rakoff JS, Yen SSC. Increased luteinizing hormone sensitivity to dopamine inhibition in polycystic ovary syndrome. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1981;52:231-234.

16. Franks S. Polycystic ovary syndrome: a changing perspective. Clin Endocrinol (Oxf) 1989;31:87-120.

17. Barnes RB, Lobo RA. Central opioid activity in polycystic ovary syndrome with and without dopaminergic modulation. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1985;61:779-782. 18. Steingold KA, Lobo RA, Judd HL. The effect of bromocriptine on gonadotropin and steroid secretion in polycystic ovary syndrome. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1986;62:1048-1051.

19. Bahceci M, Tuzcu A, Canoruc N, Tuzun Y, Kidir V, Asian C. Serum C-reactive protein (CRP) levels and insulin resistance in non- obese women with polycystic ovarian syndrome, and effect of bicalutamide on hirsutism, CRP levels and insulin resistance. Horm Res 2004;62:283-287.

20. Matthews DR, Hosker JP, Rudenski AS, Naylor BA, Treacher DF, Turner RC. Homeostasis model assessment: insulin resistance and cell ss function from fasting plasma glucose and insulin concentrations in man. Diabetologia 1985; 28:412-419.

21. Venturoli S, Porcu E, Fabbri R, Magrini O, Paradisi R, Pallotti G, Gammi L, Flamigni C. Postmenarchal evolution of endocrine pattern and ovarian aspect in adolescents with menstrual irregularities. Fertil Steril 1987;48:78-85.

22. Szilagyi A, Hole R, Keckstein J, Rossmanith WG. Effects of ovarian surgery on the dopaminergic and opioidergic control of gonadotropin and prolactin secretion in women with polycystic ovarian disease. Gynecol Endocrinol 1993;7:159-166.

23. Laatikainen T, Tulenheimo A. Prolactin pulsatility in polycystic ovarian disease. J Endocrinol Invest 1985;8:157-161.

24. Murdoch AP, Dunlop W, Kendall-Taylor P. Studies of prolactin in polycystic ovary syndrome. Clin Endocrinol (Oxf) 1986;24:175.

25. Bahceci M, Tuzcu A, Baheci S, Tuzcu S. Is hyperprolactinemia associated with insulin resistance in non-obese patients with polycystic ovary syndrome? J Endocrinol Invest 2003;26:655-659.

26. Lunde O. Hyperprolactinemia in polycystic ovary syndrome. Ann Chir Gynaecol 1981;70:197-201.

27. Luciano AA, Chapler FK, Sherman BM. Hyperprolactinemia in polycystic ovary syndrome. Fertil Steril 1984;41:719-725.

28. Carmina E, Rosato F, Maggiore M, Gagliano AM, Indovina D, Janni A. Prolactin secretion in polycystic ovary syndrome (PCO): correlation with the steroid pattern. Acta Endocrinol (Copenh) 1984;105:99-104.

29. Wortsman J, Hirschowitz JS. Galactorrhoea and hyperprolactinemia during treatment of polycystic ovary syndrome. Obstet Gynecol 1980;55:460-463.

30. Duignan NM. Polycystic ovarian disease. Br J Obstet Gynaecol 1976;83:593-602.

31. Buvat J, Siame-Mourot C, Fourlinnie JC, Lamaire A, Buvat- Herbaut M, Hermand E. Androgens and prolactin levels in hirsute women with either polycystic ovaries or ‘borderline ovaries’. Fertil Steril 1982;38:695-700.

32. Peillon F, Vincens M, Cesselin F, Doumith R, Mowszowicz I. Anovulatory cycles with an apparently normal level of blood prolactin. Treatment by bromocriptine. Nouv Presse Med 1979;8:3269- 3270.

33. Alger M, Velasquez-Matute L, Mason M, Canales ES, Zarate A. Polycystic ovarian disease associated with hyperprolactinemia and defective response. Fertil Steril 1980;34:70-71.

34. Corenblum B, Taylor PJ. A rationale for the use of bromocriptine in patients with amenorrhea and normoprolactinemia. Fertil Steril 1980;34:239-241.

35. Corenblum B, Taylor PJ. The hyperprolactinemic polycystic ovary syndrome may not be a distinct entity. Fertil Steril 1982;38:549-552.

36. Buvat J, Buvat-Herbaut M, Marcolin G, Racadot A, Fourlinnie JC, Fossati P. Acute effects of bromocriptine on gonadotropin secretion in polycystic ovary syndrome. Fertil Steril 1985;44:356- 360.

37. Shoupe D, Lobo RA. Prolactin response after gonadotropinreleasing hormone in the polycystic ovary syndrome. Fertil Steril 1985;43:549-553.

38. Falaschi P, Del Pozo E, Rocco A, Toscano V, Petrangeli E, Pompei P, Frajese G. Prolactin release in polycystic ovary. Obstet Gynecol 1980;55:579-582.

39. Seppala M, Hirvonen E. Raised serum prolactin levels associated with hirsutism and amenorrhoea. Br Med J 1975;4:144-145.

40. Hamori M, Szendei G, Kovacs I, Somos P. The connection between hyperprolactinemia and polycystic ovary syndrome. Zentralbl Gynakol 1987;109:481^86.

41. Franks S, Murray MAF, Jequier AM, Steele SJ, Nabarro JD, Jacobs HS. Incidence and significance of hyperprolactinemia in women with amenorrhoea. Clin Endocrinol (OxO 1975;4:597-607.

42. Paoletti AM, Cagnacci A, Soldani R, Orru M, Ajossa S, Pittorra G, Mulas P, Melis GB. Evidence that an altered prolactin release is consequent to abnormal ovarian activity in polycystic ovary syndrome. Fertil Steril 1995;64:1094-1098.

43. Vilar L, Naves LA, Casulari LA. Hiperprolactinemia – problemas no diagnostico. Brasilia Med 2005;42:1-7.

44. Suliman AM, Smith TP, Gibney J5 McKenna TJ. Frequent misdiagnosis and mismanagement of hyperprolactinemia patients before the introduction of macroprolactin screening: application of a new strict laboratory definition of macroprolactinemia. Clin Chem 2003;49:1504-1509.

45. Escobar-Morreale HF. Macroprolactinemia in women presenting with hyperandrogenic symptoms: implications for the management of polycystic ovary syndrome. Fertil Steril 2004;82:1697-1699.

46. Forbes AP, Henneman PH, Griswold GC, Albright F. Syndrome characterized by galactorrhea, amenorrhea, and low urinary FSH: comparison with acromegaly and normal lactation. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1954;14:265-271.

47. Lavric MC. Galactorrhea and amenorrhea with polycystic ovaries. Del Castillo syndrome or polycystic ovarian disease. Am J Obstet Gynecol 1969;104:814-817.

48. Thorner MO, McNeilly AS, Hagan C, Besser GM. Long-term treatment of galactorrhoea and hypogonadism with bromocriptine. Br Med J 1974;2:419-422.

49. Barnes RB, Mileikowsky GN, Cha KY, Spencer CA, Lobo RA. Effects of dopamine and metoclopramide in polycystic ovary syndrome. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1986;63: 506-509.

50. Motta LDC, Motta LACR, Gagliardi ART. Bromocriptine na sindrome dos ovarios policisticos: urna revisao. J Bras Ginecol 1989;99:177-181.

51. Crosignani PG, Reschini E, Lombroso GC, Arosio M, Peracchi M. Comparison of placebo and bromocriptine in the treatment of patients with normoprolactinaemic amenorrhoea. BrJ Obstet Gynaecol 1978;85:773-75.

52. McBain JC, Poppereil RJ. Use of bromocriptine in unexplained infertility. Clin Reprod Fertil 1982;1:145-150.

53. Coelingh Bennink HJ, van der Steeg HJ. Failure of bromocriptine to restore the menstrual cycle in normoprolactinemic post-pill amenorrhea. Fertil Steril 1983;39:238-240.

54. Murdoch AP, McClean KG, Watson MJ, Dunlop W, Kendall Taylor P. Treatment of hirsutism in polycystic ovary syndrome with bromocriptine. BrJ Obstet Gynaecol 1987;94:358-365.

55. El Tabakh GH, Loutli A, Azab I, Rahman HA, Aleem FA, Southren AL. A controlled clinical trial for the effect of bromocriptine on the adrenal contribution in polycystic ovary syndrome. Acta Endocrinol (Copenh) 1987;114:161-165.

56. Spruce BA, Taylor PK, Dunlop W, Anderson AJ, Watson MJ, Cook DB, Gray C. The effect of bromocriptine in the polycystic ovary syndrome. Clin Endocrinol (Oxf) 1984;20: 481-488.

57. Dewailly D, Buvat J, Fourlinnie JC, Fessati P, Linquette M. Effects cliniques et biologiques de ladministracion prolongee de bromocriptine dans la maladie des ovaries polykystiques. Ann Endocrinol (Paris) 1982;43:134.

58. Thorner MO, Besser GM, Jones A, Dacie J, Jones AE. Bromocriptine treatment of female infertility: report of 13 pregnancies. Br Med J 1975;4:694-697.

59. Ito M, Matsuura K, Aiko A, Matsui K, Yoshimura T, Okamura H. Successful treatment with bromocriptine of hypertension associated with polycystic ovarian disease. Acta Obstet Gynecol Scand 1987;66:279-282.

60. Blum I, Bruhis S, Kaufman H. Clinical evaluation of the effects of combined treatment with bromocriptine and spironolactone in two women with the polycystic ovary syndrome. Fertil Steril 1981;35:629-633.

61. Blum I, Kaufman H, Merilus R, Rusecki Y, Chovers 1. Successful treatment of polycystic ovary syndrome with spironolactone or bromocriptine. Obstet Gynecol 1981;57: 661-665.

ROBERPAULO BARBOZA FILHO1, LUCILIA DOMINGUES2, LUCIANA NAVES3, ELENICE FERRAZ2, ADRIANA ALVES3, & LUIZ AUGUSTO CASULARI3

1 Endocrinology and Neurology Clinics – CLINEN, Brasilia, Brazil, 2Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, University of Brasilia, Brasilia, Brazil, and Endocrinology Service, University of Brasilia, Brasilia, Brazil

(Received 26 September 2006; revised 18 February 2007; accepted 21 February 2007)

Correspondence: L. A. Casuiari, CLINEN – Ed. America Office Tower, SCN quadra 1 bloco F salas 1105/?06, CEP 70911-905, Brasilia DF, Brasil. Tel/Fax: 55 61 33280228. E-mail: [email protected]

Copyright Taylor & Francis Ltd. May 2007

(c) 2007 Gynecological Endocrinology. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Allopregnanolone Decrease With Symptom Improvement During Placebo and Gonadotropin-Releasing Hormone Agonist Treatment in Women With Severe Premenstrual Syndrome

By Nyberg, Sigrid Backstrom, Torbjorn; Zingmark, Elisabeth; Purdy, Robert H; Poromaa, Inger Sundstrom

Abstract Background. Neurosteroids such as allopregnanolone and pregnanolone are suggested to be of importance for the pathophysiology of premenstrual dysphoric disorder. The aim of this study was to investigate whether the luteal-phase serum concentrations of these neurosteroids are associated with improvement of premenstrual symptoms in 12 women with severe premenstrual syndrome after treatment with low-dose gonadotropin- releasing hormone agonist and placebo.

Methods. Daily ratings for mood and physical symptoms were made prior to treatment and throughout the study. Serum progesterone, allopregnanolone and pregnanolone were assessed in the luteal phase (cycle day -9 to cycle day – 1). Based on their symptom ratings, subjects were grouped as either buserelin responders (n = 6) or placebo responders (n = 6).

Results. Buserelin responders displayed decreased levels of allopregnanolone (p

Conclusion. Treatment response, whether induced by buserelin or placebo, appears to be associated with a decrease in allopregnanolone concentration.

Keywords: Premenstrual dysphoric disorder, menstrual cycle, gonadotropin-releasing hormone agonist, allopregnanolone, pregnanolone, progesterone

Introduction

Premenstrual dysphoric disorder (PMDD) or severe premenstrual syndrome (PMS) is characterized by a cluster of physical, affective and behavioral symptoms that occur in the luteal phase of the menstrual cycle. The most prominent affective symptoms are depressed mood, anxiety, irritability and lability, which are also considered as four of the main symptoms according to the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, fourth edition (DSM-IV) [I]. The pathophysiology behind the appearance of these symptoms is related to ovarian steroids, as symptoms disappear during anovulatory cycles when no corpus luteum is formed [2]. Likewise, treatment with a gonadotropin-releasing hormone (GnRH) agonist has been proved to relieve PMDD symptoms [3-6] .

As serum levels of gonadal hormones are similar between PMDD patients and control subjects [7-9], it has been suggested that women with PMDD have a different sensitivity to the fluctuations during the menstrual cycle of these hormones and/or of their neuroactive metabolites. Differences in sensitivity to the effects of neuroactive steroids and y-aminobutyric acid A (GABAA)-receptor active substances between PMDD patients and controls have also been reported during the luteal phase [10-13].

Progesterone is metabolized to allopregnanolone (3a-hydroxy-5a- pregnan-20-one) and pregnanolone (3oc-hydroxy-5/?-pregnan-20-one), which are potent GABAA-receptor agonists that exert sedative, anxiolytic and antiepileptic effects in a dose-dependent manner. The findings regarding peripheral concentrations of allopregnanolone in women with PMDD are divergent. Most studies have failed to indicate any difference in peripheral allopregnanolone levels between PMDD patients and control subjects [14-16], although both lower and higher allopregnanolone levels [17-22] have been reported in PMDD patients.

However, within the individual patient, different steroid levels might have an impact on symptom expression. Decreased levels of allopregnanolone have been associated with improvement in PMDD symptoms, irrespective of whettier treatment widi a selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) or placebo was given [23]. Furthermore, in women receiving postmenopausal hormone therapy (HT), negative mood symptoms are enhanced when allopregnanolone levels increase during progesterone treatment [24].

For this reason, it is of interest to investigate, within an individual patient, the relationship between changes in symptom severity and changes in neuroactive steroids. We have previously shown that a low dose of GnRH agonist is superior to placebo for treatment of severe premenstrual symptoms [25]. Given the varying degree of ovarian and corpus luteum suppression that was induced by the low-dose GnRH agonist [25], this model could be used to investigate changes in the endogenous production of corpus luteum- derived neurosteroids [26] and, at the same time, investigate the symptom profiles of these individuals.

Thus the primary aim of the present study was to investigate whether luteal-phase serum concentrations of progesterone, allopregnanolone and pregnanolone are associated with symptom improvement following low-dose GnRH agonist treatment. A secondary aim was to investigate whether the concentrations of these hormones and neuroactive steroids are associated with symptom improvement during placebo treatment.

Materials and method

Subject study group

The patients included in this study were part of a larger, multi- center, randomized, placebo-controlled, double-blind crossover trial comparing a low dose of the GnRH agonist buserelin with placebo. For the purpose of this study, 18 PMDD patients recruited at the department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Umea University Hospital, were asked to give blood samples every second week during the trial.

Hence, 18 otherwise healthy women aged 37.8 +1.4 years (mean + standard error of the mean), who had suffered from premenstrual mood changes for more than 6 months, were included in the study. All subjects met the criteria for PMDD, as defined in DSM-IV [I]. Diagnosis was based on daily prospective symptom ratings on the Cyclicity Diagnoser (CD) scale [25] during two ovulatory cycles prior to inclusion. The CD scale consists of seven mood parameters (depression, fatigue, irritability, tension, cheerfulness, friendliness and energy), and four somatic symptoms (headache, swelling, breast tenderness and menstrual bleeding). In addition, the CD scale contains one severity item for measuring impairment of everyday family/social functioning and work performance. The CD scale is a Likert scale ranging from 1 to 9, with 1 as complete absence of a particular symptom and 9 as the maximal severity of the symptom [25] . Patients were diagnosed with PMDD if they had a significant worsening in at least five mood symptoms during nine premenstrual days compared with nine midfollicular days, associated with a clinically significant social and occupational impairment [27] . All patients displayed at least one week of sparse symptomatology (scores less than 2) in the follicular phase. Women treated with oral contraceptives, other steroid hormones, benzodiazepines or antidepressants were excluded. In addition, women with irregular menstrual cycles, e.g. variation of more than + 3 days between cycles, were not included. Those widi a current mental disorder or a history of drug abuse during the clinical interview were also excluded from the study. Physical examinations and routine blood chemical tests carried out prior to inclusion were within the normal range. The Umea University Ethics Committee approved the study, and each participant gave informed consent.

Study design

The PMDD patients were treated with a low dose of the GnRH agonist buserelin 100 [mu]g/day administered intranasally (Aventis Pharma; Hoechst AG, Frankfurt, Germany) or placebo. The placebo spray, prepared in an identical nebulizer, contained the solution for buserelin but without the active drug (Apoteksbolaget AB, Stockholm, Sweden). Prior to the start of the study, all patients were given thorough instructions for the use of the nebulizer. Half of the patients were randomized to start with the GnRH agonist and the remainder started with placebo. The crossover was made after two menstrual cycles. Compliance was assessed by measuring the amount of liquid remaining in the nebulizers at each visit. In addition, patients were questioned about adverse effects of the study drug.

The primary outcome measure for the study was the daily PMDD symptom scores made by the patients on the CD scale throughout the study. As previously mentioned, a significant relief in premenstrual depression and irritability scores was noted during low-dose GnRH agonist treatment compared with placebo [25] .

Blood sampling

Blood samples for analysis of progesterone, allopregnanolone and pregnanolone were obtained every second week throughout the study, but for present purposes only luteal-phase blood samples were used.

Only cycles with a blood sample taken within the stipulated time frame of the luteal phase (day – 9 to day – 1) have been included in die statistical analyses of this study. The blood sampling was aimed to coincide with die late luteal phase (one week before onset of menses) of each treatment cycle. As buserelin treatment caused irregularities in the bleeding pattern, it was sometimes difficult to schedule the blood sampling in the luteal phase. In these cases, menstrual cycles were either unexpectedly long or onset of menstrual bleeding occurred earlier than expected. Menstrual cycle day was monitored by use of daily ratings of menstrual bleeding.

Second, only those subjects who had a lutealphase blood sample from a buserelin as well as from a placebo cycle were included in the statistical analyses. Third, to avoid carry-over effects from buserelin treatment to placebo treatment cycles in subjects starting with buserelin before the crossover to placebo, only blood samples from the second placebo treatment cycle were used.

Hormone assays

Allopregnanolone and pregnanolone were measured by radioimmunoassay (RIA) after diethylether extraction and purification of samples by high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC).

Extraction. Serum or plasma (0.2-0.4 ml) was pipetted into a cylindrical flat-bottomed glass vial of 20 ml volume, after which water (0.5 ml) and diethylether (3.0 ml) were added. The samples were then allowed to stand on an orbital shaker for 10 min. Following the liquid-liquid extraction, the vials were transferred into an ethanol/dry ice bath. The water phase was frozen, and the ether phase was decanted and evaporated under a stream of nitrogen gas.

Purification. Purification of samples before quantification of allopregnanolone and pregnanolone was achieved by preparative HPLC followed RIA. Plasma samples were analyzed in duplicate. Evaporated samples were re-dissolved in 1 ml of ethanol-water (1:1, v/v) prior to analysis. Our HPLC system consisted of a Waters 1515 Isocratic Pump (Waters Corporation, Millford, MA, USA), delivering the mobile phase (methanol-water, 60:40, v/v) at a flow rate of 1.0 ml/min. A Waters 717 plus Auto-sampler was used for injection of samples (200 [mu]) into a Symmetry C18 separation column (4.6 mm ? 75 mm, 3.5 [mu]m; Waters), heated to 45[degrees]C in a Waters 1500 Column Heater. Detection of retention times of standards and cross- reacting steroids was at 206 nm using a Waters 2487 Dual ? Absorbance Detector. The detector output was recorded by Waters Breeze Chromatography Software (version 3.20). In the preparative technique, HPLC fractions were collected symmetrically around the retention time for allopregnanolone and pregnanolone. Retention was found from injection of a standard sample before the start of analysis. A Waters Fraction Collector II was used for collection of samples, for further analysis with RIA. It was possible to separate all cross-reacting steroids, even though some had retention times close to that of the collected fraction as analyzed by injection of 20 nmol of standard samples (Table I).

Allopregnanolone. Allopregnanolone was measured by RIA after diethylether extraction and HPLC purification of samples. Recovery was determined for each assay by adding 300-500 cpm of 3H-labeled allopregnanolone, [9, 1 1 , 1 2-3H(N)] 5a-pregnan-3a-ol-20-one (Perkin Elmer Life Sciences, Boston, MA, USA), to a plasma sample before extraction and measuring the amount recovered after HPLC. The recovery of allopregnanolone averaged 98% and the results are compensated for recovery.

All samples were analyzed using a polyclonal rabbit antiserum raised against 3a-hydroxy-20-oxo-5a-pregnan-1 1-yl- carboxymethylether coupled to bovine serum albumin (Table I) [28]. The antiserum was used at a dilution of 1:5000 and the antibody solutions were prepared in the same way as described earlier [29] . The sensitivity of the assay was 25 pg; the intra-assay coefficient of variation (CV) for allopregnanolone was 6.5% and the inter-assay CV was 8.5%.

Pregnanolone. After extraction and HPLC, a RIA for pregnanolone was performed as described earlier [12]. Briefly, the antiserum was raised against 3a,21-dihydroxy-5jss-pregnan-20-one-21-hemisuccinate coupled to bovine serum albumin in a rabbit by Dr Robert H. Purdy, Department of Psychiatry, College of Medicine, University of California, San Diego, CA, USA. Cross-reactivity is shown in Table I. The antibody was used at a dilution 1:2300 and the solution was prepared using [1 1,1 2-3H] pregnanolone custom-synthesized by NEN (New England Nuclear, Boston, MA, USA). The recovery of pregnanolone was 93%. The results are compensated for recovery. The sensitivity of the assay was 25 pg; the intra-assay CV was 6.5% and the inter- assay CV, 8.5%.

Table I. Retention times of cross-reacting steroids to anti- allopregnanolone and anti-pregnanolone antibodies*. The earlier published crossreactivity patterns from Purdy’s allopregnanolone antiserum [12] and Purdy’s pregnenolone antiserum [12 or 16] are also shown. These are the antisera used in the present study.

Progesterone. Measurements of plasma progesterone were taken using Delfia progesterone kits (Wallac Oy, Turku, Finland), a fluoroimmunoassay, according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Reference values for Z-transformation of progesterone and allopregnanolone concentrations. As blood samples were taken from the study patients on different days in the luteal phase, the progesterone and allopregnanolone concentrations were Z- transformed. This made it possible to compare serum progesterone and allopregnanolone concentrations taken at different cycle days between cycles and groups. The sample value (Z-value) is expressed as the number of standard deviation (SD) units from the mean in the reference group of the particular sampling day. The standard deviation used is the SD in the reference group of mat particular cycle day. Z-values were dius calculated USing the equation: Z = Xi- Xmean reference/ SDreference, where Xi is the value obtained in the Study patient and -X^sub mean reference^/SD^sub reference^ IS the mean and SD in the reference group for the particular day of the menstrual cycle before the onset of the next menstrual bleeding. No normal curve was available for serum pregnanolone concentrations, which is why this neurosteroid was not transformed.

As reference values for the calculation of Z-scores of progesterone and allopregnanolone concentrations in the PMDD patients, daily progesterone and allopregnanolone concentrations during the luteal phase from reference menstrual cycles were used. The mean reference cycle consisted of blood samples of 32 menstrual cycles from a group of 20 women participating in an earlier study without any treatment intervention [15]. The subjects in the reference group were women both with and without PMDD. For the reference cycle, women provided daily blood samples for progesterone and allopregnanolone assays on cycle days 1-4, and from cycle day 10 throughout the remaining cycle until the first four days of menstrual bleeding during the next cycle. Between cycle days 4 and 10, occasional blood samples were taken. The average age of the women was 36.6 years (range 25-44 years). All cycles in the reference group were ovulatory, as defined by plasma progesterone values exceeding 15 nmol/1. These samples were centered on the first day of menstrual bleeding, with reverse counting during the preceding luteal phase and with the day before onset of bleeding as day – 1 . The mean (SD) concentrations during the menstrual cycle are shown in Figure 1.

Statistical methods

Daily symptom ratings were analyzed separately and in clusters of related symptoms. Related symptoms were grouped togedier as mean scores of summarized symptoms: ‘negative mood symptoms’, i.e. tension, irritability and depressed mood.

Analysis of variance with repeated measures was used to evaluate the difference in luteal-phase daily ratings between types of treatments. The withinsubjects factors were time (the 7 days prior to onset of menstruation) and treatment (buserelin vs. placebo vs. pre-treatment).

The scores of daily life impairment and summarized negative mood during the pre-treatment cycle were compared with corresponding scores in the placebo cycle. A placebo response was then found in certain individuals. Based on the difference in scores of daily life impairment and summarized negative mood between pre-treatment cycles and placebo treatment, the women were divided into two groups, buserelin responders and placebo responders, using median split of the rank order of score difference. Two situations in each of the two groups (placebo responders and buserelin responders) were studied, namely: (1) placebo responders on placebo treatment; (2) placebo responders on buserelin treatment; (3) buserelin responders on placebo treatment; and (4) buserelin responders on buserelin treatment.

Comparisons of hormone levels between buserelin responders and placebo responders were made by the Mann-Whitney U test, and between treatments in each group by the Wilcoxon matched-pair signedrank test. The SPSS statistical package was used for all analyses (SPSS Inc., Chicago, IL, USA). Values p

Results

Of the 18 PMDD patients included in the study, 12 (with 24 cycles) had blood samples taken witiiin die stipulated luteal-phase time frame during both a buserelin and a placebo treatment cycle. Of these 12 patients, six were buserelin responders, whereas the remaining six were placebo responders. Table II shows their demographic data.

Figure 1. Progesterone (nmol/1) (bottom) and allopregnanolone (nmol/1) (top) concentrations from 32 menstrual cycles in the reference group; data are means with standard deviation shown by vertical bars. The data are centered on the day of onset of menstrual bleeding in 14-day periods.

Buserelin responders

The buserelin responders reported a significant improvement by buserelin treatment in summarized negative mood compared with both pre-treatment and placebo treatment (F(2,10) = 10.45, p

Placebo responders reported a significant difference in summarized negative mood between treatments and the pre-treatment period (F(l,10) = 16.86, p

Table II. Demographic data of the study group.

Figure 2. Daily symptom ratings on a 9-point Cyclicity Diagnoser scale of summarized negative mood scores during pre-treatment, placebo and buserelin treatment cycles in placebo responders (top) and buserelin responders (bottom). The cycles represent ideal 28- day cycles showing 14 postmenstrual days and 14 premenstrual days. Each point represents the group mean with vertical bars showing the standard error of the mean; error bars are not displayed during the pre-treatment cycle for clarity. Buserelin responders reported a significant improvement of the buserelin treatment in summarized negative mood symptoms (F(l,146) = 9.05, p

Neurosteroid and progesterone response to buserelin

Buserelin responders had significandy lower Z-scores for progesterone (p

Figure 3. Daily symptom ratings on a 9-point Cyclicity Diagnoser scale of daily life impairment during pre-treatment, placebo and buserelin treatment cycles in placebo responders (top) and buserelin responders (bottom). The cycles represent ideal 28-day cycles showing 14 postmenstrual days and 14 premenstrual days. Each point represents the group mean with vertical bars showing the standard error of the mean; error bars are not displayed during the pre- treatment cycle for clarity. Buserelin responders showed a significant improvement of the buserelin treatment in daily life impairment compared with placebo (F(1, 146) = 26.07, p

There were no differences in neurosteroid or progesterone concentrations or normalized Z-score values between buserelin responders and placebo responders during buserelin treatment.

Neurosteroid and progesterone response to placebo

During placebo treatment, placebo responders had lower Z-scores of allopregnanolone man buserelin responders (p

Table III. Progesterone and neurosteroid levels during the late luteal phase of placebo and buserelin treatment in buserelin responders and placebo responders.

Discussion

In die present study, we investigated the effect of a low dose of intranasal buserelin and placebo treatment on symptom improvement and serum steroid levels in women with PMDD. The main finding is that there is an association between the decrease in allopregnanolone concentration and symptom severity when individual patients are investigated.

In buserelin responders luteal-phase allopregnanolone levels decreased together with a decrease in symptom severity between die low-dose GnRH treatment cycles and placebo treatment cycles. Placebo responders, on the other hand, had lower lutealphase allopregnanolone concentrations during placebo treatment compared with buserelin responders (i.e. women who did not improve on placebo but only on buserelin).

Furthermore, placebo responders who improved on both placebo and buserelin treatment compared with pre-treatment had similar allopregnanolone and progesterone levels during the placebo and low- dose GnRH treatment cycles.

These results thus suggest that diere is an association between improved symptoms and decreased serum allopregnanolone concentrations, independent of whether the cause for improvement is a placebo response or an active drug response. An association between a parallel change in severity of negative mood and serum allopregnanolone concentrations has been reported in earlier studies [23,24]. For instance, PMDD patients who reported symptom improvement following treatment with SSRI or placebo had lower levels of allopregnanolone, irrespective of which treatment had been given [23].

However, higher endogenous levels of allopregnanolone in the luteal phase have also been associated with lower symptom severity in PMDD patients [15], widi similar results in a study by Girdler and coworkers [22]. The relationship between symptom severity and a decreased sensitivity to different GABAergic substances like pregnanolone, benzodiazepines, and alcohol [10-13], especially in the luteal phase, has previously been reported in women with PMDD. Given the findings of altered functional GABAA-receptor sensitivity in PMDD patients, the absolute level in allopregnanolone concentration might not be the only explanation for the appearance of symptoms. Instead, a combination of an altered GABAA-receptor sensitivity and a possible development of tolerance to these neuroactive agents [30,31] could render these women less sensitive to the effect of allopregnanolone in the luteal phase of the menstrual cycle.

In fertile women, serum allopregnanolone concentration increases from 0.5 nM in the follicular phase to 4 nM in the luteal phase, and is correlated with the level of serum progesterone. The increase in allopregnanolone seems to correlate with die increase in negative mood symptoms during the early luteal phase in women with PMDD [32]. In the present study, the decrease in serum allopregnanolone concentration was, on average, 0.6SD in the buserelin responder group, thus approaching follicular-phase values.

The serum concentration of allopregnanolone seems to be of importance for symptom severity. In postmenopausal women receiving HT with sequential progesterone and estradiol, severity of symptoms increased in parallel with the serum levels of allopregnanolone seen during mid-luteal phase. With further increases in serum allopregnanolone concentrations symptom severity gradually decreases, rendering an inverted U-shaped relationship between symptom severity and allopregnanolone concentration [24,33]. Allopregnanolone is a well-known potent GABAA-receptor agonist, and many GABAAreceptor agonists like benzodiazepines, alcohol, barbiturates and neuroactive steroids have been shown to exert an inverted U-shaped biphasic effect on mood and behavior. With high concentrations, these positive modulators of the GABAA receptor enhance the effect of GABA and induce an anxiolytic, sedative, hypnotic, antiepileptic and anesthetic effect in both animals and humans [28,34,35], while in certain individuals low concentrations of allopregnanolone induce loss of impulse control, aggression and irritability [36-43].

This is further substantiated by studies investigating the effect of different doses of progesterone/ progestogens in postmenopausal HT. Postmenopausal women taking sequential HT reported more adverse mood effects on 10 mg medroxyprogesterone acetate (MPA) than on 20 mg MPA [44] and, likewise, experienced more negative mood symptoms with vaginal progesterone 400 mg/day compared with 800 mg/day [45]. It is possible mat women receiving a low dose of GnRH agonist treatment, resulting in a somewhat downregulated ovarian function, experience symptom improvement secondary to declining allopregnanolone levels. It is also quite possible that the allopregnanolone levels in these women are lower than the peak symptominducing allopregnanolone concentration.

The placebo effect in the treatment of PMDD was shown earlier to be substantial [3,25,46,47] . The rate of placebo response for PMDD varies between 6 and 35% [48], but rates up to 94% have been seen in some clinical studies [49] . Placebo response has also been reported in prior GnRH agonist studies, with significant improvement from placebo treatment in between 26 and 70% of patients (depending on the symptom) compared with pre-treatment [3]. The mechanisms behind the placebo response are not known, but explanations of an effect on the opioid system have been forwarded [50,51]. Also, release of dopamine, and expectation of and desire for drug effect, may alter the treatment response. In the present study there was a decrease in allopregnanolone concentration during placebo treatment, indicating mat the placebo effect might be related to decreased allopregnanolone concentration or GABAA-receptor stimulation.

There are a number of weaknesses and limitations to the interpretation of this study. First, the number of patients is limited and it is not possible to draw any definite conclusions from this small sample size, although the tendency supports findings from other studies. Another limitation is that with a more frequent blood sampling we could have used actual serum steroid levels instead of transformed Z-score levels, although Z-scores of serum concentration represent the specific day of the menstrual cycle on which serum is taken. The reason why we failed to take blood samples on a specific day of the menstrual cycle was the variation in cycle length, mainly during GnRH treatment.

In conclusion, this study suggests a relationship between decreased serum allopregnanolone concentrations and decreased symptom severity, independent of active treatment or placebo. Acknowledgements

This work was supported by the Swedish Medical Research Council (project 4X-11198), Umea sjukvard, spjutspetsanslag, Visare Norr Norra Regionen, and by a grant from the EU Regional Funds, Objective 1.

References

1. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders. 4th ed. Washington (DC): US Department of Health and Human Services; 1994. pp 714-718.

2. Hammarback S, Ekholm UB, Backstrom T. Spontaneous anovulation causing disappearance of cyclical symptoms in women with the premenstrual syndrome. Acta Endocrinol (Copenh) 1991;125:132-137.

3. Hammarback S, Backstrom T. Induced anovulation as treatment of premenstrual tension syndrome. A double-blind cross-over study with GnRH-agonist versus placebo. Acta Obstet. Gynecol. Scand 1988;67:159- 166.

4. Mortola JF, Girton L, Fischer U. Successful treatment of severe premenstrual syndrome by combined use of gonadotropin- releasing hormone agonist and estrogen/progestin. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1991;72:252A-252F.

5. Studd J, Leather AT. The need for add-back with gonadotrophin- releasing hormone agonist therapy. Br J Obstet Gynaecol 1996;103(Suppl 14),l- ^.

6. Di Carlo C, Palomba S, Tommaselli GA, Guida M, Di Spiezio Sardo A, Nappi C. Use of leuprolide acetate plus tibolone in the treatment of severe premenstrual syndrome. Fertil Steril 2001;75:380- 384.

7. Rubinow DR, Hoban MC, Grover GN, Galloway DS, Roy-Byrne P, Andersen R, Merriam GR. Changes in plasma hormones across the menstrual cycle in patients with menstrually related mood disorder and in control subjects. Am J Obstet Gynecol 1988;158:5-1 1.

8. Backstrom T, Sanders D, Leask R, Davidson D, Warner P, Bancroft J. Mood, sexuality, hormones, and the menstrual cycle. II. Hormone levels and their relationship to the premenstrual syndrome. Psychosom Med 1983;6:503-507.

9. Girdler SS, Pedersen CA, Stern RA, Light KC. Menstrual cycle and premenstrual syndrome: modifiers of cardiovascular reactivity in women. Health Psychol 1993;12: 180-192.

10. Sundstrom I, Ashbrook D, Backstrom T. Reduced benzodiazepine sensitivity in patients with premenstrual syndrome: a pilot study. Psychoneuroendocrinology 1997;22:25-38.

11. Sundstrom I, Nyberg S, Backstrom T. Patients with premenstrual syndrome have reduced sensitivity to midazolam compared to control subjects. Neuropsychopharmacology 1997;17:370-381.

12. Sundstrom I, Andersson A, Nyberg S, Ashbrook D, Purdy RH, Backstrom T. Patients with premenstrual syndrome have a different sensitivity to a neuroactive steroid during the menstrual cycle compared to control subjects. Neuroendocrinology 1998;67:126-138.

13. Nyberg S, Wahlstrom G, Backstrom T, SundstromPoromaa I. Altered sensitivity to alcohol in the late luteal phase among patients with premenstrual dysphoric disorder. Psychoneuroendocrinology 2004;29:767-777.

14. Schmidt P, Purdy R, Moore P Jr, Paul S, Rubinow D. Circulating levels of anxiolytic steroids in the luteal phase in women with premenstrual syndrome and in control subjects. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1994;79:1256-1260.

15. Wang M, Seippel L, Purdy RH, Backstrom T. Relationship between symptom severity and steroid variation in women with premenstrual syndrome: study on serum pregnenolone, pregnenolone sulfate, 5a-pregnane-3,20-dione and 3a-hydroxy-5a-pregnan-20-one. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1996;81:1076-1082.

16. Sundstrom I, Backstrom T. Patients with premenstrual syndrome have decreased saccadic eye velocity compared to control subjects. Biol Psychiatry 1998;44:755-764.

17. Rapkin AJ, Morgan M, Goldman L, Brann DW, Simone D, Mahesh VB. Progesterone metabolite allopregnanolone in women with premenstrual syndrome. Obstet Gynecol 1997; 90:709-714.

18. Bicikova M, Dibbelt L, Hill M, Hampl R, Starka L. Allopregnanolone in women with premenstrual syndrome. Horm Metab Res 1998;30:227-230.

19. Monteleone P, Luisi S, Tonetti A, Bernardi F, Genazzani AD, Luisi M, Petraglia F, Genazzani AR. Allopregnanolone concentrations and premenstrual syndrome. Eur J Endocrinol 2000;142:269-273.

20. Lombardi I, Luisi S, Quirici B, Monteleone P, Bernardi F, Liut M, Casarosa E, Palumbo M, Petraglia F, Genazzani AR. Adrenal response to adrenocorticotropic hormone stimulation in patients with premenstrual syndrome. Gynecol Endocrinol 2004;18:79-87.

21. Nyberg S, Andersson A, Zingmark E, Wahlstrom G, Backstrom T, Sundstrom-Poromaa I. The effect of a low dose of alcohol on allopregnanolone serum concentrations across the menstrual cycle in women with severe premenstrual syndrome and controls. Psychoneuroendocrinology 2005;30: 892-901.

22. Girdler SS, Straneva PA, Light KC, Pedersen CA, Morrow AL. Allopregnanolone levels and reactivity to mental stress in premenstrual dysphoric disorder. Biol Psychiatry 2001;49:788-797.

23. Freeman EW, Frye CA, Rickels K, Martin PA, Smith SS. Allopregnanolone levels and symptom improvement in severe premenstrual syndrome. J Clin Psychopharmacol 2002;22: 516-520.

24. Andreen L, Sundstrom-Poromaa I, Bixo M, Andersson A, Nyberg S, Backstrom T. Relationship between allopregnanolone and negative mood in postmenopausal women taking sequential hormone replacement therapy with vaginal progesterone. Psychoneuroendocrinology 2005;30:212-224.

25. Sundstrom I, Nyberg S, Bixo M, Hammarback S, Backstrom T. Treatment of premenstrual syndrome with gonadotropin-releasing hormone agonist in a low dose regimen. Acta Obstet Gynecol Scand 1999;78:891-899.

26. Ottander U, Poromaa IS, Bjurulf E, Skytt A, Backstrom T, Olofsson JI. Allopregnanolone and pregnanolone are produced by the human corpus luteum. Mol Cell Endocrinol 2005;239:37-44.

27. Hammarback S, Backstrom T, MacGibbon Tayler B. Diagnosis of premenstrual tension syndrome: description and evaluation of a procedure for diagnosis and differential diagnosis. J Psychosom Obstet Gynecol 1989;10:25-42.

28. Purdy RH, Moore PH Jr, Rao PN, Hagino N, Yamaguchi T, Schmidt P, Rubinow DR, Morrow AL, Paul SM. Radioimmunoassay of 3cc-hydroxy- 5a-pregnan-20-one in rat and human plasma. Steroids 1990;55:290- 296.

29. Timby E, Balgard M, Nyberg S, Spigset O, Andersson A, Porankiewicz-Asplund J, Purdy RH, Zhu D, Backstrom T, Poromaa IS. Pharmacokinetic and behavioral effects of allopregnanolone in healthy women. Psychopharmacology (Berl) 2005;186:1-11.

30. Turkmen S, Lofgren M, Birzniece V, Backstrom T, Johansson IM. Tolerance development to Morris water maze test impairments induced by acute allopregnanolone. Neuroscience 2006;139:651-659.

31. Zhu D, Birzniece V, Backstrom T, Wahlstrom G. Dynamic aspects of acute tolerance to allopregnanolone evaluated using anaesthesia threshold in male rats. Br J Anaesth 2004;93: 560-567.

32. Backstrom T, Andreen L, Birzniece V, Bjorn I, Johansson IM, Nordenstam-Haghjo M, Nyberg S, Sundstrom-Poromaa I, Wahlstrom G, Wang M, et al. The role of hormones and hormonal treatment in premenstrual syndrome. CNS Drugs 2003;17:325-342.

33. Andreen L, Sundstrom-Poromaa I, Bixo M, Nyberg S, Backstrom T. Allopregnanolone concentration and mood – a bimodal association in postmenopausal women treated with oral progesterone. Psychopharmacology (Berl) 2006;187: 209-221.

34. Carl P, Hogskilde S, Nielsen JW, Sorensen MB, Lindholm M, Karlen B, Backstrom T. Pregnanolone emulsion. A preliminary pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic study of a new intravenous anaesthetic agent. Anaesthesia 1990;45: 189-197.

35. Backstrom T, Andersson A, Andreen L, Birzniece V, Bixo M, Bjorn I, Haage D, Isaksson M, Johansson IM, Lindblad C, et al. Pathogenesis in menstrual cycle-linked CNS disorders. Ann NY Acad Sei 2003;1007:42-53.

36. Lee GP, Loring DW, Meador KJ, Flanigin HF, Brooks BS. Severe behavioral complications following intracarotid sodium amobarbital injection: implications for hemispheric asymmetry of emotion. Neurology 1988;38:1233-1236.

37. Cherek DR, Spiga R, EgIi M. Effects of response requirement and alcohol on human aggressive responding. J Exp Anal Behav 1992;58:577-587.

38. Dougherty DM, Cherek DR, Bennett RH. The effects of alcohol on the aggressive responding of women. J Stud Alcohol 1996;57:178- 186.

39. Beauchamp MH, Ormerod BK, Jhamandas K, Boegman RJ, Beninger R.J. Neurosteroids and reward: allopregnanolone produces a conditioned place aversion in rats. Pharmacol Biochem Behav 2000;67:29-35.

40. Masia SL, Perrine K, Westbrook L, Alper K, Devinsky O. Emotional outbursts and post-traumatic stress disorder during intracarotid amobarbital procedure. Neurology 2000;54: 1691-1693.

41. Ben-Porath DD, Taylor SP. The effects of diazepam (valium) and aggressive disposition on human aggression: an experimental investigation. Addict Behav 2002;27: 167-177.

42. Wenzel RR, Battel T, Eggebrecht H, Philipp T, Erbel R. Central-nervous side effects of midazolam during transesophageal echocardiography. J Am Soc Echocardiogr 2002; 15: 1297-1300.

43. Miczek KA, Fish EW, De Bold JF- Neurosteroids, GABAA receptors, and escalated aggressive behavior. Horm Behav 2003;44:242- 257.

44. Bjorn I, Bixo M, Nojd KS, Collberg P, Nyberg S, Sundstrom- Poromaa I, Backstrom T. The impact of different doses of medroxyprogesterone acetate on mood symptoms in sequential hormonal therapy. Gynecol Endocrinol 2002; 16: 1-8.

45. Andreen L, Bixo M, Nyberg S, Sundstrom-Poromaa I, Backstrom T. Progesterone effects during sequential hormone replacement therapy. Eur J Endocrinol 2003;148: 571-577.

46. Wang M, Hammarback S, Lindhe BA, Backstrom T. Treatment of premenstrual syndrome by spironolactone: a doubleblind, placebo- controlled study. Acta Obstet Gynecol Scand 1995;74:803-808.

47. Freeman EW, Rickels K. Characteristics of placebo responses in medical treatment of premenstrual syndrome. Am J Psychiatry 1999;156:1403-1408.

48. Yonkers KA, Clark RH, Trevedi MH. The psychopharmaco- logical treatment of non major mood disorders. In: Rush AJ, editor. Modern problems in pharmacopsychiatry. Vol 25. Basel: Karger; 1997. pp 146- 166 49. Magos AL, Brincat M, Studd JW. Treatment of the pre- menstrual syndrome by subcutaneous estradiol implants and cyclical oral norethisterone: placebo controlled study. Br Med J (Clin Res Ed) 1986;292:1629-1633.

50. Benedetti F, Amanzio M, Maggi G. Potentiation of placebo analgesia by proglumide. Lancet 1995;346:1231.

51. Sher L. The placebo effect on mood and behavior: the role of the endogenous opioid system. Med Hypotheses 1997;48: 347-349.

SIGRID NYBERG1, TORBJORN BACKSTROM1, ELISABETH ZINGMARK1, ROBERT H. PURDY3, & INGER SUNDSTROM POROMAA2

1 Department of Clinical Science, Obstetrics and Gynecology, Umea University Hospital, Umea, Sweden, 2 Department of Women’s and Children’s Health, University Hospital, Uppsala, Sweden, and 3 ‘Department of Psychiatry, University of California, San Diego, California, USA

(Received 16 August 2006; revised 29 January 2007; accepted 31 January 2007)

Correspondence: S. Nyberg, Department of Clinical Science, Obstetrics and Gynecology, University Hospital of Umea, S-901 85 Umea, Sweden. Tel: 46 90 785 22 77. Fax: 46 90 13 75 40. E-mail: [email protected]

Copyright Taylor & Francis Ltd. May 2007

(c) 2007 Gynecological Endocrinology. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Overweight Kids Face Widespread Stigma

NEW HAVEN, Conn. — Overweight children are stigmatized by their peers as early as age 3 and even face bias from their parents and teachers, giving them a quality of life comparable to people with cancer, a new analysis concludes.

Youngsters who report teasing, rejection, bullying and other types of abuse because of their weight are two to three times more likely to report suicidal thoughts as well as to suffer from other health issues such as high blood pressure and eating disorders, researchers said.

“The stigmatization directed at obese children by their peers, parents, educators and others is pervasive and often unrelenting,” researchers with Yale University and the University of Hawaii at Manatoa wrote in the July issue of Psychological Bulletin.

The paper was based on a review of all research on youth weight bias over the past 40 years, said lead author Rebecca M. Puhl of Yale’s Rudd Center for Food Policy and Obesity.

It comes amid a growing worldwide epidemic of child obesity. By 2010, almost 50 percent of children in North America and 38 percent of children in the European Union will be overweight, the researchers said.

While programs to prevent childhood obesity are growing, more efforts are needed to protect overweight children from abuse, Puhl said.

“The quality of life for kids who are obese is comparable to the quality of life of kids who have cancer,” Puhl said, citing one study. “These kids are facing stigma from everywhere they look in society, whether it’s media, school or at home.”

Even with a growing percentage of overweight people, the stigma shows no signs of subsiding, according to Puhl. She said television and other media continue to reinforce negative stereotypes.

“This is a form of bias that is very socially acceptable,” Puhl said. “It is rarely challenged; it’s often ignored.”

The stigmatization of overweight children has been documented for decades. When children were asked to rank photos of children as friends in a 1961 study, the overweight child was ranked last.

Children as young as 3 are more likely to consider overweight peers to be mean, stupid, ugly and sloppy.

A growing body of research shows that parents and educators are also biased against heavy children. In a 1999 study of 115 middle and high school teachers, 20 percent said they believed obese people are untidy, less likely to succeed and more emotional.

“Perhaps the most surprising source of weight stigma toward youths is parents,” the report says.

Several studies showed that overweight girls got less college financial support from their parents than average weight girls. Other studies showed teasing by parents was common.

“It is possible that parents may take out their frustration, anger and guilt on their overweight child by adopting stigmatizing attitudes and behavior, such as making critical and negative comments toward their child,” the authors wrote, suggesting further research is needed.

Lynn McAfee, 58, of Stowe, Pa., said that as an overweight child she faced troubles on all fronts.

“It was constantly impressed upon me that I wasn’t going to get anywhere in the world if I was fat,” McAfee said. “You hear it so often, it becomes the truth.”

Her mother, who also was overweight, offered to buy her a mink coat when she was 8 to try to get her to lose weight even though her family was poor.

“I felt I was letting everybody down,” she said.

Other children would try to run her down on bikes to see if she would bounce. She had a hard time getting on teams in the playground.

“Teachers did not stand up for me when I was teased,” McAfee said.

A study in 2003 found that obese children had much lower quality of life scores on issues such as health, emotional and social well-being, and school functioning.

“An alarming finding of this research was that obese children had (quality of life) scores comparable with those of children with cancer,” the researchers reported.

Sylvia Rimm, author of “Rescuing the Emotional Lives of Overweight Children,” said her surveys of more than 5,000 middle school children reached similar conclusions.

“The overweight children felt less intelligent,” Rimm said. “They felt less popular. They struggled from early on. They feel they are a different species.”

Parents should emphasize a child’s strengths, she said, and teachers should pair up students for activities instead of letting children pick their partners.

McAfee, who now works for the Council on Size and Weight Discrimination, said her childhood experiences even made her reluctant to see a doctor when she needed one. She recalled one doctor who said she looked like a gorilla and another who gave her painkillers and diet pills for what turned out to be mononucleosis.

“The amount of cruelty I’ve seen in people has changed me forever,” McAfee said.

The Yale-Hawaii research report recommends more research to determine whether negative stereotypes lead to discriminatory behavior, citing evidence that overweight adults face discrimination. It also calls for studying ways to reduce stigma and negative attitudes toward overweight children.

“Weight-based discrimination is as important a problem as racial discrimination or discrimination against children with physical disabilities,” the report concludes. “Remedying it needs to be taken equally seriously…”

Walgreen Co. Names Donald C. Huonker Senior Vice President of Pharmacy Services

Walgreen Co. (NYSE:WAG)(NASDAQ:WAG) today named Donald C. Huonker, 46, senior vice president of Pharmacy Services, and Debra B. Garza, 38, divisional vice president of Government and Community Relations.

“Don’s challenges are considerable as we strive to solidify our leading edge in the fast-changing healthcare field,” said Jeffrey A. Rein, Walgreens Chairman and CEO. “Prescriptions now account for two-thirds of our sales volume. At the same time, we’re focused on evolving from a prescription filler to a healthcare provider, with such initiatives as our Take Care clinics, in-store immunizations and specialty pharmacy offerings. Don understands this evolution and the role pharmacy can play in it, including our opportunities to control overall healthcare costs.”

Huonker joined Walgreens in 1995 as a management trainee in St. Louis after 16 years with United Parcel Service. He became a store manager in 1996, a district manager in 1998 and a store operations vice president in 2002. He has headed Pharmacy Services since 2005 and was promoted to a corporate vice president last year. He received his B.S. degree from the St. Louis College of Pharmacy in 1984 and an M.B.A. degree from St. Louis Webster University in 1999.

Garza was promoted from director of Government and Community Relations to a divisional vice president.

“Debbie’s impact on Walgreens and how we are perceived by the government leaders who impact our operations is powerful,” said Rein. “Her grasp of both issues and people have opened important doors for our company.”

Garza joined the company in 1984 and over the years worked as a pharmacy technician, pharmacist and pharmacy manager before being promoted to a pharmacy supervisor in 1995. She received her pharmacy degree from the University of Texas at Austin in 1992.

Garza serves on the University of Texas College of Pharmacy Pharmaceutical Foundation Advisory Council and is the chairwoman of the National Association of Chain Drug Stores Policy Council. She is also on the board of directors for the Coalition for Community Pharmacy Action.

Walgreen Co. is the nation’s largest drugstore chain with fiscal 2006 sales of $47.4 billion. The company operates 5,807 stores in 48 states and Puerto Rico, including 77 Happy Harry’s stores in Delaware and surrounding states. Walgreens is expanding its patient-first health care services beyond traditional pharmacy through Walgreens Health Services, its managed care division, and Take Care Health Systems, a wholly-owned subsidiary that manages convenient care clinics inside drugstores. Walgreens Health Services assists pharmacy patients and prescription drug and medical plans through Walgreens Health Initiatives, Inc. (a pharmacy benefits manager), Walgreens Mail Service Inc., Walgreens Home Care Inc., and Walgreens Specialty Pharmacy.

Flexpoint Partners Announces Acquisition of IntegraCare Home Health

CHICAGO, July 11 /PRNewswire/ — Flexpoint Partners, LLC announced today that it has acquired a majority interest in Grapevine, TX-based IntegraCare Home Health. IntegraCare is a leading rural-focused provider of home healthcare services in Texas, currently operating a total of 19 home health agencies throughout the state. The Company has rapidly expanded its operations, doubling its patient census and adding 8 additional clinics since the end of 2004. IntegraCare has been managed by its four founding owners, each of whom has been involved in home healthcare for over 15 years. The founding owners are all retaining equity in the new entity and continuing on in management roles with the Company.

Founded in 1999, IntegraCare primarily offers home nursing services as a Medicare and Texas state Medicaid certified provider. In addition, the company provides Medicare reimbursed routine hospice care out of several of its home health agencies. In total, the Company serves roughly 2,100 patients and has focused its development efforts in rural communities in northern and western Texas.

In response to the transaction, Flexpoint Vice President Perry Ballard commented, “We are excited to partner with existing management and add IntegraCare Home Health to our portfolio. We are impressed with the Company’s solid growth trajectory to date, and believe IntegraCare is well positioned for continued de novo expansion.” Ethan Budin, a Principal at Flexpoint, added, “We are excited about the opportunities available for a strong platform in the heavily fragmented home nursing industry, and look forward to working with management to pursue select M&A opportunities in the future.”

“We are happy to announce this partnership with Flexpoint,” said Mr. Chris Gerard, the Company’s President. “IntegraCare will benefit from Flexpoint’s deep healthcare experience as the Company continues on its strong growth trajectory.”

Flexpoint’s other healthcare services investments include Home Solutions, a provider of specialty home infusion services, and Senior Whole Health, a managed care plan focused on coordinating care for patients eligible for both Medicare and Medicaid.

The Braff Group acted as financial adviser and Garza & Harris, Ltd. and Gordon & Rees, LLP acted as legal counsel to IntegraCare on the transaction. Flexpoint retained Kirkland & Ellis LLP and Epstein Becker & Green, P.C. as legal counsel for this transaction.

About IntegraCare Holdings, Inc.

IntegraCare Holdings, Inc. is a Medicare and Medicaid certified provider of home health services in Texas. The company provides a vast array of home nursing services, including skilled care, rehabilitation (physical therapy, speech therapy, and occupational therapy) and home health aide services to a total of approximately 1,100 Medicare home nursing patients and 900 Medicaid home nursing patients. In addition, IntegraCare provides Medicare reimbursed hospice services to roughly 120 patients. For more information, visit http://www.integracarehh.com/.

About Flexpoint Partners, LLC

Flexpoint Partners, LLC is an equity investment firm focused on the healthcare and financial services industries. Flexpoint seeks to build relationships with executives and companies who look for Flexpoint to be a value-added partner. Flexpoint aims to invest $10 to $100 million of equity in each opportunity. For more information, visit http://www.flexpointpartners.com/.

   Media Contacts   At Flexpoint:                      At IntegraCare:   Ethan Budin    312-327-4535        Chris Gerard       817-310-4999   Perry Ballard  312-327-4539  

Flexpoint Partners, LLC

CONTACT: Ethan Budin, +1-312-327-4535, or Perry Ballard,+1-312-327-4539, both of Flexpoint; or Chris Gerard of IntegraCare,+1-817-310-4999

Web site: http://www.flexpointpartners.com/http://www.integracarehh.com/

Drager Medical Continues Innovation of Anesthesia Information Management System Performance With Release of Innovian(R) Anesthesia 2.0

Dräger Medical today announced the release of Innovian Anesthesia 2.0. The new release offers system improvements based on extensive customer feedback and includes expanded capability for IT performance in the perioperative suite. It provides additional support for ease of access, enhanced security functions to promote compliance with HIPAA regulations, and additional notification capabilities that increase visibility to data coming from other systems. Innovian 2.0 is the latest example of Dräger’s expertise in developing and supporting IT Solutions at the acute point of care.

Innovian Anesthesia 2.0 is the information backbone that integrates near real-time, life-critical information from patient monitoring, medical therapy devices, and other ancillary information systems. It gives clinicians fast access to patient data which can minimize multiple handoffs and duplication of effort that occurs with paper records. Hospitals that standardize on Dräger Medical solutions for IT, patient monitoring, and therapy devices, have a consistent, harmonized graphical user interface (GUI) across their devices. This simplifies user training and provides a common look and feel.

“The release of Innovian Anesthesia 2.0 demonstrates Dräger’s ongoing commitment to continuous innovation in IT solutions,” says Stefan Dräger, Executive Board Chairman and CEO of Drägerwerk AG, headquartered in Lbeck, Germany. “Innovian is a cornerstone of Dräger’s IT strategy. Innovian Anesthesia 2.0 clearly demonstrates how approaching the perioperative information management system integrated with other health system technology can simultaneously help address cost, quality and safety issues.”

Implementing Innovian Anesthesia across the entire perioperative process impacts charting efficiency by reducing paper records. This allows clinicians to spend more time delivering care while enhancing documentation compliance and expediting reimbursement. Robust data mining capabilities facilitate more aggressive pursuit of quality improvement and cost-containment initiatives. Because Innovian Anesthesia can offer seamless connectivity to medical devices and other XML or HL7 capable hospital software systems, clinicians are able to access vital signs, patient demographics, and lab results quickly and easily. The information is then automatically integrated into the Innovian Anesthesia patient’s electronic record in a secure manner, supporting the clinician in their patient care process.

About Dräger

Drägerwerk AG is an international leader in the medical and safety technology markets with 2006 sales of €1,801.3 million. Founded in 1889, Dräger employs nearly 10,000 people in more than 190 countries, with more than 50 percent outside of Germany. The Dräger Medical division offers products, services and integrated system solutions throughout the patient care process – Emergency Care, Perioperative Care, Critical Care, Perinatal Care and Home Care. The Dräger Safety division’s portfolio covers products and system solutions for holistic hazard management — gas detection, personal and property protection products including a wide variety of services. Dräger’s key customers are from the hospital sector, on the one hand, and industry, mining, fire fighting, municipal utilities, and police, on the other. For more information, visit www.draeger.com.

Midwest Fertility Specialists Celebrate First Birthday of Child Conceived From Eight-Year Old Frozen Embryo

INDIANAPOLIS, July 11 /PRNewswire/ — Today, physicians at Midwest Fertility Specialists are celebrating the first birthday of Jake Matthew Spartz, who was conceived from an eight-year frozen embryo — the oldest frozen embryo transfer in Dr. Robert Colver’s 20 years of experience and the second oldest known within Colver’s medical group, which collectively have 45 years of experience.

After having trouble conceiving a child on their own, Dawn and Cliff Spartz of Noblesville, Ind., first went to Midwest Fertility Specialists in 1997. Eventually, they conceived twin boys, Max and Adam, through in vitro fertilization.

“Years after the twins’ birth, Midwest Fertility reminded us that we still had an embryo that was being stored,” said Dawn. “That made my husband and I realize that we were ready for another child.”

The Spartzs found out they were pregnant a second time on Thanksgiving Day 2005. On July 11, 2006, the couple gave birth to Jake Matthew, after having been frozen from October 23, 1997 to November 10, 2005.

“It was miraculous,” said Dawn on her pregnancy. “I wasn’t really expecting it, because I know your chances are better with a fresh embryo. Also, the process they used to freeze the embryo then is not as advanced as what they use now.”

“These kinds of events were once exceedingly rare. But the rapid rise in pregnancy rates in the last decade is making frozen embryo transfer a more viable option for couples wanting to have a child,” said Colver, whose practice is with the largest single group of reproductive endocrinologists in Indiana. “As of April 2007, our clinical pregnancy rate with frozen embryo transfers [for all ages of women patients] reached 42 percent, more than double the national average 10 years ago.”

About Midwest Fertility Specialists

Founded July 1, 2004, Midwest Fertility Specialists is the largest single group of reproductive endocrinologists in the state of Indiana serving patients in Carmel, Ind., Fort Wayne, Ind., Noblesville, Ind. and Champaign, Ill. Midwest Fertility is a member of IntegraMed America, an exclusive network limited to the highest performing infertility practices in larger metro areas around the United States. Nearly one out of every four IVF procedures in the United States is performed in an IntegraMed practice. For more information, visit http://www.midwestfertility.com/

Midwest Fertility Specialists

CONTACT: Jordan Peel or Ron King of Vanguard Communications,1-877-382-2999, for Midwest Fertility Specialists, or Tessa Delong of MidwestFertility Specialists, +1-317-571-1637

Web site: http://www.midwestfertility.com/

Versant Advantage Partners With CHRISTUS Spohn Health System for Recruitment and Retention of New RNs

Versant Advantage, Inc., developers of the Versant RN Residency™, today announced that CHRISTUS Spohn Health System has selected Versant’s evidence-based, outcome-driven education solution to stabilize their RN workforce. With the integration of the Versant RN Residency, CHRISTUS Spohn plans to improve the retention of new graduate hires, while, simultaneously, standardizing the delivery of quality patient care throughout its six-hospital system.

Like many other healthcare systems, hiring and retaining qualified nurses proved to be a daunting task for CHRISTUS Spohn’s administrative team. In tandem with a national RN turnover rate that averages between 35 and 60 percent within the first year of hire, CHRISTUS Spohn’s combined first and second year turnover rate was over 40 percent. With a rapidly-expanding patient population of more than 600,000 residents from 13 counties, CHRISTUS Spohn sought a long-term solution for attracting and maintaining confident and competent new nurse hires.

“Given that we are a six-campus system, Versant’s integrated approach for onboarding new nurse hires was a critical component of their offering,” noted Cathy Colley, director of education for CHRISTUS Spohn. “Short-term staffing resources simply did not provide us with the assurance that quality measures were maintained consistently throughout our system. In contrast, Versant’s rigorous evaluation system equips each campus with a 360-degree real-time view into each resident’s performance–providing us with the qualitative and quantitative measurements to ensure consistent patient care.”

As part of the Versant RN Residency in adult acute care, graduate RNs complete a rigorous 18-week training program that features ongoing evaluation, Web-facilitated clinical modules and skills labs. Throughout the duration of the program, residents are supported by a network of senior nurses who act as preceptors, mentors and debriefers to further ensure that they are well-equipped to deliver safe patient care. Mastery of critical thinking skills, coordination of care, and time management are among the numerous core competencies that must be met as part of the successful completion of the residency.

“One of our primary goals is to ensure that at the completion of the residency, employers are confident that every resident has the requisite clinical skills to be successful in multiple settings, from 100-bed facilities to multi-campus healthcare systems” said Charles Krozek, president and managing director of Versant Advantage, Inc. “To this end, core components of the residency — from looping to various clinical units throughout the hospital, to nurturing close relationships with seasoned nursing veterans — are designed to facilitate capacity building among the nurse leaders of tomorrow.”

About CHRISTUS Spohn

CHRISTUS Spohn Health System is the region’s largest charity care provider and not-for-profit health care system consisting of six hospital campuses – CHRISTUS Spohn Hospital Corpus Christi (Shoreline, Memorial and South), CHRISTUS Spohn Hospital Alice, CHRISTUS Spohn Hospital Beeville and CHRISTUS Spohn Hospital Kleberg (Kingsville). The health system is consistently ranked as a leading health system in the area and has received national recognition for several pioneering programs, including cardiac care, clinical excellence and oncology. For more than 100 years, CHRISTUS Spohn has been distinguished by its high caliber staff and affiliated physicians, its comprehensive and innovative services, and its long history of responding to the needs of the community it serves. For additional information, please visit: www.christusspohn.org.

About Versant Advantage, Inc.

Established by Childrens Hospital Los Angeles, Versant Advantage, Inc. is a non-profit public benefit corporation developed in response to the severe national shortage of experienced nurses. Designed by nurses for nurses, Versant is a leading provider of integrated, evidence-based and Web-facilitated programs that assist hospitals and healthcare organizations with strategically stabilizing their RN workforce while optimizing financial performance. Versant Voyager™ is the Web-based application that executes Versant’s suite of workforce development applications to track and monitor professional growth. More than 2500 newly graduated registered nursing students from over 35 hospitals nationwide have completed the Versant RN Residency. Versant’s clients include leading healthcare institutions, such as Advocate Illinois Masonic Medical Center, All Children’s Hospital, John Muir Medical Center, Lucile Packard Children’s Hospital, Northridge Hospital Medical Center, Torrance Memorial Medical Center and USC University Hospital. For more information on the Versant RN Residency, please visit: www.versant.org.

myYearbook.Com Launches Video Battles, myMag and a Brand New Design

myYearbook.com, one of the fastest growing social networks on the Internet and the only one started by two high school students, revealed new features and a new layout today–a cleaner, more streamlined design that showcases Video Battles, Match, and myMag.

“It surprises a lot of people, but myYearbook is more popular in the United States than Bebo, Hi5, and Tagged in terms of uniques, according to the May comScore Media Metrix report,” notes Geoff Cook, myYearbook’s CEO and older brother to the company’s teenage founders. “We’ve seen page views increase 500 percent and new friend requests increase 2000 percent since just February of this year. We believe the changes we made today will set the stage for continued rapid growth.”

“Today we launched Video Battles and myMag,” announces Catherine Cook, the 17-year-old co-founder of myYearbook. “We already have tens of thousands of active Battles at any given moment, and myYearbook is already the largest person-to-person Battles site in the United States. Expanding Battles to include Video was only natural. Now our users can battle over ‘Battle of the Bands’ or ‘Best Lip Synch’ or come up with their own categories.”

myMag, meanwhile, is a new activity that transforms every interested member into a budding Internet author. Created by and read by myYearbook users, it’s an online magazine with the slogan “It’s All About You!”

“myMag is the future of teen magazines. You look around and you see teen magazines suspending publication and other titles struggling just to keep the lights on, and you see opportunity,” states Catherine. “One-way media like traditional teen magazines are dying. myMag is the future of teen media–it doesn’t pretend to be a singular authority, but recognizes that the voice of the audience is the only voice that matters.”

An astounding 10,000 new people join myYearbook.com every day and, in the course of a single month, generate more than 300 million page views exploring the site’s unique features including “Match,” which enables them to make new connections online; “Battles,” where members battle for “Best Looking” or “Cutest Couple;””Pimp,” an all-out profile customization tool with all the glitters and animations anyone could ever want; and “myMag,” where young people sound off on issues like anorexia, cliques, relationships, and the fashions and foibles of their favorite celebrities. myYearbook.com’s new, more efficient design will welcome greater numbers of people to the community, and encourage members to invest more time in their online experience.

About myYearbook.com

Reaching 4.6 million unique visitors each month, myYearbook.com is one of the largest U.S. teen-focused media properties on the Internet. Boasting 500 percent growth in page views and members over the last five months, myYearbook has grown from a single high school to more than 3,000,000 members, and is now adding one million new members every three months. Founded by brother-and-sister teen entrepreneur duo Dave and Catherine Cook, myYearbook maintains a laser focus on the teen demographic which has made for enormously successful viral features like Battles, myMag, Pimp, Match, and an original take on video called Video Battles. myYearbook specializes in developing innovative custom advertising opportunities with deep brand integration into the core of the user experience.

Central DuPage Hospital First in Illinois to Offer Proton Beam Therapy

WINFIELD, Ill., July 10 /PRNewswire-USNewswire/ — Central DuPage Hospital (CDH) in Winfield, Ill., announced its intent to enter a joint venture with ProCure Treatment Centers Inc. and Radiation Oncology Consultants, Ltd. to bring the future of cancer treatment to Illinois.

“We will have the capacity to treat up to 1,500 cancer patients a year. Imagine the lives that will be impacted,” said Luke McGuinness, Chief Executive Officer of CDH. “This is the most precise form of radiation treatment available. Patients will have the best treatment, from the best physicians at a Top 100 Hospital in the United States. We’ve worked hard to ensure Central DuPage Hospital is a place where you can focus on getting well.”

Proton therapy will be available on an out-patient basis. It has applications for most solid tumors, including tumors of the head, neck and pelvis, cancers of the eye and prostate. Nearly all U.S. insurance providers cover proton therapy as does the U.S. Medicare program.

Nearly 50,000 people worldwide have received proton therapy at centers in Europe, Asia and the United States. This center will be the eighth in the United States and the first in Illinois.

The Winfield-based center will have four treatment rooms. The Letter of Intent has been filed with the State of Illinois, and pending regulatory approval, patient treatment is expected by 2010.

About ProCure Treatment Centers, Inc.

ProCure Treatment Centers, Inc., based in Bloomington, Ind., was founded in 2005 by Dr. John Cameron, a particle therapy physics pioneer who was pivotal in the development of the Midwest Proton Radiotherapy Institute. ProCure provides management support and a model for the complete design, construction, operation and maintenance of world-class proton therapy centers. Through partnerships with leading radiation oncologists and hospitals, ProCure’s business model reduces the time, effort and cost involved in creating a facility, which allows physicians more time to focus on patient care. ProCure plans to increase the number of centers across the country to make proton therapy affordable and accessible to patients who would benefit from the treatment. For more information visit http://www.procurecenters.com/.

About Radiation Oncology Consultants Limited

Radiation Oncology Consultants Limited (ROCL), with headquarters in Park Ridge, Ill., is one of the largest private practice radiation oncology practices in the Chicago area.

The practice, composed of 12 board certified radiation oncology physicians who provide cancer care to patients at multiple locations, has been an early adopter of leading technologies used in the treatment of cancer. These technologies include: 3-dimensional conformal radiation therapy (3DCRT), intensity modulated radiation therapy (IMRT), Gamma Knife radiosurgery and, soon, proton therapy. For more information, visit http://www.chicagocancer.com/.

About Central DuPage Hospital

Central DuPage Hospital is a nationally recognized 361-bed facility located in Winfield, Illinois, a suburb west of Chicago. It is a leading center for surgical innovations and was one of the first institutions in the nation to offer minimally invasive heart surgery, robotic-assisted surgery, minimally invasive spine surgery with bio-engineered bone protein and was the first Level III Neonatal Intensive Care Unit in DuPage County.

The hospital is an interdependent network of health-care organizations and services, including convenient care centers, occupational health services and a full range of options for senior living, home health and hospice care. For more information or to find a doctor, visit http://www.cdh.org/ or call (630) 933-4CDH.

Central DuPage Hospital

CONTACT: Amy Jo Steinbruecker of Central DuPage Hospital,+1-630-933-5117, [email protected]

Web site: http://www.cdh.org/http://www.chicagocancer.com/http://www.procurecenters.com/

Alberta Girl Found Guilty in Bloody Murders of Parents and Younger Brother

By JAMES STEVENSON

MEDICINE HAT, Alta. (CP) – As Canada’s youngest convicted multiple killer stood weeping in the prisoner’s box, the 12 jurors who found her guilty Monday of murdering her family filed silently past, staring at the ground to avoid her gaze.

The jurors walked out of court in a single line, close enough to touch the 13-year-old girl, after taking little more than three hours to decide her guilt on three counts of first-degree murder in the grisly killings of her mom, dad and eight-year-old brother.

Even her own lawyer, Tim Foster, initially appeared to find it difficult to look at the girl, who was just 12 when the family was slaughtered in their home in the southern Alberta city of Medicine Hat.

But he quickly joined his client in the prisoner’s box to put a comforting arm around her.

Outside of court, Foster said he had no idea how his young client was coping even though she has had continued support from extended family on both sides.

“We’ve been working with our client for the last year and a little bit, and you develop relationships with your client and sometimes people just need a hug.”

In a calculated gamble in the fourth week of the murder trial, Foster had the accused testify in her own defence. She told the court that she was mad at her parents and often talked angrily about killing them and wanting them dead, but never meant any of it.

The defence contended that it was the girl’s much-older boyfriend, 23-year-old Jeremy Steinke, who took matters into his own hands when he showed up that fateful night in April 2006, high on cocaine, revved up by violent movies and armed with two knives.

“In the end, it came down to one thing: did her testimony leave (the jury) with the reasonable doubt?”

“And that was really the only issue in the trial. We basically admitted everything else.”

Earlier in the day, Justice Scott Brooker had given the jury few choices when he delivered their final instructions. They had to find her either guilty of first-or second-degree murder, or innocent altogether. The lesser charge of manslaughter was not an option.

The girl can’t be named under provisions of the Youth Criminal Justice Act.

Outside court, Crown prosecutor Stephanie Cleary said she had not put too much thought into making legal history and had simply focused on the case.

“I truly hope that we have done the right thing here and I think that we have done the right thing by this young person and by the victims,” she said.

“This is the community’s response to this terrible crime and I hope that the verdict gives some comfort to the families of the victims.”

As an offender under 14, the girl faces a maximum sentence of 10 years, with no more than six spent in custody. There is no minimum sentence.

Brooker scheduled the sentencing for Aug. 23 and ordered a pre-sentencing report and psychiatric assessment.

In his charge to the jury, the judge noted that both the Crown and defence agreed that it was Steinke who physically stabbed and slashed the three family members to death.

Steinke has yet to enter a plea, and his trial on the same charges is not expected to start until next year. An adult convicted of first-degree murder faces an automatic life sentence and must serve at least 25 years before becoming eligible for parole.

Cleary argued throughout the trial that the young girl intentionally encouraged and persuaded Steinke to kill her family because they strongly disapproved of her much-older boyfriend.

Cleary also contended that she helped her boyfriend break into the family home by telling him which window was unlocked.

The girl admitted to being upstairs and very near her brother when his throat was slit and even confessed to stabbing him once, but said she did so only under Steinke’s orders.

In Canadian law, an accused can also be found guilty of a crime if they intentionally aided, abetted and counselled another person to commit it.

“Under our law a person may be involved in an illegal act by different ways,” Brooker told the jury.

Brooker also told the jurors that they need not find proof of aiding, abetting and counselling – any one of those acts would warrant a guilty verdict.

“You don’t need to agree on the same basis, but you must all agree the accused is guilty on one basis or another,” Brooker said.

In order to find the girl guilty of first-degree murder, the jury had to be satisfied beyond a reasonable doubt that the attack was planned and deliberate, said the judge.

Some of the relevant evidence that the jury heard over the last four weeks included various “hypothetical conversations” and e-mail chats that the girl had with Steinke musing about how to kill her parents and eight-year-old brother.

There was also a stick-person cartoon found in the Grade 7 student’s school locker that depicted a family of four where the middle-sized figure covers the two larger figures and a small figure with gasoline and smiles as they burn alive. The fourth figure then runs to a vehicle labelled “Jeremy’s truck.”

And there were also prison love letters that the two exchanged after being arrested, including one in which the girl wrote: “If only we ran.”

Timeline in case of 13-year-old girl convicted of murdering her family Some key events leading up to Monday’s conviction of a 13-year-old girl on three counts of first-degree murder in the deaths of her parents and eight-year-old brother: April 23, 2006: Police receive a call after a young boy sees a body through the window of a Medicine Hat house. They find the bodies of a middle-aged couple and their eight-year-old son and ask for the public’s help in finding the missing 12-year-old daughter.

April 24, 2006: RCMP in Leader, Sask., about two hours away from Medicine Hat, arrest the girl and her boyfriend, 23-year-old Jeremy Steinke. Both are charged with three counts of first-degree murder.

April 25, 2006: Steinke and the girl are returned to Medicine Hat, where they are remanded into custody after appearing in court.

May 1, 2006: The girl is ordered transferred to a Calgary detention facility so she can attend school.

May 4, 2006: Police charge Kacy Lancaster, 19, with being an accessory to murder after the fact. They allege she destroyed evidence, gave a false alibi and drove the two suspects out of the province.

June 28, 2006: Court rules the 12-year-old girl does not have to undergo a psychiatric assessment.

July 13, 2006: Steinke is charged with disobeying a court order after the Crown alleges he contacted somebody he wasn’t supposed to.

July 24, 2006: The girl pleads not guilty and opts for trial by judge alone.

Jan. 16, 2007: The girl applies to be tried by jury instead.

Mar. 1, 2007: The girl waives her preliminary hearing and a trial date of June 4 is set.

Mar. 7, 2007: A 16-year-old girl is charged with being an accessory to murder in the deaths.

Mar. 27, 2007: Steinke’s preliminary hearing begins, but ends in less than a day after lawyers agree the rest of the facts can wait until trial. A date for his trial has not yet been set and he has not entered a plea.

June 4, 2007: The girl’s trial begins.

June 29, 2007: The jury is shown jailhouse letters between the girl and Steinke in which he proposes marriage and she accepts.

July 3-4, 2007: The girl takes the stand in her own defence, arguing that she considered discussions with Steinke about killing her parents to be “hypothetical.” She says she stabbed her brother once, because she was scared of Steinke after he killed her parents, but couldn’t strike the fatal blow.

July 9, 2007: After deliberating for a little more than three hours, a seven-man, five-woman jury finds the girl guilty of first-degree murder on all three counts.

Indian Steel Industry: Political, Economic, Social and Technological Aspects

Research and Markets(http://www.researchandmarkets.com/reports/c62017) has announced the addition of “Indian Steel Industry — PEST Framework Analysis” to their offering.

The Indian steel industry comprises of the producers of finished steel, semi-finished steel, stainless steel and pig iron. Indian steel industry, having participation from both public sector and private sector enterprises, is one of the fastest growing markets for steel and is also increasingly looking towards exports as driving the growth of the industry.

This report analyzes the Indian Steel Industry in a PEST Framework Analysis. A PEST analysis is concerned with the environmental influences on a business. The acronym stands for the Political, Economic, Social and Technological issues that could affect the strategic development of a business. Identifying PEST influences is a useful way of summarizing the external environment in which a business operates.

Topics Covered:

-Introduction to the Industry

-Industry Definition

-Industry Profile

-Future Outlook

-PEST Framework Analysis

-Political Aspects

-Economic Aspects

-Social Aspects

-Technological Aspects

For more information visit http://www.researchandmarkets.com/reports/c62017.

Senior Whole Health Appoints Carissa Neubig, Executive Director

Carissa Neubig, the former chief operating officer of Gaylord Hospital in Wallingford, Conn., has been tapped as executive director of Senior Whole Health (SWH), a Medicare Advantage Special Needs Plan serving Medicare/ Medicaid beneficiaries in New Haven, Hartford and Middlesex counties. SWH, an emerging national company with expansion plans underway in Connecticut, facilitates coordinated, integrated care planning for each member through the use of a care management model.

“Carissa Neubig’s longstanding ties to Connecticut healthcare providers and patient communities made her a natural choice to lead SWH in the state,” states John Baackes, CEO of SWH. “She brings to SWH a breadth of experience and an enterprise-wide focus to building innovative and practical solutions that are expected to increase productivity and quality of life for beneficiaries.”

Neubig has worked at virtually every level of healthcare delivery, from her early years as a physical therapist to running operations at one of Connecticut’s most respected hospitals.

At Gaylord Hospital, a 109-bed, long-term acute care hospital also providing outpatient and sleep services, Neubig served as chief operating officer from 1999-2006. She previously worked as the hospital’s vice president of clinical services, providing administrative leadership for clinical operations, satellites, transitional living and Gaylord Farms Rehabilitation Center from 1995-1999. Earlier, she served as supervisor/clinical coordinator for physical therapy, as marketing liaison, and as associate director of marketing.

“This position with SWH is a logical extension of my career at Gaylord Hospital,” says Neubig, who resides in Wallingford. “I look forward to working with local healthcare providers and organizations as they endeavor to meet the profound health care needs of seniors who face the reality of aging with limited resources.”

Neubig earned her MBA degree at the University of New Haven in Connecticut and a B.S. in Physical Therapy from Quinnipiac University in Connecticut. She holds licensure in Physical Therapy in both New York and Connecticut. A current board member of the Wallingford Education Foundation and Quinnipiac Chamber of Commerce, and past board member of the Connecticut Community Providers Association, she was also selected among the New Haven Business Times “20 Noteworthy Women” for 2004.

SWH coordinates Medicare and Medicaid benefits, utilizing a case management model as part of providing integrated care planning for each member.

A nurse case manager and a support staff of community resource coordinators are responsible for overseeing care for members across all locations and levels of care. The SWH model promotes optimized benefits management and care, patient autonomy and members’ ability to live as independently as possible.

About Senior Whole Health

Founded in 2003 and headquartered in Cambridge, MA, Senior Whole Health is a privately-held company offering intensive, integrated case management services for Medicare/Medicaid dual eligibles and Medicare Part D. Senior Whole Health’s Special Needs Plans (SNPs) plans are designed for people who are Medicare & Medicaid eligible and live in the Senior Whole Health service areas. SNPs serve the chronically ill, the institutionalized and Medicare/Medicaid dual eligibles. Visit www.seniorwholehealth.com or call 1.888.749.7268.

Bank of America Hires M&A Banker Dimitri Steinberg, Expands Market Leading Healthcare Franchise

NEW YORK, July 9 /PRNewswire/ — Bank of America today announced that it has expanded its Healthcare Investment Banking M&A team with the addition of managing director Dimitri Steinberg. Steinberg is based in New York and reports to Michael McIvor, Head of Healthcare, Consumer and Retail M&A.

(Logo: http://www.newscom.com/cgi-bin/prnh/20050720/CLW086LOGO-b )

“We are excited to welcome Dimitri to Bank of America,” said McIvor, who also serves as Co-Chair of the firm’s Global M&A Operating Committee. “His extensive knowledge of the healthcare industry and rich M&A background complement our deep bench of existing talent.”

Steinberg comes to Bank of America from HSBC, where he established the firm’s Healthcare M&A investment banking practice. In his role, he oversaw strategic planning, hiring and operations for the group as well as client coverage for large-cap pharmaceutical and select specialty pharmaceutical and medical technology clients. Prior to HSBC, Steinberg spent almost a decade at Lazard Freres, where he specialized in M&A across several industry groups, including Healthcare, Power & Utility, and Technology, Media & Telecommunications.

Bank of America also announced that John Lalis has joined Bank of America as a vice president in Healthcare M&A, reporting to McIvor. Lalis joins from Seaview Securities, a boutique investment bank focused on the life sciences industry, where he was a vice president and partner. He began his investment banking career in the Healthcare Group at Lehman Brothers.

Bank of America continues to be recognized as a top provider of healthcare investment banking and advisory services and in 2006, led the market in announced and completed M&A transactions, according to SDC. Underscoring its leadership in providing strategic and financial advice, the firm acted as a financial advisor to the consortium that purchased hospital operator HCA for approximately $33 billion; to Caremark Rx, Inc., in its $27 billion merger with CVS Corporation; and to Holiday Retirement Corporation in its acquisition by Fortress Investment Group LLC. The Firm was sole financial advisor to Health Management Associates, Inc., on a shareholder value-driven recapitalization that returned approximately $2.4 billion to shareholders.

Bank of America is one of the world’s largest financial institutions, serving individual consumers, small and middle market businesses and large corporations with a full range of banking, investing, asset management and other financial products and services. The company’s Global Corporate and Investment Banking group (GCIB) focuses on companies with annual revenues of more than $2.5 million; middle-market and large corporations; institutional investors; financial products and services. The company’s Global Corporate and Investment Banking group (GCIB) focuses on companies with annual revenues of more than $2.5 million; middle-market and large corporations; institutional investors; financial institutions; and government entities. GCIB provides innovative services in M&A, equity and debt capital raising, lending, trading, risk management, treasury management and research. Bank of America serves clients in 175 countries and has relationships with 98 percent of the U.S. Fortune 500 companies and 80 percent of the Global Fortune 500. Many of the bank’s services to corporate and institutional clients are provided through its U.S. and UK subsidiaries, Banc of America Securities LLC and Banc of America Securities Limited. For additional information, visit http://www.bankofamerica.com/

Photo: http://www.newscom.com/cgi-bin/prnh/20050720/CLW086LOGO-bAP Archive: http://photoarchive.ap.org/PRN Photo Desk, [email protected]

Bank of America

CONTACT: Brandon C. Ashcraft of Banc of America Securities,+1-212-933-2365, [email protected]

Web site: http://www.bankofamerica.com/

University of California San Diego Medical Center Selects MediServe for a Complete Respiratory Care Solution

MediServe has announced an agreement with University of California, San Diego (UCSD) Medical Center to deploy MediServe’s Respiratory Care solution at UCSD Medical Center-Hillcrest in San Diego and at UCSD’s Thornton Hospital in La Jolla, CA. In conjunction with the deployment, UCSD has chosen to switch from the Clinivision Mobile Patient Charting solution to MediServe’s MediLinks® application suite, including its ReportLink™ analytics module, to fully leverage MediServe’s expertise in the clinical and business aspects of respiratory care.

According to Rick Ford, Respiratory Director, UCSD Medical Center, “MediLinks offers the unique functionality to support our environment in which 95% of care is delivered using protocols. As users of a respiratory care information system since 1993, MediLinks will allow UCSD Respiratory Care to achieve even greater gains in capturing therapist workday activities, the deployment of resources across sites, the automation of protocols, regulatory agency compliance, and maximizing the time therapists spend at the bedside.”

Ford continues, “UCSD Respiratory Care is data driven with a focus on performance improvement. ReportLink will provide the mechanism not only to support the operational programs in which the reporting of outcomes is so important, but to also better facilitate the active research programs by UCSD faculty and staff.” Mr. Ford is the chairperson for the management section and benchmarking committee of the American Association for Respiratory Care.

According to MediServe’s Director of Marketing Zach Mortensen, “We are excited to work with UCSD and Rick Ford because of our mutual commitment to improving the quality and efficiency of respiratory care through patient-driven protocols and advanced analytics. Our combined knowledge and experience will benefit the practice of respiratory care well beyond this immediate engagement.”

About UCSD Medical Center

UCSD Medical Center is part of the renowned University of California system, one the of the most respected education and research institutions in the world. Year after year, the prestigious U.S. News & World Report rankings have recognized UCSD for its clinical and research excellence in a wide range of specialties, including cancer care, orthopedics, respiratory care and gynecology. UCSD physicians have also been honored consistently by both “The Best Doctors in America,””America’s Top Doctors” and “San Diego’s Best Doctors.”

About MediServe Information Systems

MediServe, based in Tempe, AZ, combines financial intelligence with clinical expertise to help Respiratory Care facilities improve their bottom line. As consultants and solution providers, MediServe has a documented history of increasing client revenue, reducing risk, and improving medical outcomes.

The Oregonian, Portland, Ore., Rick Bella Column

By Rick Bella, The Oregonian, Portland, Ore.

Jul. 5–First they swore me to secrecy, making me promise I’d never reveal the “undisclosed locations” they took me to. But it was well worth it.

By trading away my right to a few details, I got to see the place where illegal fireworks go to die in Oregon.

For the past couple of years, the Oregon State Fire Marshal’s Office, Oregon State Police, Metropolitan Explosive Disposal Unit and Tualatin Valley Fire & Rescue have hauled most of the illegal fireworks they collect to a special facility for disposal.

“We are the destroyers,” said Karen Eubanks, TVF&R’s spokeswoman. “Almost everything that is gathered by police and firefighters in most of Oregon winds up with us.”

Firefighters lock the items in a big shipping container, which looks like a train car that lost its wheels, and a smaller fireproof shed, until the cache totals several hundred pounds.

Then they load them into a specially built seven-cubic-yard bin made of heat-resistant carbon steel and outfitted with a heavy-gauge mesh lid. They line the bottom of the bin with dry straw, then drop in a wooden pallet and a hot-burning flare wired to a remote detonator.

Then they light the whole thing.

“It’s impressive — and scary,” Assistant Fire Marshal Steve Forster said. “That stuff is somewhat unpredictable.”

Operations technician Jim Barclay said he waits at least a full day before opening the bin.

Oregon law limits fireworks to “safe and sane” items. There are strict limits on the amount of effect-producing chemicals the fireworks can contain and tight parameters on what the fireworks can do.

In short, they can’t explode, fly more than 1 foot into the air or move more than 6 feet along the ground.

That means all those mortars, bottle rockets, skyrockets, helicopters and Roman candles sold in Washington are illegal in Oregon. Same goes for all the firecrackers and wire-core sparklers that Native Americans sell on reservations. It goes without saying that more powerful items barred by federal law — M-80s, cherry bombs, ashcans, silver salutes and homemade explosives — are strictly off-limits.

The laws aren’t arbitrary or capricious. Last year, 283 fireworks-related fires in Oregon caused nearly $2 million in damage, according to State Fire Marshal’s Office figures.

Statistics aren’t compiled for injuries in Oregon. But nationally, according to the national Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, more than 10,000 people receive emergency medical treatment for fireworks-related injuries.

By a stroke of timing, Deputy Fire Marshal Ed Bonollo was bringing a load of illegal fireworks that he picked up from Tualatin Station 34, South Beaverton Station 66 and Rock Creek Station 64. The items were collected by police and firefighters throughout the area.

Bonollo also had a canister of gunpowder used to reload shotgun shells and old road flares that a man had turned in for disposal.

“Some of this illegal stuff was turned in by parents,” Bonollo said. “They say, ‘My kid caused a fire. Enough is enough. Here — take it.’ “

Fire officials said they’d alert me when they planned to destroy a big load of illegal items. But I might have to be blindfolded until just before they wire the detonator and push the button.

Rick Bella: 503-294-5114; [email protected]; 15495 S.W. Sequoia Parkway, Suite 190, Portland, OR 97224

—–

To see more of The Oregonian, or to subscribe the newspaper, go to http://www.oregonian.com.

Copyright (c) 2007, The Oregonian, Portland, Ore.

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

InNexus Appoints Dr. Thomas Kindt, Former National Institute of Health (NIH) Director of Intramural Research, As Chief Scientific Officer, Focuses on Commercialization of DXL(TM)

InNexus Biotechnology Inc. (OTCBB: IXSBF) (TSX VENTURE: IXS), a drug development company commercializing the next generation of monoclonal antibodies based on its Dynamic Cross Linking (DXL™) technology, is proud to announce the appointment of Dr. Thomas Kindt as Chief Scientific Officer (CSO). Dr. Kindt has been a member of InNexus’ Scientific Advisory Board and was most recently Director of Intramural Research and Chief of Laboratory of Immunogenetics at the NIH in Bethesda, Maryland. Dr. Kindt replaces Dr. Kohler who remains a Consultant to the Company.

Jeff Morhet, President and CEO of InNexus said, “This appointment is an important step in communicating the expertise of our team and our mission to commercialize our DXL™ technology. We are focused on driving projects to the FDA for human trials and concentrating our team and activities on drug development with the assistance of our world class Scientific Advisory Board. Later this year, we will publicly share information about our product development program including InNexus’ first pre-clinical stage product candidate for the treatment of cancer.”

Commenting on Dr. Kindt’s appointment, Dr. Kohler said, “It is now time and I look forward to passing the scientific baton to InNexus’ commercial development team. I fully support InNexus’ chief goal of commercializing products based on the DXL™ technology and will continue to serve as a scientific advisor to Mr. Morhet. My best wishes to Jeff, his team and the strategy he has developed for the future of InNexus.”

Dr. Kindt was most recently Director of Intramural Research and Chief of Laboratory of Immunogenetics, NIAID, NIH and spent a year as Visiting Scientist, Analytical Immunochemistry Laboratory at the Institute Pasteur, Paris. Prior to this he was with the Rockefeller University in New York and the City of Hope National Medical Center in Duarte, CA. Dr. Kindt has served on a number of Advisory Boards and Committees including those of the Institute Pasteur, Tunis, Tunisia; Hematech LLC, Massachusetts; Institute for Medical Sciences, University of Tokyo; REDI Center, Singapore; NIH Facilities Working Group and Blue Ribbon Panel on Bioterrorism and implications for biomedical research. He has authored and co-authored 225 publications, two books and three patents; currently he is an active biomedical consultant, immunology textbook author and adjunct professor at the University of New Mexico’s Department of Biology.

About InNexus

InNexus is a drug development company commercializing the next generation of monoclonal antibodies based on its Dynamic Cross Linking (DXL™) technology, which improves the potency of existing antibody products while opening new markets and disease applications. DXL™ antibodies utilize unique, novel and patented methods and technologies of InNexus.

InNexus is headquartered in British Columbia with principal management based in Scottsdale, Arizona, on the campus of The Mayo Clinic and has its own in–house developmental facilities. These development facilities provide validation of protein and peptide discoveries, enabling InNexus (and its strategic partners) to advance novel drug therapeutics and diagnostics. To learn more about InNexus, please visit www.ixsbio.com.

The TSX Venture Exchange has not reviewed and does not accept responsibility for the adequacy or accuracy of this news release. This news release may contain assumptions, estimates, and other forward–looking statements that involve inherent risks and uncertainties and are subject to factors, many of which are beyond the Company’s control, that may cause actual results or performance to differ materially from those currently anticipated in such statements.

Sutter Regional Medical Foundation Opens New After Hours Clinic in Fairfield

FAIRFIELD, Calif., July 5 /PRNewswire/ — Sutter Regional Medical Foundation has opened a new modern and convenient after-hours clinic, located at 2702 Low Court, Fairfield, Calif. The new facility offers extended afternoon and evening hours for patients with minor illnesses or injuries, or patients who are unable to access their primary care physicians.

The new after-hours clinic serves southern Solano County and is Sutter Regional Medical Foundation’s second in the County. The other SRMF after-hours clinic is located at 770 Mason Street, Vacaville, Calif., and has provided outstanding healthcare services to residents in the northern part of Solano County for more than five years. Both after-hour clinics have physicians and licensed registered nurses available during all hours of operation. Patient care at the clinics is provided on a walk-in basis.

“Our after-hours clinics primarily provide care for patients with acute problems who aren’t able to see their regular doctor in a timely fashion,” says Bryan Holcomb, M.D., Medical Director, after-hours clinics. “For health-related issues, such as bronchitis, asthma attacks, sprains, strains, and broken bones, we can quickly respond to patients’ requirements and, if appropriate, also schedule follow up care with their regular physicians or healthcare providers.”

The new Fairfield after-hours clinic is open Monday through Friday from 2 p.m. to 9 p.m. and may be reached at 707-427-4900. The Vacaville after-hours clinic is open Monday through Friday from 2 p.m. to 9 p.m., plus weekends and holidays from 10 a.m. to 5:30 p.m., and may be reached at 707-454-5800. For more information on Sutter Regional Medical Foundation or to learn more about the after-hours clinics, please visit http://www.srmf.org/.

About Sutter Regional Medical Foundation

Sutter Regional Medical Foundation is a locally governed and managed affiliate of Sutter Health, a not-for-profit network of physicians and hospitals in Northern California. SRMF is affiliated with Solano Regional Medical Group, Solano County’s largest multi-specialty physician practice that has served the community for more than 50 years. SRMF offers professional, high-quality and compassionate care from medical facilities in Vacaville, Vallejo, Fairfield, and Rio Vista, all in California and is fully accredited by the Institute for Medical Quality.

Sutter Health is one of the nation’s leading not-for-profit networks of community-based health care providers, delivering high quality care to more than 100 Northern California communities. Sutter Health has relationships with more than 3,600 physicians and is the regional leader in infant deliveries, neonatology, orthopedics, and pediatric services. Sutter Health maintains medical foundation clinics in 11 Northern California counties.

Sutter Regional Medical Foundation

CONTACT: Ashley Martin of Armada Medical Marketing, +1-303-623-1190,ext. 240, [email protected], for Sutter Regional Medical Foundation

Web site: http://www.suttersolano.org/http://www.srmf.org/

A Primary Care Approach to Functional Abdominal Pain

By Scholl, Jennifer Allen, Patricia Jackson

This article reviews the literature related to functional abdominal pain (FAP) in childhood, including the definition, etiology, contributing factors, clinical diagnosis, therapy and management, and associated long-term health effects. FAP is determined when no specific structural, infectious, inflammatory, or biochemical cause can be found in a child with chronic pain. The presence of abdominal pain as an isolated symptom is more suggestive of FAP, whereas multiple symptoms are more likely to be due to an organic or biochemical condition. While the exact cause of FAP is not completely understood, most researchers and clinicians agree that it is of multi-factorial etiology coupled with an altered brain- gut interaction. Children are highly susceptible to influences around them and can experience pain in response to normal childhood feelings and experiences. Psychological disorders such as anxiety and depression are common in both children with FAP and their parents. Children with FAP tend to have low levels of self- directedness, internalize their feelings and worries, and ruminate over issues they cannot control.

The biopsychosocial model has proved to be a worthwhile framework for children with FAP, as it recognizes the interaction between social and environmental influences, psychological processes, and the state of the body. Interventions that focus on the child’s cognitive processes associated with abdominal pain and the family’s response to the pain have increased efficacy over standard education and reassurance. Providing children and families with techniques to use when experiencing pain decreases alterations in normal daily activities and improves long-term health outcomes.

Chronic abdominal pain is a common complaint among children and adolescents in the primary care setting. While the current prevalence has not been determined, previous data report 2%-4% of all pediatric office visits are for the evaluation of abdominal pain (Starfield, Hoekelman, & Mc Cormick, 1984). Children may experience abdominal pain when they are worried or excited or hungry, but they may also complain when they have pain from an organic disorder or disease. Practitioners must be prudent in their approach, systematic and skilled to differentiate organic disease from benign conditions. A benign or functional disorder is typically determined when no specific structural, infectious, inflammatory, or biochemical cause can be found in a child with chronic pain (Subcommittee on Chronic Abdominal Pain [SCAP], 2005a).

Children with functional abdominal pain (FAP) typically present to the primary care office with peri-umbilical pain that has been occurring for 2 or more months and interfering with participation in normal childhood activities. While mild additional symptoms may be associated, abdominal pain is the most troubling symptom that will explain the child’s withdrawal from normal activities. The presence of abdominal pain as an isolated symptom is more suggestive of FAP, whereas multiple symptoms (listed in Table 1) are more likely to be due to an organic or biochemical condition (Saps & Li, 2006). It is important to recognize, however, that only 3%-8% of children with isolated abdominal pain lasting 3 or more months will have an organic cause for their pain (Kokkonen, Haapalahti, Tikkanen, Karttunen, & Savilahti, 2004; Miele et al., 2004; Schurman et al., 2005; Walker et al., 2004). Table 2 provides a list of differential diagnoses associated with chronic abdominal pain.

Background

The concept of “functional abdominal pain” (FAP) was first defined as “recurrent abdominal pain” (RAP) by John Apley in 1958 (Apley, 1975). Apley set forth criteria for RAP that continues to be used by practitioners today. The diagnostic criteria for RAP states that a child experiencing at least three bouts of abdominal pain within 3 months, with pain severe enough to interfere with normal functioning should be diagnosed with RAP. Apley did not detail the etiology of RAP, however, making it more of a symptom than a diagnosis. As research on RAP has progressed, it has become evident that different types or subgroups of abdominal pain exist.

In 1999 a group of pediatric gastroenterologists developed symptom-based criteria for functional gastrointestinal disorders (FGIDs) in children. The “Rome II criteria,” as it became known (based on the geographic location of the original meetings), clustered common pediatric gastrointestinal disorders based on their symptoms and clinical presentations (Rasquin-Weber et al., 1999). The abdominal pain category included the following diagnoses: functional dyspepsia, irritable bowel syndrome (IBS), abdominal migraine, functional abdominal pain, and aerophagia (Rasquin-Weber et al., 1999). Previously, functional disorders were default diagnoses, made only after the physical exam, laboratory and radiographic tests were normal. The Rome II criteria enabled clinicians to make functional diagnoses based on specific symptoms, retiring the notion that every possible disorder should first be ruled out before a functional diagnosis could be made. Diagnoses based on specific criteria reassure children and families that their symptoms correspond with a real, but not organic, diagnosis.

Rome II was the first attempt at categorizing FGIDs in children. Its application in the clinical setting has not been without its problems and criticisms. Research studies found 16%-35% of children previously fitting Apley’s RAP criteria did not fit any of the Rome II criteria (Caplan, Walker, & Rasquin, 2005; Schurman et al., 2005; Walker et al., 2004). According to a 2005 survey conducted by the North American Society of Pediatric Gastroenterology, Hepatology, and Nutrition (NASPGHN) and the American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP), pediatric practitioners were unaware of the Rome II criteria for diagnosing FGIDs and misused terms related to chronic abdominal pain (SCAP, 2005a). Even 6 years after release, its clinical use and application was poor.

In 2006 the Rome committee met again to update the FGID categories and improve their clinical applicability. The criticisms and problems met with the Rome II criteria were addressed, resulting in a new and improved document, “Rome III” (see Table 3 for complete diagnostic criteria). The Rome III abdominal pain category continues to include functional dyspepsia, irritable bowel syndrome, abdominal migraine, and FAP, but now also includes a new diagnosis, “functional abdominal pain syndrome” (FAPS) (Rasquin et al., 2006). Children with FAP may experience episodic abdominal pain that does not interfere with their daily activities, while children with FAPS have a loss in daily functioning and additional somatic symptoms like headache, limb pain, and sleep disturbances (Rasquin et al., 2006). The Rome III criteria recognize the wide spectrum of children who present with functional, chronic abdominal pain by including both FAP and FAPS.

Prevalence

FAP is most commonly experienced by children between the ages of 8-15 years with the most common age of onset being 9 1/2 years (Campo, Bridge, et al., 2004; Huang, Palmer, & Forbes, 2000; Walker et al., 2004). It is uncommon under the age of 4 years (Saps & Li, 2006). The occurrence is slightly higher among females, with the female-tomale ratio increasing with age (Campo, Comer, Jansen McWilliams, Gardner, & Kelleher, 2002; Clouse et al., 2006; Crushell et al., 2003; Huang et al., 2000; Uc, Hyman, & Walker, 2006; Walker, Smith, Garber, & Claar, 2006). FAP may be more common in children from single-parent families (Campo, Bridge, et al., 2004; Uc et al., 2006), low socioeconomic status (Boey & Goh, 2001; Walker, Garber, & Greene, 1993), and low parental academic attainment (Boey & Goh, 2001; Campo et al., 2002; Perquin et al., 2000). However, these familial characteristics are not consistent throughout the research literature (Huang et al., 2000; Kaminsky, Robertson, & Dewey, 2006; Logan & Scharff, 2005; Malarty et al., 2005; Uc et al., 2006). Research on FAP has primarily included Caucasian children, but the occurrence of FAP in African American children has recently been identified (Uc et al., 2006; White & Farrell, 2006). Differences in race and ethnicity have not been well studied, although, it is clear that FAP is a global health problem (SCAP, 2005b).

Etiology

While the exact cause of FAP is not completely understood, most researchers and clinicians agree that it is of multi-factorial etiology coupled with an altered brain-gut interaction (Clouse et al., 2006; Drossman, 2006; Saps & Li, 2006). Children are highly susceptible to influences around them and can experience pain in response to these influences. Stress from school (Boey & Goh, 2001; Fekkes, Pijpers, & Verloove-Vanhorick, 2004; Greco, Freeman, & Dufton, 2006) and home (Boey & Goh, 2001; Levy et al., 2006; Logan & Scharff, 2005) increase the incidence of FAP. Even good stress, like anticipation and excitement about a birthday party or a dance recital, can exacerbate FAP symptoms.

The brain-gut connection suggests that children with FAP have differences in their central and enteric nervous systems, which cause bowel hyper-reactivity to stimuli, and results in abdominal pain (Jones, Dilley, Drossman, & Crowell, 2006). Physiologic stimuli (bowel motility, intestinal gas, hormonal changes), psychological stimuli (family dysfunction, anxiety, excitement), or other stressful stimuli (normal inflammatory processes) that would not normally cause pain can produce exaggerated symptoms in children with an altered brain-gut connection (SCAP, 2005a). In comparison to both healthy children and those with chronic disease, children with FAP report a lower pain threshold in response to painful stimuli on surfaces of the body (Duarte, Goulart, & Penna, 2000) and to increased intraluminal pressure using an inflatable balloon (DiLorenzo et al., 2001). Psychological disorders such as anxiety and depression are common in children with FAP (Ball & Weydert, 2003; Campo, Bridge, et al., 2004; Campo, Perel, et al., 2004; Crushell et al., 2003; Dorn et al., 2003; Huang et al., 2000; Kaminsky et al., 2006; Thomsen et al., 2002; White & Farrell, 2006). Children with abdominal pain for 3 months or longer and three or more nonspecific symptoms (headache, dizziness, chest pain, fatigue, back pain, weakness, racing heart) reportedly have a high incidence of depression (Little, Williams, Puzanova, Rudzinski, & Walker, 2007). Psychopathology does not substantiate a functional diagnosis over an organic diagnosis, however, as children with organic disorders reportedly experience anxiety and depression at the same rate as children with FAP (Dorn et al., 2003; Walker et al., 1993).

Children whose parents have functional gastrointestinal disorders, anxiety, depression, somatization, or other pain disorders are more likely to exhibit FAP than children whose parents do not have such disorders (Ball & Weydert, 2003; Huang et al., 2000; Kaminsky et al., 2006; Levy et al., 2004; Logan & Scharff, 2005). The familial influence appears to be a complex interaction between environmental influences (social learning, social support), psychological factors, and an inherited altered brain-gut connection (Levy et al., 2006).

Children with FAP tend to have low levels of self-direct-edness, internalize their feelings and worries, and ruminate over issues they cannot control (Campo, Bridge, et al., 2004). These children engage in passive coping strategies (isolation, catastrophizing, behavioral disengagement) in lieu of adaptive coping strategies (Kaminsky et al., 2006; Lipani & Walker, 2006; Thomsen et al., 2002; Walker et al., 2006) and have difficulty directing their attention away from negative stimuli and pain (Boyer et al., 2006; Thomsen et al., 2002). Because many children with FAP do not activate effective coping mechanisms in the presence of stimulation or threat, they enter into a spiral of stress, worry, pain, rumination about the pain, worsening pain, stress, worry…until it becomes debilitating. In the presence of a psychological diagnosis, such as anxiety, children may experience even greater disability and alteration in their normal daily activities, resulting in functional abdominal pain syndrome (FAPS).

Altered Activities of Daily Living

Functional abdominal pain can lead to significant dysfunction and disability, resulting in school absences (Campo et al., 2002; Crushell et al., 2003; Walker, Claar, & Garber, 2002), withdrawal from social activities (Blanchard, Gurka, & Blackman, 2006; Crushell et al., 2003; Lipani & Walker, 2006; Walker et al., 2002), and disruption in family functioning (Hunfeld et al., 2002; Lipani & Walker, 2006; Logan & Scharff, 2005). Multiple visits to healthcare providers in and of itself can cause a child to miss school and parents to miss work. Children and families experiencing unexplained abdominal pain have also been found to have fear associated with the condition, especially when they suspect a serious disease has been missed by their practitioner (Crushell et al., 2003; van Tilburg & Whitehead, 2003). In general, children and parents report low levels of quality of life in comparison to healthy controls (Youssef, Murphy, Langseder, & Rosh, 2006).

Children with abdominal pain have a high utilization of the health care system as they seek an explanation for and relief from their pain (Campo et al., 2002; Greco et al., 2006; Lindley, Glaser, & Milla, 2005). Children with FAP reportedly visit at least three different health care providers for evaluation of unexplained abdominal pain (Campo et al., 2002; Caplan et al., 2005). In attempt to reach a diagnosis, practitioners may order a series of blood tests, radiological studies, endoscopies, and other invasive procedures. Studies evaluating the standard of practice have found that practitioners often order diagnostic tests and refer to specialists, against their better judgment, at the insistence of parents (Lindley et al., 2005). Unexplained abdominal pain accounts for up to 25% of referrals to tertiary gastroenterol-ogy clinics (Boyle, 1997). National estimates of hospital utilization by children show gastrointestinal disorders, including abdominal pain, as the leading cause of hospitalizations (Guthery, Hutchings, Stat, Dean, & Hoff, 2004).

Children with FAP have been found to have long-term associated health problems into adulthood. Adult irritable bowel syndrome (IBS) was identified as a long-term outcome of FAP over 30 years ago (Christensen & Mortensen, 1975) when data was gathered from adults who had experienced childhood FAP. Twenty years after initial presentation with FAP, 61% of patients experienced symptoms consistent with IBS. More recent studies have also identified the link between childhood FAP and adult IBS, but to a lesser extent; 18%-25% of children developed IBS in adulthood (Blanchard & Scharff, 2002; Jarrett, Heitkemper, Czyzewski, & Shulman, 2003; Walker, Guite, Duke, Barnard, & Greene, 1998). Physiological abnormalities, bowel hyper-reactivity, and psychological issues associated with childhood FAP may persist and worsen into adulthood, resulting in altered bowel movement frequency and/or consistency, associated with IBS (Jarrett et al., 2003).

Just as there is a spectrum of FAP severity, there is also a spectrum of long-term health outcomes. One longitudinal study found adults with a history of FAP were significantly more likely than controls to experience anxiety, hypochon-driasis, social dysfunction, somatization, and were more likely to be taking psychoactive medication (Campo et al., 2001). On the other hand, many children reportedly have complete resolution of their symptoms within months of diagnosis and others within 2-5 years (Mulvaney, Lambert, Garber, & Walker, 2006).

Assessment/Diagnosis

Caring for children with nonspecific, recurring abdominal pain is a challenge. A detailed evidence-based guideline for assessment and diagnosis will provide an organized course for practitioners, children, and families to follow. The biopsy-chosocial model has proved to be a worthwhile framework as it identifies the interaction between social and environmental influences, psychological processes, and the state of the body (Engel, 1977). The pediatric nurse practitioner can evaluate for organic disease while simultaneously identifying significant psychosocial influences by using this model of care throughout the evaluation (Cunningham & Banez, 2006; Levy et al., 2006).

History. The initial evaluation of a child with nonspecific abdominal pain will include a comprehensive history: past medical history, family medical history, psychological issues, and social influences. Any of these systems can trigger, exacerbate, or worsen a child’s abdominal pain. As parental and child reports of pain vary depending on the child’s gender and age, the nurse should talk to the child first and inquire about the symptoms he has been experiencing (Ball & Weydert, 2003; Hunfeld et al., 2002; Mulvaney et al., 2006). Using the “OLD CARTS” pneumonic (Onset, Location, Duration, Character, Aggravating factors, Relieving factors, Timing, Severity) is helpful to assure the pain is being adequately described. During the history, the pediatric nurse practitioner should note the child’s affect and behavior, being sensitive to signs of anxiety or depression.

Next, obtain information from the parent(s) and identify additional symptoms, observations, or concerns. Include questions about specific food intolerance, bowel patterns, sleep disturbances, lifestyle changes, treatments, and level of participation in normal activities. The nurse can help the family identify what specifically worries them and what they think could be causing the pain. This portion of the initial evaluation purposefully includes the child and parent(s) as active participants in the evaluation of abdominal pain, and will provide valuable insight regarding the family dynamics. The nurse practitioner should briefly review the child’s past medical history, current medications, food and drug allergies, growth and development, psychological diagnoses, past social stressors, and any additional care received for abdominal pain.

Psychosocial Assessment

School. The child’s social situation and social comfort can often be determined by asking about the child’s school function. Children with FAP tend to miss a lot of school and other social activities, so the pediatric nurse should inquire about the number of missed days of school in the past month due to abdominal pain (this is a valuable outcome measure). There is a higher incidence of hospital admissions for nonspecific abdominal pain during the academic year than during holiday periods (Williams, Jackson, Lambert, & Johnstone, 1999). Children may worry about a school examination, a school dance, an important sports competition, or an encounter with a peer. For a child who is frequently absent from school, the practitioner should ask specific questions about the child’s school day and outline the daily experience class-by-class. Children who excessively push themselves to achieve high academic standards (Ball & Weydert, 2003), and children who are bullied at school (Boey & Goh, 2001; Fekkes et al., 2004; Greco et al., 2006) have a higher reported incidence of FAP than their unaffected counterparts. In addition, self-imposed isolation from peers may be symptomatic of anxiety or depression (Kaminsky et al., 2006). Negative life events. Children with FAP who experience either major negative life events (personal hospitalization, the hospitalization of a family member, and a change of parental occupation) or minor daily irritants have an increase in the frequency of pain complaints (Boey & Goh, 2001; Walker et al., 2006; White & Farrell, 2006). Daily stressors include anything that is troublesome or unusual to the child (chores, homework, sibling interaction). Children with FAP have not been found to experience negative life events more frequently than other children, but their ability to use effective coping strategies in the face of stress is weak (Boyer et al., 2006; Campo et al., 2002; Walker et al., 2006). Therefore, the pediatric nurse should inquire about significant events, changes in the child’s life, and sources of daily stress. The child should identify daily experiences that make him excited, worried, frustrated, nervous, or scared, and what he does when faced either with the encounter or the anticipation of the encounter.

Abuse. The nurse practitioner should evaluate for physical and sexual abuse throughout the assessment and work-up, as childhood abuse has been related to functional gastrointestinal disorders throughout the lifespan (Levy et al., 2006). The reported rate of sexual, physical, and emotional abuse in individuals with functional gastrointestinal disorders has been reported as high as 30%-56% (Levy et al., 2006).

Family functioning. Family conflict and the presence of parent/ child enmeshment are closely linked to the level of dysfunction associated with abdominal pain (Blanchard et al., 2006; Campo et al., 2002; Kaminsky et al., 2006; Lipani & Walker, 2006; Logan & Scharff, 2005; Walker et al., 1993). In contrast, an adaptive family environment may be protective against loss of daily functioning (Logan & Scharff, 2005). The provider should inquire about how family members respond to the child’s pain complaints and the impact it has on the family functioning. Parental attention to pain complaints through worry, reward, increased attention or interest may encourage associated pain behaviors (Kaminsky et al, 2006; Lipani & Walker, 2006; Logan & Scharff, 2005; Walker et al., 2002).

Family Medical History

The family medical history can give insight into pain disorders, functional and organic gastrointestinal disorders, and psychological conditions that run in the family. The nurse practitioner should discuss the role of family medical history openly, being especially sensitive to psychological conditions that parents may be reluctant to share. Children whose parents have functional gastrointestinal disorders reportedly have more abdominal pain complaints, school absences, medical office visits, and daily dysfunction than controls (Levy et al., 2006).

Review of Systems

A thorough review of systems should be completed to identify symptoms not previously mentioned. If the child is reporting additional symptoms, the process of evaluation will need to be expanded to include suspected organic conditions. Even if the practitioner suspects FAP, the diagnostic process must be dynamic and flexible.

Physical Examination & Laboratory Assessment

The physical examination begins with the child’s growth chart, assessing for the growth pattern and consistency. Children with alterations in their growth pattern should be closely evaluated for an organic disorder. A head-to-toe assessment of a child with FAP should reveal a remarkably normal examination, with mild, nonspecific, peri-umbilical or slight epigastric abdominal pain upon palpation. The further the pain is away from the umbilicus, the less likely the diagnosis is functional (Apley, 1975). Additional abnormal physical findings may indicate the need to evaluate the child further for organic conditions other than FAP.

To date, there are no studies that have evaluated the usefulness of common laboratory tests to distinguish between functional and organic abdominal pain (SCAP, 2005b). It is reasonable to obtain a few laboratory tests during the initial evaluation of nonspecific abdominal pain. These should include a complete blood count with differential, erythrocyte sedimentation rate, urinalysis and urine culture, stool sample for occult blood, and additional stool studies (ova and parasite, culture) if diarrhea is present (SCAP, 2005b; Saps & Li, 2006). Additional laboratory studies should be carefully considered on the basis of the history and physical examination, but are typically not necessary for FAP diagnosis. Ordering multiple laboratory tests is costly and may encourage ideas of a “mystery disease” lurking in the body. Discussion of the plan of care with the family and child should highlight the possibility that all of the laboratory values may be normal, but they may help guide the practitioner toward a diagnosis.

If the physical examination and laboratory tests are normal, and the child has a psychosocial history associated with FAP, imaging studies may not be necessary. However, if the presentation is not completely clear, an ultrasound of the abdomen and pelvis may be a useful examination. Sonography is usually a cost-effective way to exclude non-intestinal origins of the pain (SCAP, 2005b). However, in the absence of additional symptoms, ultrasound abnormalities have been found in less than 1% of FAP cases (Yip, Ho, Yip, & Chan, 1998). Additional laboratory, radiological, and procedural testing should be utilized with astute judgment, and based on specific clinical symptoms. The strength of a functional diagnosis should be based on positive findings, not on a series of negative ones.

Treatment/Therapy

Reassurance and education. The “standard” treatment for FAP is reassurance (Blanchard & Scharff, 2002; Cunningham & Banez, 2006). According to this standard, practitioners must reassure families and children that no organic disease is present and that the pain will resolve with time. However, an increased amount of research on FAP is suggesting that reassurance does not meet the needs of the child or the family. The impact of psychological and psychosocial issues, the concept of altered brain-gut connection, and the potential longevity of FAP make reassurance only one part of treatment and therapy for FAP.

Educating parents and children about FAP is essential. Families must understand the diagnosis before they accept it and participate in the plan of care. Functional diagnoses do not fit into a simple pathophysiologic model, which may be troubling or confusing for families. Children whose parents accept the biopsychosocial approach to care are reportedly more likely to have symptom improvement and/ or resolution (Claar & Walker, 1999; Crushell et al., 2003; Levy et al., 2006). It is important to resolve any misconceptions that the child is faking his pain and the pain is “all in his head.” Comparing the child’s abdominal pain to a headache may help parents understand that the child can experience pain in the absence of abnormal laboratory and/or physical findings (Saps & Li, 2006). Initially, parents and children should be instructed to use daily diaries to record the pain experiences, in an attempt to connect the abdominal pain with associated circumstances (Ball, Shapiro, Monheim, & Weydert, 2003; Cunningham & Banez, 2006; Drossman, 2006).

Parental training. Parents play an important role in the FAP treatment plan and must accept this responsibility for successful outcomes. Nurse practitioners must educate parents about FAP, including instruction on responding to pain complaints and behaviors. Parents who reinforce well behaviors with social attention (praise) and token rewards (stickers or points on a chart), ignore nonverbal pain behaviors, and promote distracting activities reportedly have children with fewer pain reports over time (Claar & Walker, 1999; Crushell et al., 2003; Sanders et al., 1989; Sanders, Shepherd, Cleghorn, & Woolford, 1994). Parents should also be instructed on the concept of social learning and the effect their own symptom behaviors can have on their children.

Parental beliefs regarding FAP affect symptoms and long-term outcomes for children. Parents who deny the possible connection between psychological factors and FAP have children with prolonged abdominal pain symptoms, whereas parents who identify the connection are more likely to have children with resolved symptoms (Crushell et al., 2003). Only about one-half of mothers interviewed by Claar and Walker (1999) endorsed both psychological and physical factors as important influences on their child’s FAP. Regularly inquiring about psychosocial issues and explaining their correlation to the body’s functioning will help parents identify the connection and allow them to better understand the functional pain pathway.

Diet. Dietary changes have lead to little improvement in FAP, as improvements in pain with dietary changes would most likely indicate an organic etiology for pain. While fiber has been shown to be an effective treatment for irritable bowel syndrome (IBS), its effect on FAP symptoms has not been as promising (Weydert, Ball, & Davis, 2003). Fiber supplementation is a safe and effective bowel maintenance regimen, but should not be relied upon for abdominal pain relief. Children with FAP who implement a lactose-free diet, without proven lactose intolerance, also do not have decreased abdominal pain (Weydert et al., 2003). Eliminating food groups from a child’s diet without an associated diagnosis could potentially impair growth and development.

Pharmacotherapy. There is limited evidence-based knowledge for the use of pharmacological interventions for childhood FAP. To date, few randomized, controlled trials of interventions have been conducted for children with FAP, and evidence of the efficacy of any treatment is lacking (Campo, 2005). Despite the lack of evidence for pharma-cotherapy, a substantial proportion of practitioners report prescribing pharmacological interventions for FAP (Campo, 2005; Huertas-Ceballos, Macarthur, & Logan, 2004). Commonly prescribed therapy includes analgesics, antihistamines, serotonergic agents, anticholinergics, antiemetics, antidepressants, anxiolytics, and antispasmodics (Campo, 2005). While pharmacological interventions are easily implemented and often requested by families, practitioners should prescribe medication with caution. Campo, Perel, et al. (2004) evaluated the efficacy of citalopram (selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor approved for the treatment of depression) in the treatment of FAP in children with comorbid internalizing disorders. In this nonrandomized, non-placebo- controlled clinical trial, abdominal pain and functional status improved with medication use. In the presence of an underlying depressive or anxiety disorder, citalopram may prove to be a useful therapy for FAP. Currently there are warning labels on citalopram instituted by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), due to possible depressive and suicidal tendencies associated with its use in adolescents (FDA, 2004).

Tricyclic antidepressants (TCA) are reportedly prescribed for the treatment of FAP, based on anecdotal evidence only (Campo, 2005). The use of TCAs in children and adolescents, however, has been associated with undesirable side effects and carries an additional risk of sudden death (Varley, 2001).

Famotidine (H-2 receptor antagonist) is useful for functional dyspepsia or epigastric abdominal pain (See, Birnbaum, Schechter, Goldenberg, & Benkov, 2001). Pizotifen (serotonergic agent) has been found to improve abdominal migraine symptoms in school-aged children, but has not been used with FAP (Symon & Russel, 1995). Recently, medications that interrupt serotonergic neurotransmission in the gut have been shown effective in adults with IBS. These medications (alosetron and tegaserod) have not been studied in children and should not be considered for FAP treatment (Campo, 2005). Anticholinergic medications like dicyclomine and hyoscyamine have been used for their antispasmodic properties (Cunningham & Banez, 2006), but have also not been studied in children (Huertas Ceballos et al., 2004; Campo, 2005).

Complementary and alternative medicine. Complementary and alternative medicine (CAM) and herbal supplementations are possible therapies for children with FAP. When conventional medications and therapies are not effective, parents are likely to seek help from an alternative source (Sanders et al., 2003). In a survey given to parents of children with a chronic illness, 64% of respondents had used a least one form of CAM in the child’s treatment (Sanders et al., 2003). The type of interventions varied, but approximately 20% used oral herbal supplementations. Common herbal supplementations used for gastrointestinal upset are camomile, ginger, lemon balm, licorice, and peppermint (Vessey & Rechkemmer, 2001). However, the only randomized, double-blind control study done was conducted on peppermint oil and IBS; 71% of children in the peppermint treatment group reported improved abdominal pain after a 2-week trial (Kline, Kline, DiPalma, & Barbero, 2001). Herbal supplementation should be utilized with caution, since it is not regulated by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and can have potential undesirable side effects in children.

Alternative therapies. Alternative therapies such as relaxation, guided imagery, hypnosis, biofeedback, and self-talk practices are showing promising results with childhood FAP. These interventions provide outlets for children, aiming to teach them effective management strategies for stressful situations, maladaptive or distorted thinking, and pain perception. Guided imagery and relaxation techniques reportedly decrease the frequency of abdominal pain, missed school days, missed social activities, and contacts with primary care office (Ball et al., 2003; Youssef et al., 2004).

Using these techniques, a child is taught the difference between tense and relaxed muscles, and how the imagination can control what the body does and how it feels. Once relaxed, the child imagines the pain as an object or a symbol, describing it in great detail. After the pain has sufficiently been described, the child imagines something to get rid of or destroy the pain, and then they allow the destruction to occur (Ball et al., 2003). Children are encouraged to practice these techniques at home. Long-term improvement in abdominal pain complaints is found with continued use of mind-body skills performed in the home setting (Ball et al., 2003).

Self-hypnosis, a technique similar to muscle relaxation, is linked with improved FAP symptoms and outcomes. Following a session of hypnotherapy instruction, abdominal pain complaints were resolved within 3 weeks in 4 out of 5 children (Anbar, 2001). While research supporting self-hypnosis utilization is limited, it is a relatively easy technique that can be used in the primary care setting. During self-hypnosis a child imagines a relaxing place, relaxes from head to feet, and then chooses a symbol that reminds them of the state of relaxation. When faced with stress or abdominal pain, children can use the symbol to prompt their mind to focus on relaxing the body.

Any activity or practice that provides an outlet of coping for children with FAP has potential treatment efficacy. Primary care providers can teach children basic techniques such as deep- breathing exercises, muscle relaxation, distractive thinking, positive self-talk, self-hypnosis, and imagery. A child may benefit from turning down the lights and listening to soothing music in a comfortable place once daily. A calm, soothing environment uses the brain-gut connection and reduces the stimulation of the autonomic nervous system (Drossman, 2006). In addition, art, dance, and music therapy can be effective interventions for children with pain, depression, or anxiety (Pratt, 2004; Savins, 2002). It is important to develop an individualized plan that best suits the personality and interests of the child and family.

Cognitive behavioral therapy. The treatment option that has received the most attention in recent research is cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT). CBT is a form of psychotherapy that focuses on identifying cognitive processes that underlie maladaptive behaviors or disturbed emotions (Waite, 2006). Through a structured treatment plan, a trained CBT practitioner guides the child to uncover experiences, ideas, feelings, or beliefs (schema) that influence a specific behavior (Freeman, 2006). Once the schema is identified, the practitioner helps the child explore alternative explanations and responsive behaviors that will offset the former behaviors (Freeman, 2006). CBT does not aim to identify why certain behaviors occur, but to learn how thoughts, feelings, and subsequent behaviors interact (Freeman, 2006). CBT is present-oriented, problem- focused, structured, directive, educative, time-limited, and active therapy (Waite, 2006). This therapy can equip children and families with specific tools and techniques to change the thought processes and behaviors that result in abdominal pain and altered daily activities.

The most extensive research to date on CBT and FAP has been conducted by Sanders and colleagues (Sanders et al., 1989, 1994), who evaluated the effectiveness of a cognitive behavioral family intervention. A series of six intervention sessions provided an explanation of FAP and rationale for pain management procedures, training for parents on responsiveness to pain, coping skills and CBT training for children. Parental response techniques were as follows: to reinforce well behavior (attention, praise, rewards, points), offer distracting activities in response to verbal pain complaints, ignore nonverbal pain behaviors, avoid modeling sick role behaviors, and identify the difference between FAP complaints and those requiring further medical attention. Children were taught muscle relaxation, deep-breathing exercises, positive self-talk, distraction, and imagery skills they could use when experiencing pain. The CBT portion focused on teaching children techniques to interrupt distorted or maladaptive thought processes that would result in abdominal pain. When compared with standard pediatric care (reassurance and education), the children undergoing CBT had a higher rate of complete elimination of pain, lower levels of relapse at 6-and-12-month follow-up, and lower levels of disruption in their normal activities.

The effectiveness of family-based CBT sessions versus standard care was also demonstrated by Robins, Smith, Glutting, and Bishop (2005), using a double-blind, randomized study design. Children and families in the treatment group participated in five therapy sessions and homework assignments that aimed to improve their understanding of pain and associated behaviors. Specific goals were set for each session as children learned to “take control” of abdominal pain and parents learned to be active participants in the management of pain. Children and parents in the CBT group reported significantly less child-reported abdominal pain immediately following the intervention and at the 1 year follow-up. Children in the treatment group also had fewer school absences following the training.

CBT practitioners are required to undergo training in administration of the specific therapy, which is not always an option for primary care providers. However, the foundation of the therapy and the constructs that guide it can be borrowed as practitioners care for children in the primary care setting.

Plan of Care

A thorough, unhurried approach will support the development of an effective, individualized plan of care. Practitioners should establish guidelines and expectations early in the therapeutic relationship, so families recognize their important role in the plan of care. Parents should be educated that FAP is not a “disease” for the practitioner to “cure.” Practitioners need to emphasize the collaborative nature of the treatment process to parents and children (Campo & Fritz, 2001). By working together, an effective plan of care can be established, one that will be feasible in the given social and familial environment. The following is a sample treatment plan for FAP that can be implemented after the initial assessment session(s) are completed (see Table 4). It is important to identify children who may require referral to a gastroenterology or psychology specialist throughout the assessment and therapy sessions. Conclusion

FAP is a complex condition to manage in the primary care setting, but with the proper approach it is feasible. Children and their families require a calm practitioner who will obtain a thorough history and openly discuss psychosocial influences and the brain- gut connection. Laboratory specimens, radiological testing, and additional diagnostic procedures should be utilized with astute clinical judgment, and coupled with the notion that the results may be normal.

Educating families about functional gastrointestinal disorders and how to manage FAP symptoms at home is imperative. Parental training, alternative therapies, and cognitive behavioral techniques should be implemented as standard care for children with FAP. Empowering families with these tools will decrease alterations of normal daily activities and improve the long-term health outcomes for children with FAP. By using the provided sample plan of care, practitioners can feel confident in their ability to successfully manage FAP in the primary care setting.

The Primary Care Approaches section focuses on physical and developmental assessment and other topics specific to children and their families. If you are interested in author guidelines and/or assistance, contact Patricia L. Jackson Allen at [email protected].

Table 1. Signs and Symptoms Suggestive of Organic Disorder Associated with Abdominal Pain

History

* Age of onset before 5 years of age

* Localized pain away from umbilicus

* Additional gastrointestinal symptoms-significant vomiting (bloody or bilious emesis), chronic severe diarrhea, blood in stool, rectal bleeding

* Systemic symptoms-fever, weight loss, growth failure

* Extraintestinal symptoms-arthritis, arthralgias, aphthous ulcers, rashes

* Symptom resolution with dietary changes- elimination of lactose, wheat, carbohydrates

* Pain awakening child at night

* Family history of inflammatory bowel disease or peptic ulcer disease

Physical examination

* Abdominal mass or distention

* Hepatosplenomegaly

* Costovertebral angle tenderness

* Tenderness over spine

* Perianal abnormalities-fissures, ulceration, skin tags

* Oral lesions

* Joint swelling, redness

Laboratory

* Anemia

* Elevated erythrocyte sedimentation rate

* Elevated aminotransferases

* Hypoalbuminemia

* Abnormal urinalysis or culture

* Positive stool guaiac

Note: Adapted from Subcommittee on Chronic Abdominal Pain, 2005a; Saps & Li, 2006

Table 2. Differential Diagnoses: Chronic Abdominal Pain

* Abdominal migraine

* Abuse: physical, sexual

* Allergic eosinophilic gastroenteritis

* Anatomic abnormalities: intestinal malrotation, stricture, recurrent intestinal obstruction

* Appendiceal colic

* Carbohydrate malabsorption: lactose, fructose, sorbitol

* Celiac disease

* Constipation/stool retention

* Gastritis

* Gastroesophageal reflux

* Gynecological: dysmenorrhea, ovarian cysts, mittelschmerz, tuboovarian abscess, ovarian/uterine tumor, endometriosis, pelvic inflammatory disease, genital tract obstruction, adhesions, undescended testicle, hernia

* Hepatobiliary: hepatitis, tumor, abscess, cholecystitis, choledochal cyst, gonococcal perihepatitis

* Helicobacter pylori

* Hiatal hernia

* Infectious gastroenteritis: giardia, salmonella, shigella, yersinia enterocolitica, viral

* Inflammatory bowel disease

* Irritable bowel syndrome

* Lead poisoning (or other heavy metals)

* Lymphoma

* Meckel’s diverticulum

* Medication side effect (nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, antibiotics)

* Musculoskeletal disorder: muscle pain, discitis, linea alba hernia

* Pancreatitis

* Somatoform disorder

* Urinary dysfunction: urinary tract infection, hydronephrosis, ureteropelvic junction obstruction, nephrolithiasis

Note: Adapted from Boyle (1997); Dern (1999); Smith (2001).

Table 3. Rome III Criteria: Abdominal Pain Related Functional Gastrointestinal Disorders

Functional Dyspepsia

Must experience ALL of the following symptoms, at least once per week for at least 2 months:

1. Persistent or recurrent pain or discomfort centered in the upper abdomen (above umbilicus)

2. Not relieved by defecation or associated with the onset of a change in stool frequency or form

3. No evidence of an inflammatory anatomic, metabolic, or neoplastic process explains the symptoms

Irritable Bowel Syndrome

Must experience ALL of the following symptoms, at least once per week for at least 2 months:

1. Abdominal discomfort (an uncomfortable sensation not described as pain) or pain associated with 2 or more of the following at least 25% of the time:

a. Improved with defecation

b. Onset associated with a change in frequency of stool

c. Onset associated with a change in form (appearance) of stool

2. No evidence of an inflammatory, anatomic, metabolic, or neoplastic process explains the symptoms

Abdominal Migraine

Must experience ALL of the following symptoms, at least 2 times in the preceding 12 months:

1. Paroxysmal episodes of intense, acute periumbili-cal pain that lasts for 1 hour or more

2. Intervening periods of usual health lasting weeks to months

3. The pain interferes with normal activities

4. The pain is associated with two or more of the following:

a. Anorexia

b. Nausea

c. Vomiting

d. Headache

e. Photophobia

f. Pallor

5. No evidence of an inflammatory, anatomic, metabolic, or neoplastic process explains the symptoms

Functional Abdominal Pain

Must experience ALL of the following symptoms, at least once per week for at least 2 months:

1. Episodic or continuous abdominal pain

2. Insufficient criteria for other functional gastrointestinal disorders

3. No evidence of an inflammatory, anatomic, metabolic, or neoplastic process that explains the symptoms

Functional Abdominal Pain Syndrome

Symptoms occur at least once per week for at least 2 months. Abdominal pain symptoms must comprise 25% of pain complaints, in addition to 1 or more of the following symptoms:

1. Some loss in daily functioning

2. Additional somatic symptoms such as headache, limb pain, or difficulty sleeping

Note: Adapted from Rasquin, DiLorenzo, Forbes, Guiraldes, Hyams, Staiano, & Walker (2006).

Table 4. Plan of Care

Visit 1: Initial Assessment

1. Obtain complete history, physical exam, laboratory tests (as appropriate).

2. Introduce functional gastrointestinal disorders and the role of the brain-gut connection.

3. Instruct family and/or child to keep daily diary of pain, including circumstances surrounding pain complaints.

4. Schedule subsequent visit in 1-2 weeks.

Visit 2: Reassurance & Education

1. Review pain dairy: look for patterns, psychosocial stressors, and associated symptoms.

2. Reassurance and education:

* Review any laboratory or radiological testing performed.

* Reassure that there is no serious or life-threatening disease present in the body. Explain that while the child has real pain, the pain is not associated with actual tissue damage.

* Address any worries or questions the parent or child may have associated with pain experiences.

* Provide an explanation of the biopsychosocial model, addressing the connection between the child’s mind, environment, and body. Discuss inadvertent reinforcement of pain behaviors and how they can contribute to the frequency of pain complaints.

* Discuss the brain-gut connection, addressing the concept of a hyper-reactive bowel in the presence of normal stimuli.

* Discuss family patterns of hyper-reactive bowel symptoms and the role of behavior modeling in symptom patterns in children.

3. Self-regulation skills training

* Introduce self-regulation skills and their role in FAP therapy.

* Use clinical judgment to help child and family select an appropriate method (muscle relaxation, imagery, self-hypnosis, art, dance).

* A combination of methods is often used, depending on the child and the situation.

* Consider tape-recording the sequences as you instruct the child for the first time in the office. The tape should be about 10 minutes long and should be a tool for the child to practice self- regulation techniques at home.

* The session should prompt the child as he practices his self- regulating techniques at home.

* Establish a home practice schedule, including time and place (once per day should be a firm commitment, with an optional second practice per day).

4. Conclude the visit.

* Praise the child for his efforts.

* Review practice recommendation with parents.

* Instruct the child and parent to continue daily pain diaries.

* Set realistic expectations and goals, such as improved quality of life rather than complete pain resolution.

* Schedule subsequent visit in 1-2 weeks.

Visit 3: Self-regulation Skills & Parental Training

1. Review pain diaries, relaxation tape practice, and other clinical information.

* Inquire about new symptoms, stressors, thoughts about FAP and the therapy.

* Inquire about participation in daily activities and school.

2. Review importance of compliance with self-regulation practice at home. Review techniques with child as needed.

* Adjust self-regulation techniques as needed.

* Introduce idea of using self-regulation techniques in presence of pain. 3. Introduce appropriate pain behavior management guidelines for parents.

* Parents should model pain behavior management for own pain symptoms as appropriate.

* Parents should encourage normal activity.

* Express frequent approval for maintaining activity patterns, use tokens or stickers on chart for recognition.

* Advocate daily school attendance or stay in school as the norm.

* Discourage pain behaviors and redirect child’s attention.

* Ignore excessive complaining, pain gestures, and request for special treatment and assistance.

* Dispense medications for symptom relief, as necessary.

* Evaluate whether the consequence of the pain behavior is to avoid or escape from an activity or situation. If so, consider maintaining things as they are or introducing an alternative that has little appeal to the child (lay down in bed).

* Avoid questioning about presence of pain or status of pain.

* Educate school officials and teachers, as appropriate.

* Schedule subsequent visit in 1-2 weeks.

Visits 4 & 5: Cognitive Behavioral Techniques

1. Review pain diaries, relaxation tape practice, and other clinical information.

* Inquire about new symptoms, stressors, thoughts about FAP and the therapy.

* Inquire about parental training, parental symptoms (if appropriate), and associated challenges or questions.

* Inquire about participation in daily activities.

2. Review self-regulation techniques and its effectiveness with pain symptoms.

* Decrease practice sessions as competence is achieved.

3. Introduce cognitive behavioral therapy techniques.

* Discuss the child’s cognitive processes surrounding pain experiences. Ask the child to explain why he thinks he has pain, what is happening in his body, what he thinks the result of pain is, past associations with pain.

* Together with the child, identify a specific thought or idea to change regarding his pain experiences.

* Help the child explore alternative explanations and responsive behaviors.

* Incorporate self-regulation techniques.

* Review the techniques and how the child can utilize them in the presence of pain.

* Role-play a pain scenario. Pain presents…child captures maladaptive thought or idea, thinks of the new alternative explanation for pain…uses self-regulating techniques to support behavioral change.

4. Assign homework for child and parents.

* Continue pain diaries.

* Think of new responses to situations discussed in therapy session.

* Try cognitive behavioral techniques at home.

* Continue to identify sources of pain exacerbation.

* Encourage health promoting behaviors (healthy eating, exercise, socialization)

* Schedule subsequent visit in 1-2 weeks.

Visit 6: Problem Solving

1. Review pain diaries, relaxation tape practice, cognitive behavioral techniques, and other clinical information.

* Inquire about new symptoms, stressors, thoughts about FAP and the therapy.

* Inquire about participation in daily activities and school.

2. Review cognitive behavioral techniques and discuss effectiveness with pain symptoms.

* Identify barriers to compliance with plan of care.

3. Role-play specific scenarios or situations that have exacerbated pain symptoms in past week.

* Problem solve with child and parent, providing guidance for high-risk situations.

4. Child and family should continue with current treatment plan.

* Schedule follow-up appointment 4-6 weeks after the last treatment session.

* Schedule additional follow-up appointments at 3-6 month intervals, as appropriate.

Subsequent visits

1. Review cognitive behavioral techniques.

* Modify techniques as appropriate for child and family.

* Encourage continuation of techniques, even if symptoms have resolved.

2. Review pain behavior management guidelines for parents. Revise as necessary. If indicated, implement formal reward/reinforcement program.

3. Review problem solving techniques.

4. Assist the patient and family in modifying familial or social contributors to pain.

5. Discuss high-risk situations and introduce notion of relapse prevention.

* Role play to prepare child and parents for difficult situations.

Note: Adapted from Boyle (1997); Campo & Fritz (2001); Cunningham & Banez (2006); Drossman (2006).

References

Anbar, D. (2001). Self-hypnosis for the treatment of functional abdominal pain in childhood. Clinical Pediatrics, 40(8), 447-451.

Apley, J. (1975). The child with abdominal pains (2nd ed). London: Blackwell Scientific.

Ball, T., Shapiro, D., Monheim, C., & Weydert, J. (2003). A pilot study of the use of guided imagery for the treatment of recurrent abdominal pain in children. Clinical Pediatrics, 42(6), 527-532.

Ball, T. & Weydert, J. (2003). Methodological challenges to treatment trials for recurrent abdominal pain in children. Archives of Pediatric & Adolescent Medicine, 157, 112-117.

Blanchard, E. & Scharff, L. (2002). Psychosocial aspects of assessment and treatment of irritable bowel syndrome in adults and recurrent abdominal pain in children. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 70(3), 725-738.

Blanchard, L., Gurka, M., & Blackman, J. (2006). Emotional, developmental, & behavioral health of American children and their families: A report from the 2003 National Survey of Children’s Health. Pediatrics, 117(6), e1202-e1211.

Boey, C. & Goh, K. (2001). The significance of life-events as contributing factors in childhood recurrent abdominal pain in an urban community in Malaysia. Journal of Psychosomatic Research, 51, 559-562.

Boyer, M., Compas, B., Stranger, C., Coletti, R., Konik, R., Morrow, S., et al. (2006). Attentional biases to pain & social threat in children with recurrent abdominal pain. Journal of Pediatric Psychology, 31(2), 209-220.

Boyle, J. (1997). Recurrent abdominal pain: An update. Pediatrics in Review, 18(9), 310-320.

Campo, J. (2005). Coping with ignorance: Exploring pharmacologic management for pediatric functional abdominal pain. Journal of Pediatric Gastroenterology & Nutrition, 41(5), 569-574.

Campo, J., Bridge, J., Ehmann, M., Altman, S., Lucas, A., Birmaher, B., et al. (2004). Recurrent abdominal pain, anxiety and depression in primary care. Pediatrics, 113(4), 817-824.

Campo, J., Comer, D., Jansen-McWilliams, L., Gardner, W., & Kelleher, K. (2002). Recurrent pain, emotional distress, & health service use in childhood. The Journal of Pediatrics, 141(1), 76 83.

Campo, J., DiLorenzo, C., Chiappetta, L., Bridge, J., Colborn, K., Gartner, C., et al. (2001). Adult outcomes of pediatric recurrent abdominal pain: Do they just grow out of it? Pediatrics, 108(1), E1.

Campo, J. & Fritz, G. (2001). A management model for pediatric somatization. Psychosomatics, 42(6), 467-476.

Campo, J., Perel, J., Lucas, A., Bridge, J., Ehmann, M., Kalas, C., et al. (2004). Citalopram treatment of pediatric recurrent abdominal pain and comorbid internalizing disorders: An exploratory study. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 43(10), 1234-1242.

Caplan, A., Walker, L., & Rasquin, A. (2005). Validation of the pediatric Rome II criteria for functional gastrointestinal disorders using the questionnaire on pediatric gastrointestinal symptoms. Journal of Pediatric Gastroenterology & Nutrition, 41(3), 305 316.

Christensen, M. & Mortensen, O. (1975). Long-term prognosis in children with recurrent abdominal pain. Archives of Disease in Childhood, 50, 110-114.

Claar, R. & Walker, L. (1999). Maternal attributions for the causes & remedies of their children’s abdominal pain. Journal of Pediatric Psychology, 24(4), 345-354.

Clouse, R., Mayer, E., Aziz, Q., Drossman, D., Dumitrascu, D., Monnikes, H., et al. (2006). Functional abdominal pain syndrome. Gastroenterology, 130(5), 1492-1497.

Crushell, E., Rowland, M., Doherty, M., Gormally, S., Harty. S., Bourke, B., et al. (2003). Importance of parental conceptual model of illness in severe recurrent abdominal pain. Pediatrics, 112(6), 1368-1372.

Cunningham, C. & Banez, G. (2006). Pediatric gastrointestinal disor-ders: Biopsychosocial assessment & treatment. New York: Springer.

Dern, M. (1999). He keeps getting stomachaches, Doctor. What’s wrong? Contemporary Pediatrics, 16(5), 43-51.

DiLorenzo, C., Youssef, N., Sigurdsson, L, Scharff, L., Griffith, J., & Wald, A. (2001). Visceral hyperalgesia in children with functional abdominal pain. Journal of Pediatrics, 139(6), 838-843.

Dorn, L., Campo, J., Thato, S., Dahl, R., Lewin, D., Chandra, R., et al. (2003). Psychological comorbidity & stress reactivity in children & adolescents with recurrent abdominal pain & anxiety disorders. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 42(1), 66-75.

Drossman, D. (2006). The functional gastrointestinal disorders & the Rome III process. Gastroenterology, 130(5), 1377-1390.

Duarte, M., Goulart, E., & Penna, F. (2000). Pressure pain threshold in children with recurrent abdominal pain. Journal of Pediatric Gastroenterology & Nutrition, 31(3), 280-285.

Engel, G. (1977). The need for a new medical model: A challenge for biomedicine. Science, 196(4286), 129-136.

Fekkes, M., Pijpers, F., & Verloove-Vanhorick, P. (2004). Bullying behavior & associations with psychosomatic complaints & depression in victims. The Journal of Pediatrics, 144, 17-22.

Food and Drug Administration. (2004). Citalopram hydrobromide: Consumer information. Retrieved on March 30, 2005 from http:// www.fda.org

Freeman, S. (2006). Cognitive behavioral therapy in advanced practice nursing: An overview. Topics in Advanced Practice Nursing eJournal, 6(3). Retrieved on October 25, 2006 from http:// www.medscape.com/viewarticle/545336

Greco, L., Freeman, K., & Dufton, L. (2006). Overt & relational victimization among children with frequent abdominal pain: Links to social skills, academic functioning, & health service use. Retrieved on July 13, 2006 from Journal of Pediatric Psychology Advance Access http://jpepsy.oxfordjournals.org

Guthery, S., Hutchings, C., Stat, M., Dean, M., & Hoff, C. (2004). National Estimates of Hospital Utilization by Children with Gastrointestinal Disorders: Analysis of the 1997 Kids’ Inpatient Database. The Journal of Pediatrics, 144, 589-594. Huang, R., Palmer, L., & Forbes, D. (2000). Prevalence & pattern of childhood abdominal pain in an Australian general practice. Journal of Pediatrics & Child Health, 36, 349-353.

Huertas-Ceballos, A., Macarthur, C., & Logan S. (2004). Pharmacological interventions for recurrent abdominal pain (RAP) in childhood. Cochrane Database System Review, 4. Retrieved on February 14, 2005 from http://gateway.ut.ovid.com/gw2/ovidweb.cgi

Hunfeld, J., Perquin, C., Hazebroek-Kampschrueur, A., Passchier, J., Suiklekom-Smit, L., & van der Wouden, J. (2002). Physically unexplained chronic pain & its impact on children & their families: The mother’s perception. Psychology and Psychotherapy: Theory and Practice, 75, 251-260.

Jarrett, M., Heitkemper, M., Czyzewski, D., & Shulman, R. (2003). Recurrent abdominal pain in children: Forerunner to adult irritable bowel syndrome? Journal for Specialists in Pediatric Nursing, 8(3), 81-89.

Jones, M., Dilley, J., Drossman, D., & Crowell, M. (2006). Brain- gut connections in functional GI disorders: Anatomic and physiologic relationships. Neurogastroenterology Motility, 18(2), 91 103.

Kaminsky, L., Robertson, M., & Dewey, D. (2006). Psychological correlates of depression in children with recurrent abdominal pain. Retrieved on March 3, 2006 from Journal of Pediatric Psychology Advance Access, http://jpepsy.oxfordjournals.org

Kline, R., Kline, J., DiPalma, J., & Barbero, G. (2001). Enteric coated, pH dependent peppermint oil capsules for the treatment of irritable bowel syndrome in children. Journal of Pediatrics, 138(4), 125-128.

Kokkonen, J., Haapalahti, J., Tikkanen, S., Karttunen, R., & Savilahti, E. (2004). Gastrointestinal complaints and diagnosis in children: A population-based study. Acta Paediatr, 93, 880-886.

Levy, R., Olden, K., Naliboff, B., Bradley, L., Francisconi, C., Drossman, D., et al. (2006). Psycholsocial aspects of the functional gastrointestinal disorders. Gastroenterolgy, 130(5), 1447 1458.

Levy, R., Whitehead, W., Walker, R., Von Korff, M., Feld, A., Garner, M., et al. (2004). Increased somatic complaints & health- care utilization in children: Effects of parental IBS status and parent response to gastrointestinal symptoms. American Journal of Gastroenterology, 99, 2442-2451.

Lindley, K., Glaser, D., & Milla, P. (2005). Consumerism in healthcare can be detrimental to child health: Lessons from children with functional abdominal pain. Archives of Disease in Childhood, 90, 335-337.

Lipani, T. & Walker, L. (2006). Children’s appraisal & coping with pain: Relation to maternal ratings of worry & restriction in family activities. Journal of Pediatric Psychology, 31(7), 667-673.

Little, C., Williams, S., Puzanova, M., Rudzinski, E., & Walker, L. (2007). Multiple somatic symptoms linked to positive screen for depression in pediatric patients with chronic abdominal pain. Journal of Pediatric Gastroenterology & Nutrition, 44(1), 58-62.

Logan, D. & Scharff, L. (2005). Relationships between family and parent characteristics and functional abilities in children with recurrent pain syndromes: An investigation of moderating effects on the pathway from pain to disability. Journal of Pediatric Psychology, 30(8), 698-707.

Malarty, H., Abudayyeh, S., O’Malley, K., Wilsey, M., Fraley, K., Gilger, M., et al. (2005). Development of a multidimensional measure for recurrent abdominal pain in children: Population-based studies in three settings. Pediatrics, 115(2), e210-e215.

Miele, E., Simeone, D., Marino, A., Greco, L., Auricchio, R., Novek, S., et al. (2004). Functional gastrointestinal disorders in children: An Italian prospective survey. Pediatrics, 114(1), 73-78.

Mulvaney, S., Lambert, W., Garber, J., & Walker, L. (2006). Trajectories of symptoms & impairment for pediatric patients with functional abdominal pain: A 5-year longitudinal study. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 45(6), 737- 744.

Perquin, C., Hazebroek-Kamschreur, A., Hunfeld, J., van Suijlekom Smit, L., Passchier, J., & van der Wouden, J. (2000). Chronic pain among children & adolescents: Physician consultation and medication use. The Clinical Journal of Pain, 16(3), 229-235.

Pratt, R. (2004). Art, dance, & music therapy. Physical Medicine & Rehabilitation Clinics of North America, 15(4), 827-841.

Rasquin, A., DiLorenzo, C., Forbes, D., Guiraldes, E., Hyams, J., Staiano, A., et al. (2006). Childhood functional gastrointestinal disorders: Child/Adolescent. Gastroenterolgy, 130(5), 1527 1537.

Rasquin-Weber, A., Hyman, P., Cucchiara, S., Fleisher, D., Hyams, J., Milla, P., et al. (1999). Childhood functional gastrointestinal disorders. Gut, 45(2), 1160-1186.

Robins, P., Smith, S., Glutting, J., & Bishop, C. (2005). A randomized controlled trial of a cognitive-behavioral family intervention for pediatric recurrent abdominal pain. Journal of Pediatric Psychology, 30(5), 397-408.

Sanders, H., Davis, M., Duncan, B., Meaney, J., Haynes, J., & Barton, L. (2003). Use of complementary & alternative medical therapies among children with special health care needs in Southern Arizona. Pediatrics, 111(3), 584-587.

Sanders, M.,

Moderate Hypernatremic Dehydration in Newborn Infants: Retrospective Evaluation of 64 Cases

By Uras, Nurdan Karadag, Ahmet; Dogan, Guzide; Tonbul, Alparslan; Tatli, M Mansur

Abstract Objectives. This study was carried out to assess the incidence, presenting complaints, risk factors, and methods for prevention of hypematremic dehydration among term and near-term breastfeeding infants.

Methods. We retrospectively evaluated term and near-term (>/=35 weeks of gestation) neonates admitted to our neonatology department, during a four-year period with serum sodium concentrations of >/= 146 mEq/L. A detailed maternal and infant history and examination including presenting complaints, risk factors, feeding problems, and weight loss, if present, were registered.

Results. Among 1150 neonates admitted to our unit, 64 (5.6%) had serum sodium concentrations of > 145 mEq/L, in whom 43 of them had sodium concentrations of > 149 mEq/L. The most common presenting complaint was jaundice in 30 patients (48%). Forty-one (95%) of the 43 patients described a more than 7% weight loss and there was a positive correlation between serum sodium and urea and creatinine concentrations, and a negative correlation between serum sodium and glucose concentrations in these patients (p 149 mEq/L and 0.05).

Conclusions. Weight loss in an infant of greater than 7% from birth weight increases the risk of hypernatremia, a weight loss limit that is lower than the previously reported 10%. This indicates possible breastfeeding problems and requires more intensive evaluation of breastfeeding and possible interventions to correct problems and improve milk production and transfer.

Keywords: Newborn, hypematremic dehydration, breastfeeding

Introduction

The benefits of breastfeeding to children are well established and include decreased incidence of a wide variety of acute infections and chronic diseases, as well as improved neurodevelopmental outcomes [1,2]. A serious potential complication of insufficient breastfeeding is severe hypernatremic dehydration [3]. Despite the well-recognized advantages of breastfeeding to both mother and infant, hypernatremic dehydration may occur in the first week of life. Neonatal hypernatremic dehydration results from inadequate transfer of breast milk from mother to infant. Furthermore, poor milk drainage from the breasts results in persistence of high milk sodium concentrations [4]. This may exacerbate neonatal hypernatremia [5]. In the last few years the number of anecdotal reports of hypernatremic dehydration in breastfed infants has increased [6,7]. Moreover, recent retrospective studies indicate an increase in the frequency and severity of this problem; however, its real incidence is not known [8].

The aim of this study was to assess the incidence, presenting complaints and risk factors for hypernatremic dehydration, and the methods of preventing this problem among breastfeeding infants.

Methods

We retrospectively evaluated term neonates admitted between 1 January 2002 and 31 December 2005 to the Neonatal Department of Fatih University Faculty of Medicine with a serum sodium > 145 mEq/ L. Enrollment criteria included neonates younger than 29 days of age with a gestational age of more than 35 weeks who were exclusively breastfed, with normal neonatal adaptation. Exclusion criteria were having a congenital malformation, cerebral injury, prolonged fever, salicylate toxicity, hyperventilation, diabetes insipidus, and excessive salt intake. Detailed maternal and infant history and examination including maternal age, parity, length of pregnancy, breastfeeding history, level of education, modality of delivery, hospital stay, presenting complaints, risk factors, feeding problems, and weight loss, if present, were registered. The serum sodium, urea, bilirubin, and glucose concentrations of the neonate were also recorded. The patients were divided into two groups according to their serum sodium level. Group 1 consisted of patients with serum sodium 149 mEq/L. The patients in groups 1 and 2 were also grouped according to degree of weight loss (=7% or > 7%) from birth weight. Risk factors in both groups were determined.

Statistical analysis

SPSS 11.5 for Windows was used for statistical analysis. Chi- square, Student’s r-test, and Fisher’s exact test were used, with the level of significance set at p

Results

Our unit is a tertiary care center that accepts approximately 300 admissions per year. Between January 2002 and December 2005, 1150 neonates were admitted to our unit; 64 (5.6%) of these had a serum sodium concentration of more than 145 mEq/ L. Demographic data are presented in Table I.

Signs and symptoms on presentation to the hospital are summarized in Table II. The most common presenting symptom was jaundice (41%). In patients presenting with poor oral intake, no clinical or laboratory evidence of infection was present. Presenting signs included jaundice in 30 of the patients (48%), poor oral intake in 20 (31%), fever in 23 (36%), low urine output in three (5%), and lethargy in three (5%) of the patients.

Table I also presents clinical and laboratory data. Forty-three of 64 patients had a serum sodium concentration of > 149 mEq/L (range 150-168 mEq/L). Characteristics of newborns with serum sodium =149 mEq/L (group 1) and with serum sodium > 149 mEq/L (group 2) are presented in Table III. Mean age at admission of group 1 was 3.4 +-1.8 days and of group 2 was 3.5+1.3 days (p > 0.05). Fifteen of 43 patients in group 2 were born vaginally (35%) while 28 were born by cesarean section (65%). No significant relationship was found between the delivery method and hypernatremia. There was a positive correlation between serum sodium concentration and weight loss, serum urea and creatinine concentrations. Hypoglycemia was observed in none of the hypernatremic patients. The patients were also grouped according to weight loss: >7% or =7%. There was no significant difference between symptoms and signs in these groups (p > 0.05). Forty-one of the patients in group 2 (95%) described weight loss of more than 7% (820%). These patients showed a significant relationship with serum sodium, urea and creatinine concentrations (p

Table I. Demographic, clinical and laboratory data of hypematremic neonates (N = 64).

Table II. Presenting signs of hypernatremic neonates (N = 64).

When seasonal occurrence was analyzed, although hypernatremia and weight loss >/=7% were more frequently observed in summer, this was not statistically significant (p = 0.05).

A significant relationship was found between serum bilirubin levels and epidural anesthesia in group 2 (p

Table III. Group 1 and group 2 characteristics.

Discussion

Hypernatremia may be associated with a deficiency in breast milk intake, excessive fluid loss, or excessive sodium intake. Adequate breast milk intake depends on several interrelated stages: normal mammary development (mammogenesis), unimpeded initiation of lactation (lactogenesis), sustained ongoing milk synthesis (galactopoesis), and effective milk removal. Milk removal depends on effective maternal and infant breastfeeding techniques, combined with an intact milk-ejection reflex, and total daily milk intake depends on frequency and duration of feeds and the pattern of breast use [9].

The incidence of hypernatremic dehydration is difficult to ascertain. There are limited studies about hypernatremic dehydration in the neonatal period. Oddie et al. [10] have reported an incidence of 2.5 hypernatremic dehydrations per 10 000 live births. Manganaro et al. [8] found that of 686 neonates referred over a six-month period, 53 of them had a weight loss of > 10% and 19 had a plasma sodium concentration > 149 mmol/L. Michael et al. [5] found that the five-year incidence of breastfeedingassociated hypernatremia among all hospitalized term and near-term neonates was 1.9%. In our study the incidence of hypernatremia with a serum sodium concentration > 145 mEq/L was 5.6% and > 149 mEq/L was 3.7%.

The last policy statement of the American Academy of Pediatrics about breastfeeding and the use of human milk have reported that weight loss in the infant of greater than 7% from birth weight should indicate possible feeding problems and should require more intensive evaluation of breastfeeding [U]. This was the first study that underlies the importance of weight loss greater than 7% in newborns because we found that weight loss greater than 7% was related to higher sodium, urea and creatinine concentrations. According to American Academy of Pediatrics reports, all breastfeeding newborn infants should be evaluated by a pediatrician at 3-5 days of age. In our study, our patients were also examined on the 4th and 5th days. Although they were asymptomatic, hypernatremia was found in nine (14%) of them. This indicates the importance of more intensive evaluation of breastfeeding and weight loss on the 3rd-5th day controls.

As intracellular fluid passes to the extracellular space in hypernatremia, clinical signs of dehydration are usually masked. Clinical findings can be observed in the presence of severe dehydration. As the enterohepatic circulation increases with dehydration, serum bilirubin levels increase [12,13]. The most common complaint in our patients was also jaundice, and half of our patients presented with this symptom. In our study there was no correlation between bilirubin levels and peak serum sodium concentrations. But epidural anesthesia was correlated with serum bilirubin concentrations. There was also a negative correlation between serum bilirubin levels and hospital stay. Neonates who were born with epidural anesthesia and with shorter hospital stays had higher bilirubin levels than the ones born with general anesthesia. These results demonstrated the higher bilirubin levels in neonates with early discharge, as mothers with vaginal delivery and epidural anesthesia stay shorter than the ones with general anesthesia (12- 24 hours vs. 48-72 hours). Manganaro et al. [8] have reported that cesarean delivery and lower maternal education were risk factors for hypernatremic dehydration in neonates. They also demonstrated that a weight loss >10% during the first days of life was an easy and effective method for early identification of dehydration before serious hypernatremia occurred. Erdeve et al. [14] reported cesarean section as a risk factor for hypernatremic dehydration in breastfed infants. Michael et al. [5] found that hypernatremic infants were significantly more likely to be born to primiparous mothers than were infants in the control group. However, in our experience 89% of neonates with a weight loss > 7% had hypernatremia. In addition, we found that neonatal weight monitoring was an adequate parameter showing poor breastfeeding technique. Our observation points to the fact that the commonly used 10% limits of weight loss should be lowered. Also no significant difference was observed in delivery type, parity, maternal education, hospital stay, and anesthesia type between groups 1 and 2. Although hypernatremia and weight loss greater than 7% from birth weight were more common in summer this was not significant.

In conclusion, weight loss in the infant of greater than 7% from birth weight increases the risk of hypernatremia. Although results of our study about birth weight loss being a risk factor for hypernatremia are in concordance with previous results, the weight loss percentage associated with hypernatremia in this study is lower than previously reported limits (7% vs. 10%). Doctors should be aware that weight loss in neonates of less than 10% may also be harmful. Further studies are warranted to evaluate the risk level in larger populations.

References

1. Scariati PD, Grummer-Strawn LM, Fein SB. A longitudinal analysis of infant morbidity and the extent of breastfeeding in the United States. Pediatrics 1997;99:E5.

2. Reynolds A. Breastfeeding and brain development. Pediatr Clin North Am 2001;48:159-171.

3. Neifert MR. Prevention of breastfeeding tragedies. Pediatr Clin North Am 2001;48:273-297.

4. Morton JA. The clinical usefulness of breast milk sodium in the assessment of lactogenesis. Pediatrics 1994;93:802-806.

5. Michael ML, Manole MD, Bogen DL, Ayus JC. Breastfeeding- associated hypernatremia: Are we missing the diagnosis? Pediatrics 2005;! 16:343-347.

6. Smith RG. Severe hypematremic dehydration in a newborn infant. Pediatr Child Health 1998;3:413-^115.

7. Kapkan JA, Siegler RW, Schmunk GA. Fatal hypematremic dehydration in exclusively breastfed newborn infants due to maternal lactation failure. Am J Forensic Med Pathol 1998;19:19-22.

8. Manganaro R, Mami C, Marrone T, Marseglia L, Gemelli M. Incidence of dehydration and hypernatremia in exclusively breast- fed infants. J Pediatr 2001;139:673-675.

9. Livingstone VH, Willis CE, Abdel-Wareth LO, Thiessen P, Lockitch G. Neonatal hypematremic dehydration associated with breast- feeding malnutrition: A retrospective survey. CMAJ 2000; 162:647- 652.

10. Oddie S, Richmond S, Coulthard M. Hypernatraemic dehydration and breast feeding: A population study. Arch Dis Child 2001;85:318- 332.

11. Gartner LM, Morton J, Lawrence RA, Naylor AJ, O’Hare D, Schanler RJ, Eidelman AI. American Academy of Pediatrics section on Breastfeeding. Breastfeeding and the use of human milk. Pediatrics 2005; 115:496-506.

12. Zachariassen G, Juvonen P. Neonatal dehydration (dehydration fever) in newborn infants. Ugeskr Laeger 2002; 164:49304934.

13. Tarcan A, Tiker F, Vatandas NS, Haberal A, Gurakan B. Weight loss and hypernatremia in breast-fed babies: Frequency in neonates with non-hemolytic jaundice. J Paediatr Child Health 2005;41:484- 487.

14. Erdeve O, Atasay B, Arsan S. Hypernatraemic dehydration in breastfed infants: Is caesarean section a risk? Ann Trop Paediatr 2005;25:147-148.

NURDAN URAS, AHMET KARADAG5 GUZIDE DOGAN5 ALPARSLAN TONBUL5 & M. MANSUR TATLI

Department of Pediatrics and Neonatology, Fatih University Faculty of Medicine, Ankara, Turkey

(Received 10 July 2006; revised 18 September 2006; accepted 6 February 2007)

Correspondence: Nurdan Uras, MD, Department of Pediatrics and Neonatology, Fatih University Faculty of Medicine, Hosdere Cad. No. 145, Y. Ayranci, Cankaya 06540, Ankara, Turkey. Tel: +90 312 440 06 06. Fax: +90 312 441 54 98. E-mail: [email protected]

Copyright Taylor & Francis Ltd. Jun 2007

(c) 2007 Journal of Maternal – Fetal & Neonatal Medicine. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Analysis: Electricity Used to Kill Cancer

By ED SUSMAN

U.S. researchers said Monday that focused electric pulses can puncture holes into cancer cells, killing those cells without using extremes of heat or cold that can damage other tissues.

In laboratory experiments, a one-minute test utilizing irreversible electroporation destroyed 92 percent of tumors in mice, said Rafael Davalos, assistant professor of biomedical engineering at Virginia Tech in Blacksburg.

The key to this is that it is relatively simple to perform in places such as community hospitals or in resource-limited setting, Davalos told United Press International.

We have already completed laboratory experiments in the test tube and in animals, he said. We expect to begin human trials with this process within a year.

In the treatment, small, needle-like electrodes are positioned around the tumors and electric micropulses are fired. The electric charges open holes in the cell membranes, some of which do not close and cannot be repaired by the cell. These holes are fatal to the cell.

We cannot distinguish individual cells, said Davalos, so some healthy cells within the field of attack would also be killed. But because the system does not heat up cells or freeze, there is no bystander effect in which cells outside the field are killed, he said. This application creates permanent openings in the pores in the cells of the undesirable tissue. The openings eventually lead to the death of the cells.

We were actually quite surprised to find the effectiveness of the system in our animal experiments, Davalos said. He said the efficiency in killing the cells was unexpected because in some cells the electric pulses do not cause enough damage to fatally injure the cancer cells — especially the cells on the periphery of the target.

The researchers successfully destroyed tissue using the electroporation pulses in the livers of male rats. We did not use any drugs, the cells were destroyed, and the vessel architecture was preserved, Davalos said. He describes his work in the special August issue of Technology in Cancer Research and Treatment.

The research by Davalos flows from previous attempts to use electroporation to temporarily open holes in cancer cells. The electric pulses would then be used to drive chemotherapy drugs into the cells to kill them. Davalos said that his system could also be combined with the drugs to kill more targeted cells.

This seems like an exciting new process to kill cancer cells, said Dr. Douglas Scherr, clinical director of urologic oncology at the Weill Medical School of Cornell University, New York. The key is imaging, especially in treating prostate cancer. The most difficult part of prostate cancer treatment is killing the microscopic cancers in the prostate without damaging healthy tissue or other anatomical structures.

Scherr suggested that the irreversible electroporation would prove more effective in treating tumors such as breast cancer, kidney cancer or brain cancer where the malignancies can be more easily imaged. He said that work at Weill is under way in developing more accurate imaging so that only the tumors would be impacted.

The lack of a bystander effect with the electroporation could prove to be an advantage of that type of system, he told UPI.

Davalos and colleagues are working with the National Institutes of Health to use the irreversible electroporation device in brain cancer patients.

Ruined Runway Reopens

By Steve Ramirez, Las Cruces Sun-News, N.M.

Jun. 29–LAS CRUCES, N.M. — A Las Cruces International Airport runway reopened Thursday after being closed for more than 34 months after a U.S. Air Force cargo plane created ruts on it during a 2004 presidential campaign stop by President Bush.

“This is a really great day for the airport,” said airport manager Lisa Murphy. “It’s been sorely missed by the pilots. The airport is now fully operational again.”

Runway 4-22, one of three at the airport, has been repaired at a cost of $1.25 million. The 7,503-foot runway was closed on Aug. 26, 2004, when a heavily weighted Air Force C-17 cargo plane caused 2-inch ruts on the runway as it backed up moments before departure.

Heat that day softened the runway’s pavement, and city officials claimed the plane was overloaded with equipment and vehicles. The runway was designed to handle weight up to 120,000 pounds, but pilots who regularly use the airport said the runway was not capable of handling such a large plane.

City officials claimed that Air Force pilots and Bush’s campaign were warned before landing that the runway wasn’t capable of handling the plane. But an Air Force spokesman said the pilot received permission to land.

Pilots of smaller planes have been critical of the length of time it has taken to repair the runway, which traverses from northeast to southwest.

Assistant City Manager Robert Garza said inclement weather prevented the runway from opening sooner but added that patience has paid off.

“We have a project that is now essentially brand new,” Garza said.

Jerry Cordova, senior design engineer for the city, agreed.

“It’s what’s called a Super Pave, which fully meets FAA (Federal Aviation Administration) requirements,” Cordova said. “The runway surface consists of a performance-graded asphalt, which means it fits the climate and the primary functions it’s designed for. It’s tailored to meet those needs and should last a long time, 20-plus years with good maintenance.” Because of its configuration, the runway is designated as crosswind runway.

That’s vital for smaller planes, especially during strong spring winds.

“Larger planes, because of their size, are better able to handle crosswinds,” said Doug Newton, general manager of Adventure Aviation, a major airport tenant. “But about 40 percent of air traffic in and out of this airport comes from smaller planes. Reopening this runway is very important.” Newton was the first pilot to take off and land on the new runway, and received applause from the small crowd that gathered for a ribbon-cutting ceremony.

Jo Asprey, owner of Adventure Aviation, said the economic benefits to the city of reopening the runway could be significant.

“In the time we’ve been out here at the airport we’ve gone from selling 100,000 gallons of fuel in a year to 1 1/2 million gallons,” Asprey said.

“Traffic has increased dramatically out here and it’s only going to get better with the runway open again. Las Cruces and aviation are becoming more important, especially for corporate air travel.” The cost of repairing the runway includes a $603,754 settlement the Air Force paid to the city for damages to the runway.

—–

To see more of the Las Cruces Sun-News, or to subscribe to the newspaper, go to http://www.lcsun-news.com.

Copyright (c) 2007, Las Cruces Sun-News, N.M.

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

WINNING WORDS Lack of Anorexia Facilities ‘Scary’

IN REFERENCE to the article “Anorexia patient’s plea for help” (June 24), I totally agree with the comments made by Juliet Williams. I am one of the 13 lucky ones in New Zealand receiving residential care for anorexia nervosa. It scares me that with up to 5% of people suffering from anorexia, we as a country have so few services or treatment facilities. Most hospitals do not have the knowledge or understanding to work with anorexic patients, as I recently experienced after collapsing in relation to anorexia.

I am coming to realise that unless an individual has suffered or is suffering from anorexia, nobody can truly understand the care we need. Collaboration between medical specialists and recovering or recovered anorexics is needed in New Zealand to address the problem. Within the residential care facility I am in, treatment focuses hugely on the medical and physical aspects of the disease but also includes some holistic approaches such as music and art therapy. I know I could not fight this disease alone, despite having family support, and it makes me angry to think that so few people have the opportunity to fight this humiliating, destructive illness.

Megan Horsham

Hutt Valley

(c) 2007 Sunday Star – Times; Wellington, New Zealand. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Oxis Dietary Supplement L-Ergothioneine Provides New Therapeutic Strategy for the Prevention and Treatment of Chronic Inflammatory Diseases

Oxis International Inc (OTCBB: OXIS), a biopharmaceutical company focused on commercializing predictive biomarkers, clinical assays and nutraceutical and therapeutic products, announced today that Dr. Dirk Grndemann of the University of Cologne, Cologne, Germany, found evidence supporting the use of L-Ergothioneine (ERGO) as a nutritional/dietary supplement to treat Chronic Inflammatory Diseases (CIDs), Supplementation of ERGO to correct a dietary deficit could represent a new therapeutic strategy to control inflammation, a hallmark characteristic, as well as an underlying contributor, to virtually every chronic disease, a list that includes rheumatoid arthritis, Crohn’s disease, diabetes, along with major killers such as heart disease and stroke. Oxis recently launched a human and veterinary sales and marketing campaign for ERGO and this scientific validation from the University of Cologne is expected to enhance the Company’s efforts in this area.

ERGO is a unique, naturally occurring anti-oxidant/anti-inflammatory agent that is abundant in most plants and animals. ERGO cannot be synthesized by humans and therefore is available only from dietary sources. Oxis was the first company to develop a patented synthetic process for the manufacture of pure ERGO. The proprietary manufacturing process has been approved in North America, Japan, and Western Europe.

Dr. Dirk Grndemann of the University of Cologne was the first scientist to discover a unique human transport system for ERGO.

The initial paper showing the unique presence in humans of an ERGO transporter was published in the Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, USA, 2005 April 5: 102 (14): 5256-5261. Title: “Discovery of the Ergothioneine Transporter.” Dr. Grndemann’s current study is entitled: “Probing the Substrate Specificity of the Ergothioneine Transporter with Methimazole, Hercynine, and organic Cations.” Biochemical Pharmacology, 74 (2007), 309-316.

“This breakthrough finding shows the association between disease and specific nutritional dietary deficiencies and the potential for early diagnosis, specific nutritional intervention and avoidance of therapeutics with possible toxic side effects,” said Marvin S. Hausman MD, OXIS President and CEO. “The belief that a chronic inflammatory process underlies most diseases including cancer is now becoming well accepted. Moreover, scientists and physicians worldwide are uncovering and validating the therapeutic nutritional value of ERGO, a key OXIS proprietary dietary supplement product. These independent scientific validations will greatly enhance our marketing of ERGO for a broad number of uses.”

CID is an inflammatory response of prolonged duration – weeks, months, or even indefinitely – whose extended time course is provoked by persistence of the causative stimulus to inflammation in the tissue. The inflammatory process inevitably causes tissue damage and is accompanied by simultaneous attempts at healing and repair. The exact nature, extent and time course of chronic inflammation is variable, and depends on a balance between the causative agent and the attempts of the body to remove it.

The July 2007 Scientific American article by Gary Stix emphasizes that “Understanding chronic inflammation, which contributes to heart disease, Alzheimer’s and a variety of other ailments, may be a key to unlocking the mysteries of cancer.” Hence curbing inflammation could prevent a trigger to more serious disease. Dr. Grndemann emphasizes the value of ERGO as a preventive dietary supplement by stating: “supplementation of Ergothioneine (ET) to correct a dietary deficit could provide a new therapeutic strategy for chronic inflammatory diseases.”

About OXIS and BioCheck:

OXIS International, Inc. develops technologies and products to research, diagnose, treat and prevent diseases of oxidative stress associated with damage from free radical and reactive oxygen species and the related increased inflammation that accompanies oxidative stress. OXIS presently holds the rights to three therapeutic classes of compounds in the treatment of oxidative stress, and has focused commercialization programs in clinical cardiovascular markers, including MPO (myeloperoxidase) and GPx (glutathione peroxidase), as well as the super potent antioxidant, Ergothioneine, that is planned to be introduced as an over-the-counter nutraceutical supplement. OXIS’s customers include leading pharmaceutical companies such as Pfizer, Glaxo Smith Kline and Genzyme and universities such as Baylor College of Medicine, University of Minnesota, Virginia School of Technology, distributors and government laboratories. OXIS has acquired a 51% interest in BioCheck, with the option to purchase the remaining 49%.

BioCheck is a provider of high quality enzyme immunoassay research services and products, and a leading provider of immunoassay kits for cardiac and tumor biomarkers, infectious diseases, thyroid function, steroids, and fertility hormones. BioCheck operates a 15,000 square-foot, U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) certified cGMP, and ISO device-manufacturing facility in Foster City, California.

More information about OXIS, BioCheck and their products, services as well as current SEC filings may be obtained by visiting http://www.oxisresearch.com and http://www.biocheckinc.com.

The statements in this press release that are not purely historical are forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933 and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, including, without limitation, statements regarding our expectations, objectives, anticipations, plans, hopes, beliefs, intentions or strategies regarding the future. Factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from the forward-looking statements include risks and uncertainties indicated in the company’s filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission. It is important to note that actual outcomes could differ materially from those in such forward-looking statements.

A Template for Safe and Concise Handovers

By Wilson, Mary Jane

“When information is missed in patient handovers, people die,” Dr. Gail Wolf tells graduate nursing students at the University of Pittsburgh. As the nursing vice-president for the University of Pittsburgh Medical Center (UPMC), a 15-hospital system in western Pennsylvania, Dr. Wolf speaks from experience. She tells graduate students about a patient in his 30s who suffered a vessel nick in the operating room. It was repaired and not reported to the unit nurse after recovery. The patient later became slightly hypertensive and drowsy, tell-tale symptoms but not abnormal after general anesthesia and surgery. He bled internally; unfortunately, by the time his clinical condition presented as acute distress, it was too late to intervene and the patient died (Wolf, 2003). Nurses know their handover reports are important. Most develop a system and even forms for taking report. It’s vital to pass on all important but not superfluous information because timeliness is a vital aspect of their jobs. This is a fine balancing act. The associate risks frequently are unappreciated until there is an adverse event. These events are often determined to be due to miscommunication between providers during a transition in patient care (Simpson, 2005).

Changes

Over the past 20 years, changes in health care have affected reports in various ways. Nursing has become more complex and time- pressed. At the same time, patient acuity has increased dramatically. Communicating nursing care during the patient’s total hospital stay is a difficult task given the context of high patient turnover and time constraints (O’ Connell & Penney, 2001). Simply put, there is more information to give in a shorter time period.

Primary nursing allows a comprehensive view of the patient, which also increases the volume of information that can be reported. Nursing practice has increased skills and attention devoted to physical assessment; nurses focus on a patient in terms of systems. This has evolved to the practice of thoroughly reporting all findings, including the normal data such as “bowel sounds in all four quadrants.” Reporting normal values in every organ system is time intensive and can become rote. Technology has led to more lab results and procedures to report, and acutely ill patients may remain on a medical-surgical unit rather than in ICU. These factors all influence the amount of information which can be provided in shift report.

Changes in the health care environment have encouraged nurses to become more efficient. The time involved in shift handover has been no exception. Reports have evolved from a room full of staff listening to a report on every patient, to oneon- one verbal or taped reports on individual shift assignments. Reports need to include all pertinent information, but reporting every physical assessment finding, every activity, every meal, and every visitor makes reports too lengthy. However, if reporting by exception deteriorates to, “Ms. X is fine, she had a headache, gave her Tylenol(R) at 8 pm and that’s it,” nursing has a problem.

Review of the Literature

Relevant literature related to patient handover was identified using electronic databases (CINAHL, Ovid MEDLINE, AMED, and Psyc- INFO). Key words included handover, shift report, and nursing. The search yielded 17 articles.

Purpose and importance of the shift report. Nursing shift reports enhance the continuity and quality of nursing care by providing information on nursing assessments, and drawing attention to specific nursing interventions and goals for the next shift (Priest & Holmberg, 2000). They are important for ensuring and maintaining continuity and quality of patient care as well as complying with professional standards and legal requirements (Miller, 1998; Thurgood, 1995).

Numerous authors agree that a poor report can jeopardize a patient’s safety (Dowding, 2001; Lally, 1999; Malestic, 2003; Sherlock, 1995). Occurring multiple times each day with each patient in the health care setting, handoffs are prone to errors and omissions that can contribute to negative patient outcomes (Simpson, 2005; Wolf, 2003). High levels of responsibility, accountability, autonomy, and authority accompanied the transition from team to primary nursing reports. Patient reporting is a task that repeatedly tests a nurse’s knowledge skills and communication (O’Connell & Penney, 2001; Thurgood 1995).

Handovers achieve goals beyond communicating patient care. These include debriefing, clarifying information, updating knowledge, and building a sense of team (Lally, 1999; Lamond, 2000; Miller 1998; O’Connell & Penney, 2001). The report process merits further study to maximize its role in information sharing and resource management (Dowding, 2001; Lamond, 2000; Miller, 1998).

Content and mode of the shift report. Reports should support the development of consistent, collaborative nursing interventions across shifts; they should summarize and communicate current info about the patient’s status, needs, treatment plan, and responses or outcomes to treatment (Malestic, 2003; McLaughlin & Bryant, 2004; Simpson, 2005). Reports can follow various models such as “body systems,””head-totoe,” or “reporting by exception.” All report modes should allow face-to-face time to answer questions (McLaughlin & Bryant, 2004).

Nursing reports are given in a variety of ways: verbal, written, taped, or bedside (McLaughlin & Bryant, 2004; Miller, 1998; O’Connell & Penney, 2001). Each one has advantages and disadvantages (Dowding, 2001; Lamond, 2000). Wallum (1995) suggested that nurses use care plans to replace the handoff report; his research indicated that over 60% of nurses studied had not referred to the relevant care plans during their shift.

Using a Report Template

Very few articles addressed the contents of a report, and only one offered a template (Brown- Lazzara, 2004). Concise reporting that minimizes duplication yet avoids missing information is a complex job; tools that simplify and standardize the process help. See Figure 1 for a full-page template for use and replication. A table of usage guidelines for the template is found in Table 1. The critical elements that should be addressed in every report will vary by unit and type of patient, but it is important to agree within professional groups on report format as a time-saving device. Uniform order of information is achieved by following a template in a consistent manner; it simplifies communication for both giver and receiver.

Reporting that follows the trend of charting by exception will be most time effective. Stating every normal assessment finding and listing every lab value is time consuming. It also may prompt the listener to miss important information. Normal findings are pertinent and should be stated when they indicate change, recovery, or response to treatment. If information is missed, it is each nurse’s responsibility to look it up. “I don’t know. The other nurse didn’t tell me,” is not an acceptable answer to a physician or colleague. Technological advances are not a substitute for effective communication in the delivery of safe care (Malestic, 2003).

Research

The report template (see Figure 1) was utilized in a nursing project study at UPMC Shadyside Hospital (Pittsburgh, PA). At Shadyside, reports are taped on a phone system called VoiceCare. It was noted that nurses give report in a variety of ways with varying degrees of completeness. The authors reviewed the issue and learned there was an established set of guidelines for UPMC nurses to use in giving report. The use of a template could incorporate the guidelines to make report an easier process.

Step 1. “Knowledge” of existing guidelines assessed. An informal survey of 63 nurses found that only one knew of and had seen the written guidelines.

Step 2. Assistance enlisted. Four registered nurses from the resource pool at Shadyside volunteered to assist in evaluating the taped nursing reports. Four medical- surgical telemetry units were selected to assess. Each of these units had an average bed capacity of 38.

Step 3. Data collection. Volunteer nurses randomly selected and listened to 262 shift reports from all five shift times (7:00 a.m. – 3:00 p.m., 3:00 – 11:00 p.m., 11:00 p.m. – 7:00 a.m., 7:00 a.m. – 7:00 p.m., and 7:00 p.m. – 7:00 a.m.). These shift reports were compared to established guidelines over a 3-month period.

Step 4. Results. Figure 2 details the recommended information omitted from shift reports to oncoming nurses. The four nurses who collected information made suggestions and revisions to the established guidelines to provide a better process for Shadyside, where each nurse receives a printed Kardex for care on each patient. All agreed that most information on the Kardex, such as the physician’s name, did not need to be stated in the verbal report.

Step 5. Providing a report template. A report template was created and dispersed to nurses on the four medical-surgical units that were evaluated. Each nurse received a letter encouraging him or her to use the template as a guideline for giving shift reports. The unit directors on each unit were provided with copies of the templates to post near the telephones used for taping the VoiceCare reports. They also were given copies of the nursing letter and asked to promote use of the template.

Project Goals:

1. Nurses will utilize the shift report template.

2. Shift reports will include the significant data.

3. Superfluous information will be minimized. 4. Nurses will provide information in a uniform manner.

5. Nurses will find giving and receiving report simpler and streamlined.

6. Patient care and safety will be maximized.

Step 6. Evaluating use of the template. Three of the units in the initial study (named units 2, 4, and 5) were evaluated for a 5- month period beginning 1 month after forms were distributed, with no further intervention other than to answer questions. The other two units (named units 1 and 3) received ongoing encouragement from the unit director, the nursing educators, and the researchers. Fifty random samples were taken from each unit to evaluate the use of the template. See Figure 3 for results; these data differ from the initial information because nurses chose to eliminate the information that came printed on their working Kardex.

Because these reports are taped in a VoiceCare system, the reporter’s name, shift, and date were added to verify that the correct report was heard; mistakes are rare but can occur. In the initial study, 2 of the 262 reports were on a different patient. In the follow up, there also were two taped reports for which the patient data were entered in VoiceCare under the incorrect patient code number.

Discussion

Figure 3 shows a wide variation in results. Recognizing that units 2, 4, and 5 received no intervention beyond the distribution of the template and letter, it may be logical to expect their scores to be lower.

Unit 3 was involved in the initial study and the nurses there had shown a sincere interest in the project. The researchers attended a unit staff meeting then gave ongoing encouragement to utilize the template. The nurses also made recommendations and suggestions specific for their unit. Individual nurses who omitted items or gave superfluous information in report were encouraged to make changes consistent with the template. While this improved the scoring of unit 3, a factor that was likely to lower the scores involved a high use of agency nurses over the 6-month study period. While these agency nurses had access to the templates, visible near every telephone, they all did not receive specific encouragement to use the forms.

Unit 1 was added to the study because a number of nurses saw the template and asked the researcher to provide them with it. They encouraged each other in its use and evaluated each other.

In informal discussions, nurses made the following general paraphrased statements:

* It is hard to change my routine.

* I’m really trying, but I fall back into old patterns when rushed.

* I am already giving good reports and don’t see the need to change.

* This seems like one more burden to already overwhelmed nurses.

* This is a really good idea and will save time.

* Reports are improving in focus and completeness on our floor.

* There is less superfluous information.

* Graduate nurses and nursing students grasp the tool most eagerly.

* The biggest benefit is to the newer nurses.

* Some nurses follow it perfectly.

Conclusions

The critical elements that should be addressed in every report will vary by institution, unit, and type of patient. What is important is that each appropriate subgroup agrees upon a report format to ensure content quality and timeliness, and simplify a complex report communication process.

Recommendations for the Future

The case for a written handover. Historically, handovers in hospital settings involved a nurse from the off-going shift reporting to the entire oncoming team of nurses, students, and nursing assistants. Over the last 20 years, reports have changed based on practice and time constraints. The handover process is meant to promote continuity and efficiency, but there are inherent vulnerabilities due to human factors (Simpson, 2005).

The report tool could be the nurse’s documentation record, which would be handed to the nurse coming on. This document should contain the assessment, plan of care, relevant test findings, and nurse’s notes, including occurrences, treatments, as-needed medications, and patient responses. The nurse taking report would no longer need to write, but would review the document with or without a taped or verbal report. Then he or she would utilize a blank document for shift care documentation. This would in turn be handed to the next shift.

Sharing comprehensive nursing documentation each shift would minimize duplication, streamline reporting, and save significant time. Even as hospitals change to electronic health records, nurses may need a worksheet of some form. The transition to electronic records offers an additional challenge to nursing practice, including the way handovers are accomplished. The Handover Report Template Tool (see Figure 1) is intended to help nurses during these times of rapid change to remain rooted in their solid foundation of patient-centered care.

Summary

Nurses have responded professionally to the challenges of health care. They require specialized knowledge and skills, and open attitudes to give and receive handover reports safely and effectively (Malestic, 2003; Thurgood, 1995). More creative ways of conducting the handover of patient care should be explored so an important aspect of nursing practice becomes more than a ritual. In the highly stressful workplace, this tool may will help nurses and simplify one vital task.

References

Brown-Lazzara, P. (2004). Make your better best with a reporting system. Nursing Management, 35(8), 48A-48D.

Dowding, D. (2001). Examining the effects that manipulating information given in the change of shift report has on nurse’s care planning ability. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 33(6), 836-846.

Lally, S. (1999). An investigation into the functions of nurses’ communication at the inter-shift handover. Journal of Nursing Management, 7(1), 26-36.

Lamond, D. (2000). The information content of the nurse change of shift report. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 31(4), 794-804.

Malestic, S.L. (2003). A quick guide to verbal reports. RN, 66(2), 47-49.

McLaughlin, E.L., & Bryant, A. (2004). Get an A+ on end-of-shift report. Nursing2005, 34(6), 32-33.

Miller, C. (1998). Ensuring continuing care: Styles and efficiency of the handover process. Australian Journal of Advanced Nursing, 16(1), 23-27.

O’Connell, B., & Penney, W. (2001). Challenging the handover ritual. Recommendations for research and practice. Collegian: Journal of the Royal College of Nursing, Australia, 8(3), 14-18.

Priest, C.S., & Holmberg, S.K. (2000). A new model for the mental health nursing change of shift report. Journal of Psychosocial Nursing & Mental Health Service, 38(8), 36-43.

Sherlock, C. (1995). The patient handover. Nursing Standard, 9(25), 33-36.

Simpson, K. (2005). Handling handoffs safely. American Journal of Maternal Child Nursing, 30(2), 152.

Thurgood, G. (1995). Verbal handover reports: What skills are needed? British Journal of Nursing, 4(12), 720-722.

Wallum, R. (1995). Using care plans to replace the handover. Nursing Standard, 9(32), 24-26.

Wolf, G. (2003). Nursing 2061: Organizational and management theory. Lecture presented at the University of Pittsburgh, School of Nursing, Pittsburgh, PA.

Mary Jane Wilson, MS, RN, is Senior Professional Nurse, Cardiology Step- Down Unit, Shadyside Hospital, University of Pittsburgh Medical Center, Pittsburgh, PA.

Acknowledgments: The author would like to thank Lauren Saul who valued the template, encouraged research, and proofread the many drafts of this article. Special thanks to all of the nurses at Shadyside Hospital, Pittsburgh, PA, who assisted as well.

Copyright Anthony J. Jannetti, Inc. Jun 2007

(c) 2007 Medsurg Nursing. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

The Contribution of Acute Cholecystitis, Obesity, and Previous Abdominal Surgery on the Outcome of Laparoscopic Cholecystectomy

By Simopoulos, Constantinos Botaitis, Sotirios; Karayiannakis, Anastasios J; Tripsianis, Grigorios; Et al

The aim of this study was to evaluate the impact of acute cholecystitis (AC), obesity, and previous abdominal surgery on laparoscopic cholecystectomy (LC) outcomes. Records of 1940 patients undergoing LC in 1992 and 2004 were reviewed in order to assess the independent and joint effects of the above risk factors on conversion, morbidity, operation time, and hospital stay. In multivariate regression analysis, adjusting for sex and age, AC alone and in combination with obesity or previous abdominal surgery increased the risk of conversion and complications and was associated with prolonged operation time and hospital stay compared with the patients without any of the risk factors (reference group). The independent and joint effects of obesity and previous abdominal surgery were significant only on operation time. On the contrary, previous upper abdominal surgery alone and in combination with AC was associated with 3- and 17-fold relative odds of conversion, respectively. The combined presence of AC, obesity, and previous abdominal surgery yielded an odds ratio for conversion of 7.5 and for complications of 10.7, as well as a longer operation time and hospital stay. The presence of previous upper abdominal surgery with AC and obesity had a substantial effect on conversion, with an odds ratio of 87.1 compared with the reference group. LC is safe in patients with AC, previous abdominal surgery, or obesity. However, the presence of inflammation alone or in combination with obesity and/or previous (especially upper) abdominal surgery is the main factor that influences the adverse outcomes of LC. THE INCREASING EXPERIENCE With lapaiOSCOpic ctlOlecystectomy (LC) has led to an expansion of the indications for LC, a reduction in contraindications of the procedure, and more complex cases being operated laparoscopically.1″4 Although most patients will also benefit from the laparoscopic approach, difficult cases are at a higher risk for conversion and the resulting complications5 that may overshadow all advantages of the laparoscopic procedure, making this approach unsafe, uneconomic, inefficient, and hence possibly inferior to traditional open cholecystectomy. The ability to identify the subset of patients with unfavorable conditions may help in planning the laparoscopic approach or in proceeding directly to open cholecystectomy.

This study evaluated the outcome of LC in patients with gallstones and complex cases that are commonly encountered, namely acute cholecystitis (AC), previous abdominal surgery, and obesity.

Materials and Methods

We reviewed the medical records of 1940 consecutive patients who underwent LC from May 1992 to December 2004. Data used in the analysis included patient demographic characteristics (gender, age, height, and weight), data from the preoperative evaluation (history of previous abdominal surgery and inflammation of gallbladder), intraoperative findings, conversion to open cholecystectomy, postoperative complications, operative time, and hospital stay.

The primary outcomes were the conversion of the LC to an open procedure and the development of complications. As secondary outcomes, the operative time and the duration of hospital stay were considered. The choice of LC or open cholecystectomy was determined by the patient’s risk and, in particular, by the surgeon’s experience in laparoscopic surgery, with no strict preoperative criteria or guidelines determining the surgeon’s decision. The operative procedures were performed by three surgeons with differing degrees of surgical training, all of whom had experience with at least 50 cases of elective LC. The decision about when to convert to laparotomy was made by the surgeon without strict criteria during the course of the procedure. Operative time was calculated from the initiation of skin incision to the completion of skin closure. The hospital stay was calculated as the period from the admission day until discharge.

The presence of AC, previous abdominal surgery, and obesity, three initial relative or absolute contraindications or, today, risk factors for LC, were the main determinants. The diagnosis of AC was based on at least two of the following conditions being present: first, local pain and/or tenderness in the right upper quadrant, a temperature higher than 37.5[degrees] C, and/or leukocytosis (white blood cell count >/=9 x 10^sup 9^TL) and ultrasonic evidence of AC (thickening of the gallbladder wall, distended gallbladder, or fluid adjacent to the gallbladder, as well as the presence of gallstones) at the admission; and second, operative and pathological confirmation of AC. The diagnosis of empyema or hydrops of the gallbladder was based on the presence of pus or mucus in the gallbladder when it was aspirated laparoscopically. The severity of AC was then classified as acute edematous cholecystitis, hydrops, or suppurative cholecystitis. Previous abdominal surgery though a midline or paramedian incision was classified as upper or lower abdominal surgery based on whether the scar extended above or below the umbilicus, respectively. Transverse or oblique abdominal incisions also were classified on the basis of their relation to the umbilicus as upper or lower abdominal surgery. Body mass index (BMI), expressed as weight/ height2 (kg/m^sup 2^), was used as a standard for the assessment of obesity. Patients with a BMI >/= 30 kg/m^sup 2^ were considered obese. The covariates gender and age ( =65 and >65 years old) were considered for potential confounding. The intraoperative cholangiography (IOC) initially was performed in 18 elective LC for gallstone disease with no risk factors, in association with difficult recognition of the elements, but the results were not considered as satisfactory. So IOC was not performed on all patients. We strongly believe that IOC did not influence the outcome of LC, perhaps only the operative time. Therefore, these 18 patients were excluded from the analyses.

The LC was performed using a standard fourpuncture technique in all patients. Pneumoperitoneum was created using a Veress needle except in a few patients who had previously undergone a midline incision and in those with suspected adhesions, in which it was performed using the Hasson technique.

Statistical analysis of the data was performed using SPSS, version 11.0 (SPSS, Inc., Chicago, IL). The normality of continuous variables was tested with the Kolmogorov-Smirnov test. Continuous variables were expressed as mean +- SD (normally distributed) and as median and range (non-normally). Categorical variables were expressed as frequencies and percentages.

Student’s t test and a chi^sup 2^ test were used in the univariate analyses. The crude and adjusted (aOR) odd ratios were estimated by means of simple and multivariate logistic regression analyses to evaluate any potential association of conversion and complications with AC, obesity, and previous abdominal surgery. Multivariate linear regression analyses were used to assess the effects of the above three main determinants on the operation time and hospital stay. A patient’s gender and age were the major confounders in all multivariate models. Operation time was logarithmically transformed to approach the normal distribution.

Patients were then classified into eight groups according to the presence of AC, obesity, and previous abdominal surgery (Table 1). The group of patients without any of these risk factors was considered the reference group. To assess the independent effects of AC, obesity, and previous abdominal surgery, as well as their joint effect on the conversion, complications, operation time, and hospital stay, all groups with at least one risk factor were contrasted to the reference group using the same multivariate logistic and linear regression models, adjusted for gender and ag[section], All tests were two tailed and statistical significance was considered at P = 0.05.

Results

The 1940 patients who underwent LC comprised 1474 women and 466 men, with a median age of 54 years (range, 15-87 years). Of these, 280 (14.4%) patients had an inflamed gallbladder (125 with acute edematous cholecystitis, 59 with hydrops, and 96 with empyema of the gallbladder), 534 (27.5%) patients had undergone previous abdominal surgery (485 lower and 69 upper abdominal surgery), and 491 (25.3%) patients were obese. AC and previous abdominal surgery were more prevalent among obese patients compared with the patients with a BMI

TABLE 1. Groups of Patients According to the Presence of AC, Obesity, and Previous Abdominal Surgery

The primary and secondary outcomes of LC in relation to AC, obesity, and previous abdominal surgery are presented in Table 2. In univariate analyses, significantly higher conversion and complication rates and longer operative times and hospital stays were found in patients with AC compared with patients with elective LC (all P

The combined presence of AC, obesity, and previous abdominal surgery yielded an odds ratio for conversion of 7.5 (95% CI = 2.8- 20.3) and for complications of 10.7 (95% CI = 3.2-35.1) compared with the reference group. In addition, the presence of AC with obesity and the combined presence of AC, obesity, and previous abdominal surgery were associated with further increased risk for complications compared with AC alone (aOR = 4.2, 95% CI = 1.2-14.7; aOR = 4.8, 95% CI = 1.2-19.2, respectively). The presence of AC with previous upper abdominal surgery and the combined presence of AC, obesity, and previous upper abdominal surgery had substantial effects on conversion, with respective odds ratios of 16.7 (95% CI = 1.7-68.3) and 87.1 (95% CI = 15.4-370.8) compared with the reference group.

TABLE 2. The Outcome of LC in Relation to the Presence of AC, Obesity, and Previous Abdominal Surgery

TABLE 3. Independent and Join Effects of AC, Obesity, and Previous Abdominal Surgery the Risk of Conversion and Complications in LC

Table 4 shows the operation times and hospital stays in the eight groups, excluding the converted cases. Multivariate linear regression analyses, including gender and age, revealed significantly longer operation time compared with the reference group (all P

Discussion

Although LC is widely accepted as the conventional therapy for chronic biliary disease, its application in the setting of known combined effects of AC, previous abdominal surgery, and obesity is less well defined. Initially, these cases considered relative or absolute contraindications because of the technical difficulties involved in the procedure.

The initial inclusion of obesity as a contraindication6,7 was attributed to abundant abdominal wall and intra-abdominal fat interfering with the exposure and dissection of Calot’s triangle.8 Previous abdominal surgery, especially upper abdominal, was included as a contraindication because it was associated with difficulty in placing the initial trocar and obtaining adequate exposure to the gallbladder.9 The potential risk for injury of organs adherent to the abdominal wall during insertion of the Veress needle or trocar as well as the necessity for adhesiolysis and its attendant complications are the two major specific problems experienced by surgeons performing LC on patients with previous abdominal surgery. AC has been considered to be a contraindication for LC because of the technical difficulties involved in the procedure.10 An edematous gallbladder is difficult to grasp for retraction, and inflammatory processes can lead to adhesions around the gallbladder obscuring the anatomy in Calot’s triangle.11

Although numerous studies have demonstrated the safety and effectiveness of LC for AC,12-15 previous abdominal surgery,16-18 and a BMI >/= 30 kg/m^sup 2^,19-21 reports for patients with a combination of these risk factors are difficult to find in the literature. The laparoscopic procedure in these conditions is more complicated and more challenging than in cases of simple cholelithiasis.

TABLE 4. Independent and Joint Effects of AC, Obesity, and Previous Abdominal Surgery on the Operation Time and Hospital Stay of Successful LC

The statistical analysis of the data leads us to the following important conclusions. AC is the risk factor that influences more of the indicators of surgery outcome, as the incidence of AC was associated with higher conversion and complication rates as well as with longer operative time and hospital stay. The conversion was more prevalent in empyema of gallbladder, complication-related conversion was more prevalent in acute oedematous cholecystitis, and the operation time and hospital stay were longer in patients with hydrops and empyema of the gallbladder.

In contrast, BMI and previous abdominal surgery were significantly associated with longer operating time for gallbladder dissection, with it being even longer in patients with a previous surgery in the upper abdomen. The conversion and complication rates as well as the postoperative hospital stay in patients with previous abdominal surgery and a BMI >/= 30 kg/m^sup 2^ were not significantly different from those in patients with no risk factors, although the conversion rate was higher in patients with previous upper abdominal surgery than in those with previous lower abdominal surgery.

The combined effect of AC, previous abdominal surgery, and obesity on the outcome of LC shows that the conversion rate, complication rate, operation time, and hospital stay increased significantly with the number of risk factors. Compared with patients without any risk factors, the risk of conversion was higher in patients with AC and a BMI >/= 30 kg/m^sup 2^, with AC and previous upper abdominal surgery, or with a BMI >/= 30 kg/m^sup 2^ and previous upper abdominal surgery. The conversion rate in patients with all three risk factors present was 20 per cent, with it being remarkably higher (by 71.4%) in patients with AC, a BMI >/ = 30 kg/m^sup 2^, and previous upper abdominal surgery. Patients with AC and previous abdominal surgery, with AC and a BMI >/= 30 kg/ m^sup 2^, or with all three risk factors present exhibited higher complication rates.

The operation time tended to be longer in patients with all combinations of two risk factors or with all three of them, but this trend did not reach statistical significance. The operation time in all of these groups of patients was significantly longer than in patients without any risk factors. Patients with two risk factors, one of which was AC, had longer operation times. Compared with those with no risk factors, the hospital stay was longer among patients with AC and a BMI >/= 30 kg/m^sup 2^ or with AC and previous abdominal surgery, and in patients with a combination of all three risk factors, although none of the above was significantly different from that in patients with AC only.

In conclusion, this study has shown that LC can be performed safely in commonly encountered complex cases that are commonly encountered, including AC, previous abdominal surgery, or obesity. However, the presence of inflammation alone or in combination with obesity and/or previous abdominal surgery, especially in the upper abdomen, is the main factor that influences the adverse outcome of LC.

REFERENCES

1. Bingener-casey J, Richards ML, Strode! WE, et al. Reasons for conversion from laparoscopic to open cholecystectomy: A 10year review. J Gastrointest Surg 2002;6:800-5.

2. Collet D, Edye M, Magne E, Perissat J. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy in the obese patient. Surg Endosc 1992;6:186-8.

3. Edward H, Livingston MD, Robert V, Rege MD. A nationwide study of conversion from laparoscopic to open cholecystectomy. Am J Surg 2004; 188:205-11.

4. Eldar S, Sabo E, Nash E, et al. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy for acute cholecystitis: Prospective trial. World J Surg 1997; 21:540-5.

5. Karayiannakis A, Polychronidis A, Perente S, et al. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy in patients with previous upper or lower abdominal surgery. Surg Endosc 2004; 18:97-101.

6. Kum CK, Eypasch E, Lefering R, et al. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy for acute cholecystitis: Is it really safe? World J Surg 1996;20:43-9.

7. Miles RH, Carballo RE, Prinz RA, et al. Laparoscopy: The preferred method of cholecystectomy in the morbidly obese. Surgery 1992; 112:818-23.

8. Navez B, Mutter D, Russier Y, et al. Safety of laparoscopic approach for acute cholecystitis: Retrospective study of 609 cases. World J Surg 2001;25:1352-6.

9. Simopoulos C, Polychronidis A, Botaitis S, et al. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy in obese patients. Obes Surg 2005; 15: 243-6.

10. Sperlongano P, Pisaniello D, Parmeggiani D, et al. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy in the morbidly obese. Chir Ital 2002;54: 363-6.

11. Williams LF, Chapman WC, Bonau RA, et al. Comparison of laparoscopic cholecystectomy with open cholecystectomy in a single center. Am J Surg 1993:165:459-65. 12. Kiviluoto T, Siren J, Luukkonen P, Kivilaakso E. Randomized trial of laparoscopic versus open cholecystectomy for acute and gangrenous cholecystitis. Lancet 1998;351:321-5.

13. Wilson RG, Macintyre IM, Nixon SJ, et al. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy as a safe and effective treatment for severe acute cholecystitis. BMJ 1992;305:394-6.

14. Lai PB, Kwong KH, Leung KL, et al. Randomized trial of early versus delayed laparoscopic cholecystectomy for acute cholecystitis. BrJ Surg 1998:85:764-7.

15. Pessaux P, Tuech JJ, Rouge C, et al. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy in acute cholecystitis: A prospective comparative study in patients with acute vs chronic cholecystitis. Surg Endosc 2000;14:358-61.

16. Kwon AH, Innui H, Imamura A, et al. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy and choledocholithotomy in patients with a previous gastrectomy. J Am Coll Surg 2001; 193:614-9.

17. Diez J, Delbene R, Ferreres A. The feasibility of laparoscopic cholecystectomy in patients with previous abdominal surgery. HPB Surg 1998:10:353-6.

18. Faggioni A, Moretti G, Mandrin! A, et al. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy in patients who previously underwent major laparotomy. Minerva Chir 1997:52:869-73.

19. Ammori BJ, Vezakis A, Davides D, et al. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy in morbidly obese patients. Surg Endosc 2001; 15:1336-9.

20. Unger SW, Unger HM, Edelman DS, et al. Obesity: An indication rather than contraindication to laparoscopic cholecystectomy. Obes Surg 1992;2:29-31.

21. Curet MJ. Special problems in laparoscopic surgery. Previous abdominal surgery, obesity, and pregnancy. Surg Clin North Am 2000:80:1093-110.

CONSTANTINOS SIMOPOULOS, SOTIRIOS BOTAITIS, ANASTASIOS J. KARAYIANNAKIS, GRIGORIOS TRIPSIANIS, MICHAIL PITIAKOUDIS ALEXANDROS POLYCHRONIDIS, M.D.

From the Second Department of Surgery, Democritus University of Thrace, Alexandroupolis, Greece

Address correspondence and reprint requests to Alexandros Polychronidis, Associate Professor of Surgery, 15 Kolokotroni Street, Alexandroupolis 68100, Greece.

Copyright Southeastern Surgical Congress Apr 2007

(c) 2007 American Surgeon, The. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Effective Communication and Delivery of Culturally Competent Health Care

By Markova, Tsveti Broome, Barbara

Effective communication between patients and health care providers is a critical element to quality health care. Becoming aware of patients’ attitudes, beliefs, biases, and behaviors that may influence patient care can help clinicians improve access to and quality of care. Health care providers should develop a strategic plan for improvement, then implement and evaluate the plan to include structured, continuously improving progress toward achieving cultural competency goals. In this challenging health care environment, health care providers need the skills to explore the meaning of illness, to determine patient’s social and family context, and provide patient-centered and culturally competent care. Effective communication between patients and health care providers is a critical element to quality health care. Increasingly diverse racial, ethnic, and sociocultural backgrounds of patients challenge health care providers for delivery of health care services. An awareness of personal factors that have an impact on patient care is an important component of cultural competency for health care providers. Effective communication can improve outcome measures such as patient satisfaction, adherence to treatment, and disease treatment outcomes (Stewart, 1995). Becoming aware of patients’ attitudes, beliefs, biases, and behaviors that may influence patient care can help clinicians improve access to and quality of care. Health disparities and minority and foreign-born populations are increasing across the United States. The U.S. Census Bureau predicts that within the next 50 years, nearly one-half (48%) of the nation’s population will be from cultures other than Caucasian, non- Hispanic. Despite improvement in overall health for the majority of Americans, the burden of health disparities continues to affect minority populations disproportionately.

The HHS Office of Minority Health (OMH, 2007a) identified health disparities and four areas for attention, including access to health care, improved data collection/ analysis, health professions development, and cultural competence. To assist health care organizations in providing effective, timely, and respectful care that is compatible with patients’ cultural health beliefs and practices, the Office of Minority Health issued the National Standards for Culturally and Linguistically Appropriate Services in Health Care in December 2000 (Office of Minority Health, 2007b).

Cross-Cultural Encounters

Every clinical encounter is cross-cultural. Developing partnerships with our patients can help us to learn and better understand the familial, community, occupational, and environmental contexts in which they live. There is no one way to treat any racial and ethnic group, given the great sociocultural diversity within these broad classifications. For physicians and nurses to learn the aspects of each culture that could influence the medical encounter is an impractical solution because cultural groups are very heterogeneous. A patient-centered, more unified approach is needed in which the physician and nurse treats each patient as an individual, within the context of his or her environment (Carrillo, Green, & Betancourt, 1999). Patient-centered care establishes a partnership among practitioners, patients, and families to ensure that decisions respect patients’ needs and preferences and solicit patients’ input to make decisions and participate in their own care.

Patient centeredness is furthered when patients receive information in their language, when health care providers have greater awareness of potential communication difficulties, and care is provided by taking into account the context of the patient’s cultural beliefs and practices. Patient-centered care empowers the patient as an “expert” of his or her unique illness experience (Tervalon & Murray-Garcia, 1998).

The distinction between the words disease and illness is important in providing culturally competent care. Disease refers to physiologic and psychologic processes; illness refers to the psychosocial meaning and experience of the perceived disease for the individual, the family, and those associated with the individual (Kleinman, Eisenberg, & Good, 1978).

A culturally competent health care provider addresses both a patient’s disease and illness. These findings correspond to the recent emphasis in undergraduate and graduate medical and nursing education on cultural competency (Accreditation Council for Graduate Medical Education, 2006; International Council of Nurses, 2006; Long, 2000). The U.S. Accreditation Council for Graduate Medical Education (2006) requires all residency programs to have a systematic approach to teaching their physicians- in-training in the area of cultural competency. Cross, Bazron, Dennis, and Isaacs (1999) outlined a philosophical framework for developing and implementing a patient care delivery system that provides services in a culturally appropriate way to meet the needs of culturally and racially diverse groups. They also developed a comprehensive cultural competence model that can be used to assist health care professionals to work effectively in cross-cultural situations.

The quality of the information during the medical interview is essential in establishing rapport with patients, and for making an accurate assessment of a patient’s condition, taking in account psychosocial aspects of patient’s problems. Various methods are described in the literature for teaching interpersonal and communication skills (Duffy et al., 2004; Office of Minority Health, 1999). Some of the most frequently taught are the SEGUE model, the 4 E’s, and the BATHE model. The BATHE model provides a useful mnemonic for eliciting the psychosocial context through asking simple questions about background, affect, trouble, handling, and empathy (Stuart & Lieberman, 2002).

Background: The simple question “What is going on in your life?” elicits the context of the patient’s visit.

Affect: Asking “How do you feel about what is going on?” or “What is your mood?” allows the patient to report and label the current feeling state.

Trouble: “What about the situation troubles you the most?” helps the physician and patient focus and may bring out the symbolic significance of the illness or event.

Handling: “How are you handling that?” gives an assessment of functioning and provides direction for an intervention.

Empathy: “That must be very difficult for you” legitimizes the patient’s feelings and provides psychological support.

Talking the Talk

Considering that approximately 20% of U.S. residents speak a language other than English at home, health care providers should expect to communicate with non-English speaking populations (Language Map Data Center, 2007). The presence of English-speaking family members may facilitate patients’ ability to understand and express health care concerns. On the other hand, studies have reported that doing so can create an environment where the patient is uncomfortable with expressing health concerns of a personal and private nature and prefers a professional interpreter (Meadows, Thurston, & Melton, 2001; Ngo-Metzger et al., 2003). This is especially true when one considers the very personal and sensitive topics of sexuality, elimination, and gynecologic issues. Despite the fact that English-speaking physicians will be less likely to provide patientcentered encounters to patients requiring an interpreter (Perez- Stable & Napoles-Springer, 2000), it is difficult to compare such a visit with an encounter where there is a language barrier and an interpreter is not available.

Overall, the literature (Baker, Parker, Williams, Coates, & Pitkin, 1996; Ngo-Metzger et al., 2003; Peres-Stable & Napoles- Springer, 2003) has demonstrated the positive impact of professional interpreters on patientphysician interaction. Physicians with access to trained interpreters reported a significantly higher quality of patient-physician communication than physicians who used other methods (Hornberger, Itakura, & Wilson, 1997). Patients also considered the quality of interpreter services to be very important. They preferred using professional interpreters rather than family members, and preferred gender-concordant translators. One reason may be that it is less difficult to communicate issues of a private nature to a professional interpreter rather than family. The fear of the family knowing and then sharing things of a personal nature are lessened. Furthermore, they expressed the need for help in navigating health care systems and obtaining support services (Ngo- Metzger et al., 2003).

Providing language access services is good medical practice. Addressing language barriers can reduce the harm that comes from critical health care information not being communicated correctly, and it contributes to greater patient satisfaction and adherence to treatment. Interpreters should be chosen carefully to exhibit a set of competencies, not just language skills. In 2003, the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) revised its guidance on providing services for people with limited English proficiency (LEP) (Office for Civil Rights, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 2003). The guidance states that “the failure of a recipient of Federal financial assistance from HHS to take reasonable steps to provide LEP persons with meaningful opportunity to participate in HHS-funded programs may constitute a violation of Title VI [of the Civil Rights Act of 1964] and HHS’s implementing regulations.” Health Literacy

Health literacy is an emerging field focusing on literacy within the context of health. Every 10 years, the U.S. Department of Education conducts a nationwide study of the English-language literacy skills of U.S. adults. The most recent study, the 2003 National Assessment of Adult Literacy (National Center of Education Statistics, 2005), defines literacy as “the ability to use printed and written information to function in society, to achieve one’s goals, and to develop one’s knowledge and potential.” The survey responses from 21,000 individuals 16 years and older revealed that between 40% and 50% of the adult population have literacy skills at basic or below basic levels. Approximately 5% of those sampled (representing about 11 million U.S. adults) could not be tested because of cognitive impairment, spoke a language other than English or Spanish, or had rudimentary literacy skills and assessment could not be performed. Health literacy is another term, defined by the American Medical Association (Schwartzberg & VanGeest, 2005) as “a constellation of skills, including the ability to perform basic reading and numerical tasks required to function in the health care environment.” Similarly, the Healthy People 2010 (U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 2000) defines health literacy as “the degree to which individuals have the capacity to obtain, process, and understand basic health information and services to make appropriate health decisions.” In a review of 85 studies with approximately 30,000 subjects combined, Paasche-Orlow, Parker, Gazmarian, Nielsen- Bohman, and Rudd (2005) found that the prevalence of low health literacy was 26% and the prevalence of marginal health literacy was another 20%. There was an association between low health literacy skills and advanced age, ethnicity (such as Hispanic, African American), low socioeconomic and educational status, and immigrant status. However, the majority of those with limited health literacy skills were white, born in the United States, and currently employed.

It is important for health care providers to be aware that people may be ashamed to acknowledge that they can not understand health- related information and will not ask for help. Health literacy is one of the risk factors for poor health knowledge, health behaviors, and health outcomes. A recent review (DeWalt, Berkman, Sheridan, Lohr, & Pignone, 2004) highlighted links between health literacy and outcomes such as increased rate of hospitalizations, outpatient visits, health care costs, noncompliance with adherence to instructions, diabetes mellitus complications (for example, retinopathy), depression, and others. An essential component of patienthealth care providers’ communication is the ability to provide information that can improve patient understanding. This starts with increased awareness of the high prevalence of low health literacy; the use of nonmedical terms, pictures, or diagrams; providing only focused information; and determining the degree of patient comprehension.

Culturally competent care is the responsibility of all health care personnel, not only physicians. The office environment is a critical element of providing culturally competent medical service. It involves assessing one’s office, staff, and strategies to determine a baseline understanding of the current level of competency and service delivery. Developing a strategic plan for improvement, then implementing and evaluating the plan encourages structured, continuously improving progress toward achieving cultural competency goals. In this challenging health care environment, health care providers need the skills to explore the meaning of illness, to determine patient’s social and family context, and provide patient-centered and culturally competent care.

Case Study

Eleanor is an 81-year-old Appalachian woman whose daughter brings her to the office because her mother has difficulty urinating. The interaction between the nurse and Eleanor is a follows:

Nurse: “Can you tell me why you are here”?

Eleanor: “Honey, I don’t know for sure. My daughter said I should come in here and see you all.”

Nurse: “Why? Is there something going on?”

Eleanor: “Yeah, I’m having a hard time passing water.”

Nurse: “Tell me what you mean.”

Eleanor: “I told you, I can’t pass water right.”

Nurse: “Ok, well, I need you to urinate in this cup, ok?”

Eleanor: “What do you want me to do?”

Nurse: “I need you to put your water in this cup.”

Eleanor: “Ok.”

The nurse takes the sample and the urinalysis is inconsistent with “typical” urine. The nurse questions the sample and requests another. This time the daughter hears the conversation and intervenes. She explains to her mother she should catch some of the water she passes as soon as it comes out of her and not get it from the toilet. The mother nods understanding. The next urinalysis is indicative of a urinary tract infection. She is given antibiotics and fluid instructions. This is an example of “its not what we say, but how we say it.”

Culturally competent care is the responsibility of all health care personnel, not only physicians.

References

Accreditation Council for Graduate Medical Education. (2006). Outcomes project: Enhancing residency education through outcomes assessment. Retrieved April 17, 2007, from http://www.acgme.org/ outcome/project/ OutIntro_fnl1.htm

Baker, D.W., Parker, R.M., Williams, M.V., Coates, W.C., & Pitkin, K. (1996). Use and effectiveness of interpreters in an emergency department. Journal of the American Medical Association, 275(10), 783-788.

Carrillo, J.E., Green, A.R., & Betancourt, J.R. (1999). Cross- cultural primary care: A patient-based approach. Annuals of Internal Medicine, 13(10), 829-834.

Cross, T.L., Bazron, B.J., Dennis, K.W., & Isaacs, M.R. (1999). Toward a culturally competent system of care (volumes 1 and 2). Washington, DC: National Institute of Mental Health, Child and Adolescent Service System Program (CASSP) Technical Assistance Center, Georgetown University Child Development Center.

DeWalt, D.A., Berkman, N.D., Sheridan, S., Lohr, K.N., & Pignone, M.P. (2004). Literacy and health outcomes: A systematic review of the literature. Journal of General Internal Medicine, 1228-1239.

Duffy, F.D., Gordon, G.H., Whelan, G., Cole- Kelly, K., Frankel, R., Buffone, N., et al. (2004). Assessing competence in communication and interpersonal skills: The Kalamazoo II Report. Academic Medicine, 79(6), 459-507.

Hornberger, J., Itakura, H., & Wilson, S.R. (1997). Bridging language and cultural barriers between physicians and patients. Public Health Reports, 112(5), 410-417.

International Council of Nurses. (2006). Review of international council of nurses position statements. 2006. Retrieved April 17, 2007, from http:// www.nursingworld.org/inc/PSreview / CulturalandLinguisticCompetenceP olicyandSupportingConcepts.pdf

Kleinman, A., Eisenberg, L., & Good, B. (1978). Culture, illness, and care: Clinical lessons from anthropologic and crosscultural research. Annuals of Internal Medicine, 88, 251-258.

Language Map Data Center. (2007). Modern language association. Retrieved April 17, 2007, from http://mla.org/census_ data

Long, D. (2000). Competency-based residency training: The next advance in graduate medical education. Academic Medicine, 7(12), 1178-1183.

Meadows, L., Thurston, W., & Melton, C. (2001). Immigrant women’s health. Social Science Medicine, 52(9). 1451- 1458.

National Center of Education Statistics. (2005). A first look at the literacy of America’s adults in the 21st century. Washington, DC: Author. Retrieved April 17, 2007, from http:// nces.ed.gov/ pubsearch/pubsinfo.asp? pubid=2006470

Ngo-Metzger, Q., Massagli, M.P., Clarridge, B.R., Manocchia, M., Davis, R.B., Iezzoni, L.I., et al. (2003). Linguistic and cultural barriers to care. Journal of General Internal Medicine, 18(1), 44- 52.

Office for Civil Rights, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. (2003). Guidance to federal financial recipients regarding Title VI Prohibition against national origin discrimination affecting limited English proficient persons. Federal Register, 68(153), 47311-47323.

Office of Minority Health. (2007a). Eliminating racial and ethnic health disparities. Retrieved April 17, 2007, from http:// www.cdc.gov/omh/About Us/disparities.htm

Office of Minority Health. (2007b). National standards of culturally and linguistically appropriate services. Retrieved April 17, 2007, from http://www.omhrc.gov/assets/pdf/ checked/ executive.pdf

Office of Minority Health. (1999). Assuring cultural competence in health care: Recommendations for national standards and outcomes- focused research agenda. Recommended standards for culturally and linguistically appropriate services (CLAS) in Health Care Services. Washington, DC: Prepared for the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services.

Paasche-Orlow, M.K., Parker, R.M., Gazmarian, J.A., Nielsen- Bohman, L.T., & Rudd, R. (2005). The prevalence of limited health literacy. Journal of General Internal Medicine, 20(2), 175-184.

Perez-Stable, E.J., & Napoles-Springer, A. (2000). Interpreters and communication in the clinical encounter. American Journal of Medicine, 108(6), 509-510.

Schwartzberg, J.G., & VanGeest, J.B. (Eds.). (2005). Understanding and improving health literacy. Chicago: American Medical Association.

Stewart, M.A. (1995). Effective physicianpatient communication and health outcomes: A review. Canadian Medical Association Journal, 152(9), 1423-1433.

Stuart, M.R., & Lieberman, J.A. (2002). The fifteen-minute hour: Practical therapeutic intervention in primary care (3rd ed.). Darien, IL: WB Saunders.

Tervalon, M., & Murray-Garcia, J. (1998). Cultural humility versus cultural competence: A critical distinction in defining physician training outcomes in multicultural education. Journal of Health Care for the Poor and Underserved, 9(2), 117-125. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (2000). Healthy People 2010: Understanding and improving health and objectives for improving health (2nd ed.). Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office.

Tsveti Markova, MD, FAAFP, is the Residency Director and Assistant Professor, Director of Clinical Operations, UFP, Detroit, Department of Family Medicine and Public Health Sciences, Wayne State University, Detroit, MI.

Barbara Broome, PhD, RN, is Associate Dean and Chair, Community/ Mental Health, University of South Alabama – College of Nursing, Mobile, AL.

Copyright Anthony J. Jannetti, Inc. Jun 2007

(c) 2007 Urologic Nursing. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Colorectal Lymphangioma

By Huguet, Kevin L Metzger, Philip P; Menke, David M

Lymphangiomas of the colon are historically rare benign tumors. Only 331 cases have been reported in the world medical literature between 1931 and 2004. With widespread use of colonoscopy, however, they are being found more frequently. We report the case of a 74- year-old woman in whom a colonoscopy revealed a 3 x 4-cm submucosal lesion in the cecum that was eventually diagnosed as a lymphangioma. A CT of the abdomen showed a soft-tissue mass in the cecum and a low-density hepatic lesion. An endoscopic ultrasound of the colon showed a 3 x 4-cm hypoechoic lesion with internal septa arising from the submucosal layer of the cecum. This lesion resembled a vascular malformation; therefore a biopsy specimen was not taken. Pathologic findings of a specimen taken after a subsequent right hemicolectomy identified a submucosal lymphangioma. Published reports indicate that colonoscopy cures most lesions smaller than 2.5 cm in diameter. Resection should be reserved for larger lesions or those in patients exhibiting proteinlosing enteropathy. LYMPHANGIOMAS ARE BENIGN tumors most COmmonly found in the head, neck, or axillae during childhood. Intra-abdominal lymphangioma is rare, composing less than 5 per cent of all cases. Colorectal lymphangioma is even more unusual. We report the diagnosis and treatment of a patient with lymphangioma of the cecum, and we review the Englishlanguage medical literature on this entity.

case Report

A 74-year-old woman with a history of breast cancer and osteoporosis had a colonoscopy to investigate potential causes of a recent unexplained weight loss. The colonoscopy revealed a 3 ? 4-cm submucosal lesion in the cecum. The mass was bluish black and moderately soft when probed. An 8-mm tubular adenoma was also found in the ascending colon and was excised. Because of concern that the cecal mass represented a vascular lesion, biopsy specimens were not obtained.

A CT of the abdomen and pelvis confirmed the 3 ? 4-cm mass in the cecum (Fig. 1) and also identified a small, apparently benign, cystic lesion in the dome of the right lobe of the liver. An endoscopie ultrasonogram of the cecal mass showed multiple hypoechoic regions and several areas of mixed heterogenicity.

The lesion seemed to be within the submucosa rather than arising from the muscularis propria. Findings of general laboratory screening tests were within normal limits, including those from liver function tests and serum carcinoembryonic antigen.

A right hemicolectomy was conducted, and a 2.5 ? 3-cm tumor was removed from the cecum. Histopathologic findings identified a vascular tumor with benign lymphoid nodules in the wall and benign endothelium. No continuous mural, smooth muscle, or elastic lamina was identified. Pathologic features were diagnostic of lymphangioma (Fig. T). The patient’s postoperative course, recovery, and subsequent follow-up were unremarkable.

Discussion

Lymphangiomas are usually found in the head, neck, or axillae. These sites account for 50 per cent to 75 per cent of all cases. Intra-abdominal lymphangiomas occur in just 5 per cent of all cases. Intraabdominal lymphangiomas are frequently located in the mesentery. Colorectal lymphangiomas such as the one we report here are extremely rare.

In 1932, Chisholm and Hillkowitz1 reported what they identified as the first case of a rectal lymphangioma. The rarity of this lesion is highlighted by the fact that in 1943, Helwig2 identified no lymphangiomas among 154 benign colonie tumors found during 1460 consecutive autopsies. Similarly, in 1969, Stout and Turell3 reported only 4 colonie and rectal lymphangiomas among 292 tumors of the colon and rectum, excluding adenomas, carcinoid tumors, and adenocarcinomas.

Colorectal lymphangiomas are being reported with increasing frequency, perhaps because of the increased use of colonoscopy. Our search of the Englishlanguage medical literature (Medline and PubMed using the terms colon, rectum, and lymphangioma) identified a total of 83 cases reported between 1932 and 1988.4 After 1988, 248 additional cases were reported.5″12 Thus, we reviewed a total of 331 published reports of colorectal lymphangioma.

FIG. l. CT of the abdomen shows a soft-tissue mass (arrows) in the cecum.

FIG. 2. Pathologic findings of a biopsy specimen identified dilated lymphatic spaces (arrowheads) and adjacent lymphoid nodules (arrows) consistent with submucosal lymphangioma (hematoxylin-eosin stain; x20).

Worldwide, colorectal lymphangioma has been reported predominantly in Eastern countries. Only 36 cases were documented in Western countries compared with 295 cases in Eastern countries. Of the 295 cases in Eastern countries, almost all (281; 95%), or 85 per cent of the overall total, occurred in Japanese patients.

Most lymphangiomas were identified in patients older than 40 years of age (peak incidence, 41-50 years and 61-70 years; Table 1). Thus, there did not appear to be a correlation between age and peak incidence. The male-to-female ratio was 1.39:1, for a slight predominance in men. The most common site of colorectal lymphangioma appears to be the transverse or ascending colon (Table 2).

TABLE 1. Frequency of Colorectal Lymphangiomas by Age Reported between 1931 and 2004a

As early as 1877, Von Wegner13 reviewed the classifications of lymphangioma and identified three main types: simple, cavernous, and cystic. In the early 1950s, four types of chylous cysts of the abdomen were described by Beahrs et al.:14 developmental, traumatic, neoplastic, and infected. Chylous cysts would now be identified as lymphangiomas. Almost 100 years after Von Wegner’s report, Berardi15 recommended that, although any localized cystic tumor (simple or multicystic) could be a lymphangioma, the term “lymphangiectasia” should be restricted to 4. tumor with diffuse involvement.

The exact histogenesis of a lymphangioma is not completely known. Willis16 suggested that lymphangiomas are hamartomas rather than true neoplasms. The rationale for this differentiation is that these lesions have not shown any malignant potential and appear to be inborn errors in tissue development.

Tumor size was recorded in 245 of the 331 published reports we reviewed, as well as in the medical record of our patient. The diameter of colorectal lymphangiomas varied from 0.4 cm to 23 cm. As many as 80 per cent of the lymphangiomas were multilocular.

TABLE 2. Anatomical Location of Colorectal Lymphangioma by World Region

TABLE 3. Treatment of Colorectal Lymphangioma

Most lymphangiomas are usually diagnosed preoperatively as submucosal tumors. Colonoscopy is the main diagnostic study. Lymphangiomas are typically pinkish, translucent, and tense with a lustrous surface. Their shape may change with peristalsis, compression, or a shift in the patient’s position. As many as 50 per cent may have a waist or stalk. Obtaining a biopsy specimen from a lymphangioma may result in an efflux of lymphatic fluid. Radiologie studies often reveal a sharply demarcated oval or round colonie defect. The differential diagnosis should include other benign submucosal tumors such as lipoma, leiomyoma, or colitis cystica profunda, as well as carcinoid tumors, carcinoma, or mucocele.

There have been two case reports of colorectal lymphangioma associated with colonie carcinoma.17- 18 Lymphangioma has also been associated with adenomas, hemorrhoids, anal fistulae, or anal fissures. These associated lesions are incidental and probably unrelated to the primary lymphangioma. Of note, however, were five patients who had proteinlosing enteropathy. The lymphangiomas of these patients were larger than typical and also were associated with surface ulceration or erosion.

The most common clinical signs and symptoms of lymphangioma are intermittent, cramping abdominal pain, or rectal bleeding. Less frequent findings include diarrhea, fullness, abdominal mass (invagination), or, as previously noted, protein-losing enteropathy. Some patients with lymphangioma may be asymptomatic.

The most common types of therapy include segmentai or radical resection, wedge resection, or snare polypectomy (Table 3). Endoscopie therapy has increasingly been indicated for treatment. Since about 1980, a lymphangioma of 2.5 cm or less in diameter has usually been treated by endoscopie snare polypectomy. Of the treatment methods reported for 224 patients since 1980, 52 per cent were endoscopie compared with 13 per cent before 1980. The most important aspect of either treatment approach is removal of the entire lesion rather than its puncture and drainage. Larger lesions or lesions that cause proteinlosing enteropathy characteristically have deeper muscular wall or subserosal penetration and should be treated by wedge or segmental resection.

Lymphangiomas of the colon and rectum are uncommon benign tumors with little malignant potential. Diagnosis is usually best accomplished with colonoscopy, and therapeutic colonoscopy can be used for most lesions that are less than 2.5 cm in diameter. Resection is best reserved for larger lesions or for those resulting in protein-losing enteropathy.

REFERENCES

1. Chisholm AJ, Hillkowitz P. Lymphangioma of the rectum. AmJ Surg 1932;17:281-2.

2. Helwig EB. Benign tumors of the large intestine: Incidence and distribution. Surg Gynecol Obstet 1943;76:419-26.

3. Stout AP. Tumors of the colon and rectum (excluding carcinoma and adenoma). In: Turell R, editor. Diseases of the Colon and Anorectum, 2nd ed. Philadelphia: Saunders, 1969, pp 295-311. 4. Kuramoto S, Sakai S, Tsuda K, et al. Lymphangioma of the large intestine: Report of a case. Dis Colon Rectum 1988;31: 900-5.

5. Kim KM, Choi KY, Lee A, Kim BK. Lymphangioma of large intestine: Report of ten cases with endoscopie and pathologic correlation. Gastrointest Endosc 2000;52:255-9.

6. Wang H-S, Chen W-S, Lin J-K, Li AF-Y. Diagnosis and treatment of cystic lymphangioma of the ascending colon by laparoscopic- assisted surgery: A case report. Chin Med J (Taipei) 1999;62:322-5.

7. Chung JH, Suh YL, Park IA, et al. A pathologic study of abdominal lymphangiomas. J Korean Med Sei 1999; 14:257-62.

8. Kochman ML, Wiersema MJ, Hawes RH, et al. Preoperative diagnosis of cystic lymphangioma of the colon by endoscopie ultrasound. Gastrointest Endosc 1997;45:204-6.

9. Irisawa A, Bhutani MS. Cystic lymphangioma of the colon: Endosonographic diagnosis with through-the-scope catheter miniprobe and determination of further management: Report of a case. Dis Colon Rectum 2001;44:1040-2.

10. Matsuda T, Matsutani T, Tsuchiya Y, et al. A clinical evaluation of lymphangioma of the large intestine: A case presentation of lymphangioma of the descending colon and a review of 279 Japanese cases. J Nippon Med Sch 2001;68:262-5.

11. Matsuba Y, Mizuiri H, Murata T, Niimi K. Adult intussusception due to lymphangioma of the colon. J Gastroenterol 2003; 38:181-5.

12. Arluk GM, Drachenberg C, Darwin P. Colonie cystic lymphangioma. Gastrointest Endosc 2004;60:98.

13. Von Wegner G. About lymphangiomata. Arch Klin Chirurg. 1877;20:642-707 [in German].

14. Beahrs OH, Judd ES Jr, Dockerty MB. Chylous cysts of the abdomen. Surg Clin North Am 1950;30:1081-96.

15. Berardi RS. Lymphangioma of the large intestine: Report of a case and review of the literature. Dis Colon Rectum 1974; 17: 265- 72.

16. Willis RA. The Borderland of Embryology and Pathology. London: Butterworth, 1958, pp 348-50.

17. Lowell EJ Jr. Cystic lymphangioma of sigmoid flexure: Report of a case. Dis Colon Rectum 1962;5:203-5.

18. Momma T, Ohkawa F, Aisawa T, et al. A case of lymphangioma cavernosum of the colon coexisted with early cancer of the rectum. Gastroenterol Endosc. 1977; 19:903-9.

KEVIN L. HUGUET, M.D.,* PHILIP P. METZGER, M.D.,* DAVID M. MENKE, M.D.t

From the *Department of Surgery and the tDepartment of Laboratory Medicine and Pathology,

Mayo Clinic, Jacksonville, Florida

Address correspondence and reprint requests to Philip P. Metzger, M.D., Department of Surgery, Mayo Clinic, 4500 San Pablo Road, Jacksonville, FL 32224.

Copyright Southeastern Surgical Congress Apr 2007

(c) 2007 American Surgeon, The. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

The Use of Spray Electrocautery to Control Presacral Bleeding: A Report of Four Cases

By Filippakis, George M Leandros, Manolis; Albanopoulos, Kostas; Genetzakis, Michael; Et al

Bleeding originating from the presacral venous plexus during pelvic operations is difficult to control, constituting a potentially life-threatening complication. Although suture ligatures, packing, and placement of tacks are established hemostatic techniques, they are often proved to be ineffective. We report a simple novel technique using spray diathermy for managing this severe complication. We have applied our method in four patients, two undergoing low anterior resection, and the others undergoing abdominoperineal resection for rectal cancer, that manifested severe presacral bleeding during rectal mobilization. Electrocautery at spray setting was applied slightly above the target bleeders at the presacral fascia, delivering a high- frequency electrical current in combination with drainage suction. In all cases, the method resulted in successful hemostasis. Applying spray electrocautery is a simple and effective method for controlling presacral bleeding. The advantages of using such a method instead of conventional hemostatic techniques include the option of varying the degree of haemostatic effect by altering the frequency and the volume of electric current. presacral bleeding is a troublesome and lifethreatening complication that is encountered during the mobilization of rectal tumors, especially where mesorectal resection cannot be accomplished using sharp dissection. Adjuvant radiation therapy, large tumors, or inadequate surgical training may result in damage to the presacral fascia, causing bleeding from the presacral venous plexus lying on the pelvic surface of the sacrum or from one to several large-caliber foramina of the sacral basivertebral veins.1- 2

Because of the inaccessible location of these vessels, the management of presacral bleeding has always been a challenge for surgeons. Measures of controlling such a hemorrhage mainly include tamponade by packing with or without hemostatic agents and the application of metallic thumbtacks.1-3 The application of clamps or sutures is usually ineffective and inadvisable because further damage with increased bleeding may be caused. Conventional coagulation is usually not recommended because it could also aggravate the previous damage to the fragile walls of a vein. Likewise, blind attempts to clamp the bleeding presacral veins exacerbate the bleeding by extending the tear in the thin-walled veins. Packing over the bleeding site to provide tamponade of the area can sometimes be effective, but often continuous hemorrhage may force surgeons into ligating both hypogastric arteries at their origin, even clamping the aorta for a couple of minutes, especially when profound bleeding is encountered.4^6

Bleeding from the presacral veins tends to be profuse and vigorous for several reasons. The inferior vena cava, the presacral veins, and the internal vertebral venous system, dilated under general anesthesia, act as a large venous “blood pool” in the pelvis because of the lack of functional valves. With the patient at the lithotomy position, hydrostatic pressure of this venous pool can reach two to three times the pressure of inferior vena cava. That means the highest hydrostatic pressure at the site of a distal presacral vein rupture is approximately two to three times the pressure in the inferior vena cava. Thus, rupture of even a small presacral vein may result in copious bleeding, resulting in hemorrhagic shock and even death.1- 3 Experimental studies1 have demonstrated that blood loss from cut ends of presacral veins measuring 2 to 4 mm in diameter can reach up to 1000 milliliters per minute, and an increase of the diameter of the vein by just 1 mm can increase the blood loss almost three-fold.

Materials and Methods

We applied our technique in four patients, two undergoing low anterior resection and the others undergoing abdominoperineal resection for rectal cancer who manifested severe presacral bleeding during rectal mobilization. All patients, two men and two women, underwent elective surgical excision by the same surgical team between 2003 and 2005 in our Department. The mean patient age was 67 (range, 6275) years. Mean intraoperative blood replacement was three (range, 2-6) units.

The type of diathermy we used was the Force FXCTM electrosurgical generator (Valleylab, Boulder, CO) unit, with the Valleylab adaptive REMTM system and Instant Response TM technology. This device operates with 390 kHz damped sinusoidal bursts with a repetition frequency of 30 to 57 kHz into 500 ohms at fulgurate setting and with 390 kHz damped sinusoidal bursts with a randomized repetition centered at 28 kHz at spray setting. For the latter, frequencies range from 21 to 35 kHz and the output is further modulated by a random 250 Hz envelope with variable duty cycle. During the described technique, monopolar diathermy was originally set and operated at Fulgurate-High setting (high crest factor) for initial noncontact coagulation and then on the spray setting.

Operative Technique and Results

In all four cases, during mobilization of the tumor, blind sharp and blunt dissection was performed because the lesion was densely adhered to the presacral fascia and the visibility was poor, resulting in profuse bleeding from the sacral venous plexus and the sacral foramina area. Rapid removal of the tumor was necessary to improve exposure.

The first temporizing measure in arresting bleeding was direct pressure over the bleeding site with a laparotomy pad. Once accumulated blood was aspirated, the area around the bleeders was swabbed with gauze. Then, while simultaneously withdrawing the laparotomy pad over the bleeding sites, electrocautery at spray setting was applied slightly above the presacral bleeders (Fig. 1). We used a high-frequency electrical current to coagulate all of the bleeding sites, and further packing was applied for 10 minutes.

Excepting one case where we applied the technique three times repeatedly, successful hemostasis was achieved on the first attempt. The mean intraoperative blood replacement need was 3 (range, 2-6) units. Postoperatively, no patient showed any evidence of ongoing blood loss. In addition, postoperatively, all patients manifested low back pain that was successfully managed using opioid analgesics and nonsteroid antiinflammatory drugs. This complication might be explained by the fact that spinal nerve roots in the sacral foramina lie in close proximity to the presacral venous plexus and all of these elements may be affected by heat transmitted via tissues during the appliance of spray electrocautery, causing thermal damage and pain postoperatively.7~12 However, in our study, no case of postoperative back pain proved significantly hard to control. After discharge, three of four patients req^jjred further mild analgesic treatment for 3 to 6 months, orally.

FIG. l. Presacral bleeding is controlled by application of electrocautery at spray setting over the bleeding vessel at a 3 to 5 mm distance, using a 90 degree angle of approach. (A) Drain suction over the bleeding site. (B) Monopolar diathermy at spray stetting. (C) Bleeding site.

Discussion

Surgical dissection of the retrorectal space during mobilization of the rectum shall be done in the plane between the perirectal fascia anteriorly, and the pelvic fascia posteriorly. The latter covers the presacral venous plexus, making it invisible to the surgeon’s eye. The presacral venous plexus is formed from the two lateral sacral veins, the middle sacral vein, and the veins connecting them. These connecting vessels are disposed perpendicular to the middle sacral and lateral sacral veins in a stair-like fashion (Fig. 2). The presacral venous plexus is connected with the internal vertebral venous system through the basivertebral veins that pass through the sacral foramina and is also connected to the internal iliac veins. The presacral venous plexus courses into the pelvic fascia, covering the anterior aspect of the sacrum that is constituted by the presacral fascia, the piriformis and coccygeal muscle fascia, and the sacrospinous ligament.7″9

Mobilization of the rectum is usually performed with minimal bleeding, but occasionally, inadvertent breaching of the presacral fascia may result in hemorrhage from the presacral venous plexus or basivertebral veins.4’13,14 Because of the retrofascial course of the presacral venous plexus and its plexiform disposition,10-12,15, 16 occurrence of such a hemorrhage is always a risk during pelvic operations. Presacral veins lacerate easily because their adventitia is intimately blended with the sacral periosteum at the margins of the sacral foramina.1 Thus, blindly stripping the posterior surface of the rectum from the hollow of the sacrum by blunt dissection, from the abdominal or perineal approach, leads to venous injury from lifting of the presacral fascia together with the periosteum of the sacrum.

FIG. 2. Presacral venous plexus is formed from two lateral sacral veins (1), a middle sacral vein (2), and connecting veins (3). These connecting vessels are disposed perpendicular to the middle sacral and lateral sacral veins in a stair-like fashion. The presacral venous plexus is connected with the internal vertebral venous system through the basivertebral veins that pass through the sacral foramina. Conventional hemostatic techniques can be often ineffective in controlling severe presacral bleeding. Suturing and cauterization usually exacerbate bleeding,15 whereas ligation of internal iliac artery would have no effect on the hydrostatic pressure within the sacral venous system, resulting in persisting hemorrhage. Moreover, internal iliac artery ligation has been reported to result in necrosis of buttock and bladder.17 Additionally, ligation of the internal iliac veins will obstruct venous drainage from the pelvic, gluteal, and obturator veins, and consequently, the blood will be directed to the injured vein through the lateral sacral veins, thus exacerbating the bleeding.

There are two basic approaches in confronting severe presacral bleeding. The first technique involves the use of tamponade, removable after stabilization.4 However, discontinuation of tamponade is associated with the risk for secondary hemorrhage. Moreover, pelvic packing and inflatable balloon devices are established means of arresting hemorrhage.4 Inflatable devices might be left in situ to reinflate. Even an expandable breast implant sizer has been used successfully.18

The second alternative includes various means of bleeder occlusion. Probably the largest reported experience is with occlude pins or thumbtacks.5’16- 19 Using titanium thumbtacks is not always effective10 -5- 20 because of bad conforming to the irregular contour of the sacrum, which may result in detaching of the thumbtacks.21’22 Furthermore, multiple bleeders will require additional pins. A potential pitfall in this technique is that pins cannot be overlapped to control bleeders if the hemorrhage is diffuse or originates from the sacral foramina.5 The use of combined absorbable hemostatic gelatin sponges and cyanoacrylate glue, as well as using hemoclips and microfi&rillar collagen, has been also reported.23 Bone wax13 and electrocautery through a free rectus abdominis muscle fragment24’25 are also reported to be effective. During the latter technique, temperature increases gradually and coagulation is attained because of the larger contact area between the bleeding point and the muscle fragment.

In this study, we described a simple alternative technique using spray electrocautery. This technique has been already successfully applied on four patients in our department. Monopolar electrocautery device at the spray setting has been used as the simplest coagulation electrical system, generating a direct current that operates between 200 kHz and 3.3 MHz, well above the range where neuromuscular stimulation or electrocution could occur. With the coagulation mode on the generator, tissue fulguration is achieved by using electrical arcs (sparks). The sparks jump from the electrode across an air gap to the tissue, which causes clotting of blood and destruction of tissue with no cutting effect. The coagulation current can produce spikes of voltage as high as 9000 volts. The tissue is heated when the waveform spikes, and cools down in between spikes, thus producing coagulation of the cell. The correct method for achieving fulguration when using coagulation is to hold the tip of the active electrode slightly above the target tissue in a 90 degree angle.

The effectiveness of this technique may be related to the fact that a larger contact area between the bleeding area and the electrode is achieved. Moreover, if bleeding originates from the basivertebral veins that pass through the sacral foramina, spray electrocautery can effectively reach and coagulate the nonvisible bleeding points. The advantages of using spray electrocautery instead of conventional hemostatic techniques include the option of varying the degree of hemostatic effect by altering the frequency and the volume of electric current. Additionally, spray electrocautery is by far more cost-effective than all of the other hemostatic agents or techniques, and is readily available in all operating rooms. The only complication of this technique was sacral pain, which required oral analgesics for 3 to 6 months postoperatively.

REFERENCES

1. Wang QY, Shi WJ, Zhao YR, et al. New concepts in severe presacral hemorrhage during proctectomy. Arch Surg 1985; 120: 1013- 20.

2. Barras JP, Fellmann T. Massive hemorrhage from presacral veins during resection of the rectum. HeIv Chir Acta 1992;59: 335-9.

3. Hill AD, Menzies-Gov N, Darzi A. Methods of controlling presacral bleeding. J Am Coll Surg 1994; 178:183^t.

4. Zama N, Fazio VW, Jagelman DG, et al. Efficacy of pelvic packing in maintaining hemostasis after rectal excision for cancer. Dis Colon Rectum 1988;31:923-8.

5. Stolfi VM, Milsom JW, Lavery IC, et al. Newly designed occluder pin for presacral hemorrhage. Dis Colon Rectum 1992; 35:166- 9.

6. Khan FA, Fang DT, Nivatvongs S. Management of presacral bleeding during rectal resection. Surg Gynecol Obstet 1987;165: 275- 6.

7. Diop M, Parratte B, Tatu L, et al. Mesorectum: The surgical value of an anatomical approach. Surg Radiol Anat 2003;25: 290-304.

8. Muntean V. The surgical anatomy of the fasciae and the fascial spaces related to the rectum. Surg Radiol Anat 1999;21: 319-24.

9. Sato K, Sato T. The vascular and neuronal composition of the lateral ligament of the rectum and the rectosacral fascia. Surg Radiol Anat 1991; 13:17-22.

10. Arnaud JP, Tuech JJ, Pessaux P. Management of presacral venous bleeding with the use of thumbtacks. Dig Surg 2000; 17: 651- 2.

11. Harrison JL, Hooks VH, Pearl RK. Muscle fragment welding for control of massive presacral bleeding during rectal mobilization. Dis Colon Rectum 2003;46:1115-7.

12. Pastner B, Orr JWJ. Intractable venous sacral hemorrhage: Use of stainless steel thumbtacks to obtain hemostasis. Am J Obstet Gynecol 1990; 162:452.

13. Qinao W, Weijin S, Youren Z, et al. New concepts in severe pre-sacral hemorrhage during proctectomy. Arch Surg 1985;120: 1013- 20.

14. Bacon HE, Gutierrez RR. Cancer of the rectum and colon: Review of 2,402 personal cases. Dis Colon Rectum 1967;10:61-4.

15. Rotondano G, Romano G. The use of thumbtacks in massive presacral bleeding. Am J Gastroenterol 2000;95:1102.

16. Nivatvongs S, Fang DT. The use of thumbtacks to stop massive presacral hemorrhage. Dis Colon Rectum 1986;29: 589-90.

17. Tajes RV. Ligation of the hypogastric arteries and its complications in resection of cancer of the rectum. Am J Gastroenterol 1956;26:612-8.

18. Braley SC, Schneider PD, Bold RJ, et al. Controlled tamponade of severe presacral venous hemorrhage: Use of a breast implant sizer. Dis Colon Rectum 2002;45:140-2.

19. Timmons MC, Kohler MF, Addison WA. Thumbtack use for control of pre-sacral bleeding, with description of an instrument for thumbtack application. Obstet Gynecol 1991;78:313-5.

20. Patsner B, Ore JW Jr. Intractable venous hemorrha^: use of steel thumbtacks to obtain hemostasis. Am J Obstet Gynecol 1990;162:452.

21. Cosman BC, Lackides GA, Fisher DP, Eskenazi LB. Use of tissue expander for tamponade of presacral hemorrhage: report of a case. Dis Colon Rectum 1994;37:723-6.

22. Suh M, Shaikh JR, Dixon AM, Smialek JE. Failure of thumbtacks used in control of presacral hemorrhage. Am J Forensic Med Pathol 1992;13:324-5.

23. Losanoff JE, Richman BW, Jones JW. Cyanoacrylate adhesive in management of severe presacral bleeding. Dis Colon Rectum 2002;45:1118-9.

24. Xu J, Lin J. Control of presacral hemorrhage with electrocautery through a muscle fragment pressed on the bleeding vein. J Am Coll Surg 1994;179:351-2.

25. Remzi FH, Oncel M, Fazio VW. Muscle tamponade to control pre- sacral venous bleeding: Report of two cases. Dis Colon Rectum 2002;45:1109-11.

GEORGE M. FILIPPAKIS, M.D., PH.D., MANOLIS LEANDROS, M.D., ph.d., KOSTAS ALBANOPOULOS, M.D., ph.d., MICHAEL GENETZAKIS, M.D., EMMANUEL LAGOUDIANAKIS, M.D., NIKOS PARARAS, M.D., ph.d., MANOUSOS M. KONSTANDOULAKIS, M.D., PH.D.

From the First Department of Propaedeutic General Surgery, Athens University Medical School,

Hippocrateion Hospital, Q. Sophia 114, 11527, Athens, Greece

Address correspondence and reprint requests to Michael Genetzakis, M.D., Resident in General Surgery, Kononos 31 Strasse P.C., 11634, Athens, Greece.

Copyright Southeastern Surgical Congress Apr 2007

(c) 2007 American Surgeon, The. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Significance of Tumor Capsular Invasion in Well-Differentiated Thyroid Carcinomas

By Furlan, Julio C Bedard, Yvan C; Rosen, Irving B

This study examines the influence of tumor capsular invasion on the biological behavior of papillary (PTC) and follicular thyroid carcinoma (FTC) and the prognosis of surgically treated patients. This retrospective cohort study included 350 cases of PTC or FTC from a university teaching hospital. Patient charts were randomly selected and reviewed. The study population was divided into PTC and FTC groups. Each group was subdivided into CI+ (with tumor capsular invasion) and CI- subgroups (without tumor capsule or without capsular invasion). The long-term prognosis was assessed using the American Joint Committee on Cancer pTNM staging and the prognostic index was elaborated by the European Organization for Research and Treatment of Cancer. There were 284 women and 66 men (ages 19-89 years, mean of 44) with an incidence of 53.1 per cent for CI+ tumors. There were no significant differences between the PTC subgroups regarding the short-term clinical outcome and the long- term prognosis. Although patients with CI+ FTC showed lower incidence of lymph node metastasis than patients with CI- FTC, the FTC subgroups were comparable regarding the short-term clinical outcome and the long-term prognosis. Our results suggest that presence of tumor capsular invasion does not adversely influence biological behavior or survival of PTC or FTC. Moreover, the presence of tumor capsular invasion appears to not have significance for the long-term prognosis of patients with PTC or FTC. THYROID CANCER HAS been steadily increasing in Canada over the last three decades.1 The National Cancer Institute of Canada estimated 3100 new cases of thyroid cancer from which 170 deaths are expected in Canada in 2005.2 Canadian statistics also indicate that thyroid cancer has the highest increased incidence, whereas mortality from thyroid cancer decreased from the year 1993 to 2000. Generally speaking, this picture reflects the indolent course of papillary thyroid carcinomas (PTC) and follicular thyroid carcinomas (FTC), which are the most frequent histologie types of thyroid cancer (70%-80% and 10%-15%, respectively) with 10-year survival rates of approximately 90 per cent to 95 per cent and 70 per cent to 95 per cent, respectively.3,4

Unfortunately, some cases locally recur, and the cancers metastasize to locoregional lymph nodes and/ or distant organs and the patients die. Characterization of clinical and histologie features of PTC and FTC associated with adverse behavior has been a great challenge for scientists and clinicians. Several prognostic factors for PTC and FTC have been proposed such as age, sex, histology, tumor differentiation, size of the primary tumor, DNA euploidy, CD97, Ecadherin, telomerase activity, capsular invasion, and angioinvasion. However, there is little agreement on the importance of most of those clinical and morphologic variables on the prognosis of patients with PTC or FTC.4-5

This study was undertaken to examine the potential influence of presence of histologie tumor capsular invasion on the biological behavior of PTC and FTC, and to evaluate the prognosis for patients surgically treated for CI+ PTC or CI+ FTC in comparison with their respective CI- tumor counterparts.

Patients and Methods

This retrospective cohort study included 350 patients who underwent thyroidectomy for PTC or FTC from 1964 to 2000 at a university teaching hospital in Canada. Patient charts were randomly selected and reviewed. The study population was divided into PTC and FTC groups. Additionally, both groups were subdivided into patients with capsular invasive tumor (CI+ subgroup) and individuals with tumor without capsular invasion or without any tumor capsule (CIsubgroup). Therapeutic procedures were essentially selected based on demographics, clinical, and other histologic parameters, but not the presence or absence of tumor capsular invasion.

Data on demographics (age and sex), treatment features (extent of thyroidectomy, neck dissection, and adjuvant therapy), histopathological findings (lymph node metastasis, extrathyroidal invasion, angioinvasion, tumor size, and multicentricity), clinical outcomes (distant metastasis, recurrence, and postoperative elevated thyroglobulin level), and disease-free survival were collected for each subgroup of the FTC and PTC groups.

The diagnosis of PTC is essentially based on different features, including papillary architecture, psammona bodies, and cytologie characteristics.4 The differentiation between follicular thyroid adenomas and carcinomas depends on demonstration of angioinvasion and/or tumor capsular invasion.6

The patients were followed for a mean of approximately 4 years. Because that period of time is considered a short-term follow-up for PTC and FTC, we also estimated the long-term prognosis using the American Joint Committee on Cancer (AJCC) pTNM staging and the prognostic index elaborated by the European Organization for Research and Treatment of Cancer (E.O.R.T.C.; Table 1).7, 8

Data were analyzed using the chi-squared test, Fisher’s exact test, Student’s t test, and Mann-Whitney’s rank sum test. In addition, the cumulative survival was estimated according to Kaplan- Meier and Cox regression analyses associated with log-rank test. All statistical analyses were carried out using SPSS software for Windows (version 11.0; SPSS, Chicago, IL). Significance was assumed at P

Results

There were 350 patients (284 women and 66 men, age 19-89 years with a mean of 44.2 years) who underwent thyroidectomy for PTC (86%) or FTC (14%). Histologie tumor capsular invasion was present in 53.1 per cent in this series. Significantly higher incidence of CI+ tumors was observed in FTC (73.5%) than in PTC groups (49.8%; P = 0.003). There was no death related to thyroid cancer in this series.

PTC Group

Patients with PTC (245 women and 56 men, age 18-89 years with a mean of 44.3) were followed postoperatively for a mean of 41.9 months (1-420 months). There were no significant differences between CI+ PTC subgroup (n = 150) and CI- PTC subgroup (n = 151) with regard to age (44.1 +-1.3 years vs 44.5 +-1.2 years, respectively; P = 0.596) and sex distribution (82% men vs 80.8% women, respectively; P = 0.904).

TABLE 1. The AJCC Staging and the Prognostic Index from the E.O.R.T.C. for the PTC and FTC Thyroid Carcinomas

Patients with CI+ PTC were treated more radically than the CI- PTC subgroup with respect to extent of thyroidectomy and neck dissection, but there were no significant differences between the PTC subgroups for adjuvant therapy (Table 2). The short-term clinical outcome in the CI+ PTC subgroup was comparable with the CI- PTC subgroup (Table 2) after similar mean periods of follow-up (41.6 months vs 42.2 months, respectively; P = 0.831). There were no significant differences between the PTC subgroups for disease-free survival after treatment based on the Cox regression analysis (Fig. 1). Of note, disease-free survival reflects absence of recurrence, distant metastasis, and persistent postoperative elevated thyroglobulin level during the follow-up time.

Although both PTC subgroups showed similar incidences of tumor multicentricity and lymph node metastasis, the CI+ PTC subgroup had larger, more angioinvasive, and more locally invasive tumors than the CI- PTC subgroup (Table 3). There were no significant differences between the PTC subgroups for longterm prognosis based on the AJCC pTNM staging and E.O.R.T.C. prognostic index (Fig. 2).

FTC Group

There were 39 women and 10 men with FTC (ages 23-89 years with a mean of 43.2 years) who were postoperatively followed from 1 to 231 months (mean of 67.1 months). The CI+ FTC subgroup (n = 36) was similar to the CI- FTC subgroup (n = 13) with regard to age (44.7 +- 2.4 years vs 38.9 +- 2.9 years, respectively; P = 0.196) and sex distribution (80.6% men vs 76.9% women, respectively; P = 1).

TABLE 2. Treatment Features and Clinical Outcomes of the PTC Subgroups

FIG. 1. Disease-free survival in patients with tumor capsular invasive (CI+) and noninvasive (CI-) PTC. There was no significant difference between both PTC subgroups based on the log rank test (P = 0.388).

There were no significant differences between the FTC subgroups for extent of thyroidectomy and adjuvant therapy (Table 4). Of note, there was a trend for a higher frequency of neck dissection in the CI- FTC subgroup in comparison with the CI+ FTC subgroup, even though this did not reach significance (P = 0.061 ; Table 4). The CI+ FTC and CI- FTC subgroups had similar short-term clinical outcomes after comparable postoperative periods of follow-up (70.3 +- 11 months vs 58.4 +- 19.2 months; P = 0.408; Table 4). Using Cox regression analysis, no significant differences between the FTC subgroups were found with respect to disease-free survival after surgery (Fig. 3).

TABLE 3. Histopathological Findings of the PTC Subgroups

FIG. 2. Prognosis for the capsular invasive (gray bars) and noncapsule invasive (black bars) PTC subgroups based on the AJCC pTNM Staging (A) and the prognostic index from the E.O.R.T.C. (B).

There were no significant differences between the FTC subgroups with regard to tumor size, tumor multicentricity, extrathyroidal invasion, angioinvasion, and lymph node metastasis (Table 5). However, the CI- FTC subgroup showed a significantly higher incidence of nodal involvement than the CI+ FTC subgroup (23.1% vi 2.8%, respectively; P = 0.052). There were no significant differences in term of longterm prognosis between the FTC subgroups according to the AJCC pTNM staging and the E.O.R.T.C. prognostic index (Fig. 4). Discussion

The results of this retrospective cohort study suggest that the presence of histologic tumor capsular invasion may not adversely affect short-term clinical outcomes of patients with PTC or FTC. Of note, CI- FTC was associated with a higher incidence of lymph node metastasis than CI+ FTC. The presence of tumor capsular invasion does not appear to affect the longterm prognosis of patients with PTC or FTC based on the assessments using the AJCC pTNM staging and the E.O.R.T.C. prognostic index. Those results suggest that presence of tumor capsular invasion is not a significant independent factor for morbidity or mortality related to the cancer.

Diagnosis of Tumor Capsule Invasion

The identification of tumor capsular invasion in the FTC has received more attention than in the PTC because the differentiation between follicular adenomas and carcinomas relies on the demonstration of angioinvasion and/or tumor capsular invasion.6 More specifically, the latter raises issues concerning the interobserver and intraobserver reliability because the criteria for tumor capsular invasion are not always easily applicable.9 Analyzing follicular neoplasms of the thyroid gland, Lang et al.10 demonstrated the importance of sampling the tumor because the diagnosis of cancer is directly correlated, in a linear fashion, to the number of tissue blocks that are examined. Using a three- dimensional reconstruction model for tumor tissues and capsules from serial sections, Aida et al.11 reported that most capsule invasion in FTC may not be true invasion. Therefore, demonstration of capsular invasion is sometimes technically difficult, which may bias the analysis on the influence of capsular invasion on the post- treatment outcome of patients with PTC or FTC.

TABLE 4. Treatment Features and Clinical Outcomes of the FTC Subgroups

FIG. 3. Disease-free survival in patients with tumor capsular invasive (CI+) and noninvasive (CI-) FTC. There were no significant differences based on the log rank test (P = 0.175).

Significance of Tumor Encapsulation

The presence of histologic capsule invasion was observed in approximately half of our study population, with a higher incidence in FTC (73.5%) than in PTC (49.8%). The remaining cases had no tumor capsule or the capsule was not invaded by the tumor. This finding is comparable with previous studies that reported the absence of tumor capsule in 10.3 per cent to 50 per cent of PTC and FTC.12-15 The tumor encapsulation was associated with reduced patient survival in a univariate analysis by Besic et al.,16 even though tumor encapsulation was not confirmed as an independent prognostic factor in the multivariate analysis. Akslen et al.13 showed that absence of tumor capsule had no impact on prognosis of patients with PTC whatsoever. Evans17 also found that thyroid neoplasms with tumor capsule associated with cytological characteristics of PTC without invasion showed benign behavior during a minimum period of follow- up of 10 years. Mirallie et al.14 reported that absence of tumor capsule was a predictive factor for node involvement in patients with PTC. Carcangiu et al.18 demonstrated that lymph node metastasis was more frequent in patients with nonencapsulated PTC than patients with encapsulated PTC.

A similar relationship between tumor encapsulation and clinical outcome has been reported in studies on cancers from other sites. The presence of tumor capsule was associated with good prognosis in hepatocellular carcinomas and liver metastasis from colorectal cancer.19 Accordingly, it was hypothesized that the capsular formation serves as a mechanical and chemical barrier to local invasion by malignant cells.19

Significance of Tumor Capsular Invasion

Our results demonstrated that the presence of tumor capsule invasion was associated with larger, more locally invasive, and angioinvasive tumors in the PTC group at diagnosis. There was no significant association of presence of tumor capsule invasion with tumor size, tumor multicentricity, extrathyroidal invasion, and angioinvasion in individuals with FTC at diagnosis. In our study, short-term clinical outcome was unaffected by the presence of tumor capsule invasion in patients with PTC or FTC during the mean follow- up time of approximately 4 years. Also, there were no significant differences between patients with CI+ PTC and CI- PTC with regard to disease-free survival. Similarly, patients with CI+ FTC had similar freedisease survival than patients with CI- FTC in our study.

TABLE 5. Histopathological Findings of the FTC Subgroups

FIG. 4. Prognosis for the capsular invasive (gray bars) and noncapsule invasive (black bars) FTC subgroups based on the AJCC pTNM Staging (A) and the prognostic index from the E.O.R.T.C. (B).

Previous studies also indicated that tumor capsular invasion is not a predictive factor of recurrence after complete ablation for well-differentiated thyroid carcinoma.20 Van Heerden et al.6 reported that FTC that was diagnosed on the basis of presence of tumor capsule invasion alone behaves in a benign fashion without distant metastasis or death related to the cancer. Besic et al.16 reported that the presence of tumor capsule invasion appears to be significantly associated with reduced patient survival in a univariate analysis, but this was not confirmed by multivariate analysis. Nonetheless, widely invasive FTC has been associated with a higher incidence of morbidity, including distant metastases and local recurrence, and mortality in numerous investigations.12, 21- 23 Zidan et al.24 reported that more patients had tumor capsular invasion and less nodal involvement in follicular variant of PTC than patients with pure PTC. A number of previous studies reported that patients with minimally invasive FTCs, characterized by evidence of a focal and superficial angioinvasion and/or tumor capsule invasion, had good clinical outcomes and excellent long- term prognosis.21, 22, 25, 26 Other studies demonstrated that recurrence, distant metastasis, and mortality were not significantly correlated with the extent of tumor capsule invasion.27,28

In our study, there were no significant differences between CI+ PTC and CI- PTC for prognosis using the AJCC pTNM staging and E.O.R.T.C. prognostic index. Similarly, there were no significant differences between CI+ FTC and CI- FTC with respect to prognosis using the AJCC pTNM staging and E.O.R.T.C. prognostic index.

Limitations

One potential limitation of our study is the shortterm follow-up for most of the cases. This is a common problem of several retrospective studies that may limit their conclusions in terms of external validity. In reality, the need for follow-up time of minimum of 10 years makes it almost unfeasible for prospective studies focused on well-differentiated studies. Given those limitations, we sought to evaluate the long-term prognosis using the AJCC pTNM staging and E.O.R.T.C. prognostic index. Although several classifications with different variables have been developed to define risk groups of thyroid cancer, only few prognostic scoring systems have been proved as reliable predictors of survival in different populations.5, 29-33 The AJCC pTNM staging and E.O.R.T.C. prognostic index have been used in FTC and PTC, even though there are some potential limitations in terms of generalizability and reliability.7,8-29

Another important limitation inherent in our retrospective cohort study refers to the difficulty of precisely classifying FTC in different degrees of capsular invasiveness as characterized in previous studies. 12,21-23 jnuSi we cannot rule out that widely invasive FTC is more aggressive than minimally invasive FTC. Moreover, we were unable to compare the pathological, clinical, and prognostic characteristics of patients with widely invasive PTC with patients with FTC without tumor capsular invasion or patients with FTC without tumor capsule. Finally, we could not precisely distinguish patients with tumor capsule without invasion from patients without tumor capsule in the PTC and FTC groups based on the tissue reports.

Conclusions

Our results suggest that the presence of tumor capsule invasion is a histopathological finding without significance for the short- term clinical outcome or for the long-term survival of patients with PTC or FTC. However, CI+ PTC was associated with tumors with larger size, more frequent local invasion, and more often vascular invasive in our study. The absence of tumor capsule invasion or the absence of tumor capsule appears to be suggestive of susceptibility for nodal involvement in cases of FTC. Further investigation is required to confirm those suggestions.

Acknowledgments

We thank Mrs. M. Alien for her assistance with the preparation of this manuscript. This study was supported by a grant from The Head and Neck Cancer Foundation.

REFERENCES

1. Liu S, Semenciw R, Ugnat AM, Mao Y. Increasing thyroid cancer incidence in Canada, 1970-1996: Time trends and ageperiod-cohort effects. Br J Cancer 2001;85:1335-9.

2. National Cancer Institute of Canada. Canadian Cancer Statistics for the Year 2005. Toronto: National Cancer Institute of Canada, 2005, pp 21-51.

3. Busnardo B, De Vido D. The epidemiology and etiology of differentiated thyroid carcinoma. Biomed Pharmacother 2000;54:322- 6.

4. Gimm O. Thyroid cancer. Cancer Lett 2001;163:143-56.

5. Mannequin P, Liehn JC, Delisle MJ. Multifactorial analysis of survival in thyroid cancer. Pitfalls of applying the results of published studies to another population. Cancer 1986;58:1749-55. 6. van Heerden JA, Hay ID, Goellner JR, et al. Follicular thyroid carcinoma with capsular invasion alone: A nonthreatening malignancy. Surgery 1992;112:1130-6.

7. Fleming ID. AJCC Cancer Staging Manual. Philadelphia: Lippincott-Raven, 1997.

8. Byar DP, Green SB, Dor P, et al. A prognostic index for thyroid carcinoma. A study of the E.O.R.T.C. Thyroid Cancer Cooperative Group. Eur J Cancer 1979:15:1033-41.

9. Hirokawa M, Carney JA, Goellner JR, et al. Observer variation of encapsulated follicular lesions of the thyroid gland. Am J Surg Pathol 2002;26:1508-14.

10. Lang W, Georgii A, Stauch G, Kienzle E. The differentiation of atypical adenomas and encapsulated follicular carcinomas in the thyroid gland. Virchows Arch A Pathol Anat Histol 1980; 385:125-41.

11. Aida N, Yamada N, Asano G, Tanaka S. 3-D analysis of vascular and capsular invasion in thyroid follicular carcinoma. Pathol Int 2001;51:425-30.

12. Jorda M, Gonzalez-Campora R, Mora J, et al. Prognostic factors in follicular carcinoma of the thyroid. Arch Pathol Lab Med 1993;117:631-5.

13. Akslen LA, Myking AO, Salvesen H, Varhaug JE. Prognostic importance of various clinicopathological features in papillary thyroid carcinoma. Eur J Cancer 1992;29A:44-51.

14. Mirallie E, Sagan C, Hamy A, et al. Predictive factors for node involvement in papillary thyroid carcinoma. Univariate and multivariate analyses. Eur J Cancer 1999;35:420-3.

15. Paessler M, Kreisel FH, LiVolsi VA, et al. Can we rely on pathologic parameters to define conservative treatment of papillary thyroid carcinoma? Int J Surg Pathol 2002; 10:267-72.

16. Besic N, Auersperg M, Golouh R. Prognostic factors in follicular carcinoma of the thyroid: A multivariate survival analysis. Eur J Surg Oncol 1999;25:599-605.

17. Evans HL. Encapsulated papillary neoplasms of the thyroid. A study of 14 cases followed for a minimum of 10 years. Am J Surg Pathol 1987;11:592-7.

18. Carcangiu ML, Zampi G, Pupi A, et al. Papillary carcinoma of the thyroid. A clinicopathologic study of 241 cases treated at the University of Florence, Italy. Cancer 1985;55:805-28.

19. Lunevicius R, Nakanishi H, Ito S, et al. Clinicopathological significance of fibrotic capsule formation around liver metastasis from colorectal cancer. J Cancer Res CHn Oncol 2001; 127:193-9.

20. Grigsby PW, Baglan K, Siegel BA. Surveillance of patients to detect recurrent thyroid carcinoma. Cancer 1999;85:945-51.

21. Goldstein NS, Czako P, Neill JS. Metastatic minimally invasive (encapsulated) follicular and Hurthle cell thyroid carcinoma: A study of 34 patients. Mod Pathol 2000; 13:123-30.

22. Gemsenjager E, Heitz PU, Seifert B, et al. Differentiated thyroid carcinoma. Follow-up of 264 patients from one institution for up to 25 years. Swiss Med WkIy 2001;131:157-63.

23. Lo CY, Chan WF, Lam KY, Wan KY. Follicular thyroid carcinoma: The role of histology and staging systems in predicting survival. Ann Surg 2005;242:708-15.

24. Zidan J, Karen D, Stein M, et al. Pure versus follicular variant of papillary thyroid carcinoma: Clinical features, prognostic factors, treatment, and survival. Cancer 2003;97:1181-5.

25. Sanders LE, Silverman M. Follicular and Hurthle cell carcinoma: Predicting outcome and directing therapy. Surgery 1998; 124:967-74.

26. Thompson LD, Wieneke JA, Paal E, et al. A clinicopathologic study of minimally invasive follicular carcinoma of the thyroid gland with a review of the English literature. Cancer 2001;91:505- 24.

27. Ozaki O, Ito K, Sugino K. Clinico-pathologic study of pulmonary metastasis of differentiated thyroid carcinoma: Age-, sex- , and histology-matched case-control study. Int Surg 1993;78: 218- 20.

28. DeGroot LJ, Kaplan EL, Shukla MS, et al. Morbidity and mortality in follicular thyroid cancer. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1995;80:2946-53.

29. Dean DS, Hay ID. Prognostic indicators in differentiated thyroid carcinoma. Cancer Control 2000;7:229-39.

30. D’Avanzo A, Ttuarte P, Treseler P, et al. Prognostic scoring systems in patients with follicular thyroid cancer: A comparison of different staging systems in predicting the patient outcome. Thyroid 2004;14:453-8.

31. Hundahl SA, Fleming ID, Fremgen AM, Menck HR. A National Cancer Data Base report on 53,856 cases of thyroid carcinoma treated in the U.S., 1985-1995. Cancer 1998;83:2638-48.

32. Davis NL, Bugis SP, McGregor GI, Germann E. An evaluation of prognostic scoring systems in patients with follicular thyroid cancer. Am J Surg 1995; 170:476-80.

33. Voutilainen PE, Siironen P, Franssila KO, et al. AMES, MACIS and TNM prognostic classifications in papillary thyroid carcinoma. Anticancer Res 2003;23:4283-8.

JULIO C. FURLAN, M.D., M.B.A., PH.D.,*t YVAN C. BEDARD, M.D., M.D.,[double dagger] IRVING B. ROSEN, M.D.*

From the *Oepartment of Surgery, Mount Sinai Hospital, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ontario, Canada;

the [dagger] Department of Surgery, Division of Neurosurgery, Toronto Western Hospital, University of Toronto,

Toronto, Ontario, Canada; and the [double dagger] Department of Laboratory Medicine and Pathobiology, Mount Sinai

Hospital, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ontario, Canada

Oral presentations in the 2004 Canadian Surgery Forum, September 9-12, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada; and in the 76th Annual Meeting of the American Thyroid Association, September 29October 3, 2004, Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada.

Address correspondence and reprint requests to Dr. Julio C. Furlan, Toronto Western Hospital, 399 Bathurst Street, McL 12-407, Toronto, Ontario, Canada M5T 2S8.

Copyright Southeastern Surgical Congress May 2007

(c) 2007 American Surgeon, The. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Partial Cholecystectomy As a Safe and Viable Option in the Emergency Treatment of Complex Acute Cholecystitis: A Case Series and Review of the Literature

By Soleimani, Mehrdad Mehrabi, Arianeb; Mood, Zhoobin A; Fonouni, Hamidreza; Et al

Partial cholecystectomy (PC) is an alternative choice to standard cholecystectomy in situations with increased risk of Calot’s components injury. We reported our experience with the patients treated with PC and reviewed the literature. Fifty-four patients with complex acute cholecystitis underwent PC, including conventional partial cholecystectomy (CPC; n = 48) and laparoscopic partial cholecystectomy (LPC; n = 6). The clinical diagnosis was verified by ultrasonography. In addition, we reviewed 1190 published cases (1972-2005) who underwent a “nonconventional” surgery for severe cholecystitis, including cholecystostomy, CPC, or LPC. Review of the literature, including our cases, showed a male:female ratio of 1.3:1. The major operative indication was severe acute cholecystitis. Procedures included cholecystostomy (65.8%) and PC (34.2%). In the follow-up (n = 1190), biliary leak (4.8%), retained stones (4.6%), recurrent symptoms (2.3%), wound infections (1.9%), persistent biliary fistula (0.9%), and prolonged biliary drainage (0.2%) were found, with an overall mortality rate of 9.4 per cent. In 133 patients, because of postoperative complications (e.g., recurrent symptoms, remaining common bile duct stones, or persistence of bile fistula), reoperation was necessary, including 121 cases (90.1%) of cholecystectomy, whereas the other 11 patients underwent other procedures such as common bile duct exploration or closure of the fistula. The surgical trend for complex acute cholecystitis treatment has been changed from only cholecystostomy to a spectrum of cholecystostomy, CPC, and LPC with the progressive increase of PC. The proportion of the LPC compared with CPC has also increased during recent years. It seems that PC is a safe procedure for treating complicated acute cholecystitis. Whether the indication and need for alternative techniques to standard cholecystectomy is changing should be evaluated in future studies. THE DIAGNOSIS OF ACUTE cholecystitis as a common cause of the acute abdomen was distinctly improved with the development of ultrasonography and hepatobiliary scanning.1 An estimated 10 per cent of people have gallstones, and as many as one-third of them develop acute cholecystitis. Cholecystectomy for recurrent biliary colic or acute cholecystitis is one of the most common major surgical procedures performed by general surgeons, resulting in approximately 500,000 operations annually in the United States. More than 90 per cent of patients with acute cholecystitis have a complete remission within 1 to 4 days.2 However, many patients require surgery or develop some complications. Patients with acalculous cholecystitis may have a mortality rate ranging from 1 per cent to 46 per cent, which far exceeds the expected mortality rate observed in patients with calculous cholecystitis.3-5 To prevent life-threatening complications, prompt diagnosis and surgical treatment are essential. The attitude of surgeons has changed from past (medical treatment for a few weeks before operation) to now (cholecystectomy as soon as possible) in the management of cholecystitis.6-8 In performing a cholecystectomy in severe inflammation and fibrosis, portal hypertension, and Mirizzi’s syndrome, the main danger is damaging the main bile ducts or aberrant hepatic arteries during dissection of Calot’s triangle. These situations make identification of anatomical structures difficult. Many kinds of salvation have been found, such as medical treatment and operation after several weeks, cholecystostomy, conventional partial cholecystectomy (CPC), and recently, laparoscopic partial cholecystectomy (LPC). Cholecystostomy may be advisable for the acutely inflamed gallbladder that has become a phlegmonous mass. It might be warranted in the very ill patient with empyema of the gallbladder, severe concomitant disease, or sepsis (patients in ASA IV status).9, 10 However, a second definitive procedure may be necessary later.11 The PC technique has simplified removal of the difficult gallbladder, and the procedure avoids dissection in Calot’s triangle and it minimizes the risk of injury to bile duct and hepatic artery. It makes control of bleeding easier11-13 and avoids a second operation with a long recovery period.12,14,15 In addition, it can be performed in any small hospital with low cost, and surgeons do not need to use specific modern instruments. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy is one of the most common elective surgical procedures. Increasing laparoscopic experience has made LPC a feasible option16 in patients with complicated acute or chronic cholecystitis in modern equipped hospitals.

TABLE 1. Data on Clinical Manifestation, Indication of Operation, Type of Surgical Treatment, and Additional Surgical Interventions in Patients Who Underwent a “Nonconventional” Surgical Treatment of Complex Acute Cholecystitis (Review of the Lirterature from 1972- 2005)

TABLE 1. Data on Clinical Manifestation, Indication of Operation, Type of Surgical Treatment, and Additional Surgical Interventions in Patients Who Underwent a “Nonconventional” Surgical Treatment of Complex Acute Cholecystitis (Review of the Lirterature from 1972- 2005)

TABLE 1. Data on Clinical Manifestation, Indication of Operation, Type of Surgical Treatment, and Additional Surgical Interventions in Patients Who Underwent a “Nonconventional” Surgical Treatment of Complex Acute Cholecystitis (Review of the Lirterature from 1972- 2005)

The aim of this article is to present our experiences in the treatment of cases of acute severe cholecystitis that were treated by PC, and to review the literature for the “nonconventional” surgical treatments (cholecystostomy, CPC, and LPC) of cholecystitis, when a classic cholecystectomy is technically difficult or even dangerous. This review should provide surgeons with an easy decision in choosing the optimal surgical strategy in severely ill patients with cholecystitis in the presence of portal hypertension or when severe inflammation and fibrosis or Mirizzi’s syndrome exist.

Patients and Methods

Our Experience

At the Department of Surgery, Tehran University of Medical Sciences, from 1993 to 2003, 54 patients with acute severe cholecystitis underwent only PC. For all patients, the demographic data, clinical symptoms, type of operative procedures, postoperative surgical or medical complications, and mortality rate were prospectively recorded and evaluated. The diagnosis of acute cholecystitis was clinical and verified by ultrasonography. Endoscopic retrograde cholangiopancreatography (ERCP) was not performed before operation. In all patients, gallstones were present. If necessary, we used ERCP after operation. In these patients, the indication for PC was severe inflammation in the region of Calot’s triangle. All operations were performed under general anesthesia and antibiotic therapy. In our patients, we used the PC technique reported by Bornman and Terblanche.12 At first, a right transverse incision was made and dissection was kept to a minimum to prevent tissue injuries. No attempt was made to dissect Calot’s triangle or to identify cystic duct, cystic artery, and the common bile duct (CBD). The gallbladder was aspirated and infected bile was sent for bacteriological examination. The gallbladder was then excised using diathermy. Re section of gallbladder was started at the fundus with cautery, and the contents (including infected bile and impacted stones) were evacuated. After completing the partial resection of the gallbladder, the posterior wall was left attached to the liver bed and its rim was oversewn with a running suture (2-0 Vicryl) immediately to control bleeding. The cystic duct orifice was identified from inside the gallbladder using a probe, and any residual stones were gently removed. Puncture of the CBD was avoided. If necessary, retained stones in the CBD were removed by performing a postoperative ERCP with sphincterotomy. For preventing biliary leakage or fistula formation, the cystic duct was always oversewn from within the gallbladder. Curettage of the remaining mucosa was performed with a fine curette or diathermy. We did not perform intraoperative cholangiography. At the end, if possible, we “packed” the remaining portion of the gallbladder with an omentum patch to prevent bowel adhesion and subsequent intestinal obstruction. Drainage of the gallbladder bed was routinely used.

Review of the Literature

At the Department of Surgery, University of Heidelberg, the literature from 1972 to 2005 for the “nonconventional” surgical management of severe inflammation of the gallbladder, including cholecystostomy, CPC, and LPC, was reviewed using the Medline database. The focus of our analysis was on demographic data, clinical manifestations, type of surgical treatment, clinical outcome, need for postoperative surgical or nonsurgical intervention, and morbidity and mortality rate.

Results

Presenting Our Experience

From 1993 to 2003, 54 patients underwent PC, including six LPCs. The age of patients ranged between 25 and 65 years (mean, 49.1). There were 12 men (22.2%) and 42 women (77.8%). None of our patients had preoperative invasive imaging such as percutaneous transhepatic cholangiography or ERCP. In all patients cholecystitis, gallstones, and inflammation of the Calot’s triangle were present. In five (9.3%) cases, the gallbladder had a gangrenous fundus without frank perforation. Empyema was present in eight (14.8%) and hydrops was present in 10 (18.5%) patients. We did not perform intraoperative cholangiography in any patient. Closure of the cystic duct was difficult in seven (13%) patients and could not be performed in three (5.6%) patients. In these three cases, we left the cystic duct open with a drain. All of these 10 cases developed a self-limiting postoperative bile leak 3 to 5 days postoperatively, which improved spontaneously after 2 weeks without any symptoms of peritonitis. ERCP was applied in 11 (20.4%) patients after the operation, and we found CBD stones in six of them during postoperative ERCP. A postoperative exploration of the bile duct was only necessary in three (5.6%) patients in the case of ERCP failure. Five (9.3%) patients had Mirizzi’s syndrome (Type I), and common bile duct stricture and inflammation was confirmed by ERCP. In two of the patients, the syndrome was not resolved 60 days after operation and a choledochojejunostomy (Roux-en-Y anastomosis) was performed for treatment. All patients were followed-up for a mean of 24 months (range, 7-18). Three (5.6%) patients had cholangitis that resolved about 3 to 4 weeks after the operation by antibiotic therapy without any further intervention. During operation, gallbladder carcinoma with liver and local lymph nodes metastasis was found in three (5.6%) patients, confirmed by pathological sampling. No further interventions were performed, and they were referred to a chemotherapist. All of them died from progression of advanced gallbladder carcinoma 3 to 9 months postoperatively. In our series, there was no mortality directly related to the PC procedure. Review of the Literature

The available data of 1280 patients in 28 case series or case reports (including our cases) were analyzed for the review. One thousand two hundred forty-four cases underwent cholecystostomy or PC, whereas in 36 patients, the operation converted to cholecystectomy or other surgical techniques because of different causes. The most cases were reported in 1972 (n = 154) and 1981 (n = 374) by Welch17 and Glenn,18 respectively. They mainly gathered data of patients who underwent only a cholecystostomy. An overview of reviewed and analyzed publications is summarized in Table 1.

Demographic Data, Clinical Manifestations, and Indication of Operation

Among the cases were 374 (56.2%) women, 292 (43.8%) men (female:male ratio of 1.28:1), and 614 cases without declaration of the gender. The reported cases ranged from 17 to 95 years old, with mean of 61.09 years in 590 cases with accessible data. Most of the patients who underwent a “nonconventional” surgical therapy of cholecystitis or cholelithiasis were in the sixth or seventh decade of their lives. The most common presenting signs and symptoms of the patients were the same as an acute cholecystitis (available data in 1012 patients, 79.1%; Table 1). Apart from ultrasonography, which was the routine type of evaluation, different diagnostic imaging modalities (n = 452) were mentioned for evaluation of the CBD perioperatively, including perioperative and/or intravenous cholangiography (n = 265, 58.6%), ERCP (n = 120, 26.5%), oral cholecystography (n = 36, 8%), percutaneous transhepatic cholangiography (n = 8, 1.8%), cholecintigraphy (hydroxy iminodiacetic acid scan; n = 3, 0.7%), and CT/magnetic resonance imaging scan (n = 20, 4.4%). After reviewing the articles, it could be assumed that the major indication of operations in the total of 1200 patients (excluding 80 patients who had incidental gallbladder operation during another operation) was severe inflammation with/ without fibrosis (n = 1099, 91.6%), Mirizzi’s syndrome in 79 (6.6%) patients, and portal hypertension in 15 (1.2%) patients. In seven (0.6%) patients, anatomical variations were the main cause (Fig. 1; Table 1).

FIG. 1. Indication for operation in patients undergoing a “nonconventional” surgical treatment of complex acute cholecystitis (literature reviewed from 1972-2005).

Types of Operations, Procedures, and Postoperative Complications

Overall, the most common operation was cholecystostomy, with 818 (65.8%) cases, whereas CPC and LPC were performed on 272 (21.9%) and 154 (12.4%) patients, respectively (Table 1; Fig. 2). Major additional operations, which were occasionally applied in combination or instead of cholecystostomy, CPC, or LPC for more complicated situations such as Mirizzi’s syndrome or choledochal stones, were exploration of the CBD in 74 (5.8%) cases and choledochostomy and other bypass operations in 47 (3.7%) cases. As an intraoperative finding, empyema was found in 74 (5.8%) patients, gangrenous and/or perforated gallbladder were found in 65 (5.1%) patients, carcinoma was found in 6 (0.5%) patients, and cirrhosis was found in 5 (0.4%) patients.

During follow-up of reported cases (n = 1190), wound infections were found in 26 (2.1%) cases. A persistent biliary fistula was noticeable in 12 (0.9%) patients after cholecystostomy, and a prolonged biliary drainage was found in 3 (0.2%) patients who underwent LPC. Fifty-seven (4.6%) patients showed CBD or gallbladder stones, and 60 (4.8%) patients showed a biliary leak. Thirty (2.3%) patients had recurrent symptoms. In 133 patients, because of postoperative complications (e.g., recurrent symptoms, remaining CBD stones, or persistence of bile fistula), reoperation was necessary, including 121 (90.1%) of cholecystectomy, whereas the rest ( 11 patients) underwent other procedures such as CBD exploration or closure of fistula. The overall mortality rate was 9.4 per cent (n = 117).

Discussion

In acute cholecystitis, different therapeutic approaches according to the individual situation are required. It may be treated by removal of the inflamed gallbladder during the acute phase of the disease or by conservative treatment followed later by cholecystectomy. Medical therapies do not eliminate the need for cholecystectomy despite the need for resuscitation of ill patients, whereas a second attack is not uncommon. On the other hand, urgent cholecystectomy is necessary in patients with acute life- threatening complications such as empyema and suspected or confirmed perforation. Early cholecystectomy prevents the complications of delayed operation and reduces the mortality rate and the hospital stay, as well as the treatment costs.19-22 In recent years, surgeons prefer cholecystectomy as soon as possible in the management of cholecystitis. However, in severe cholecystitis with involvement of Calot’ s triangle, it is sometimes difficult to perform a classic cholecystectomy. In this case, cholecystostomy, CPC, or LPC might be a proper solution.

FIG. 2. Different surgical techniques for the treatment of complex acute cholecystitis in patients from 1972 to 2005 (reviewed literature).

Cholecystostomy, as an initial life-saving procedure, might be a safe approach and served as a definitive procedure in elderly patients without the risk of gallstone recurrence.10,18,23-26 It may eliminate the need for potentially dangerous dissection of distorted biliary tract anatomy and it can be performed rapidly through a small incision under local anesthesia.17 As shown in Fig. 2, this technique outnumbered other techniques and alone, it comprises 66 per cent of all procedures. It seems that cholecystostomy, as an alternative safe procedure to cholecystectomy, has the disadvantage of a high rate of retained stones (up to 50%), which then requires a subsequent cholecystectomy.15,17,27-30 Recently, interventional gallbladder drainage as a primary procedure seems to be an alternative to urgent surgery.31 PC is not a new operation, many years ago, destroying the mucosa of the gallbladder with diathermy was suggested32-34 by identification and ligation of the Calot’ s triangle structures. Some authors described resection of the peritoneal wall of the gallbladder down to the opening of the cystic duct, which is left unsutured and drained in the early postoperative phase.35 Bornman and Terblanche12 termed their modification “subtotal cholecystectomy,” leaving the posterior wall of the gallbladder attached to the liver and securing the cystic duct at its origin as we used in our patients. Partial (subtotal) cholecystectomy combines the advantages of cholecystostomy and cholecystectomy.12,27 Like cholecystostomy, PC is a safe, easy, and definitive operation. It avoids difficult dissection in the inflamed Calot’s triangle and prevents bile duct injury, which minimizes the conversion rate.36,37 Therefore, PC should be considered as a surgical option in inflamed, gangrenous, perforated, deeply placed, or fibrotic gallbladder, and also in the presence of high-grade cirrhosis with the increased risk of bleeding or in severely ill patients with coagulopathy.”

Similar to cholecystectomy, PC prevents recurrent gallstone formation, as no residual diseased gallbladder mucosa is left in continuity with the biliary system. ‘2 However, recurrence of stones remains a possibility, particularly if a blind pouch is formed by approximation of Hartmann’s pouch.38 Gorrini et al.39 applied PC with choledochoplasty and exploration of the distal part of CBD by a transduodenal sphincteroplasty to prevent recurrent gallstone formation. We found CBD stones in six patients postoperatively, even though the risk of residual stones in the gallbladder remnant after PC is bound to be less than after cholecystostomy.38 In addition, PC deals adequately with the necrotic portions of the gallbladder; we had five cases with a gangrenous fundus of the gallbladder, a common finding in acalculous cholecystitis.40 On the other hand, the possible disadvantages of PC are an increased incidence of infection by the opened gallbladder, although some authors stated that the infection rate is no greater than a cholecystostomy,41 the so- called cystic stump syndrome (continuous mucus discharge from the retained gallbladder mucosa), and subphrenic collection or persistent discharge from the drain site.12,38 Closure of the cystic duct may lead to a self-limiting postoperative bile leak. In our study, closure of the cystic duct was difficult in seven (13%) patients and could not be performed in three patients. These 10 cases developed a self-limiting bile leak 3 to 5 days postoperatively, which improved spontaneously after 2 weeks without any symptoms of peritonitis. Sometimes it is possible to ligate the cystic duct with the help of a probe inside. However, we did not use this technique to prevent unwanted trauma to branches of the hepatic artery. Gholson et al.42 quoted that the insertion of a 10 F endoprothesis resulted in a complete closure of the persistent fistula within 6 weeks. Surgeons encountered a difficult situation during the handling of severe cholecystitis such as Mirizzi’s syndrome. Some authors have suggested that PC is the treatment of choice for Mirizzi’s syndrome Type I (five cases in our study)14,27,43,44 with complete recovery.45,46 As described by Baer et al.,47 in cholecystobiliary fistula, PC with choledochoplasty using a gallbladder flap is the treatment of choice. Baer treated Mirizzi’s syndrome Type II by performing a combination of PC and cholecysto-choledochoduodenostomy. By introducing laparoscopic surgery, another choice is available in the treatment of acute cholecystitis. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy is technically feasible in the majority of patients with acute cholecystitis. The essential surgical steps remain similar to those of open cholecystectomy. However, in complex acute cholecystitis, the conversion rate to open surgery is higher and the operative time is longer,48,49 with an increased risk of bile duct injury.50 LPC has been reported during the past years.51,52 Increasing laparoscopic experience has made LPC a feasible option in patients with complicated acute or chronic cholecystitis. LPC is a safe, relatively simple, and definitive procedure that allows the management of complex acute cholecystitis and reduces the need for conversion or cholecystostomy in a majority of patients.36-53 Mirizzi’s syndrome is generally considered a contraindication for laparoscopic cholecystectomy, which can easily result in CBD injury.54-57 However, laparoscopic treatment of Mirizzi’s Type I syndrome by an experienced laparoscopic surgeon is technically feasible and safe.51,58

FIG. 3. Change in the management of complex acute cholecystitis in different time periods (literature reviewed from 1972-2005).

The surgical trend for the treatment of the complex acute cholecystitis has been changed from performing only cholecystostomy (100%) in the period between 1972 and 1982 to a spectrum of operations, including cholecystostomy, CPC, and LPC after that time. The proportion of PC in the operation of difficult cholecystitis cases has increased progressively from O per cent between 1972 and 1982 to 58 per cent of operations in the period of 1983 to 1994 and to 81 per cent between 1995 and 2005. In this way, because of the increase of experiences in minimally invasive surgery, the part of LPC in the PC procedure for complex acute cholecystitis has increased from 2.4 per cent of operations between 1983 and 1994 to 43 per cent of operations in the period of 1995 to 2005 (Fig. 3). In conclusion, PC is a safe and definitive procedure for the treatment of complex acute cholecystitis. The procedure avoids dissection in Calot’s triangle and reduces the risk of bile duct injury. In addition, it makes the control of bleeding easier and avoids the need for a second look with a better postoperative recovery in high- risk patients. Whether the indication and need for alternative techniques to standard cholecystectomy is changing should be evaluated in future studies.

REFERENCES

1. Sharp KW. Acute cholecystitis. Surg Clin North Am 1988; 68:269- 79.

2. Zakaria S, et al. Mayo Clinic Gastrointestinal Surgery: Biliary Stone Disease. Philadelphia: Saunders, 2004, .

3. Savoca PE, Longo WE, Zucker KA, et al. The increasing prevalence of acalculous cholecystitis in outpatients. Results of a 7-year study. Ann Surg 1990;211:433-7.

4. Warren BL, Carstens CA, Falck VG. Acute acalculous cholecystitis: A clinical-pathological disease spectrum. S Afr J Surg 1999:37:99-104.

5. Nilsson E, Pored CM, Granath F, Blomqvist P. Cholecystectomy in Sweden 1987-99: A nationwide study of mortality and preoperative admissions. Scand J Gastroenterol 2005;40:1478-85.

6. Strohmeyer G, Stelzner M. Acute cholecystitis: Early cholecystectomy? Langenbecks Arch Chir 1984;364:387-91.

7. Bjerkeset T, Edna TH, Drogset JO, Svinsas M. Early elective cholecystectomy in acute stone-related cholecystitis. Tidsskr Nor Laegeforen 1997 ; 117:2941 -3.

8. Cameron IC, Chadwick C, Phillips J, Johnson AG. Acute cholecystitis: Room for improvement? Ann R Coll Surg Engl 2002;84:10- 3.

9. Glenn F. Cholecystostomy in the high-risk patient with biliary tract disease. Ann Surg 1977;185:185-91.

10. Winkler E, Kaplan O, Gutman M, et al. Role of cholecystostomy in the management of critically ill patients suffering from acute cholecystitis. Br J Surg 1989;76:693-5.

11. Douglas PR, Ham JM. Partial cholecystectomy. ANZ J Surg 1990;60:595-7.

12. Bornman PC, Terblanche J. Subtotal cholecystectomy: For the difficult gallbladder in portal hypertension and cholecystitis. Surgery 1985;98:l-6.

13. Bickel A, Lunsky I, Mizrahi S, Stamler B. Modified subtotal cholecystectomy for high-risk patients. Can J Surg 1990;33: 13-4.

14. Cottier DJ, McKay C, Anderson JR. Subtotal cholecystectomy. BrJ Surg 1991;78:1326-8.

15. Katsohis C, Prousalidis J, Tzardinoglou E, et al. Subtotal cholecystectomy. HPB Surg 1996;9:133-6.

16. Crosthwaite G, McKay C, Anderson JR. Laparoscopic subtotal cholecystectomy. J R Coll Surg Edinb 1995;40:20-1.

17. Welch JP, Malt RA. Outcome of cholecystostomy. Surg Gynecol Obstet 1972; 135:717-20.

18. Glenn F. Surgical management of acute cholecystitis in patients 65 years of age and older. Ann Surg 1981; 193:56-9.

19. Kern E. Acute cholecystitis: Early cholecystectomy? Langenbecks Arch Chir 1984:364:393-6.

20. Lennert KA, Muller U. Therapy of acute cholecystitis: Importance of early operation. Langenbecks Arch Chir Suppl II Verh Dtsch Ges Chir 1990;S2:1201-4.

21. Eitan A, Toledano C, Rivlin E, et al. Early vs. delayed cholecystectomy for acute cholecystitis. Harefuah 1991; 120: 319- 23.

22. Jaeger G, Rothenbuhler JM, Famos M, Tondelli P. When should cholecystectomy in acute cholecystitis be planned? Schweiz Med Wochenschr 1983;! 13:552-4.

23. Havard C, Parry D. Cholecystostomy. Br J Surg 1976;63: 631- 6.

24. Hafif A, Gutman M, Kaplan O, et al. The management of acute cholecystitis in elderly patients. Am Surg 1991;57:648-52.

25. Hamy A, Visset J, Likholatnikov D, et al. Percutaneous cholecystostomy for acute cholecystitis in critically ill patients. Surgery 1997;121:398^10I.

26. Ghahreman A, McCaIl JL, Windsor JA. Cholecystostomy: A review of recent experience. ANZ J Surg 1999;69:837-40.

27. Maudar KK. Evaluation of surgical options in difficult gall bladder stone disease. J Indian Med Assoc 1996;94:138-40.

28. Burhenne HJ. Mini-cholecystectomy and radiologie stone extraction in high-risk cholelithiasis patients. Am J Surg 1985; 149: 632-5.

29. Weigelt JA, Norcross JF, Aurbakken CM. Cholecystectomy after tube cholecystostomy. Am J Surg 1983; 146:723-6.

30. Kerlan RK Jr, LaBerge JM, Ring EJ. Percutaneous cholecystolithotomy: Preliminary experience. Radiology 1985;157: 653- 6.

31. Sosna J, Copel L, Kane RA, Kruskal JB. Ultrasound-guided percutaneous cholecystostomy: Update on technique and clinical applications. Surg Technol Int 2003;11:135-9.

32. Pribram PO. Mukoklase und drainagelose Gallenchirurgie. Zentralbl Chir 1928;55:773-9.

33. Maingot R. Abdominal Operation. East Norwalk, CT: Appleton- Century-Croft, 1940.

34. Morris PJ, Malt RA. Oxford Textbook of Surgery: Partial Cholecystectomy. Vol. 1. 1994. 1228p.

35. Zollinger RM, Zollinger RM Jr. Atlas of Surgical Operations, 5th ed. New York: Macmillan, 1983.

36. Chowbey PK, Sharma A, Khullar R, et al. Laparoscopic subtotal cholecystectomy: A review of 56 procedures. J Laparoendosc Adv Surg Tech A 2000; 10:31-4.

37. Beldi G, Glattli A. Laparoscopic subtotal cholecystectomy for severe cholecystitis. Surg Endosc 2003:17:1437-9.

38. Ibrarullah MD, Kacker LK, Sikora SS, et al. Partial cholecystectomy: Safe and effective. HPB Surg 1993;7:61-5.

39. Gorini P, Fogli L, Belcastro S. Transduodenal sphincterotomy and type II Mirizzi syndrome. Minerva Chir 1994;49:729-31.

40. Fox MS, Wilk PJ, Weissman HS, Freeman LM. Acute acalculous cholecystitis. Surg Gynecol Obstet 1984; 159:13-6.

41. Keighley MR, Drysdale RB, Quoraishi AH, et al. Antibiotic treatment of biliary sepsis. Surg Clin North Am 1975 ;55:1379-90.

42. Gholson CF, Burton F. Closure of a controlled biliary fistula complicating partial cholecystectomy with endoscopic biliary stenting. Am J Gastroenterol 1992;87:248-51.

43. Karademir S, Astarcioglu H, Sokmen S, et al. Mirizzi’s syndrome: Diagnostic and surgical considerations in 25 patients. J Hepatobiliary Pancreat Surg 2000;7:72-7.

44. Johnson LW, Sehon JK, Lee WC, et al. Mirizzi’s syndrome: Experience from a multi-institutional review. Am Surg 2001 ;67: 11- 4.

45. Sharma AK. Pitfalls in the management of Mirizzi’s syndrome. Trop Gastroenterol 1998;19:72-4.

46. Vadala G, Basile G, Rimmaudo G, et al. Mirizzi’s syndrome. Minerva Med 1999;90:179-85.

47. Baer HU, Matthews JB, Schweizer WP, et al. Management of the Mirizzi’s syndrome and the surgical implications of cholecystcholedochal fistula. BrJ Surg 1990;77:743-5.

48. Kum CK, Goh PM, Isaac JR, et al. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy for acute cholecystitis. Br J Surg 1994;81:1651-4. 49. Kum CK, Eypasch E, Lefering R, et al. Laparoscopic cholecystectomy for acute cholecystitis: Is it really safe? World J Surg 1996;20:43-8.

50. Sawyers JL. Current status of conventional (open) cholecystectomy versus laparoscopic cholecystectomy. Ann Surg 1996; 223:1-3.

51. Vezakis A, Davides D, Birbas K, et al. Laparoscopic treatment of Mirizzi’s syndrome. Surg Laparosc Endosc Percutan Tech 2000:10:15- 8.

52. Subramania SN. Partial cholecystectomy in elective and emergency gallbladder surgery in the high risk patients: A viable and safe option in the era of laparoscopic surgery. Trop Gastroenteral 1996; 17:49-52.

53. Michalowski K, Bornman PC, Krige JE, et al. Laparoscopic subtotal cholecystectomy in patients with complicated acute cholecystitis or fibrosis. Br J Surg 1998;85:904-6.

54. Corlette MB, Bismuth H. Biliobiliary fistula. A trap in the surgery of cholelithiasis. Arch Surg 1975;110:377-83.

55. Rao PS, Tandon RK, Kapur BM. Biliobiliary fistula: Review of nine cases. Am J Gastroenterol 1988;83:652-7.

56. Mishra MC, Vashishtha S, Tandon R. Biliobiliary fistula: Preoperative diagnosis and management implications. Surgery 1990; 108:835-9.

57. Hsu YB, Yu SC, Lee PH, Wei TC. An uncommon cause of biliary obstruction (Mirizzi’s syndrome): Report of five cases. J Formos Med Assoc 1994;93:314-9.

58. Kok KY, Goh PY, Ngoi SS. Management of Mirizzi’s syndrome in the laparoscopic era. Surg Endosc 1998;12:1242-4.

59. Matanovic M, Roth H. Cholecystostomy-indication, late results. HeIv Chir Acta 1972;39:207-8.

60. Schein M. Partial cholecystectomy in the emergency treatment of acute cholecystitis in the compromised patient. J R Coll SurgEdinb 1991;36:295-7.

61. Khan TF. Modified subtotal cholecystectomy: A procedure for the difficult gall bladder. Med J Malaysia 1992;47:65-8.

62. Ibrarullah M, Saxena R, Sikora SS, et al. Mirizzi’s syndrome: Identification and management strategy. Aust NZJ Surg 1993;63:802- 6.

63. Bickel A, Shtamler B. Laparoscopic subtotal cholecystectomy. J Laparoendosc Surg 1993;3:365-7.

64. Ransom KJ. Laparoscopic management of acute cholecystitis with subtotal cholecystectomy. Am Surg 1998;64:955-7.

MEHRDAD SOLEIMANI, M.D.,*,[dagger] ARIANEB MEHRABI, M.D.,[dagger] ZHOOBIN A. MOOD, M.D.,[dagger]

HAMIDREZA FONOUNI, M.D.,[dagger] ARASH KASHFI, M.D.,[dagger] MARKUS W. BUCHLER, M.D.,[dagger] JAN SCHMIDT, M.D.[dagger]

From the * Department of Surgery, Tehran University of Medical Sciences, Tehran, Iran and the

[dagger] Department of General, Visceral, and Transplantation Surgery, University of Heidelberg,

Heidelberg, Germany

Address correspondence and reprint requests to Dr. A. Mehrabi, Department of General, Visceral, and Transplantation Surgery, University of Heidelberg, Im Neuenheimer Feld 110, 69120 Heidelberg, Germany.

Copyright Southeastern Surgical Congress May 2007

(c) 2007 American Surgeon, The. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Accessory Breasts: A Historical and Current Perspective

By Loukas, Marios Clarke, Pamela; Tubbs, R Shane

The presence of accessory breast tissue such as extra nipples (polythelia) and extra breast (polymastia) is relatively common, with a high incidence of being misdiagnosed in clinical medicine. Although polythelia is congenital in origin and is identifiable at childhood, polymastia may not be evident until the influence of sex hormones during puberty. In this article, we present a review of the literature concerning the historical background of accessory breasts, their incidence, their misdiagnoses, and their association with other syndromes and diseases. Finally, we present the common treatment options available today for such conditions. ACCESSORY BREAST TISSUE is a relatively common occurrence that has a high incidence of being misdiagnosed in clinical medicine. Various diagnoses of such structures include lipoma, lymphatic malformation, lymphadenitis, and sebaceous cysts.1,2 Clinically, cases of accessory breast tissue may be asymptomatic or patients may report discomfort during menstruation, pain, discharge, and restriction of arm movement. Many patients may wish to have ectopic tissue excised for cosmetic reasons or to relieve anxiety over the possibility of malignancy. Potential accessory breast tissue in a patient merits further investigation by the clinician, as this tissue has the ability to undergo all the pathological changes that are characteristic of the normal breast and the presence of ectopic breast tissue may indicate underlying congenital anomalies.

In ancient times, multiple breasts were associated with fertility. The goddess Artemis is one of the most well known of the female deities endowed with multiple breasts (Fig. 1). During the centuries of witchhunts, supernumerary breasts and nipples were deemed Devil’s marks.3 Men and women found with this accessory breast tissue were often tortured and killed. One of the most referred to cases of accessory breast tissue is from 1827 and involves Therese Ventre of Marseilles, France.4 Ventre had an accessory breast on the lateral aspect of her left thigh that enlarged during puberty and produced milk when she became pregnant. The famous woodcut showing Venire’s children nursing from both of her normally positioned right breast and left thigh breast is frequently depicted (Fig. 2).

The prevalence of accessory breast tissue has been shown to be dependent on a few factors, including gender, ethnicity, geographical area, and inheritance. Overall, the occurrence averages between 0.22 per cent and 6 per cent of the general population.5,6 Women report a higher rate of polymastia and polythelia than do men. Instances of ectopic breast tissue are higher in blacks Americans, white Americans, Native Americans, Japanese, Israeli Jews, and Arabs.7-9 Studies on white European children show a very low frequency of 0.22 per cent.9 Most instances of accessory breast tissue is sporadic, however, familial cases have been described in up to 10 per cent of the affected population. Family pedigrees have mapped the two most common methods of inheritance to be autosomal dominant with incomplete penetrance and X-linked dominance.10-12 Each of these modes of inheritance shows variability in their phenotypic expression among generations.

Any combination of accessory breast tissue, including nipples, areola, and glandular breast tissue, can be found in addition to the two normally developed breasts on the chest. Most commonly, this tissue develops along the embryonic mammary ridge that extends from the axilla to the groin (Fig. 3). Incomplete regression of this ridge during embryologie formation gives rise to ectopic breast tissue. Aberrant breast tissue has been reported to arise from extra sites, including the face, posterior neck, chest, buttock, vulva, hip, shoulder, posterior and/or lateral thigh, perineum, as well as the midback (Fig. 4).13-18 Several theories have been developed to account for breast tissue found outside the embryonic milk line. One theory suggests that the milk ridges become displaced, whereas another posits that accessory breast tissue may occur anywhere apocrine sweat glands are found.17

FIG. 1. The statue of polymastia of Artemis.

In 1915, Kajava2, 19 classified the expression of accessory breast tissue into eight categories still in use today: complete supernumerary nipple (SN) with nipple, areola, and glandular breast tissue, which is known as polymastia; SN with nipple and glandular tissue without areola; SN with areola and glandular tissue without nipple; aberrant glandular tissue only; SN with nipple, areola, and pseudomamma, which is fat tissue that replaces the glandular tissue; SN with nipple only, which is known as polythelia; SN with areola only, which is known as polythelia areolaris; and a patch of hair only, which is known as polythelia pilosa. The most common type of accessory breast tissue is polythelia. Axillary accessory breast tissue is found in 60 per cent to 70 per cent of all affected patients. This tissue is separate from the direct extension of the axillary tail of Spence.

Accessory breast tissue is not usually identified at a young age. The tissue frequently becomes symptomatic during menarche, pregnancy, or lactation as it responds to normal fluctuating levels of hormones.20 Ectopic breast tissue has been known to change size cyclically with menstruation, to increase in size during pregnancy, and to lactate while nursing.

FIG. 2. One of the most referred cases of accessory breast tissue from 1827 that involves Therese Ventre of Marseilles. Ventre had an accessory breast on the lateral aspect of her left thigh that enlarged during puberty and produced milk when she became pregnant. The famous woodcut showing Venire’s children nursing from her normally positioned right breast and left thigh breast.

Patients with accessory breast tissue may also be more prone to other congenital anomalies. Although there is some dispute over the findings, research indicates a correlation between ectopic breast tissue and urogenital abnormalities (Table 1).21 Urogenital anomalies occur in 1 per cent to 2 per cent of the general population, whereas an estimated 14.5 per cent of patients with accessory breast tissue have been diagnosed by ultrasound with kidney and/or urinary tract abnormalities.22-24 This high association has led some researchers to suggest that there may be a common supernumerary breast tissue/renal field defect.22,25

Accessory breast tissue has also been associated with underlying cardiovascular disorders, although the relation between the two has yet to be definitively established. Congenital heart anomalies with pulmonary hypertension, cardiomyopathy arising from myocardial infarction, and systemic hypertension are notably related to polythelia.26,27 Ectopic breast tissue in patients is an important cutaneous indicator of conduction system abnormalities, such as bundle branch block or third degree heart block.26

FIG. 3. A woman with two axillary breasts.

Polythelia is a well-established clinical finding in Simpson- Golabi-Behmel Syndrome. Simpson-GolabiBehmel Syndrome is an X- linked recessive disorder characterized by pre- or postnatal overgrowth, facial dysmorphic features, polythelia, heart malformations, cleft palate, and postaxial polydactyly.9

Accessory breast tissue has not been conclusively linked to renal or cardiovascular disorders, however, many clinicians choose to follow up affected patients with renal ultrasound and a full cardiovascular workup for screening of any congenital or acquired disorders.

Misdiagnosis of accessory breast tissue is common, especially if the tissue is in close proximity to sweat glands.28 The most common presumptive diagnoses include lipoma, lymphadenopathy, hidradenitis, sebaceous cyst, vascular malformation, and malignancy.28,29 The diagnosis of accessory breast tissue is supported by the initial appearance during pregnancy or by a description of cyclical changes in the tissue during the menstrual period. If doubt exists as to the nature of the tissue, mammography, needle biopsy, or surgical biopsy of the area should be undertaken.30-32 Exact diagnosis is crucial, as breast carcinoma can invade these aberrant areas.33,34 Ductal carcinoma is the most frequent subtype of primary ectopic breast cancer. Medullary breast cancer, cystosarcoma phylloides, extramammary Paget’s disease, and papillary carcinoma have all been reported in accessory mammary tissue.28,35

FIG. 4. A case of an accessory breast found at the anatomy department during a routine dissection. The accessory breast was located to the left side of the cadaver superior to the inguinal ligament.

TABLE 1. Renal Anomalies Found in Correlation with Accessory Breast Tissue

Sentinel node biopsy is effective in accurately determining the staging of cancer in accessory breast tissue.36 Because the lymphatic drainage from ectopic breast tissue is unclear, blind dissection of areas such as the axilla can result in considerable morbidity, including intercostobrachial nerve injury, incomplete excision of the accessory tissue, poor wound healing, and lymphoadenoma of the arm.29, 36-38

There is no need to specifically treat accessory breast tissue unless there is some diagnostic ambiguity, a pathological concern, or if the patient wishes to have it removed as a cosmetic hindrance.17 The literature reports that the majority of patients want removal of the tissue for cosmetic reasons.35,37 Patients should be completely informed as to the inherent risks of surgical excision and should be offered liposuction as an alternative if this option is feasible.35,39 The study of accessory mammary tissue and its relationship to other congenital anomalies warrants increased consideration by researchers and the creation of innovative clinical treatment. REFERENCES

1. DeCholnoky T. Accessory breast tissue in the axilla. NY State J Med 1951;19:2245-8.

2. Greer KE. Accessory axillary breast tissue. Arch Dermatol 1974;109:88-9.

3. McDonald SW. The Devil’s mark and the witch-prickers of Scotland. J R Soc Med 1997;90:507-11.

4. Grossl NA. Supernumerary breast tissue: Historical perspectives and clinical features. South Med J 2000;93:29-32.

5. Scantan KA, Propeck PA. Accessory breast tissue in an unusual location. AJR 1996;155:339-40.

6. Schmidt H. Supernumerary nipples: Prevalence, size, sex and side predilection: A prospective clinical study. Eur J Pediatr 1998; 157:821-3.

7. Gilmore HT, Milroy M, Mello BJ. Supernumerary nipples and accessory breast tissue. SDJ Med 1996;49:149-51.

8. Jaber L, Merlob P. The prevalence of supernumerary nipples in Arab infants and children. Eur J Pediatr 1988; 147:443

9. Velanovich V. Ectopic breast tissue, supernumerary breasts and supernumerary nipples. South Med J 1995;88:903-6.

10. Galli-Tsinopoulou A, Krohn C, Schmidt H. Familial polythelia over three generations with polymastia in the youngest girl. Eur J Pediatr 2001; 160:375-7.

11. Tsukahara M, Uchida M, Uchino S, et al. Male to male transmission of supernumerary nipples. Am J Med Genet 1997; 69:194- 5.

12. Urbani CE, Betti R. The significance of familial polythelia. J Am Acad Dermatol 1995;32:687-8.

13. Basu S, Bag T, Saha KS, Biswas PC. Accessory breast in the perineum. Trop Doc 2003;33:245.

14. Burdick AE, Thomas KA, Welsh E, et al. Axillary polymastia. J Am Acad Dermatol 2003;49:1154-6.

15. Camisa C. Accessory breast on the posterior thigh of a man. J Am Acad Dermatol 1980;3:467-9.

16. Koltuksuz U, Aydon E. Supernumerary breast tissue: A case of pseudomamma on the face. J Pediatr Surg 1997;32:1377-8.

17. Leung W, Heaton JPW, Morales A. An uncommon urologic presentation of a supernumerary breast. Urology 1997;50:122-4.

18. Miguel M, Lopez I, Carrera A, et al. Supernumerary breast on the thigh of a woman. J Eur Acad Dermatol Venereol 2006; 20:868- 902.

19. Kajava Y. The proportions of supernumerary nipples in the Finnish population. Duodecim 1915;1:143-70.

20. Laor T, Collins MH, Emery KH, et al. MRI appearance of accessory breast tissue: A diagnostic consideration for an axillary mass in a peripubertal or pubertal girl. AJR 2004; 183:1779-81.

21. Mehes K, Szule E, Torzsok F, Meggyessy V. Supernumerary nipples and urologic malignancies. Cancer Genet Cytogenet 1987;24:185-8.

22. Brown J, Schwartz RA. Supernumerary nipples and renal malformations: A family study. J Cutan Med Surg 2004;8:170-2.

23. Grotto I, Browner-Elhanan K, Mimouni D, et al. Occurrence of supernumerary nipples in children with kidney and urinary tract malformations. Pediatr Dermatol 2001;18:291-4.

24. Meggyessy V, Mehes K. Association of supernumerary nipples with renal anomalies. J Pediatr 1987;111:412-3.

25. Urbani CE, Betti R. Aberrant mammary tissue and nephrourinary malignancy. Cancer Genet Cytogenet 1996;87:88-9.

26. Urbani CE. Supernumerary nipple and cardiocutaneous associations. J Am Acad Dermatol 2004;50:e9.

27. Rajaratnam K, Kumar PD, Sahasranam KV. Supernumerary nipple as a cutaneous marker of mitral valve prolapse in Asian Indians. Am J Cardiol 2000;86:695-7.

28. Gutermuth J, Audring H, Voit C, Haas N. Primary carcinoma of ectopic axillary breast tissue. J Eur Acad Dermatol Venereol 2006;20:214-38.

29. Baruchin AM, Rosenberg L. Re: Axillary breast tissue: Clinical presentation and surgical treatment. Ann Plast Surg 1995; 36:661-2.

30. Giron GL, Friedman I, Feldman S. Lobular carcinoma in ectopic axillary breast tissue. Am Surg 2004;70:312-5.

31. Roorda AK, Hansen JP, Rider JA, et al. Ectopic breast cancer: Special treatment considerations in the postmenopausal patient. Breast J 2002;8:286-9.

32. Lesavoy MA, Gomez-Garcia A, Nejdl R, et al. Axillary breast tissue: Clinical presentation and surgical treatment. Ann Plas Surg 1995;35:356-60.

33. Guerry RL, Pratt-Thomas HR. Carcinoma of supernumerary breast of vulva with bilateral mammary cancer. Cancer 1976; 38:2570-4.

34. Kuroda N, Goishi K, Ohara M, et al. Bilateral hamartoma arising in axillary accessory mammary glands. APMIS 2006;114: 77-8.

35. Alghamdi H. Accessory breasts: When to excise? Breast J 2005;11:155-7.

36. Thorne AL, Jackson A, Yiangou C. The use of sentinel node biopsy in the treatment of cancer of an accessory breast. Breast 2003; 12:153-5.

37. Down S, Barr L, Baildam AD, Bundred N. Management of accessory breast tissue in the axilla. Br J Sur 2003;90:1213-4.

38. Loukas M, Hullett J, Louis RG Jr, et al. The gross anatomy of the extrathoracic course of the intercostobrachial nerve. Clin Anat 2006; 19:106-11.

39. Emsen IM. Treatment with ultrasound-assisted liposuction of accessory axillary breast tissues. Aesthetic Plast Surg 2006;30: 251- 2.

40. Mehes K, Pinter A. Minor morphological aberrations in children with isolated urinary tract malformations. Eur J Pediatr 1990; 149:399-402.

41. Mehes K. Association of supernumerary nipples with other anomalies. J Pediatr 1979;95:274.

MARIOS LOUKAS, M.D., PH.D.*[dagger] PAMELA CLARKE,* R. SHANE TUBBS[double dagger]

From the * Department of Anatomical Sciences, St. George’s University, School of Medicine, Grenada, West

Indies; the [dagger] Department of Education and Development, Harvard Medical School, Boston, Massachusetts;

and the [double dagger] Department of Cell Biology and section of Pediatric Neurosurgery, University of Alabama,

Birmingham, Alabama

Address correspondence and reprint requests to Dr. Marios Loukas, M.D., Ph.D., Associate Professor, Department of Anatomical Sciences, St. George’s University, School of Medicine, True Blue Campus, Grenada, West Indies.

Copyright Southeastern Surgical Congress May 2007

(c) 2007 American Surgeon, The. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Tumors at the Aortoiliac/Inferior Vena Cava Bifurcation: Preoperative, Anesthetic, and Intraoperative Considerations

By Ouellette, James R Cossman, David V; Sibert, Karen S; McAndrew, Nicholas P; Silberman, Allan W

Primary and recurrent retroperitoneal tumors can involve the aortoiliac vasculature. They are often considered inoperable or incurable because of the locally advanced nature of the disease or the technical aspects involved in safely resecting the lesion. Safe resection of these lesions requires experience and extensive preoperative planning for success. A retrospective database review of 76 patients with retroperitoneal tumors identified tumors involving major vascular structures in the abdomen and pelvis undergoing resection of tumor en bloc with the aortoiliac vasculature. Preoperative planning and intraoperative technical maneuvers are reviewed. Patients were followed until time of this report. Four patients with retroperitoneal tumors involving the aortoiliac vessels underwent surgery: two patients with sarcoma (one primary and one recurrent), one with metastatic renal cell carcinoma, and one with a paraganglioma. All patients had resection of the aorta and vena cava or the iliac artery and vein. Arterial reconstruction (anatomic or extra-anatomic) was performed in all cases. The patient with renal cell carcinoma also required venous reconstruction to support a renal autotransplant. Veno-venous bypass was required in one patient. Local control was achieved in 3 of 4 cases. Surgery for retroperitoneal tumors involving major vascular structures is technically feasible with appropriate planning and technique. Multiple disciplines are required, including general surgical oncology, vascular surgery, and possibly, cardiothoracic surgery. TUMORS AT THE aortoiliac bifurcation (AIB) with or without involvement of the inferior vena cava (IVC) and iliac veins are often considered inoperable or incurable because of the locally advanced nature of the disease or the technical aspects involved in safely resecting the lesion. The usefulness of other treatment modalities, like chemotherapy or radiation, to effectively treat these patients is variable, depending on the tumor histology; however, it is usually limited without concomitant surgical resection.1-2 Because of improved operative techniques, anesthetic care, and intensive care unit support over the last several years, the morbidity and mortality from major oncologic re sections has significantly decreased.3 Successful tumor resections involving major vascular structures have also been reported with acceptable morbidity.1, 4-6

The approach to tumors with vascular invasion or encasement must be well planned and multidisciplinary.7 The possibility of major blood loss must be anticipated and prepared for. In addition to a general surgical oncologist, a vascular surgeon is often required because of the need for vascular resection and reconstruction. Veno- venous bypass techniques and even cardiopulmonary bypass with profound hypothermia with total circulatory arrest are occasionally needed to safely resect these tumors.8 Thus, a cardiac surgeon and a perfusionist may be necessary in certain situations. Failure to plan for these contingencies may lead to poor outcomes.

Methods

From a database of patients undergoing surgery for retroperitoneal tumors from 1981 to 2005, we identified four patients with lesions at the AIB and IVC bifurcation (IVCB) that demonstrate the importance of a well-coordinated, multidisciplinary approach to these difficult problems. Two of our patients had primary tumors and two had recurrent/metastatic tumors.

Case Reports

Primary Tumors

Case 1

A 49-year-old white man complained of vague abdominal pain. A magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) scan revealed a 3-cm, partially exophytic, right upper pole renal mass extending through at least 50 per cent of the cortex, and a 14 x 11-cm pelvic mass (Fig. 1) located at the AIB/IVCB. There were multiple collateral vessels surrounding the pelvic lesion; the right common iliac artery was partially enveloped and the left common iliac artery was completely enveloped by the lesion. A CT-directed needle biopsy of the pelvic mass was consistent with a paraganglioma. Biochemical testing was performed and found to be normal. The patient underwent a right radical nephrectomy through a right flank incision. The pathology revealed a chromophobe-type renal cell carcinoma. Additionally, the pelvic lesion was evaluated for possible resection through a lower midline incision. The tumor started just above the AIB, completely surrounded the iliac vasculature bilaterally, and extended deep into the pelvis with the rectosigmoid mesentery draped over the mass. Multiple vascular lakes were noted within the tumor and large collateral vessels surrounded the tumor. In addition, the residual distal right ureter went through the mass, and, of concern, the left ureter was adherent to the lateral aspect of the mass. For several reasons, we elected to abort resection of the tumor at this time: first, it was clear that a colon resection and an aortic resection with grafting would be required with its attendant risk of infection; second, the remaining left kidney might be in jeopardy with a radical resection that included the left ureter; third, temporary cross clamping of the infra-renal aorta caused a considerable decrease in the size of the tumor. Thus, pretreatment of the tumor with angiographic embolization might shrink the tumor and make a subsequent attempt at resection safer. Moreover, paragangliomas in other anatomic positions have been treated with radiation and/or embolization with subsequent shrinkage.9, 10 Thus, our plan was to treat this patient with radiation followed by angiographie embolization in an attempt to shrink the tumor and deprive it of its blood supply before an attempt at resection.

FIG. 1. MRI showing pelvic paraganglioma involving aortoiliac vasculature.

After a course of pelvic radiation (4500 rads), a follow-up MRI scan showed a slight decrease (10 x 9 cm) in the size of the mass. Five weeks after completion of radiation, the patient underwent angiographie embolization of multiple feeding vessels (Figs. 2A and 2B). The next day, the patient was taken electively to the operating room and was found to have ischemia of his sigmoid colon necessitating colectomy. Despite the radiation and embolization, there was little change in the size of the tumor and its vascular involvement, although we were able to dissect the left ureter off the tumor. The multiple vascular lakes noted within the substance of the tumor and the large collateral vessels were still present. Our thinking at this time was that venovenous bypass or cardiac bypass with hypothermie arrest would be necessary to control the potential bleeding. These contingencies were not prepared for; thus, we again aborted the procedure with plans to return to the operating room later in the week. Because of the presence of the tumor, an anastomosis between the proximal sigmoid colon and mid rectum could not be accomplished, necessitating a colostomy and Hartmann pouch.

FIG. 2. (A) Late arterial phase showing extensive arterial communication of aortoiliac vessels with tumor. (B) Postembolization film showing tumor vessels without blood supply.

At the third operation, the pelvic paraganglioma was resected with in-continuity removal of the distal aorta, all iliac arteries (common, external, and internal), the IVCB, and all iliac veins (common, external, and internal). A right axillofemoral-femoral bypass graft was constructed so that blood flow to the lower extremities would continue during the procedure when it became clear that the aortic cross clamp time would be prolonged. The femoral arteries proximal to the femoral anastomoses were ligated and a venovenous bypass circuit was inserted from both femoral veins to the right axillary vein. Despite these techniques, including the use of two Cell-Savers (Belmont Instrument Corporation, Billerica, MA), massive bleeding was encountered from the surrounding collateral vessels even after the tumor was removed. Hemostasis was finally obtained by packing the pelvis with multiple laparotomy pads. The patient was returned to the operating room several days later for pack removal and closure.

The patient developed complications of acute renal failure, massive scrotal and lower extremity edema, and an enterocutaneous fistula (several weeks later). The renal failure required short- term dialysis; however, he was discharged with a creatinine of 1.1 mg/dL. The massive scrotal and lower extremity edema completely resolved 3 months after surgery. The fistula required operative repair 18 months after the initial operation. The patient remains disease-free, alive and well, 3 years later.

Case 2

A 51-year-old white man presented to the emergency room with severe abdominal pain and a low-grade fever. A CT scan revealed a large (11 x 9.5-cm) retroperitoneal mass surrounding the distal aorta and the AIB, and severe effacement of the IVC. A CT-guided core needle biopsy was performed consistent with a high-grade sarcoma. The patient subsequently underwent neoadjuvant chemotherapy with cisplatin, adriamycin, and ifosfamide in an effort to reduce the size and induce necrosis of the tumor before surgical removal. The patient’s symptoms resolved after two courses of chemotherapy. A follow-up CT scan showed a large amount of necrosis, although there was little change in the size of the tumor (Fig. 3). Before the operation, an aortogram and inferior vena cavagram were performed that showed an avascular mass displacing the aorta and causing partial obstruction and effacement of the caudal IVC. The patient then underwent resection of the tumor, which necessitated a right hemicolectomy, right ureteronephrectomy, resection of the distal aorta, both common iliac arteries, the IVC, and both common iliac veins. Aortoiliac reconstruction was performed with a bifurcated Dacron graft. The IVC was ligated primarily. In preparation for the procedure, venovenous bypass and cardiac bypass were available, but were not necessary. FIG. 3. MRI after neoadjuvant chemotherapy. Mass shows >60 per cent necrosis without a significant decrease in size and persistent compression on vena cava and iliac vessels.

This patient also developed massive scrotal and lower extremity edema that resolved in 6 weeks. Although the pathologic margins were clear, several small lung metastases have developed subsequently. He is currently undergoing chemotherapy and is alive with no local recurrence 2 years postoperatively.

Recurrent/Metastatic Tumors

Case 3

A 44-year-old Hispanic woman initially presented 5 years ago to another institution with a left renal mass. At that time, she underwent a left nephrectomy. The pathology revealed a renal cell carcinoma with positive lymph nodes. Shortly thereafter, she developed a brain metastasis and underwent stereotactic brain radiation. Later that year, she developed pulmonary metastases and received interleukin 2, with a complete response. The patient remained disease-free for 4 years and then presented with a right pelvic mass. She underwent resection of the mass, which was adherent to the right iliac vasculature. No surrounding organs or vascular structures were removed. The pathology revealed recurrent renal cell carcinoma with all margins involved. The lesion recurred within 4 months. At that time, she presented to our institution and was noted to have a creatinine of 2.8 mg/dL with right hydronephrosis. A right ureteral stent was inserted with a drop in her creatinine to 1.5 mg/ dL. A metastatic evaluation was negative except for the right-sided retroperitoneal/pelvic mass. If resection of the recurrent lesion were possible, we felt that radiation therapy to the right pelvis/ retroperitoneum would be useful in the postoperative period. However, we were concerned that radiation might jeopardize any type of ureteral reconstruction (psoas hitch/Boari flap) and also injure the lower half of the remaining kidney. Consequently, preparations were made for possible renal autotransplantation to the left iliac fossa. An MR-angiogram demonstrated a single renal artery and vein and confirmed the mass in the right lower retroperitoneum. It compressed the right ureter, the distal right external iliac vein, and the IVC near the bifurcation (Fig. 4).

At operation, removal of the right pelvic/retroperitoneal recurrence required appendectomy, right ureterectomy, and right salpingo-oophorectomy. In addition, the IVCB and the right and left common iliac veins were resected. A venous reconstruction was performed using a 12-mm polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) graft between the IVC and the left common iliac vein and an 8-mm PTFE graft between the right common iliac vein and the previously placed 12-mm graft. An autotransplant of the right kidney to the left lower quadrant was performed by anastomosing the right ureter to the stump of the left ureter, the right renal artery to the right external iliac artery, and the right renal vein to the native left common iliac vein. All gross disease was removed, although margins were involved along the paravertebral musculature.

She recovered from surgery without incident and subsequently had her ureteral stent removed. The kidney autotransplant is functioning well; she has a creatinine of 1.2 mg/dL. She underwent radiation therapy to the resection bed and is currently disease free, 18 months postresection.

Case 4

A 53-year-old Middle-Eastern woman initially presented 5 years ago to another institution with a mass in her right thigh. An incisional biopsy revealed a high-grade sarcoma. The patient underwent neoadjuvant chemotherapy with ifosfamide and adriamycin followed by a wide excision. Postoperatively, she received radiation and additional chemotherapy. Three years later, the patient developed a local recurrence and underwent another wide excision followed by a second course of radiation and additional chemotherapy. An MRI scan 18 months later revealed an 8.5 x 8 x 7.5-cm right pelvic mass surrounding the right iliac vasculature, consistent with a recurrence. A metastatic work-up was otherwise negative. A preoperative arteriogram demonstrated encasement of the right external iliac artery, although no definite invasion was noted. At operation, the recurrent right-sided pelvic/ retroperitoneal sarcoma was resected with an in-continuity right ureteronephrectomy and resection of the right external iliac artery and vein. Both internal iliac arteries were ligated along with the right common iliac vein. Vascular reconstruction was performed with a 6-mm Dacron graft between the right common iliac artery and the right external iliac artery just proximal to the inguinal ligament. The vein was thrombosed at operation and ligated. All gross disease was removed.

FIG. 4. MRI coronal view of right pelvic mass recurrent after recent resection.

She recovered from surgery without complication; however, the right lower extremity woody edema, which was present before our operation, worsened. She developed a local recurrence within 6 months of surgery (her third recurrence), resulting in significant pain and debilitating symptoms. She died 8 months after surgery.

Results

Preparations for Surgery

Anatomic/Vascular Assessment

A thorough understanding of the involved anatomy is mandatory using CT and/or MRI scans. Although cross-sectional and sagittal imaging of the tumor and the involved vasculature is sufficient to determine what vessels are invaded or encased and will require sacrifice, conventional arteriography is important in planning reconstruction. This is especially true when the aortoiliac tree is extensively involved, the patient has preexisting arteriosclerotic occlusive disease, potential for contamination exists, or extra- anatomic reconstruction is anticipated. Extra-anatomic reconstruction, such as axillo-femoral and/or femoral-femoral bypass are useful ways of keeping prosthetic grafts and anastomoses out of the main surgical field when there has been bowel spillage, leakage of potentially contaminated urine from the ureter or bladder, or when the tumor itself is necrotic and bacterial contamination cannot be immediately ruled out. Basic vascular surgical principles require preoperative assessment of inflow vessels and distal target vessels. Contrast imaging confirms that the target vessel is suitable for bypass and is in continuity with the distal vascular bed. This is especially important in patients who have had prior procedures in the groin, have extensive arteriosclerotic occlusive disease, or have had prior radiation therapy in the operative field. Absence of femoral pulses is an indication for conventional dye arteriography. Because venous reconstruction is optional, preoperative venous assessment is adequately performed with contrast-enhanced cross- sectional and sagittal imaging to evaluate venous invasion by tumor.

Preoperative/Neoadjuvant Therapy

A tissue diagnosis is mandatory before any attempt at resection to rule out a lymphoma or any other type of tumor that could be treated nonoperatively. In addition, we recommend that any primary malignant tumor at the AIB/IVCB be considered for preoperative chemotherapy and/or radiation therapy in an effort to shrink the tumor. This also allows for a period of observation to see if distant metastatic disease develops that would preclude surgery of this magnitude. In addition, this in vivo clonogenic assay may be helpful in the postoperative period in deciding on adjuvant therapy. For recurrent tumors, the decision on neoadjuvant therapy would be dictated by the patient’s previous chemotherapy/radiation history.11, 12

Preoperative embolization or radiation, in an effort to shrink the size of the tumor (benign or malignant) and control its blood supply, can be considered when feasible.13, 14 This may allow involution of tumor and potentially decrease angiogenesis.15 On occasion, preoperative placement of an infrarenal or suprarenal IVC filter will be required to prevent tumor emboli. If the tumor extends above the renal veins into the retrohepatic IVC or above, cardiopulmonary bypass with or without profound hypothermia and total circulatory arrest may be required.

Anesthetic Considerations

The anesthetic management of patients with tumors involving the great vessels of the lower abdomen and pelvis must take into account that these cases may last 8 hours or longer and involve substantial blood loss. Blood products and rapid infusion devices should be readily available. Judicious volume support is given along with blood products as needed. Adjunctive pressor administration guided by invasive monitoring can be better than large-volume administration and easier on the patient in the postoperative period. In the preanesthetic work-up, it is important to question the use of any cardiotoxic chemotherapeutic drugs (i.e., adriamycin) that may result in underlying cardiac dysfunction.

Intraoperative Considerations

We recommend performing the arterial reconstruction earlier, rather than later, in the course of the operation. As noted above, operations involving resection of massive tumors encompassing aortoiliac arteries and/or caval and iliac veins frequently require multiple transfusions of blood and blood products, large infusions of crystalloid and/or colloid, and advanced hemodynamic monitoring. Distal tissue ischemia and subsequent reperfusion acidosis and hyperkalemia are poorly tolerated in patients already being challenged by massive fluid losses and replacement. Coagulopathy, hemodynamic instability, electrolyte imbalance, hypothermia, and marginal distal tissue perfusion will all be worsened by distal tissue ischemia. An unexpected bleeding event after crossclamping that is difficult to control might prolong the period of ischemia and push the patient over the precipice into hemodynamic and clotting instability. If the tumor proves unresectable at surgery or the major vascular structures remain intact, the previously placed bypasses can be easily removed. Venous reconstruction of the vena cava and iliac veins can be performed if conditions permit.16, 17 Large caliber tube or bifurcated PTFE grafts or femoral vein homografts make excellent conduits and are very rapidly grafted when the proximal vena cava and distal iliac veins have already been dissected out. Unlike the arterial reconstruction, venous reconstruction may be done when resection of the tumor is complete and the patient is stable. Highly vascular tumors that extend deep into the pelvis may require additional blood loss control measures. The surgeon and the perfusionist should be prepared for venovenous bypass. Previous groin surgery or radiation may increase the risk of long-term complications.18

Discussion

The initial question that needs to be addressed is whether or not patients with tumors encompassing the AIB/IVCB should be considered for surgical resection. Is the potential curative, survival, or palliative benefit worth the considerable risk involved? Chemotherapy and/or radiation therapy may be helpful in the neoadjuvant or adjuvant setting, but would not be expected to be effective as primary therapy for most solid tumors in this location.11, 12 We believe, depending on the pathology, that patients with primary tumors at the AIB/IVCB or patients with an isolated recurrence at the AIB/IVCB with a reasonable diseasefree interval can be better palliated with surgical intervention and have a better opportunity to respond to adjunctive therapy if all gross disease is removed. In all of our cases, the patient was left with one kidney, and in cases 1 and 3, the remaining kidney was in jeopardy. Clearly, poor cardiopulmonary and renal function would be a contraindication to this type of surgery.19

In highly vascular tumors, such as the paraganglioma in case 1, preoperative angiographie embolization can be considered. We were very pleased with the radiographie appearance of the completed embolization procedure (Fig. 2B), but were disappointed at surgery that it had little effect on the vascular nature of the tumor. In addition, the embolization complicated the situation by causing ischemia of the sigmoid colon. The combination of radiation and embolization has been used for paragangliomas in other locations, for example head and neck and mediastinum, with better results.10, 14, 20, 21 Our experience suggests caution with these techniques for tumors at the AIB.

Blood product transfusion is guided by intraoperative assessment. The use of cell-saver technology is not usually desirable during the resection of malignant tumors. In the case of Patient 1, the paraganglioma was considered histologically benign, thus, cell- saver blood was used and was certainly life-saving. Hansen et al.22 studied the use of intraoperative blood collection and autotransfusion in patients with cancer. Malignant cells were identified regularly in the blood shed during tumor surgery, justifying the standard teaching against cell-saver methods in cancer surgery. The concern, of course, is that salvaged blood may lead to hematogenous metastases after retransfusion.22

Other investigators have sought better methods to allow for autotransfusion. For instance, Papadimitriou and colleagues23 have shown autotransfusion to be safe in hepatic resection for malignancy. In more recent studies, tumor cells have been able to be filtered. Although a standard red cell filter will not adequately remove circulating tumor cells, a leukocyte depletion filter will remove tumor cells completely.24 Of course, with massive blood loss, saving the patient becomes paramount to the small risk of perpetuating hematogenous metastases.

In reviewing case 1, despite arterial inflow occlusion, axillobifemoral bypass grafts with ligation of the femoral arteries proximal to the anastomoses, bilateral femoral venous occlusion with venovenous bypass, massive bleeding was still encountered. This has caused us to consider cardiopulmonary bypass with profound hypothermia and circulatory arrest as a potentially better way to address the problem of a highly vascular tumor located deep within the pelvis. The advantages include a bloodless field for faster resection in a highly vascular area. In addition, cross-clamp time is decreased and neurologic protection is afforded by the associated hypothermia.25 This technique has been used for high aortic arch procedures and cardiac procedures, although it has been reported with resection of highly vascular pelvic tumors such as arteriovenous malformations.26

Conclusions

Radical resection of tumors involving the AIB/ IVCB can be performed safely and can provide effective palliation, improve quality of life, and afford a potential cure. Based on the tumor location and organs and vascular structures involved, various techniques, including anatomic and extra-anatomic arterial grafting, venous grafting, venovenous bypass, and total circulatory arrest with profound hypothermia, may be necessary to safely resect these difficult tumors. An experienced team is required to achieve optimal results and to justify the potential morbidity associated with resection.

Acknowledgment

This work was supported in part by the Robert J. and Suzanne Gottlieb Endowment in Surgical Oncology and by the Surgical Oncology Education and Research Fund at Cedars-Sinai Medical Center.

REFERENCES

1. Lewis JJ, Leung D, Heslin M, et al. Association of local recurrence with subsequent survival in extremity soft tissue sarcoma. J Clin Oncol 1997;15:646-52.

2. DiPerna CA, Bowdish ME, Weaver FA, et al. Concomitant vascular procedures for malignancies with vascular invasion. Arch Surg 2002;137:901-6.

3. Duffy JP, Hines OJ, Liu JH, et al. Improved survival for adenocarcinoma of the ampulla of Vater: Fifty-five consecutive resections. Arch Surg 2003; 138:941-8.

4. Hollenbeck ST, Grobmyer SR, Kent KC, Brennan MF. Surgical treatment and outcomes of patients with primary inferior vena cava leiomyosarcoma. J Am Coll Surg 2003; 197:575-9.

5. Hassan I, Park SZ, Donohue JH, et al. Operative management of primary retroperitoneal sarcomas: A reappraisal of an institutional experience. Ann Surg 2004;239:244-50.

6. Jaques DP, Coit DG, Hadju SI, Brennan MF. Management of primary and recurrent soft-tissue sarcoma of the retroperitoneum. Ann Surg 1990;212:51-9.

7. Silberman AW, Steckel RJ, Kagan AR. Retroperitoneal sarcomas: The role of diagnostic imaging and multimodal management. Med Pediatr Oncol 1987;15:262-6.

8. Sarmiento JM, Bower TC, Cherry KJ, et al. Is combined partial hepatectomy with segmentai resection of inferior vena cava justified for malignancy? Arch Surg 2003;138:624-30.

9. Mendenhall WM, Hinerman RW, Amdur RJ, et al. Treatment of paragangliomas with radiation therapy. Otolaryngol Clin North Am 2001;34:1007-20.

10. Deruyver D, Mathurin P, Dooms G, Hamoir M. Lateral neck paraganglioma: Diagnostic imaging and preoperative embolization. J BeIg Radiol 1993;76(1):15-9.

11. Meric F, Milas M, Hunt KK, et al. Impact of neoadjuvant chemotherapy on postoperative morbidity in soft tissue sarcomas. J Clin Oncol 2000; 18:3378-83.

12. Meric F, Hess KR, Varma DG, et al. Radiographic response to neoadjuvant chemotherapy is a predictor of local control and survival in soft tissue sarcomas. Cancer 2002;95:1120-6.

13. Stone HB, Coleman CN, Anscher MS, McBride WH. Effects of radiation on normal tissue: Consequences and mechanisms. Lancet Oncol 2003;4:529.

14. Smith RF, Shetty PC, Reddy DJ. Surgical treatment of carotid paragangliomas presenting unusual technical difficulties. The value of preoperative embolization. J Vase Surg 1988;7:631-7.

15. Folkman J. Tumor angiogenesis: A possible control point in tumor growth. Ann Intern Med 1975;82:96-100.

16. Grotemeyer D, Pillny M, Luther B, et al. Reconstruction of the inferior vena cava for extended resection of malignant tumors. Chirurg 2003;74:547-53.

17. Sarkar R, Eilber FR, Gelabert HA, Quinones-Baldrich WJ. Prosthetic replacement of the inferior vena cava for malignancy. J Vasc Surg 1998;28:75-81.

18. Payne WG, Walusimbi MS, Blue ML, et al. Radiated groin wounds: Pitfalls in reconstruction. Am Surg 2003;69:994-7.

19. Kraybill WG, Gallery MP, Heiken JP, Flye MW. Radical resection of tumors of the inferior vena cava with vascular reconstruction and kidney autotransplantation. Surgery 1997;121:31- 6.

20. Ward PH, Liu C, Vinuela F, Bentson JR. Embolization: An adjunctive measure for removal of carotid body tumors. Laryngoscope 1988;98:1287-91.

21. Rakovich G, Ferraro P, Therasse E, Duranceau A. Preoperative embolization in the management of a mediastinal paraganglioma. Ann Thorac Surg 2001;72:601-3.

22. Hansen EN, Wolff N, Knuechel R, et al. Tumor cells in blood shed from the surgical field. Arch Surg 1995;130:387-93.

23. Papadimitriou JD, Fotopoulos AC, Prahalias AA, et al. The impact of new technology on hepatic resection for malignancy. Arch Surg 2001; 136:1307-13.

24. Soukiasian HJ, Raissi SS, Kleisli T, et al. Total circulatory arrest for the replacement of the descending and thoracoabdominal aorta. Arch Surg 2005; 140:394-8.

25. Edelman MJ, Potter P, Mahaffey KG, et al. The potential for reintroduction of tumor cells during intraoperative blood salvage: Reduction of risk with use of the RC-400 leukocyte depletion filter. Urology 1996:47:179-81. 26. McCready RA, Fehrenbacher JW, Divelbiss JL, et al. Surgical resection of a large recurrent pelvic arteriovenous malformation using deep hypothermie circulatory arrest. J Vase Surg 2004;39:1348-50.

JAMES R. OUELLETTE, D.O.,*1 DAVID V. COSSMAN, M.D., F.A.C.S.,[dagger] KAREN S. SIBERT, M.D.,[double dagger]

NICHOLAS P. MCANDREW,* ALLAN W. SILBERMAN, M.D., PH.D., F.A.C.S.*

From the * Divisions of Surgical Oncology, [dagger] Vascular Surgery, and [double dagger] Anesthesiology, Cedars Sinai Medical

Center, Los Angeles, California

1 Present address: Division of Surgical Oncology, Wright State University School of Medicine, Dayton, OH.

Address correspondence and reprint requests to Allan W. Silberman, M.D., Ph.D., Samuel Oschin Comprehensive Cancer Institute, Cedars-Sinai Medical Center, 8700 Beverly Boulevard, Los Angeles, CA 90048.

Copyright Southeastern Surgical Congress May 2007

(c) 2007 American Surgeon, The. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

The Charlotte Observer, N.C., Tim Funk Column: Blessing the Hands That Heal

By Tim Funk, The Charlotte Observer, N.C.

Jun. 30–Depending on your religion, Friday, Saturday or Sunday spells sacred.

Just consider what many of us do with our hands on those days: We raise them in praise or press them together in prayer. We use them to hold our holy books, to accept Communion, to offer another a handshake of peace.

But what about the workweek?

That can be hallowed time, too. On the job, in a thousand different ways, we extend helping hands.

At Charlotte’s Presbyterian Hospital, they understand — and honor — this. Once a year, chaplains there carve out time to bless the healing hands of employees. Doctors, nurses, assistants, secretaries, gardeners, janitors — whoever chooses to participate.

Sometimes patients want to be included, too.

Recently, I tagged along, notebook in hand, as the Rev. Hunter Roddey and Connie Matthews, his helper for the day, rolled their “Blessing the Hands cart” from one nursing unit to the next.

Armed with hot water, frankincense and myrrh, their message to these caregivers, Roddey said, was: “You do so much with your hands all day. Let us care for you a little while.”

Then, in the same spirit as figures in the Bible washed each others’ feet, Roddey and Matthews soothed working hands by pouring water over them and anointing them with the aromatic oils.

“We are thankful for the work your hands do,” Roddey told nurse Mitzy Waller, 35, the first in line. Then he held her hands and prayed over them: “God, our creator, thank you for the skills you give us…and may the work of these hands bring hope and healing.”

Roddey is Presbyterian. But, because of the religious diversity of the hospital’s work force, he said he doesn’t invoke Jesus, Muhammad or Moses.

But the blessees are free to bring their own beliefs and traditions to the experience. And many do.

Dr. Jay Duggins, an anesthesiologist who attends Carmel Baptist Church, said he sees his work — and the blessing of his hands — as part of his Christian faith.

“I believe in the Lord and that we are all doing his work here,” said Duggins, 40, who was at Presbyterian to evaluate patients a day after surgery. “This is an outward showing of our faith, and allows (God) to work through us.”

How did the blessing make this Christian — and man of science — feel?

“Clean, purified, free from the illness and the troubles of the world,” he said.

Nurse Megan Peterson, 22, a Baptist from Mount Pleasant, said she believes the blessing helps her do a better job.

“It helps me not make mistakes,” she said.

And Kristen Lash, 21, a nurse who attends Concord First Assembly Church, said she partakes in the blessing partly “to bring hope and healing to my patients” and partly, she adds with a laugh, because the oils “smell good.”

The Rev. Roddey is the son of a doctor. And, for a while growing up, he thought maybe he’d go into medicine, too. But he didn’t like the science.

He felt called, instead, to the ministry. And he loved serving in a hospital. He’s one of three full-time chaplains on Presbyterian Hospital’s Charlotte campus.

The blessing of hands, Roddey, 44, said, “connects me to people…When you hold somebody’s hand and look into their eyes, that can be very meaningful.”

His favorite story: The day a nursing technician, tears in her eyes, called out as the cart started to depart. “Don’t forget about me,” she said.

Her hands were gnarled and missing fingers, but Stephanie Biggers — the parish nurse who came up with the blessing-of-the-hands idea and Roddey’s co-worker that day — held them, blessed them, and said, “What beautiful hands.”

“God was in the midst of that,” Roddey said at the memory.

Some doctors and nurses don’t get in line to have their hands blessed. But no one, Roddey said, has ever complained.

At the cardiac triage unit, where heart patients are cared for, three nurses lined up to have their hands blessed.

Among them: Rayna Jones, 49, of Matthews, who said that, most Sundays, she’s working at the hospital rather than in church.

But she said she saw the sacredness in her work — and welcomed the blessing.

“It all helps,” Jones said. “Nursing is caring and this (blessing) gives us a little assistance from God.”

FAITH & VALUES Tim Funk

—–

To see more of The Charlotte Observer, or to subscribe to the newspaper, go to http://www.charlotte.com.

Copyright (c) 2007, The Charlotte Observer, N.C.

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

Diet-Related ‘Irritable Larynx Syndrome’ on the Rise

By Meg Haskell, Bangor Daily News, Maine

Jun. 29–Add “irritable larynx syndrome” to the litany of ills related to Americans’ poor health habits. Characterized by an ongoing cough, frequent throat-clearing and vocal hoarseness, the condition is on the rise throughout the country, including in Maine, and is in many cases directly related to our fatty diets and lack of exercise.

Dr. Robert Sataloff, a clinician in private practice and the head of ear nose and throat studies at Drexel University College of Medicine in Philadelphia, is in Maine this week educating physicians, speech pathologists and singing teachers about the condition and other matters associated with voice health.

Sataloff is the keynote speaker at a two-day professional symposium in Belfast sponsored by the Voice and Swallowing Center of Maine, an affiliate of the Waldo County General Hospital.

“This is an extremely common problem, but it is often not recognized,” Sataloff said in a phone interview during a break in the schedule on Thursday.

The syndrome is often caused and made worse by the reflux of stomach acid up the esophagus to the voice box, or larynx, he said. Reflux is more common and more intense in people who are overweight and those who have fat-heavy diets.

But because many people do not experience the uncomfortable “heart burn” associated with reflux, misdiagnosis is common: asthma and allergies are often blamed for the symptoms.

“When acid reflux is bad enough that it’s irritating the larynx, it’s been in the esophagus long enough to do serious damage,” Sataloff said. That damage can set the stage for dangerous illnesses, including esophageal and laryngeal cancer, he said.

Less life-threatening but still of concern are other problems associated with vocal chord irritation, he said, including pain, voice strain and complete loss of the ability to speak.

Sataloff, who is a professional singer as well as the author of numerous books and articles in medical journals, spoke to approximately 80 conference attendees about the basic anatomy and physiology of the larynx, different ways to measure and diagnose problems, and new treatments for voice problems. Attendees came from Maine, other states, Canada and Taiwan.

“They’ll leave with a better working knowledge to provide better care,” he said, “and a better understanding of what they don’t know so they can continue to educate themselves.”

Speech pathologist Michael Towey, manager of the Voice and Swallowing Center of Maine, said Sataloff is one of the world’s best-known voice specialists. His presentation at the symposium, Towey said, helps assure that Mainers get “world-class treatment.”

The Voice and Swallowing Center of Maine treats patients for vocal chord strain and irritation, stroke-related speech and swallowing disorders and other medical conditions.

It also provides speech modification services to people who use their voices professionally, including singers, telemarketers, teachers, clergy and others.

More information about the center can be found at www.wchi.com/slp/t_cva.html. Information about Dr. Sataloff is available at www.phillyent.com.

—–

To see more of the Bangor Daily News, or to subscribe to the newspaper, go to http://www.bangordailynews.com.

Copyright (c) 2007, Bangor Daily News, Maine

Distributed by McClatchy-Tribune Information Services.

For reprints, email [email protected], call 800-374-7985 or 847-635-6550, send a fax to 847-635-6968, or write to The Permissions Group Inc., 1247 Milwaukee Ave., Suite 303, Glenview, IL 60025, USA.

ORLive Presents: Congenital Hole in the Heart Called Patent Foramen Ovale Sealed Without Open-Heart Surgery

Shawnee Mission Medical Center will showcase a procedure that can repair a hole in the heart without invasive surgery in a live Webcast on www.OR-Live.com July 12, 6:30 PM EDT. Cardiologist Paul H. Kramer, MD, of Kramer & Crouse Cardiology, will use a closure device to seal a congenital hole in the heart, a condition also known as patent foramen ovale (PFO), without open-heart surgery.

Kramer is a national leader in the innovation of this procedure and was the first cardiologist in the area to perform the procedure using the latest closure devices.

During this minimally invasive procedure, the closure device will be fed through a catheter in the leg and advanced to the heart to cover the hole. Once the device is in place, the catheter will be removed. Over time, heart tissue will grow over the device, closing the hole permanently. The closure device will block future blood flow through the hole and reduce the chance of recurring stroke.

“This procedure is beneficial to patients because it dramatically reduces recovery time,” said Kramer. “Surgery is eliminated, as well as a painful incision. The only follow-up medication needed is an aspirin a day.”

Most patients do not have symptoms with PFO. However, it can lead to a stroke or a TIA, better known as a mini stroke. PFO can be detected by an echocardiogram, a test in which an ultrasound is used to scan the heart. PFO is present in about 25 percent of the general population.

Most PFO procedures are done on an outpatient basis and the patient is allowed to return home the day of the procedure or the next. This procedure is less invasive than open-heart surgery, which leads to a quicker recovery and less discomfort for the patient.

Minimally Invasive Cardiovascular Procedures

Physicians at the Shawnee Mission Regional Cardiac & Vascular Center were the first in the Kansas City metropolitan area to perform a variety of revolutionary minimally invasive procedures designed to prevent open-heart surgery — affording patients a shorter hospital stay, less pain and a quicker recovery time than with traditional surgery.

Umbrellas Used for More than Rainy Days

Paul H. Kramer, MD, FACC, of Kramer & Crouse Cardiology, PC, was the first cardiologist in the area to use a revolutionary umbrella-like device to close congenital holes in the heart, otherwise known as patent foramen ovale (PFO) and atrial septal defect, without open-heart surgery. These polyester fabric devices are folded into a special catheter that is inserted through a vein in the leg to the hole in the heart. The umbrella-like arms of the device are slowly pushed out of the catheter and a set of arms opens on each side of the hole to close it. The use of this type of device facilitates the growth of tissue around the hole, closing it permanently. Closure devices block future blood flow through the defect and reduces the incidence of recurrent stroke. Many times, the procedure also enables patients to eliminate blood thinners from their medication regimen. “This procedure is beneficial to patients because it dramatically reduces recovery time,” said Dr. Kramer. “Surgery is eliminated, as well as a painful incision. The only follow-up medication needed is an aspirin a day.” In addition, most PFO and atrial septal defect procedures are performed under local anesthesia in an outpatient setting, allowing patients to return to normal activity in just a few days.

Visit: http://www.or-live.com/ShawneeMission/1888 now to learn more and view a program preview. VNR http://www.or-live.com/rams/shm-1888-mkw-q.ram

Video-Link Available: http://www.marketwire.com/mw/frame_mw?attachid=526127

 Contact:  Alex Fraser Director of Marketing slp3D, Inc. / OR-Live  860-953-2900 x 214 Email Contact

SOURCE: slp3D

Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder in an Elderly Combat Veteran: A Case Report

By Markowitz, Joseph D

In this case report, an elderly combat veteran with a chronic course of post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) that was untreated for nearly 60 years was evaluated and treated with a combination of medication and graded exposure psychotherapy. To the best of our knowledge, there have been no reports on graded exposure in the elderly. The course of treatment lessened the key symptom domains of PTSD. Comorbid depression was also lessened. Although a single case report, it would appear that elderly patients do respond to psychotherapeutic techniques such as graded exposure therapy. Given the large percentage of the elderly population that has witnessed combat and due to the continuing military conflicts that the United States has been involved in over recent decades, treatments for PTSD in an aging population will be necessary. Introduction

It was only several years after the cannons of the American Civil War fell silent that Dr. Jacob Da Costa wrote an article describing “irritable heart” in former soldiers. A generation later, the phenomenon called “shell shock” was written about the horrific battles of World War I. Still later “combat neurosis” was used to describe this entity in World War II, until the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders III changed the name of this syndrome to post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD). As PTSD became increasingly more relevant in the 20th century, figures in the field of psychology no less significant than Freud, Jung, and Piaget pondered the mechanisms of this disorder.1

At the dawn of the 21st century, PTSD continues to play an important role in the mental health care system. Temporally closer to our time will be the scourge of combat-related trauma victims of World War II, the Korean Conflict, and the Vietnam Conflict. Nonetheless, the generation that fought in the Persian Gulf War Conflicts and the War on Terror will quickly rise and present for treatment in increasing numbers over the coming years. Recent research has established that 25% of elderly men have experienced combat and that 50 to 70% of the general American population over a lifetime will experience a trauma meeting diagnostic criteria for PTSD.2 PTSD in the elderly population also has several distinguishing features that have been noted.

Despite the commonly held belief that PTSD symptoms ameliorate with age, retirement tends to worsen symptoms of PTSD.3 Factors involved in this are thought to be the loss of the ability to submerge the earlier trauma in the world of business or family life. Also, retirement age individuals experience other stressors such as the loss of friends to illness and death and a general decline in economic resources.3 Elderly patients with PTSD also are noted to suffer a greater burden of somatic complaints due to the illness.4 Anxiety disorders frequently affect the cardiovascular system, central nervous system, and endocrine system via the hypothalamic pituitary axis.4 Another aspect of PTSD in the elderly patient that bodes poorly is its persistence as a diagnosis.5

For the above reasons, as the general population continues to grow older, PTSD in the elderly will undoubtedly become more prevalent. Society will need newer and better treatment modalities as PTSD can prove to be a protracted and treatment-resistant disorder with significant morbidity, comorbidity in psychiatric and somatic health, and mortality.

Case Report

C.R. is an 82-year-old married Caucasian male with multiple medical problems who presented with a chief complaint of “nightmares and flashbacks of the Battle of the Bulge (Ardennes Offensive).”

History of Present Illness

C.R. served one term in the army from 1942 to 1946 in the European theater of World War II. He vividly remembers the campaign that began in the Ardennes Forest of Belgium during the winter of 1944 to 1945. During the interview, he expressed his fear of not surviving this battle and the horrors he experienced while in combat.

After his return from the war, he began re-experiencing explosions, witnessing dismembered or dead army soldiers, and running through the forests in the snow and ice. Another particularly disturbing memory that repeatedly surfaced was of a severely injured comrade asking for a “mercy killing” to “put him out of his misery.” He described these phenomena as “flashbacks” and stated that they occurred only occasionally since his discharge from active military duty in 1946 but intensified greatly during the early years of the Korean conflict.

C.R. reported frequent nightmares since the early 1950s that were usually about themes of the war-dogs chasing him through the forest, bullets whizzing nearby and striking trees, and dismembered corpses. Commonly, the dreams had no substance but he woke up with feelings of dread and terror and usually sweating and shaking. C.R. reported that the nightmares occurred about two nights per week since that time. These dreams continued in frequency and intensity up to the time he presented for treatment over 50 years later. He described these symptoms as “something I thought was normal for people who had been in battle and would have to deal with for the rest of my life.” It was his opinion that the exposure to men in military service during the Korean conflict exacerbated his symptoms and established their permanence. The patient admitted that he had difficulties discussing the trauma of the Ardennes Offensive and avoided the topic with his family. In addition, he has avoided sports events and malls which disappointed his wife who enjoyed sports and shopping. He described being bothered by loud noises and had given up hunting many years ago as the combination of being in a wooded location with loud firearms exacerbated his symptoms and triggered “flashbacks.” C.R. reported that he becomes startled easily and spoke of sitting in the corners of restaurants so other patrons would not be directly behind him. One major reason for his seeking treatment was due to his noticing an increasing irritability that he was concerned over as he had several times verbally “snapped” at his wife. The symptoms C.R. discussed-re-experiencing phenomena, avoidance, and hyperarousability-met diagnostic criteria for PTSD.

Throughout this time, he experienced occasional depressive symptoms which were usually “mild” in the 4 to 5 out of 10 scale (1 being the worst mood he could ever imagine, 5 being the average mood most people have on a typical day, and 10 being the best mood he could imagine), but occasionally reaching 2 out of 10. He would then have decreased sleep, decreased concentration, poor energy, and guilt about surviving the war. He did maintain a normal appetite and sex drive. C.R. admitted to occasional suicidal thoughts but seriously doubted he would ever go through with the act. He had a plan once to drive his car off the road into a tree but emphasized that this thought had long since passed and he was able to contract for safety. Although the symptoms of PTSD and depression were present for many years, overall, these had worsened since C.R.’s retirement approximately a decade earlier. C.R. denied mania or psychotic symptoms except one episode of auditory and visual hallucinations when medically ill in the hospital. Several years before presenting to treatment, C.R. was in the hospital and saw a flashlight at the foot of the bed being held by someone he could not see. He believed he would soon be interrogated in a “military-like” manner. This was the first and only episode of auditory or visual hallucinations in C.R.’s life.

Past Psychiatric History

C.R. denied a history of psychiatric illness including hospitalizations, suicide attempts, or a history of physical or sexual abuse. He denied the use of cigarettes, drugs, or alcohol.

Past Medical History

As a child C.R. had a tonsillectomy and then as a young adult he had an appendectomy and a pilonidal cystectomy. Due to his time in the Ardennes Forest, he has bilateral peripheral neuropathy in his feet from frostbite and mild, bilateral sensorineural hearing loss. He has an extensive history of coronary artery disease with a quadruple bypass surgery, angioplasty, several catheterizations, and stent placements after suffering four myocardial infarctions. He has a 4-cm abdominal aortic aneurysm and suffers from hypertension.

Current medical pharmacotherapy includes 10 mg of ezetimibe in the morning, 75 mg of clopidogrel in the evening, 40 mg of sotalol daily, 60 mg of isosorbide mononitrate daily, 500 mg of acetaminophen/5 mg of hydrocodone-two tablets daily, one tablet of cetirizine in the evening, 40 mg of furosemide per day, potassium chloride tablets-20 milliequivalents twice daily, and 25 mg of hydroxyzine four times daily. He is allergic to aspirin and diltiazem.

Family History

C.R’s mother had a history of coronary artery disease and his father had diabetes mellitus. He had two brothers and four sisters, all with significant coronary artery disease. There is no history of psychiatric illness in any sibling.

Psychosocial History

C.R. reported an uneventful childhood in rural South Carolina with no history of physical or sexual abuse. He interacted well with siblings and peers and had friends. C.R. graduated from college after his military service, went on to complete seminary, and was a minister for 44 years before retirement. After retirement, he volunteered in a hospital chaplaincy service. Currently, he enjoys woodshop. He has been married for 56 years and has two daughters and multiple grandchildren. Mental Status Examination

Mental status examination upon initial consultation demonstrated an 82-year-old Caucasian male who appeared younger than his stated age. His speech was normal in rate and volume. He described his mood as “okay” and his affect was mildly blunted. He was cooperative, coherent, and his stream of thought was goal directed. He denied suicidal or homicidal ideation. He denied auditory or visual hallucinations. He was not hypervigilant or paranoid. His insight and judgment were good. Cognitively, he was of above-average intelligence with preserved mental functioning based on his fund of knowledge and vocabulary. He was aware of the date, location, and current events. C.R. was able to spell the word “grape” forward and backward, do serial mathematical calculations, and was able to recall three items immediately and after 5 minutes.

Clinical Course

Treatment for C.R. was initiated with sertraline at 25 mg per day and after several days increased to 50 mg per day. He was not able to tolerate this medication due to fatigue and discontinued it on his own volition. Upon return visit, we agreed to a trial of 10 mg of escitalopram per day which also caused fatigue and we reduced the dose to 5 mg per day. This dose was effective and well tolerated. Initially, his mood symptoms began to show improvement, including his sleep, energy, and concentration, while the number of nightmares and flashbacks, as well as the severity of the avoidance and hyperarousability, remained constant.

A discussion on the theory of graded exposure therapy and its potential to lead to a brief worsening of symptoms before improvement was undertaken and C.R. agreed to begin this treatment.6 Graded exposure is a technique used to overcome maladaptive anxiety by having the patient approach the feared situation gradually through a hierarchy of anxiety-provoking scenes developed by the both physician and patient.7 As each level is mastered, more intense anxiety provoking scenes are graduated to until there is a relative desensitization to the material disturbing the patient.7 As a first step, C.R. attained a long article in the mail from a World War II veteran’s group to which he belongs of the history of his battalion during the Ardennes Offensive and its relation to other units including the rationale of troop and supply movements. The reading of this took several hours and was described as a difficult, yet tolerable and helpful, experience. Next, for several sessions, we discussed his personal experiences at the Battle of the Bulge from December 16th to December 21st 1944 and had detailed discussions of the events of the engagement and his feelings surrounding various situations. Initially, the topics covered were of the least emotionally upsetting (e.g., his position and a general description of the landscape and troop movements). C.R. was asked to only superficially describe his experiences and, when comfortable with one event, to continue to progress to more graphic and traumatizing experiences (e.g., the decision to “storm” a home and the events that occurred once inside). Painful memories were spoken about first in the office until some sense of mastery was acquired over them by the patient. At that point, he made a cassette tape recording of himself discussing these experiences in detail to be listened to daily for at least 1 month for habituation. C.R. was instructed to only make the tapes of the previously discussed experiences until the most traumatic experiences (e.g., the request of a friend for a “mercy killing” and seeing dismembered corpses of fellow soldiers) were mastered. Concurrently, the frequency of nightmares decreased from approximately two weekly to one every 2 to 3 weeks and the number of flashbacks decreased from approximately five weekly to two to three every 2 weeks. After approximately 2 to 3 more months of medication treatment, he reported only the occasional nightmare and flashback. C.R. described less sensitivity to disturbing stimuli and less arousal but still noted avoidance symptoms. Nonetheless, by the end of treatment he began to have less avoidance as evidenced by his attending two crowded church bazaars without difficulty.

Discussion

PTSD is a common syndrome estimated to affect 1 in 12 adults at some time during their lives although 50 to 70% of people are exposed to traumatic experiences. Approximately 20% of those exposed to traumatic situations develop PTSD.8 PTSD must be a diagnosis of concern for the clinician since it is an anxiety disorder commonly comorbid with other anxiety disorders, affective disorders, substance abuse disorders, and suicide.9 When combined with the fact that the suicide rate increases in elderly males, particularly elderly Caucasian males, PTSD proves to be a condition that must be closely monitored.

Some authors have postulated the underdiagnosis of this syndrome in patients due to both clinical inattention on the part of health care providers and a culture of denial among the generation of World War II and Korean era combat veterans.10

Because PTSD is likely to be a chronic condition, it would be helpful to have an idea of the typical course the illness follows. Contrary to widespread belief that the syndrome uniformly diminishes in severity over time, it is more likely to show an early decrease in symptoms, with a heightening of symptoms later in life.2 This seems to be the course that C.R.’s psychopathology followed. Table I represents a diagram of events believed to be increasingly intense in traumatic nature, and possibly more likely, to result in PSTD.

Combat exposure, including duration and intensity, is known to predict PTCD. This could be complicated by the more community- driven psychosocial stressors such as recent conflicts in the Middle East. It has been reported that combat veterans can have significant increases in symptomatology at times when reminders of warfare abound.11

Treatment of PTSD continues to evolve and has entered an exciting new phase of development. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors clearly are the first-line drugs for treatment and appear effective in both the core symptomatology of PTSD and the very frequent comorbid depression.9 The paradigm shift to the utilization of graded exposure treatment has proven very promising for a large number of sufferers of PTSD and should be considered either as a primary treatment or to consolidate gains made with pharmacotherapeutic measures, especially when fear is the predominant PTSD emotion and avoidance is the primary coping mechanism.6 When fear is not the predominant coping mechanism (e.g., shame, guilt, or disgust), graded exposure therapy may be less likely to be successful. Another valuable lesson learned from this case is that, contrary to a popular belief among some mental health professionals, the elderly can benefit from psychotherapeutic interventions.8 Although there is little published data on controlled trials of psychotherapy with the elderly, relaxation therapy, cognitive therapy, cognitive behavioral therapy, and psychodynamic psychotherapy, all have been associated with positive outcomes in elderly patients with mood and anxiety disorders.12-14 Relaxation therapy typically involves the tensing and relaxing of progressive muscle groups while attention is focused on different sensations associated with tension and relaxation. Sometimes an element of guided imagery is added in which a patient is directed to have calming visions and physical sensations. In cognitive therapy, distorted thoughts at times of anxiety or depression are rigorously identified.

Evidence for and against these thoughts is collected and the patient is encouraged to challenge the maladaptive thoughts. Cognitive behavioral therapy incorporates cognitive therapy with elements of relaxation training or the exposure therapy mentioned above. Psychodynamic psychotherapy focuses on conflicts from childhood and earlier adulthood and analyzes patient defense mechanisms to affect long-term changes in patient behavior. This usually proves to be an intense therapy to better understand oneself and more adaptively relate to the environment. C.R. responded well to the selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor medication and to exposure therapy, reporting dramatic relief of symptoms in a fairly short amount of time. Another aspect of his personality likely to have been beneficial to his recovery was his religious faith and career. Religious faith, it has been noted, can help people transcend their embeddedness in their own personal suffering and provide a purpose for suffaring.1 After the war, C.R. likely used his experiences of seeing the worst in mankind to try to bring some hope and good will to his “corner of the world.”

Conclusions

PTSD is a common psychiatric disorder and it can persist for many years after the trauma occurred. Due to the many conflicts and tragedies of the 20th century, it is hard to imagine anything but an epidemic of PTSD in America and around the world. Screening the elderly who present with depression, especially those with a past history of military service, should be a standard practice. Medication and psychotherapy are likely to be beneficial to the majority of patients and should be discussed with patients. When fear is the predominant emotion and avoidance is the primary coping mechanism, exposure therapy may demonstrate great usefulness. Hopefully, the future will deliver new and better treatments for this common and potentially devastating psychiatric disorder.

References

1. Van der KoIk BA, McFarlane AC, Weisaeth L: Traumatic Stress: The Effects of Overwhelming Experience On Mind, Body, and Society. New York, Guilford Press, 1996.

2. Port CL, Engdahl B, Frazier P: A longitudinal and retrospective study of PTSD among older prisoners of war. Am J Psychiatry 2001; 158: 1474-9. 3. Busuttil W: Presentations and management of post traumatic stress disorder. Int J Geriatr Psychiatry 2004; 19: 429-39.

4. Owens GP, Baker DG, Kaschow J, Ciesla JA, Mohamed S: Review of assessment and treatment of PTSD among elderly American armed forces veterans. Int J Geriatr Psychiatry 2005; 20: 1118-1130.

5. Dirkzwager AJE, Bramsen I, Van Der Ploeg HM: The longitudinal course of posttraumatic stress disorder symptoms among aging military veterans. J Nerv Ment Dis 2001;18: 12: 846-53.

6. Leahy RL: Roadblocks in Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy, pp 175- 194. New York, Guilford Press, 2003.

7. Kaplan HI, Sadock BJ: Synopsis of Psychiatry, Ed 8. New York, Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins, 1998.

8. Breslau N: The epidemiology of posttraumatic stress disorder: what is the extent of the problem? J Clin Psychiatry 2001; 62(Suppl 17): 16-22.

9. Hales RE, Yudofsky SC, Talbott JA: The American Psychiatric Press Textbook of Psychiatry, Ed 3. Washington, DC, The American Psychiatric Press, 1999.

10. Snell FI, Padin-Rivera E: Posttraumatic stress disorder and the elderly combat veteran. J Gerontol Nurs 1997; 23: 13-9.

11. Hilton C: Media triggers of posttraumatic stress disorder 50 years after the second World War. Int J Geriatr Psychiatry 1997 Aug; 12: 862-7.

12. Yesavage JA, Karasu TB: Psychotherapy with elderly patients. Am J Psychother 1982; 36: 41-55.

13. Wetherell JB: Treatment of anxiety in older adults. Psychotherapy 1998; 35: 444-58.

14. Morgan AC: Psychodynamic psychotherapy with older adults. Psychiatr Serv 2003; 54: 1592-4.

Guarantor: Joseph D. Markowitz, MD

Contributor: Joseph D. Markowitz, MD

Department of Neuropsychiatiy and Behavioral Science, University of South Carolina School of Medicine, 15 Medical Park, Columbia, SC 29203.

This manuscript was received for review in January 2006. The revised manuscript was accepted for publication in July 2006.

Reprint & Copyright (c) by Association of Military Surgeons of U.S., 2007.

Copyright Association of Military Surgeons of the United States Jun 2007

(c) 2007 Military Medicine. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Outcome Measures in Cardiopulmonary Physical Therapy: Focus on the University of California, San Diego Shortness of Breath Questionnaire

By Wilson, Christine R

Research Corner INTRODUCTION

Since breathlessness is one of the most limiting symptoms for an individual with cardiac or pulmonary disease, the measurement of dyspnea is a critical component of patient evaluation. Diverse measurement tools have been developed to rate dyspnea in different contexts. For example, the modified Borg1 and Visual Analog ScalesJ are used to assess dyspnea before, during, and after exercise in the clinical laboratory setting. Dyspnea-related questions within the Chronic Respiratory Disease Questionnaire’ provide information about the effect of dyspnea on health related quality of life. The Baseline Dyspnea Index4 assesses dyspnea during activities of daily living. Another tool which can be used to assess dyspnea generated by activities of daily living is the University of California, San Diego Shortness of Breath Questionnaire (UCSD SOBQ). The purpose of this article is to discuss the development, psychometric properties, and usage of the UCSD SOBQ.

DEVELOPMENTAND INTENDED POPULATION

The current UCSD SOBQ is the result of several modifications of a questionnaire described in 1987 by Archibald and Cuidottis which assessed shortness of breath during activities of daily living (ADL) in individuals with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Patients were asked to rate dyspnea on a scale of 0-4 (0=absent, 1 =small, 2=moderate, 3=large, 4=severe) at rest, walking, and during ADL.1″1 The scale was adapted for use in the pulmonary rehabilitation program at the University of California, San Diego, and has been used with patients with COPD (including asthma and cystic fibrosis) and post lung transplant. The first modification, described by Eakin et al” in 1995 required patients to rate the frequency of breathlessness during 21 specific activities of daily living (Table 1) and to respond to questions about limitations due to shortness of breath, fear of harm from overexertion and fear of shortness of breath. The frequency rating used a 7 point scale: O (never), 1 (sometimes), 2 (half of the time), 3 (most of the time), 4 (all of the time), 5 (activity given up due to dyspnea), and NA (activity not performed, unrelated to dyspnea). In another modification, described in 1998, the frequency rating scale was changed to a 6 point scale (0=not at all, to 5=maximal or unable to do because of breathlessness).7 Patients are also asked to estimate the degree of shortness of breath anticipated for any listed activities which they do not normally perform. Scores for each question are summed, creating a total score ranging from 0-120 with higher scores indicating more severe breathlessness. The entire UCSD SOBQ can be found in the appendix of the paper by Eakin et al” which addresses validation of the questionnaire.

RELIABILITY

The reliability and validity of the UCSD SOBQ was assessed in 54 individuals (32 male, 22 female) participating in pulmonary rehabilitation.7 Medical conditions included COPD (n=28), cystic fibrosis (n=9), and post lung transplant (n=17). Reliability was determined statistically by assessing internal consistency. The coefficient Cronbach alpha was 0.96, indicating excellent internal consistency, and item-total correlations ranged from 0.49-0.87. In addition, patients were asked to complete both old and new versions of the UCSD SOBQ. The correlation between both versions was 0.96, indicating good agreement.

VALIDITY

Validity was determined in the same group of subjects by comparing UCSD SOBQ scores to other measures.7 The calculated correlations matched the predicted associations. UCSD SOBQ scores were negatively correlated with predicted forced vital capacity (- 0.36) and forced expiratory volume in one second (FEV1 -0.50), diffusion capacity (-0.67), maximal inspiratory pressure (-0.60), health related quality of life (Quality of Well Being questionnaire, -0.41), and the 6 minute walk test (-0.68). Scores were positively correlated with Borg ratings after the 6 minute walk test (0.45), residual volume/total lung capacity (0.47), and depression (Center for Epidemiologic Studies Depression Scale, 0.37).

MINIMAL DETECTABLE CHANCE/RESPONSIVENESS TO CHANGE

This author was not able to find specific mention of the minimal detectable change in the UCSD SOBQ in the literature. However, changes in UCSD SOBQ scores have been correlated with the minimal detectable change in the Transitional Dyspnea Index and are described below under “Responsiveness to Change.” The standard error of the measurement has been reported in a study with 164 subjects with moderate to severe chronic lung disease enrolled in a pulmonary rehabilitation program.8 Statistical data on the baseline UCSD SOBQ in these individuals is: mean 55.5, standard deviation 20.8, standard error of the measurement (SEM) 5.0. SEM was calculated as delta square root (!-reliability coefficient).

Responsiveness to Change

The responsiveness to change was determined by comparing changes in the UCSD SOBQ scores after pulmonary rehabilitation to changes in the Chronic Respiratory Questionnaire-Dyspnea (CRQ-Dyspnea) score and the Transitional Dyspnea Index (TDI).8 Improvement in breathlessness is noted by a decrease in the UCSD SOBQ score or an increase in the CRQ-Dyspnea score. The CRQDyspnea score was moderately correlated (-0.43) with the UCSD SOBQ score. To compare the sensitivity of change in UCSD SOBQ scores, a receiver-operator curve analysis assessed the CRQ-Dyspnea scores and the UCSD SOBQ scores when the change in TDI was 1 unit (the minimum change detectable by patients). This curve indicated that a 4-6 unit decrease in UCSD SOBQ score and a 4-6 unit increase in CRQ-Dyspnea score was associated with a 1 unit improvement in TDI.

Minimally Clinically Important Difference (MCID)

The MCID has been determined by expert consensus and by calculating effect size, SEM, and comparing agreement between UCSD SOBQ and CRQ-Dyspnea and TDI.8 The effect size was 0.48, indicating a moderate effect size. The SEM was 5 units. The receiver-operator curve mentioned in the preceding section indicated that a decrease of about 5 units in the UCSD SOBQ can detect a 1 unit improvement in the TDI with 69% sensitivity and 67% specificity. Individuals who were experienced in using the questionnaire estimated that a change of 5 units was clinically significant. Based on all of these findings, the MCID was determined to be 5 units.

SUGGESTIONS FOR USE IN THE CLINIC

Dyspnea is a symptom which frequently limits physical activity and contributes to the physical deconditioning associated with pulmonary disease. The Borg and VAS scales are useful to assess dyspnea in the midst of physical therapy sessions. However, physical therapists are interested in knowing whether therapeutic intervention is affecting the daily life of the patient. To assess dyspnea during activities of daily living, the UCSD SOBQ can be used during an initial evaluation as a baseline measurement and during re- evaluations to detect change. It can be completed by a patient in about 5 minutes, without the need for an interviewer, however, patients must answer every question before a total score can be calculated. Shown to be reliable and valid when used with individuals with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and post lung transplant, it has been used successfully in a number of pulmonary rehabilitation studies.915 In clinical settings, therapists can expect that an effective intervention would produce a decrease of 5 points in the UCSD SOBQ score. Use of the UCSD SOBQ could provide physical therapists with valuable information about the effect of dyspnea on the daily activities of their patients and the effect of physical therapy intervention on this symptom.

REFERENCES

1. Borg G. Psychophysical bases of perceived exertion. Med Sd Sports Exerc. 1982;14:377-381.

2. Aitken RB. Measurement of feelings using visual analogue scales. Proc R Soc Med. 1969;62:989-993.

3. Mahler DA, Weinberg DH, Wells CK, Feinstein AR. The measurement of dyspnea: contents, interobserver agreement, and physiologic correlates of two new clinical indexes. Chest. 1984;85:751-758.

4. Guyatt GH, Berman LB, Townsend M, Pugsley SO, Chambers LW. A measure of quality of life for clinical trials in chronic lung disease. Thorax. 1987;42:773778.

5. Archibald CG, Guidotti TL. Degree of objectivity measured impairment and perceived shortness of breathing with activities of daily living in patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Canadian / Rehab. 1987;1:45-54.

6. Eakin EG, Sassi-Dambron DE, Ries AL, Kaplan RM. Reliability and validity of dyspnea measures in patients with obstructive lung disease, lntl I Behav Med. 1995;2:118-134.

7. Eakin EG, Resnikoff PM, Prewitt LM, Ries AL, Kaplan RM. Validation of a new dyspnea measure. The UCSD Shortness of Breath Questionnaire. Chesi. 1998;113:619-624.

8. Kupferberg DH, Kaplan RM, Slymen DJ, Ries AL. Minimal clinically important difference for the UCSD Shortness of Breath Questionnaire. / Cardiopulm Rehab. 2005;25:370-377.

9. Ries AL, Kaplan RM, Limberg TM, Prewitt LM. Effects of pulmonary rehabilitation on physiologic and psychosocial outcomes in patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Ann Intern Med. 1995;122:823-832. 10. Stulbarg MS, Carrieri-Kohlman V, Demir- Deviren S, et al. Exercise training improves outcomes of a dyspnea self-management program. / Cardiopulm Rehab. 2002;22:109-121.

11. Ries AL, Kaplan RM, Myers R, Prewitt LM. Maintenance after pulmonary rehabilitation in chronic lung disease: a randomized trial. Am I Respir Crit Care Med. 2003;167:880-888.

12. California Pulmonary Rehabilitation Collaborative Group. Effects of pulmonary rehabilitation on dyspnea, quality of life and health care costs in California. / Cardiopulm Rehab. 2004;24:52-62.

13. Verrill D, Barton C, Beasley W, Lippard WM. The effects of short-term and long-term pulmonary rehabilitation on functional capacity, perceived dyspnea, and quality of life. Chest. 2005;128:673-683.

14. Ries AL, Make B), Lee SM, et al. The effects of pulmonary rehabilitation in the national emphysema treatment trial. Chest. 2005:128:3799-3809.

15. Heppner PS, Morgan C, Kaplan RM, Ries AL. Regular walking and long-term maintenance of outcomes after pulmonary rehabilitation. / Cardiopulm Rehab. 2006:26:44-53.

Christine R. Wilson, PT, PhD

Department of Physical Therapy, University of the Pacific, Stockton, CAq

Address correspondence to: Christine R. Wilson, PT, PhD, Department of Physical Therapy, University of the Pacific, 360 7 Pacific Avenue, Stockton, CA 95211, Ph: 209-946-2397 ([email protected]).

Copyright Cardiopulmonary Physical Therapy Journal Jun 2007

(c) 2007 Cardiopulmonary Physical Therapy Journal. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Street Youth Crime: A Test of Control Balance Theory

By Baron, Stephen W Forde, David R

Utilizing a sample of 400 homeless street youths, the paper explores the role control balance plays in the generation of crime. Using vignettes designed to represent violent crime, serious property crime, and minor property crime, the paper tests whether these youths sense of control over their poverty, shelter, hunger and other living conditions influences their participation in crime. Further, it examines how perceptions of risk and thrill, as well as deviant values, self-control, deviant histories, and peer support impact on crime. Results indicate that both control deficits and control surpluses were related to assault and serious theft but not minor theft. Perceptions of thrill, deviant peers, deviant histories, and deviant values predicted violent and property crime, and perceptions of risk were related to the property offenses. Criminal peers also conditioned the impact of control surpluses and deficits on property offenses. Results are discussed in terms of future research and policy. Keywords street youth; control balance theory; violent crime; property crime

Introduction

In 1995, Charles Tittle published his award-winning monograph, Control Balance. Since publication, control balance theory has been reviewed, critiqued, empirically tested, and refined (Tittle, 2004). In this article, we briefly review the control balance explanation of deviance and contribute to the emerging literature on control balance theory by presenting an empirical test using a sample of homeless youth.

In control balance theory, Tittle suggests that behavioral restrictions and deviant motivations need to be examined in tandem to understand deviance. Central to his argument is the “control ratio” defined as “the total amount of control to which an individual is subject relative to the total amount of control that he or she can exercise” (Tittle, 1995, p. 148). Being controlled reflects limitations placed on individuals by various physical and social arrangements when attempting to satisfy goals and motivations, while exercising control reflects the extent to which an individual can escape these limitations or help or hinder others in their pursuits. People are said to have a number of specific control ratios associated with their various roles, statuses, and environments, as well as a general control ratio reflecting their overall ability to control and be controlled (Tittle, 2001, p. 317).

When the amount of control a person exercises is equal to the amount of control they are subject to, their control ratio is balanced, leaving them less likely to be involved in deviance. In contrast, control ratio imbalances, which can take two forms, leave one more likely to consider deviance as a method of altering the control ratio. “Control surpluses” emerge where the control exercised is greater than the control subject to. “Control deficits” arise where the control subject to exceeds the control exercised. While imbalances predispose a person to undertake deviance to improve control ratios, the motivation for deviance only emerges under circumstances where people experience a provocation that reminds them, or makes them aware, of their control imbalance creating negative emotions (Tittle, 2004, p. 411). The greater the imbalance, the higher the likelihood that people will feel debased or humiliated when faced with provocation. This focuses the individual on deviance as a potential solution and the benefits, rewards, and perceived pleasures associated with engaging in the deviant act that might serve to alter the control ratio (Piquero & Hickman, 2002, p. 86).

Motivation is only transformed into deviance if there is “opportunity.” The person must have both the capabilities and the occasion to undertake the particular behaviors being considered. Given motivation and opportunity, people will consider the deviant acts they perceive as leading to the greatest change in their control ratio. These behaviors, however, are also likely to be viewed as serious and bring about reactions of counter control (Tittle, 2001, p. 321). Therefore, the most serious acts may not serve as viable options for altering a control imbalance leaving individuals to choose other forms of deviance. The act actually chosen will be influenced by “constraint.”

Constraint is a complex variable that represents the seriousness of the act being considered and situational risk (Tittle, 2004, p. 414). Seriousness is related to the degree of counter control or the “amount of control inherent in an act … that could possibly be forthcoming” (Tittle, 2004, p. 403) while “situational risk” is the concern about the act being exposed and actually experiencing the counter controlling reactions. Thus, individuals consider constraint when reviewing possible avenues to address imbalances.

The causal process is said to work as outlined when a person has high selfcontrol. Low self-control makes people vulnerable to provocation leaving them more apt to become motivated for crime, more likely to react instantly, less likely to consider the counter control associated with their acts, and less likely to consider gains (Tittle, 2004, p. 416). In contrast, those high in selfcontrol can restrain themselves from taking instantaneous actions leaving them more likely to consider different types of acts than those with low selfcontrol, and these acts may have more impact on altering control balance ratios.

Types of Deviance

Given a favorable configuration of opportunity and constraint, an unbalanced control ratio will lead to deviance. Forms of deviance can be distinguished by two components of “control balance desirability” (Tittle, 2004, p. 405). The first surrounds the potential long-term change in the control ratio that may result from the act. The second focuses on the degree to which the offender needs to be personally or directly involved with the victim (Tittle, 2004, p. 405). Acts with little direct contact with victims that allow for long-term changes in control balance ratios have the greatest control balance desirability. Acts that involve direct contact, and have shorter-term impact on control balance ratios, are seen to have less control balance desirability. Tittle (2004, p. 406) suggests that acts can be assorted on a continuum based on these characteristics. He argues, however, that the theory does not permit the precise estimate of particular behaviors but claims it can help explain the choosing of a certain act from behaviors with similar control balance desirability scores (Tittle, 2004, p. 407). He also allows that including a greater number of the variables outlined in the theory beyond control ratios may improve the prediction of specific acts (Tittle, 2004, pp. 408, 415).

Actors with substantial control surpluses, high in self-control, who are presented with opportunities and few constraints will be most likely to undertake behaviors high in control balance desirability. In contrast, acts low in control balance desirability are more likely to be accessed by people who have small to medium control deficits, are low in self-control, face constraints on committing high control balance desirability acts, but have opportunities for the low desirability acts. Acts around the middle of the desirability continuum may point towards various levels and amalgamations of the causal variables. Those with surpluses or small deficits, a range of self-control, and a range of constraint could engage in acts of medium control balance desirability as long as opportunities present themselves. Those with extreme deficits, however, are most likely to resort to “submission” which is not on the continuum (see Tittle, 2004).

Contingencies

The causal process of the theory may be influenced by various “contingencies” including moral beliefs, self-efficacy, prior deviant experience, and subcultural involvement. While not required for the control balance variables to impact on deviance, and not having significant independent causal impact, contingencies can modify the control balancing process (Tittle, 1995, pp. 201, 214). For example, moral beliefs may disturb the impact of an imbalanced control ratio on crime (Tittle, 1995, pp. 208-209). In contrast, when facing control imbalance, a higher self-efficacy may leave one more likely to confront controls and/or take advantage of deviant opportunities others would find risky. Prior experience with deviance can also act as a contingency because people can recall previous successes in altering control imbalances through crime and recognize the low potential for counter control (Tittle, 1995, p. 216). Similarly, subcultural involvement may produce motivations for deviance beyond those stemming from imbalanced control ratios as people are exposed to various forms, excuses, rationalizations, and expectations of deviance (Tittle, 1995, p. 220).

Risk, an important component of constraint, can also act as contingency. The link between control imbalance and deviance should be greatest when actors perceive the risk of detection and punishment to be minimal. While admitting that Tittle does not make this explicit, Piquero and Hickman (2002, p. 86) argue that benefits or perceived rewards represented in the motivation variable can also be used as a contingency variable. Here, the greater the benefits, including the perceived pleasure of the act, the greater the impact of an imbalanced control ratio on crime. Tittle (1995) also dedicates some detail to the link between socioeconomic status and deviance through its influence on control ratios, motivation, constraint, contingencies, and opportunities. Control surpluses, the desire to increase surpluses, and opportunities, lead people in higher socioeconomic locations to engage in “elite” deviance although the behavior of people in these positions is still restricted by various social, political, and legal constraints, and the majority may have balanced control ratios (Tittle, 1995, p. 257). In contrast, lower-status people tend to be deficient in various political and financial resources that might enable them to control or advance their situations, and they are subject to intense surveillance and repression by state authorities (Tittle, 1995, p. 258). This argument suggests the greater likelihood of control deficits, although subcultural resources in lower-class areas can enable people to balance control ratios.

While the contingencies for deviance will not vary substantially by socioeconomic status, those in lower socioeconomic locations may be more involved in “street” types of offenses because of their criminal subcultural participation and prior experience in these types of crimes. In contrast, those in higher socioeconomic locations should have greater experience in “elite” forms of deviance and be exposed to models and expectations that support these behaviors. Tittle (1999, p. 259) concedes that lacking “precise information” predicting deviance for different economic locations is difficult.

Past Research

Control balance theory has been subject to a limited number of empirical tests. The bulk of this research finds both control balance deficits and control balance surpluses to be related to deviance including assault (Piquero a Hickman, 1999, 2002), drug and alcohol use (Curry & Piquero, 2003), deviant sexual practices (Piquero & Hickman, 1999), eating disorders (Hickman & Piquero, 2001) using others’ school work (Hickman & Piquero, 2001; Higgins & Lauterbach, 2004), and cheating (Curry, 2005). Further, in a theoretical extension, control imbalances were related to property and general victimization (Piquero & Hickman, 2003). Only one study has found that deficits alone were related to deviance (Hickman, Piquero, Lawton, & Greene, 2001).

The research has also examined the impact of other variables in the causal process. There is some support for the relationship between constraint and deviance (Curry, 2005; Curry ft Piquero, 2003; although see Higgins & Lauterbach, 2004). The effect of risk (one component of constraint) on deviance, however, has been mixed (Hickman & Piquero, 2001; Piquero & Hickman, 1999) as has been the support for the effect of low self-control (Curry, 2005; Hickman & Piquero, 2001; Higgins a Lauterbach, 2004; Piquero a Hickman, 1999, 2002; see also Curry a Piquero, 2003, for impulsivity). Work exploring the direct effects of the contingency variables shows moral beliefs to decrease the likelihood of deviance (Hickman a Piquero, 2001; Higgins a Lauterbach, 2004; Piquero a Hickman, 1999, 2002), while deviant histories have shown no direct impact on deviance (Hickman a Piquero, 2001; Higgins a Lauterbach, 2004; Piquero a Hickman, 1999, 2002).

The limited work exploring the conditioning effects of the contingency variables has found control surpluses and deficits to have a greater impact at higher levels of impulsivity (Curry a Piquero, 2003). The findings on the conditional impact of constraint on the control balance ratio have been mixed (Curry a Piquero, 2003; Higgins a Lauterbach, 2004). However, surpluses and deficits have been found to have a greater impact at lower levels of risk, and higher levels of pleasure or sensation seeking (Higgins a Lauterbach, 2004; Piquero a Hickman, 2002) as well as at levels of low risk and low pleasure, which is in contrast to expectations (Piquero a Hickman, 2002).

While informative, these works rely extensively on college populations and similar control balance items (see Curry, 2005; Curry a Piquero, 2003; Hickman a Piquero, 2001; Higgins a Lauterbach, 2004; Piquero a Hickman, 1999, 2002, 2003; Piquero et al., 2001). Only one study has used a noncollege population (Hickman et al., 2001). Thus, it is difficult to determine the general support for the theory. Most research has examined only the main effects of the contingency variables (although see Curry a Piquero, 2003; Higgins a Lauterbach, 2004; Piquero a Hickman, 2002), no research has examined the conditioning effect of deviant histories, deviant peers, self-efficacy, or moral beliefs, and none of this research has examined property offending.

To date, no research has utilized a street population, so it is unknown if the types of control deficits and surpluses these people experience are related to deviant behavior. In light of Tittle’s discussion of SES, it seems important to explore how control balance ratios, and the various variables that impinge on these ratios, influence the deviance of lower socioeconomic individuals. We utilize a sample of homeless street youth to explore control balance theory. This is a population with serious and persistent problems of crime and adversity (Hagan & McCarthy, 1997a). They are faced with crises of day-to-day survival, including finding food, shelter, and employment that might lead to control balance deficits. Research suggests they hold values supportive of crime, are involved in criminal networks, and have deviant histories (Baron, Kennedy, & Forde, 2001; Hagan & McCarthy, 1997b), factors that might condition the impact of control imbalances. Further, evidence suggests that perceptions of risk (Baron & Kennedy, 1998) and personality factors (Baron, 2003) influence their criminal behavior.

Method

Researchers define street youth as young people who have runaway or been “thrown” from their homes and/or who spend much of their time in public areas. Street youth are a heterogeneous group that can include students, dropouts, the employed, and the unemployed, who may or may not have homes to return to at night (see Shane 1996; Whitbeck a Hoyt, 1999). This study utilized 400 respondents (265 male, 135 female) who were identified based on four sampling criteria: (1) to cover the age range of those described as street youth participants must be aged 24 and under; (2) they must have left or finished school; (3) they must be currently unemployed; (4) they have spent time without a fixed address or living in a shelter in the previous 12 months. These criteria were developed (1) to exclude those in school and eliminate those not eligible for full- time employment; and (2) to obtain a sample of “serious””at risk” youth.

Data Collection

In-depth interviews were completed between May 2000 and August 2001 in Vancouver, Canada. The study took place in and around the city’s downtown business core bordered by the local skid row and “inner city.” The area contained a mix of commercial and financial establishments surrounded by bars, pawnshops, sex shops, and tattoo parlors, as well as potential residences for the study sample including single-room-occupancy hotels, shelters, rundown residential units, and abandoned buildings.

Potential respondents were approached by one of the researchers, alerted to the project and screened for eligibility. Youths who met the selection criteria were provided additional information and solicited to participate. Interested youths were presented with informed consent forms outlining study goals and their rights within the interview. Youths granting consent were then interviewed in locations that allowed for some privacy as well as familiarity including fast food restaurants, parks, in front of store-front social services, bus shelters, and on the street. Interviews averaged an hour and 10 minutes in length, and respondents were awarded $20 in food coupons at a popular fast-food restaurant. Other contacts were initiated by youths who learned of the project and solicited interviews or through introductions from previously interviewed respondents.

The 400 youths interviewed had an average age of almost 20 years (O = 19.9). The racial make-up of the sample was predominately Caucasian (83 percent). Aboriginal youths made up the majority of the other respondents (12 percent).1 The average length of homelessness in the previous 12 months was close to 7 months (M = 6.8).

Scenarios

Each respondent was read three scenarios representing three different forms of deviance and asked to respond to a series of questions regarding each scenario. Although this strategy has been used in most of the empirical research on control balance theory (Curry, 2005; Hickman St Piquero, 2001; Hickman et al., 2001; Higgins a Lauterbach, 2004; Piquero a Hickman, 1999, 2002, 2003; although see Curry a Piquero, 2003), it has been critiqued because the intention to offend does not necessarily translate into actual offending (Piquero a Hickman, 1999). However, research exploring this issue, including meta-analyses, shows a high correlation between intentions and actual behavior (Fishbein a Ajzen, 1975; Green, 1989; Kirn a Hunter, 1993; Piquero a Hickman, 1999). The following is an example of the scenario involving assault.

Brian is standing on a street corner drinking a pop. A guy named David is rushing to catch the bus and bumps into Brian just enough to cause him to spill the pop all over the sidewalk. Brian’s friend’s can’t help but laugh at him. David stops and says “Sorry man.” As David turns to continue for the bus Brian grabs his shoulder and says “You spilt my pop you asshole. Get me another one.” David tells him to “fuck off.” Brian punches him in the face and a fight breaks out between them.

After each scenario was read to the respondent they were asked on a scale from zero (no chance at all) to 10 (100 percent chance) to estimate the probability that they would do what the person in the scenario did (in the case of the assault scenario example Brian). We use two other scenarios (see Appendix A) to explore minor theft and serious theft (see Table 1 for descriptive statistics). Tittle (2004, p. 212) argues that when examining specific acts, researchers should explore their “probability” within a certain scope of control desirability. The three dependent variables were recoded to O or 1, where O indicated no probability of offending, and 1 indicated a nonzero probability of engaging in the scenario-specific form of deviance. We also report the results of the original scale in the text. We do not have information regarding respondent’s perceptions of the control desirability of these offenses. However, all of these offenses share the requirement of direct contact with the target which Tittle suggests places them lower on the desirability continuum. Measurement of Variables

In his book, Tittle (1995, p. 267) suggests that the “general perceptual method” is one strategy that can be utilized to measure control balance ratios. Like the empirical research conducted so far (see Curry, 2005; Curry & Piquero, 2003; Hickman & Piquero, 2001; Hickman et al., 2001; Higgins a Lauterbach, 2004; Piquero & Hickman 1999, 2002, 2003), we ask respondents to estimate the amount of control they exercise over certain circumstances and then ask them to estimate the amount of control these circumstances have over them. Piquero and Hickman (1999) stress that different samples will have different life domains, and these must be considered in the measuring of a control balance ratio. With this in mind, individuals were asked to rate the degree of control they had over their homelessness, unemployment, regularity of food, avoiding physical illness, cleanliness, and being uncomfortable because of the cold. Response options ranged from O (no control) to 10 (total control). Respondents were then asked to rate on a 0-10 scale the degree of control these same things had over them. Theoretically, each domain functions in the situationally specific circumstance as well as in a global context. However, Tittle (1995, p. 267) argues that the “the most important measure is of the overall general control ratio” which should be created from “specifically focused ratios.”

Following Tittle (1995, p. 267), the control balance ratio was created by first summing the items measuring the amount of control one is subject to. second, the items for the amount of control one can exercise were summed. A principal axis factor analysis was then undertaken to confirm that the two scales were unidimensional, and tests were conducted that indicated that the scales were reliable (control subject to, a = .741; control exercised, a = .737). Finally, to create an overall control balance ratio, we calculate the ratio of the amount of control to which one is subject relative to the amount of control one can exercise. In this scale, subjects who score over 1 have a control deficit (the larger the score over one, the larger the deficit), while following past research (see Piquero & Hickmam, 1999) those scoring equal to or less than 1 have a control surplus (the smaller the number under 1, the greater the surplus).2 The control balance ratio was then segmented to create a separate variable for a control balance surplus and a control deficit. Those with extreme deficits, those who reported having no control at all across the six domains (n = 3), were left out since theoretically they are linked to submission.3

Tittle (1995, pp. 167-168) argues that one of the other vital components in the control balance process is constraint, which is made up of the control balance ratio, perceptual risk, and seriousness. Here we examine perceptions of risk. Respondents were asked after each scenario “On a scale from O (not likely) to 10 (very likely) to rate the risk of getting caught by committing the act portrayed in the scenario.” One weakness of this measure is that it is not specific in who will discover the act. Following Piquero and Hickman’s (2002) argument for the examination of benefits, we explore if respondents thought they would get a sense of thrill engaging in the scenario presented. They were asked “On a scale of O (not exciting) to 10 (very exciting), how exciting would it be to engage in the act portrayed in the scenario?” To examine deviant values, respondents were asked after each scenario “On a scale of O (very wrong) to 10 (not wrong at all) how morally wrong is the act portrayed in the scenario?” To explore for the influence of peers, respondents were asked after each scenario “On a scale of O (none) to 10 (most) how many of your friends have engaged in the act portrayed in the scenario?” Self-efficacy is measured by the question “I generally have confidence that when I have a plan I will be able to carry it out” (1 = strongly disagree; 4 = strongly agree). As one of the few measures that is not scenario-specific, caution should be exercised since it is a single-item measure. Prior deviance was obtained by asking the respondents how many times in the past year they had done the following: broken into a car, broken into a building, taken something worth less than $50, taken something worth more than $50, broken into a structure to sleep, stolen food, taken a car without permission of the owner, used physical force to get money or things from another person, attacked someone with a weapon or fists injuring them so badly they probably needed a doctor, got into a fight, and taken part in a group fight. The raw scores of individual offenses were aggregated across the range of offenses to create indices of property and violent histories. To reduce skewness, these scales were logged and scores two standard deviations above the mean receded to that score. Consistent with the past research on control balance, the Grasmick, Tittle, Bursick and Arneklev (1993) scale is used to measure selfcontrol (a = .777). A principal axis factor analysis revealed that this scale broke into seven factors. However, an examination of the Scree plot to look for “discontinuity” in eigenvalue magnitudes indicated that the scale was unidimensional (see Arneklev, Grasmick, Tittle, & Bursick, 1993, p. 232, for a discussion). The 23 items drawn from this scale were summed and divided by their number. Finally, chronological age and gender are also controlled for in the analysis (see Table 1 for descriptive statistics and Appendix B for correlation matrix).

Nonlinear regression is used to analyze the models, since Tittle (1995, p. 176) argues that a number of the causal linkages are nonlinear. Our analytic strategy replicates the analytic methods used by Piquero and his colleagues in their previous empirical tests of control balance theory. Specifically, the equation utilized takes the form:

Y is the dependent variable, and CBR is the control ratio. This variable is segmented where values of 1 or less than 1 are defined as control balance surpluses, and those greater than 1 are defined as control balance deficits. The equation also assesses low self- control (lsc), the chances of getting caught (risk), the excitement of undertaking the act (thrill), how wrong the act is (deviant values), the degree of control over the situation (self-efficacy), the total amount of the crime in the previous 12 months (deviant experience), the number of peers who have undertaken the criminal act (peers), the age of the respondent (age), and their gender (males = O, females = 1).

Findings

Table 1 shows that the majority of youth in the sample had control surpluses (67 percent) with only 31 percent reporting deficits. Moving to Table 2, we see that having either a control deficit or a control surplus is a significant predictor of assault. The greater the deficit, the more likely street youth indicate that they would assault the person in the scenario. Respondents with smaller surpluses, in contrast, are more likely to report that they would engage in violence. In the analysis utilizing the original 0- 10 scale, neither control surpluses nor deficits predicted assault. Table 2 also reveals that perceptions of thrill increase the likelihood of reporting an intention to engage in assault. Perceptions of risk, in contrast, are not related to the intention to assault. Deviant peers, prior violent crime, being male, and deviant values are also related to intention to assault. Age, self- control, and self-efficacy are not significant predictors of intention to assault.

Table 2 indicates that neither control deficits nor control surpluses predict minor theft. This finding is replicated using the 0-10 scale for a dependent variable. In contrast, thrill, lack of risk, deviant peers, deviant values, and low selfcontrol are related to intentions to engage in minor theft. The final model in Table 2 shows that both control deficits and control surpluses are related to serious theft. Neither of the control imbalances were related to serious theft using the 0-10 scaling of the dependent variable. Further, thrill, risk, deviant peers, deviant values, and prior participation in property crime are also related to serious theft, as are being young and male.

Although Tittle argues that the control ratio will have a strong influence on the probability and type of deviance, he also suggests that this effect may not occur with the same strength or likelihood in all circumstances. Contingencies may alter, or impinge on, the operation of the control balancing process (Tittle, 1995, p. 201). Thus, the strength of the relationship between control imbalances and crime may be different, depending on levels of risk, subcultural participation, morality, self-control, self-efficacy and deviant histories. To explore this, the sample was split at the median for each of the contingency variables: risk, thrill, morality, self- control, self-efficacy, peers, and deviant history. The nonlinear regressions were repeated on each of the samples representing lower levels and higher levels of each specific variable. This allowed us to explore if the effects of control surpluses and control deficits on our dependent variables were different depending on the level of the contingency variables (see Appendixes C, D, and E). This process revealed the conditioning impact of deviant peers on control imbalances. At higher levels of deviant peers, control surpluses and control deficits had stronger relationships with both minor theft and serious theft. Again, these results held only for the dichotomized dependent variables. Discussion

This study set out to examine the role control balance ratios play in the generation of street youth crime. The results indicate that both control deficits and control surpluses were related to their violent and serious theft, and when deviant peers were available, these imbalances increased minor theft. It may be reasonable to suggest that for those with deficits, there is a sense of desperation to ensure that control is not decreased even further. As control deficits become larger, there is less for street youth to lose by engaging in certain types of criminal behavior. Or it may be that as their deficits grow, options involving offenses of higher control desirability decline. Or it could be a combination of these types of explanations. The findings also suggest that those with small control surpluses use assault, and serious theft, to extend their surpluses in situations where these meager surpluses are threatened. Lacking the surplus that would allow them to undertake offenses higher in control balance desirability, these youth undertake offenses that involve face-to-face contact.

The findings that both surpluses and deficits are related to the same behavior is consistent with past research. Further, the direction of the deficits and surpluses is also consistent with past work (although see Curry, 2005; Higgen & Lauterbach, 2004). The recently revised theory allows for both deficits and surpluses to explain similar behaviors that fall in the middle range of the control desirability continuum. Those with deficits who engage in middle-range acts are expected, however, to have smaller deficits. The findings here then raise some questions. Since these behaviors are more likely to be undertaken as deficits increase and surpluses decrease, there needs to be some direction regarding what should be considered minor or moderate deficits and surpluses. As observed by others, Tittle provides little guidance regarding the “relative positions on the control balance continuum” (Piquero & Hickman, 1999, p. 337), and the recent refinement does little to address this question.

Further, the findings suggest that more work is necessary to make clear where on the control desirability continuum the offenses examined here fit. If both surpluses and deficits are related to offenses towards the middle of the control balance continuum, then serious theft and assault, despite requiring face-to-face contact with targets, may have more than a short-term impact on the control balance ratio for a population living in extreme poverty. In contrast, the minor-theft offense, which shares the face-to-face component, was only influenced by control imbalances under conditions where there was deviant peer association. This suggests that minor theft provides at best only short-term alteration of control ratios and only under restricted circumstances. The finding that deficits and surpluses are related to assault suggests that types of violent offenses may contain more than just high “personal desirability” (see Tittle, 2004). This is consistent with the research in college populations, and it reveals that the population being examined may also be important in determining the context of control desirability. So while Tittle (1995) argues that those in various socioeconomic locations may have equal opportunity to engage in the offenses examined here, it may be that the differential participation in these activities is based on the different appeal in altering control balance ratios because the desirability varies across different social groups for similar offenses. At the same time, certain offenses may share appeal across social groups.

The findings also imply that control imbalances may be better predictors of any probability of offending rather than predictors of the probability of offending. This appears to be consistent with Tittle’s (2004) caution regarding the accuracy with which the theory can be used to predict behavior. At the same time, this would appear to be a drawback in that the theory cannot distinguish between those with weak and strong intentions leaving it perhaps to overpredict behavior.

Tittle has argued that the effect of imbalances will be influenced by various contingencies. There is only limited support for this argument here. In both cases, the impact of control deficits and control surpluses was greater under conditions where the respondents had deviant peers. Peers may help to contextualize experiences as imbalances, as well as offer and support crime as a method for altering control ratios. Generally, however, the impact of deficits and surpluses is not significantly different at varying levels of the contingency variables.

Instead, these contingency variables appear to have strong direct effects on crime. Deviant values had a direct impact on crime, and unlike past research, deviant histories were related to the intention to offend. Prior offending may educate street youth on the realistic risks and gains that can alter control balance ratios. Risk, one component of the constraint variable, was predictive of property but not violent offending. Perhaps the emotional nature of this offense overwhelms the consideration of risk. Further, thrill appears important in the generation of crime. Katz (1988) argues that crime has a seductive quality. Different crimes have different forms of seduction but they share the ability to provide excitement to people and at the same time provide relevance to the identity of the offender. Crimes are not only fun but also have a transformative quality about them that it can be argued alter the control balance ratio.

Tittle’s (2004) recent addition of self-control to the control balance process is not supported. It was not associated with any of the individual offenses where control imbalances predicted crime. Past work including low social control controlling for control imbalances has been mixed, but the work examining violent offenses also found no effect (Piquero 6t Hickman, 1999, 2002). Further, there is little support that control ratios are conditioned by self- control. This suggests that in this population, the causal process works the same way regardless of the level of self-control.

This study is important because Control Balance theory has yet to be applied to an at-risk population. The study allows for comparison with the results of research on more conventional populations and can establish the generalizability of the theory. The study examines unstudied offenses (serious and nonserious property crimes) and a range of offenses and tests for a number of the yet-to-beexplored contingencies. At the same time, caution must be exercised in that some of the measures are single-item; certain variables like a full measure of constraint, were not included; the method of sampling and the restricted sample make it hard to generalize the findings to other populations; and the use of scenarios captures only the intention to offend. Overall, this project is one step of many that will be required to explore this complex theory, and it is only through this type of process that control balance theory can be refined and its place as a general theory of deviance determined.

The findings also present a challenge to policymakers. Tittle (2001, p. 331) himself stresses that the theory was not developed with policy in mind and admits to avoiding such issues (see Tittle, 1997). The fact that both deficits and surpluses lead to the forms of crime makes the policy issue even more challenging. One might attempt to address deficits through employment, housing, and the provision of food, which in turn would decrease crime. These types of responses, however, may also be appropriate for those with surpluses. While it seems problematic to decrease the surpluses of those who feel they have some control over the domains examined here, it is also probably the case that their control over these domains is a reflection of their survival skills. They have learned how to get food, find alternative shelter, avoid the elements, and access alternative avenues for money. Substituting these with more conventional avenues might decrease their need to be resilient under harsh conditions, leaving them less likely to engage in crime. These types of changes, however, still pose challenges in terms of funding and politics. Tittle (2001 ) argues that one alternative may be to increase constraint. However, this is a population already high in constraint, and central to the theory is that control can cause crime. This suggests that increases in risk, and the degree of counter-control associated with offending could serve to increase crime in this population or lead to different types of offending. Perhaps a more productive avenue is to reduce provocation (Tittle, 2001). Perhaps the general public needs to be educated about certain issues including the causes of homelessness and the various challenges that the homeless face. Thus, policy might focus on not only trying to provide things such as housing and employment, but also encouraging compassion for this disadvantaged population.

Acknowledgments

The authors would like to acknowledge the financial support of the Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council of Canada and Queen’s University Chancellor’s Research Award. They would also like to thank Jennifer Robinson for her research assistance. They would also like to thank Chester Britt and the anonymous reviewers for their helpful comments. 1. Aboriginals are drastically overrepresented in the sample. According to Peters and Murphy (1993), only about 1 percent of the youths in city schools are native.

2. For example, if the respondent’s total control subject to was 30, and their control exercised was 15, their control balance ratio would be 2, which is a deficit. In contrast, if the respondent’s total control subject to was 15, and their control exercised was 30, their control balance ratio would be .5, which is a surplus.

3. Following Piquero et al.’s (2001) argument regarding the inefficiency of the control balance scale, we also followed their work and recoded the items to 4 points (O = O, 1-4 = 1, 5-8 = 2, 9- 10 = 3). The correlation between scale created with the recoded items and the original scale was .972. Since the results using either scale were similar, we retain the scale using the original coding.

References

Arneklev, B. J., Grasmick, H. G., Tittle, C. R., a Bursick, R. J. (1993). Low self-control and imprudent behavior. Journal of Quantitative Criminology, 9, 225-247.

Baron, S. W. (2003). Self control, social consequences, and criminal behavior: Street youth and the general theory of crime. Journal of Research in Crime and Delinquency, 40, 403-425.

Baron, S. W., & Kennedy, L. W. (1998). Deterring crime among street kids: An empirical test. Canadian Journal of Criminology, 40, 27-60.

Baron, S. W., Kennedy, L. W., & Forde, D. R. (2001). Male street youths’ conflict. The role of background, subcultural and situational factors. Justice Quarterly, 18, 759-789.

Curry, T., & and Piquero, A. R. (2003). Control ratios and defiant acts of deviance: Assessing additive and conditional effects with constraints and impulsivity. Sociological Perspectives, 46, 397- 415.

Curry, T. R. (2005). Integrating motivating and constraining forces in deviance causation: A test of causal chain hypotheses in control balance theory. Deviant Behavior, 26, 571-599.

Fishbein, M. M., & Ajzen, I. L. (1975). Belief, attitudes, intention and behavior. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.

Grasmick, H. G., Tittle, C. R., Bursick, R. J., a Arneklev, B. J. (1993). Testing the core empirical implications of Gottfredson and Hirschi’s general theory of crime. Journal of Research in Crime and Delinquency, 30, 5-29.

Green, D. (1989). Measures of illegal behavior in individual- level deterrence research. Journal of Research in Crime and Delinquency, 26, 253-275.

Hagan, J., & McCarthy, B. (1997a). Anomie, social capital, and street criminology. In N. Passas & R. Agnew (Eds.), The future of anomie theory (pp. 121-141). Boston: Northeastern University Press.

Hagan, J., & McCarthy, B. (1997b). Mean streets: Youth crime and homelessness. Cambridge, MA: Cambridge University Press.

Hickman, M., & Piquero, A. (2001). Exploring the relationships between gender, control balance and deviance. Deviant Behavior, 22, 323-351.

Hickman, M. J., Piquero, A. R., Lawton, B. A., a Greene, J. R. (2001). Applying Tittle’s control balance theory to police deviance. Policing, 24, 497-519.

Higgins, G. E., a Lauterbach, C. (2004). Control balance theory and exploitation: An examination of contingencies. Criminal Justice Studies, 17, 291-310.

Jensen, G. F. (1999). A critique of control balance theory: Digging into details. Theoretical Criminology, 3, 339-343.

Katz, J. (1988). Seductions of crime. New York: Basic Books.

Kim, M., a Hunter, J. (1993). Relationships among attitudes, behavioral intentions, and behavior: A meta-analysis of past research. Part 2. Communications Research, 20, 331-364.

Peters, L., a Murphy, A. (1993). Adolescent health survey: Report for the greater Vancouver region of British Columbia. Vancouver, BC: The McCreary Centre Society.

Piquero, A. R., a Hickman, M. (1999). An empirical test of Tittle’s control balance theory. Criminology, 37, 319-341.

Piquero, A. R., a Hickman, M. (2002). The rational choice implications of control balance theory. In A. R. Piquero & S. G. Tibbetts (Eds.) Rational choice and criminal behavior (pp. 85-107). New York: Routledge.

Piquero, A. R., a Hickman, M. (2003). Extending Tittle’s control balance theory to account for victimization. Criminal Justice and Behavior, 30, 282-301.

Piquero, A. R., Macintosh, R., a Hickman, M. (2001). Applying Rasch modeling to the validity of a control balance scale. Journal of Criminal Justice, 29, 493-505.

Shane, P. (1996). What about America’s homeless children? Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.

Tittle, C. R. (1995). Control balance: Toward a general theory of deviance. Boulder, CO: Westview.

Tittle, C. R. (1997). Thoughts stimulated by Braithwaite’s analysis of control balance theory. Theoretical Criminology, 1, 99- 110.

Tittle, C. R. (2001). Control balance. In R. Paternoster a R. Bachman (Eds.), Explaining criminals and crime (pp. 316-334). Los Angeles: Roxbury.

Tittle, C. R. (2004). Refining control balance theory. Theoretical Criminology, 8, 395-428.

Whitbeck, L. B., a Hoyt, D. R. (1999). Nowhere togrow. Hawthorne, NY: Walter de Gruyter.

Stephen W. Baron is an Associate Professor in the Department of Sociology at Queen’s University. His research interests focus on homeless street youth and crime. His work has recently appeared in Criminology, Journal of Research in Crime and Delinquency, and Journal of Criminal Justice.

David R. Forde is a Professor of Criminology and Criminal Justice and Director of the Mid-South Social Survey at the University of Memphis. His research interests include interpersonal victimization processes, crime prevention, and innovations in survey research methods. His recent publications have appeared in Violence & Victims, Journal of Interpersonal Violence and Child Abuse & Neglect. Correspondence to: Department of Sociology, Queen’s University, Kingston, Ontario, Canada K7L 3N6. E-mail: [email protected]

Copyright Academy of Criminal Justice Sciences Jun 2007

(c) 2007 Justice Quarterly : JQ. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Acute Respiratory Distress Following Liposuction

By Wessman, Dylan E Kim, Thu-Thuy T; Parrish, John S

An active duty male presented to the emergency room with dyspnea for 2 days after undergoing liposuction surgery. Upon presentation, the patient was afebrile, tachycardie, tachypneic, and hypoxemic. The initial chest radiograph demonstrated bilateral patchy opacities and the PaO^sub 2^/FiO^sub 2^ ratio was

A 31-year-old African-American male with no major medical problems except sickle cell trait presented to the emergency room (ER) with shortness of breath for 2 days’ duration after having undergone liposuction surgery. He also complained of a cough productive of clear sputum, but he denied experiencing fevers, chills, diaphoresis, hemoptysis, rash, confusion, sick contacts, or recent travel. He also denied any anginal or pleuritic chest pain.

The patient underwent liposuction for the removal of “love handles.” The procedure was performed at an outpatient surgical center, lasted several hours, and involved the use of general anesthesia, but the perioperative records were not available. The patient’s dyspnea began immediately after the surgery. He reported wearing compression stockings perioperatively and postoperatively, but denied being treated with any anticoagulants such as heparin or enoxaparin.

The patient was discharged to his home on the day of surgery without any specific treatment for his dyspnea. On postoperative day 1, he returned to the surgical center where he was seen by the plastic surgeon, who prescribed prednisone, reportedly for upper airway edema following the recent intubation. Again, the patient was discharged home, but his dyspnea became progressively worse, such that he sought attention in the ER on postoperative day 2.

The patient’s past medical history was notable for sickle cell trait. His surgical history was notable only for the recent liposuction. He had no known drug allergies. His current medications included cephalexin, acetaminophen/hydrocodone, and prochlorperazine, which were prescribed after the surgery. The patient’s family history was notable for a mother with sickle cell disease. He denied cigarette smoking, alcohol consumption, and illicit drug use. The patient served as an enlisted member in the U.S. military.

Upon presentation to the ER, vital signs included: temperature, 99.3[degrees]F; heart rate, 111 beats per minute; blood pressure, 157/73 mm Hg; respiratory rate, 26 breaths per minute; and pulse oximetry, 53% on room air. The patient was well-developed and well- nourished. He was alert and oriented and he appeared to be in mild respiratory distress. The head was normocephalic and atraumatic. His pupils were equal, round, and reactive to light. The sclerae were anicteric and the conjunctivae were pink. The oropharynx was clear and the mucous membranes were moist. The neck was supple without lymphadenopathy. There was no jugular venous distension or hepatojugular reflux.

The lungs were clear to auscultation without stridor, inspiratory crackles, or expiratory wheezes. The apical impulse was nondisplaced and there was no left ventricular lift or right ventricular heave. Auscultation of the heart revealed a rapid rate with a regular rhythm. There was no murmur, rub, or gallop. The peripheral pulses were 2+ and symmetric.

The abdomen was soft, nondistended, and nontender. Four surgical dressings had been placed over the incision sites in the hypogastrium, suprapubic region, and bilateral flanks; these dressings were clean, dry, and intact. Inspection of the extremities revealed no clubbing, cyanosis, or edema, although the patient was wearing compression stockings over the bilateral lower extremities. The patient had several tattoos on his chest and bilateral upper extremities. There was no appreciable petechial rash. The neurological examination revealed no focal deficits.

Routine laboratory tests were notable for mild leukocytosis with a left shift and microcytic anemia. Cardiac markers and brain natriuretic peptide were not measured. The initial arterial blood gas revealed significant hypoxemia with a widened A-a gradient (Table I). An electrocardiogram demonstrated sinus tachycardia without the signs of right ventricular strain. A chest radiograph demonstrated bilateral, multifocal air space opacities (Fig. 1). The Pa02/Fi02 ratio was 168, consistent with acute respiratory distress syndrome.

The patient was admitted to the medical intensive care unit for supportive care. He was started on intravenous azithromycin and ceftriaxone for possible pneumonia and subcutaneous enoxaparin for possible pulmonary embolism. Blood and sputum cultures were negative. A computed tomography (CIl angiogram of the chest revealed no evidence of pulmonary embolism, but did confirm bilateral, perihilar ground glass opacities (Fig. 2). An echocardiogram was not obtained and bronchoscopy was not performed.

The patient’s oxygen requirement improved and the abnormal chest radiographie findings resolved over the next 48 hours (Fig. 3). Given his acute respiratory distress following liposuction, negative workup for pneumonia and pulmonary embolism, and rapid recovery, a presumptive diagnosis of pulmonary fat embolism was established, although he did not manifest the mental status changes and petechial rash characteristic of the fat embolism syndrome (FES).

Discussion

During the past 20 years, liposuction has become an increasingly popular and widely used cosmetic procedure. Liposuction was developed originally in France and introduced in the United States in the early 1980s. Although the surgical techniques have been refined, liposuction is not a benign procedure. Major complications include bleeding, infection, skin necrosis, vital organ injury, adverse anesthesia reaction, pulmonary embolism, and fat embolism.1 A census survey of North American cosmetic surgeons in the mid- 1990s revealed a perioperative mortality rate of 20 per 100,000 cases; death was attributed to pulmonary embolism in 23% of the fatal cases and fat embolism was identified as the cause of death in 8.5% of cases.2

Fat embolism occurs when adipocytes and small blood vessels are damaged during the procedure, introducing lipid microthrombi into the circulation.3 Patients may present with lowgrade fever, tachycardia, tachypnea, hypoxemia, hypocapnia, and mental status changes. The differential diagnosis includes venous thromboembolism, aspiration pneumonitis, and pneumonia.4

Trauma-related conditions associated with fat embolism include long bone fractures, pelvic fractures, orthopedic procedures, bone marrow harvest, soft tissue injuries, burns, and liposuction. Non- trauma-related conditions include pancreatitis, osteomyelitis, panniculitis, bone tumor lysis, sickle cell disease, fatty liver disease, and lipid infusion.

The FES is characterized by the triad of acute hypoxemic respiratory distress, central nervous system dysfunction, and a petechial rash involving the head, neck, anterior thorax, or axillae. It typically occurs 24 to 72 hours after trauma involving the long bones or pelvis and it is more frequent in closed rather than open fractures. FES is much less likely to occur after damage to adipose tissue.5

Pulmonary fat embolism results from the oxidative effects of large amounts of circulating free fatty acids, which damage endothelial cells and pneumocytes in the lungs. The risk of mortality is significant, ranging from 5 to 15%.4 Approximately 10 to 44% of patients with pulmonary fat embolism develop acute respiratory distress syndrome requiring mechanical ventilation.5

The diagnosis of pulmonary fat embolism is largely clinical, based on a predisposing condition plus typical symptoms and signs. Bronchoalveolar lavage and high-resolution CT have been investigated as diagnostic modalities for FES, but neither is used widely for that purpose.6

The mainstay of treatment for pulmonary fat embolism is supportive care, with close monitoring of respiratory and hemodynamic status. The symptoms and signs of FES typically resolve in 3 to 7 days. The administration of intravenous unfractionated heparin or subcutaneous low-molecular-weight heparin is not recommended and the use of corticosteroids remains controversial.5

Conclusions

Clinicians should maintain a high suspicion for pulmonary fat embolism whenever a patient presents with acute dyspnea following liposuction. The diagnosis is a clinical one and the treatment is supportive. Morbidity due to fat embolism after liposuction can be significant, but mortality is rare. References

1. Iverson RE, Lynch DJ: Practice advisory on liposuction. Plast Resconstr Surg 2004; 113: 1478-90.

2. Grazer FM, De Jong RH: Fatal outcomes from liposuction: census survey of cosmetic surgeons. Plast Reconstr Surg 2000; 105: 436-46.

3. Fourme T, Vieillard-Baron A, Loubieres Y, Julie C, Page B, Jardin F: Early fat embolism after liposuction. Anesthesiology 1998; 89: 782-4.

4. Ross RM, Johnson GW: Fat embolism after liposuction. Chest 1988; 93: 1294-5.

5. Mellor A, Soni N: Fat embolism. Anaesthesia 2001; 56: 145-54.

6. Georgopoulos D, Bouros D: Fat embolism syndrome: clinical examination is still the preferable diagnostic method. Chest 2003; 123: 982-3.

Guarantor: LT Dylan E. Wessman, MC USN

Contributors; LT Dylan E. Wessman, MC USNf; LT Thu-Thuy T. Kirn, MC USN*; CAPT John S. Parrish, MC USN[double dagger]

*Department of Internal Medicine, Naval Medical Center San Diego, San Diego, CA 92134.

[dagger]DMsion of Cardiology, Naval Medical Center San Diego, San Diego, CA 92134.

[double dagger]Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, Naval Medical Center San Diego, San Diego, CA 92134.

The views expressed in this article are those of the authors and do not reflect the official policy or position of the Department of the Navy, Department of Defense, or the U.S. government.

This manuscript was received for review in July 2006. The revised manuscript was accepted for publication in February 2007.

Copyright Association of Military Surgeons of the United States Jun 2007

(c) 2007 Military Medicine. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

A Case of Severe Exercise-Induced Rhabdomyolysis Associated With a Weight-Loss Dietary Supplement

By Burke, Jennifer Seda, Gilbert; Allen, David; Knee, Treyce S

In response to questions about the safety of ephedra-based dietary products, ephedra-free products are now available. Many contain synephrine, a sympathomimetic amine with structural similarities to ephedra. We present a 22-year-old, previously healthy, African American male with sickle cell trait who developed rhabdomyolysis after ingestion of a synephrine-containing dietary supplement. The patient developed fatigue, dehydration, and myalgias while exercising. He developed severe rhabdomyolysis, with a peak creatine phosphokinase level of 2.8 million U/L, complicated by pulmonary edema, acute renal failure, disseminated intravascular coagulation, and bilateral compartment syndromes in his lower extremities. He required prolonged hospitalization for hemodialysis, multiple wound debridements, hyperbaric oxygen therapy, and physical therapy. He has permanent sensory and motor neurological deficits in his distal lower extremities. Military physicians should routinely inquire about the use of dietary supplements, educate patients about the potential adverse reactions associated with these agents, and encourage healthy diets and exercise for weight loss. Introduction

In 2004, the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) banned ephedra- containing products because of numerous reports of adverse cardiovascular and neurological events.1 As a result, many ephedrine- containing weight-loss products were reformulated with ephedra-free compounds. Some formulations contain synephrine (Citrus aurantium), which is structurally similar to ephedrine and phenylpropanolamine. Because dietary supplements are not under state or federal regulation, the FDA relies on Medwatch and case reports to monitor their safety and efficacy. Limited studies demonstrate increased blood pressure without desired weight loss when synephrine is combined with caffeine.2 There are case reports of synephrine- associated ischemie stroke, arrhythmias, and myocardial infarction.3 We present a case of a previously healthy male subject who developed severe rhabdomyolysis, complicated by acute renal failure and bilateral compartment syndrome, while exercising and using a dietary supplement called Lipo 6 (Nutrex Research Inc., Winter Park, Illinois). Lipo 6 is a supplement containing synephrine and caffeine that is marketed to accelerate fat loss. Rhabdomyolysis is an acute, fulminating, potentially fatal disease of skeletal muscle that entails destruction of muscle, as evidenced by myoglobinemia and myoglobinuria.

Despite a lack of strong scientific evidence for their positive effects, amphetamines were heavily used for performance enhancement before the Controlled Substances Act of 1970.4 Subsequently, the market was dominated by less-potent sympathornimetic amines. The market for these sympathomimetic amines exploded after the Dietary Supplements Health Education Act was enacted in 1994, despite their decreased potency and the lack of scientific support for efficacy.4 The Dietary Supplements Health Education Act allows manufacturers to sell supplements as long as they do not make claims regarding preventing or curing disease.5 FDA regulations5″8 do not pertain to the manufacturing of these herbal remedies. The FDA relies on a system of self-reporting for adverse events, and it is estimated that

The sympathomimetic amine ephedra was banned in 2004 because of numerous reports of adverse events.1 Ephedra, an CLand a-adrenergic receptor agonist, is structurally similar to methamphetamines, phenylpropanolamine, cocaine, and pseudoephedrine.6 In 2001, ephedra products were responsible for 64% of all supplement-related adverse events, despite representing only 0.8% of all dietary supplement sales.11 In the 140 reports of adverse events Haller and Benowitz12 reviewed to determine the relationship to ephedra, cardiovascular symptoms were the most common (47%), with hypertension being the most frequent adverse cardiovascular event. Central nervous system events, including strokes and seizures, constituted 18% of the events.12 Phenylpropanolamine, a cold preparation and appetite suppressant that is also structurally related to ephedra, was shown to be an independent risk factor for hemorrhagic strokes in female subjects in the Hemorrhagic Stroke Project.13

When ephedra was removed from the market in 2004, bitter orange (C. auronttum), or synephrine, became the popular alternative.4 A systematic review of C. auraniium for weight loss by Bent et al.2 found no evidence for the efficacy of synephrine for weight loss and cautioned that consumption of this supplement could result in adverse cardiovascular events. Adverse events associated with synephrine, which is structurally related to ephedra, include case reports of myocardial infarction, arrhythmias, and ischemie stroke.H Literature review did not reveal any cases of rhabdomyolysis related to synephrine use. We present a case of severe rhabdomyolysis in a patient using a synephrinecontaining dietary supplement for weight loss.

case Report

A 22-year-old, previously healthy, obese (body mass index, 31), African American, male, active duty sailor with sickle cell trait presented to the emergency department with fatigue, lightheadedness, and myalgias, which had developed while the patient was running for the physical readiness test. The patient was diagnosed as having exercise-induced rhabdomyolysis and heat exhaustion. Rhabdomyolysis is an acute, fulminating, potentially fatal disease of skeletal muscle that entails destruction of muscle, as evidenced by myoglobinemia and myoglobinuria. The patient had a maximal creatine phosphokinase level of 14,070 U/L and elevated liver function test results but preserved renal function. An elevated creatine phosphokinase level is an indicator of skeletal or myocardial muscle injury. After a brief hospitalization, followed by outpatient observation aboard his ship, the patient’s creatine phosphokinase levels and liver function test results improved but did not return to normal. According to the patient, his health care providers did not inquire about the use of supplements and were not aware that he was using a weight-loss dietary supplement.

Several weeks later, the patient resumed participation in the physical readiness test, without medical clearance, and experienced a second episode of exercise-induced rhabdomyolysis and heat exhaustion while running. After this episode, the patient admitted using a dietary supplement twice daily for the past 3 months. He presented to the emergency department with hypotension, tachycardia, tachypnea, and myalgias. Initial laboratory studies revealed combined lactic acidosis and respiratory acidosis with concomitant metabolic alkalosis stemming from muscle hypoxia and ischemia in the setting of pending respiratory failure. Other significant laboratory studies were an elevated white blood cell count of 24,000 cells per mm3, an elevated D-dimer level (an indicator of disseminated intravascular coagulation or venous thrombosis), and an elevated creatinine level of 4.4 mg/dL (an indicator of acute renal failure). Urinalysis revealed proteinuria and mild hematuria. Chest radiographs revealed no acute cardiopulmonary process, an echocardiogram revealed no evidence of impaired ventricular function, and a ventilation perfusion scan revealed no evidence of venous pulmonary thromboembolism. The initial creatine phosphokinase level was elevated at 704 U/L; within 24 hours, levels peaked at an incredible 2.8 million U/L, evidence of severe muscle injury. Another indicator of severe muscle injury was a urinary myoglobin level of 3.6 million [mu]g/mL. Urine drug screen results were negative. The serum aldolase level (a test for diagnosing myopathies) was normal.

Over the next 96 hours, the patient’s hospital course was complicated by hypovolemic shock requiring resuscitation with fluids and vasopressors, respiratory failure requiring intubation, acute renal failure requiring emergency dialysis, and disseminated intravascular coagulation. The patient had no evidence of cardiogenic or septic shock. Within 48 hours, he developed severe tightness, pallor, and pain in his lower extremities. He required emergency fasciotomies for left thigh and bilateral lower-extremity compartment syndromes. In this condition, increased pressure in a confined anatomical space adversely affects the circulation and threatens the function and viability of skeletal muscle, requiring incision of the fascia to relieve the pressure. Despite rapid surgical intervention, the patient sustained severe skeletal muscle ischemia and necrosis.

Over the next 6 weeks, the patient received hemodialysis because of his renal failure. Two weeks into treatment, the patient developed hypercalcemia, presumed to be a late phase of recovery from his rhabdomyolysis, in which calcium is released from calcium salts from injured muscle. His compartment syndrome required multiple debridements for removal of ischemic muscle, wound vacuum- assisted closure devices on both extremities to facilitate wound healing, and repeated transfusions because of blood loss from open wounds. The patient required hyperbaric oxygen therapy to promote increased perfusion of his lower extremities. After 6 weeks, his renal function improved and he no longer required hemodialysis. Despite intensive management by the surgical and medical staffs, the patient sustained permanent bilateral sensory and motor neurological deficits in both distal lower extremities, requiring prolonged physical therapy and braces on both lower extremities to walk. The patient was medically discharged from military service and required vocational and physical rehabilitation through the Veteran’s Administration. Discussion

In rhabdomyolysis, muscle injury is induced by trauma, infection, inflammatory myopathies, metabolic disorders, endocrine disorders, medications, or supplements. We found no other case reports in the literature of severe rhabdomyolysis in patients using synephrine- containing dietary supplements. Although this patient had several predisposing factors for rhabdomyolysis, including a recent episode of rhabdomyolysis, sickle cell trait, and exercising in a warm climate, we suspect the severity of the rhabdomyolysis was aggravated by the use of a dietary supplement. The patient had no history of exerciseassociated rhabdomyolysis when performing the physical readiness test without dietary supplements.

The dietary supplement this patient was taking contained synephrine, caffeine, and yohimbine. Several of these compounds are associated with adverse reactions. Synephrine has reported associations with ischemie stroke, arrhythmias, myocardial infarction, hypertension, and syncope.14 Caffeine has a synergistic effect with synephrine.14 case reports implicate caffeine in rhabdomyolysis at toxic doses; when combined with synephrine, it is also associated with hypertension, seizures, and arrhythmias.15,16 Yohimbine is associated with hypertensive crisis when combined with sympathomimetic agents such synephrine, and there is one report of renal failure attributable to the combination.17,18 We hypothesize that the synephrine and caffeine in this patient’s dietary supplement increased this patient’s risk of rhabdomyolysis via ischemic injury to muscle through vasoconstriction or vasospasm, myocyte thermoregulatory dysfunction, toxin-associated myocyte injury, or impaired calcium homeostasis causing myonecrosis. We cannot eliminate the fact that the sickle cell trait increased the patient’s propensity for rhabdomyolysis.19-21 Further research is warranted to investigate the effects of dietary supplements on skeletal muscle during exercise, especially in patients with risk factors such as sickle cell trait.

This case study raises several important points for Armed Forces medicine. Often our patients are overweight and under enormous pressures to maintain normal weight for active duty status. Carlton et al.22 found that active duty men used diet pills at a year-round rate of 3.5% but the rate increased to 14.9% around the times for weigh-ins and measurements. The weight standards, although important for military bearing and readiness, place our service members at higher risk for eating disorders, unhealthy diets, and use of supplements for weight loss. The sale of supplements at military faculties, combined with the assumption of safety if they are sold over the counter, increases the vulnerability of our active duty consumers.

Service members can benefit from education regarding the effects and risks associated with dietary supplement use, as well as healthy ways to promote weight loss and fitness. Physicians should be aware of the potential side effects of supplements and should routinely question and caution patients on their use. We propose that the use of dietary supplements might have increased the propensity for rhabdomyolysis and subsequent complications in our patient’s case. Our case illustrates the importance of physicians routinely asking their patients about supplement use and encouraging the reporting of adverse events, to monitor for trends.

References

1. Food and Drug Administration: Final rule declaring dietary supplements containing ephedrine alkaloids adulterated because they present an unreasonable risk, December 2004. Available at http:// www.fda.gov/oc/initiatives/ephedra/ febraary2004/finalsummary.html; accessed February 6, 2006.

2. Bent S, Padula A, Neuhaus J: Safety and efficacy of Citrus ourontium for weight loss. Am J Cardiol 2004; 94: 1359-61.

3. Haller CA, Benowitz NL, Jacob P III: Hemodynamic effects of ephedra-free weight-loss supplementation in humans. Am J Med 2005; 118: 998-1003.

4. McDuff DR, Baron D: Substance use in athletics: a sports psychiatry perspective. Clin Sports Med 2005; 24: 885-97.

5. Dietary Supplement Health and Education Act of 1994, Pub. L. 103-417, [section]l(a), 109 Stat. 4325, October 25, 1994.

6. LoVecchio F, Sawyers B, Eckholdt PA: Transient ischemic attack associated with Metabolife 356 use. Am J Emerg Med 2005; 23: 199- 200.

7. Heber D: Herbal preparations for obesity: are they useful? Prim Care 2003; 30: 441-63.

8. Bent S, Ko R: Commonly used herbal medicines in the United States: a review. Am J Med 2004; 116: 478-85.

9. Fleming GA: The FDA, regulation, and the risk of stroke. N Engl J Med 2000; 343: 1886-7.

10. Blowey DL: Nephrotoxicity of over-the-counter analgesics, natural medicine, and illicit drugs. Adolesc Med 2005; 16: 31-43.

11. Saper RB, Eisenberg DM, Phillips RS: Common dietary supplements for weight loss. Am Fam Physician 2004; 70: 1731-8.

12. Haller CA, Benowitz NL: Adverse cardiovascular and central nervous system events associated with dietary supplements containing ephedra alkaloids. N Engl J Med 2000; 343: 1833-8.

13. Keman WN, Viscoli CM, Brass LM, et al: Phenylpropanolamine and the risk of hemorrhagic stroke. N Engl J Med 2000; 343: 1826- 32.

14. Bouchard NC, Howland MA, Greller HA, Hoffman RS, Nelso LS: Ischemic stroke associated with use of an ephedra-free dietary supplement containing synephrine. Mayo Clin Proc 2005; 80: 541-5.

15. Wrenn KD, Oschner I: Rhabdomyolysis induced by a caffeine overdose. Ann Emerg Med 1989; 18: 94-7.

16. Michaelis HC, Sharift S, Schoel G: Rhabdomyolysis after suicidal ingestion of an overdose of caffeine, acetaminophen, and phenazone as a fixed-dose combination (Spalt N). J Toxicol Clin Toxicol 1991; 29: 521-6.

17. Sandier B, Aronson P: Yohimbine-induced cutaneous drug eruption, progressive renal failure, and lupus-like syndrome. Urology 1993; 41: 343-5.

18. Ruck B, Shih RD, Marcus SM: Hypertensive crisis from herbal treatment of impotence. Am J Emerg Med 1999; 17: 317-8.

19. Dincer HE, Raza T: Compartment syndrome and fatal rhabdomyolysis in sickle cell trait. WMJ 2005; 104: 67-71.

20. Eisenbach CH, Pohl J, Dikow R, Stremmel W, Encke J: Severe rhabdomyolysis and renal failure triggered by a sauna visit in sickle cell trait: a case report. Clin Nephrol 2005; 63: 229-31.

21. Gardner JW, Kark JA: Fatal rhabdomyolysis presenting as mild heat illness in military training. Milit Med 1994; 159: 160-3.

22. Carlton JR, Manos GH, Van Slyke JA: Anxiety and abnormal eating behaviors associated with cyclical readiness testing in naval hospital active duty populations. Milit Med 2005; 170: 663-7.

Guarantor: CDRTreyce S. Knee, MC USN

Contributors: LT Jennifer Burke, MC USNR*; LCDR Gilbert Seda, MC USN[dagger]; LCDR David Alien, MC USNR[dagger]; CDRTreyce S. Knee, MC USN[dagger]

* Regional Support Organization Norfolk, Norfolk, VA 23511.

[dagger] Naval Medical Center Portsmouth, Portsmouth, VA 23708.

Presented at the American College of Physicians, U.S. Navy Chapter Scientific Meeting, October 6-8, 2005, San Diego, CA.

The views expressed in this article are those of the authors and do not necessarily reflect the official policy or position of the Department of the Navy, the Department of Defense, or the U.S. government.

This manuscript was received for review in March 2006. The revised manuscript was accepted for publication in November 2006.

Copyright Association of Military Surgeons of the United States Jun 2007

(c) 2007 Military Medicine. Provided by ProQuest Information and Learning. All rights Reserved.

Water Street Healthcare Partners and Wind Point Partners Announce Deal to Create Leader in Rehabilitation Services

CHICAGO, June 28 /PRNewswire/ — Water Street Healthcare Partners, a Chicago private-equity firm focused exclusively on the healthcare industry, and Wind Point Partners announced today that they have finalized a deal to merge Physiotherapy Associates and Benchmark Medical to create a national leader in outpatient rehabilitation services.

Water Street, which recently acquired Physiotherapy Associates from Stryker Corporation in a $150 million deal, and Wind Point, which has owned Benchmark Medical since 2000, will be the majority owners of the combined company. Operating under the name Physiotherapy Associates, the company will generate combined revenues of $420 million, employ 5,500 people and operate more than 800 clinics offering physical therapy, orthotic and prosthetic services to millions of patients in communities throughout the U.S.

Bill Floyd, CEO of Benchmark Medical, has been named the new CEO of Physiotherapy Associates. Prior to Benchmark, Mr. Floyd served as chairman, president and CEO of leading eldercare provider, Beverly Enterprises, where he was instrumental in increasing shareholder value by more than $1 billion.

Noting that the number of people over age 45 will increase by more than 20 percent over the next 15 years, Mr. Floyd stated, “As U.S. demographics shift to an increasingly older population, the demand for rehabilitation services will rise. We’re already seeing it. Now more than ever, people need access to consistent, personalized care. Physiotherapy Associates will set the bar for the industry as the only national company that can offer people specialized expertise in physical therapy, orthotic and prosthetic services at a local level. Our advantage as a combined company will be our ability to serve local communities more effectively because we understand their specific needs and, at the same time, have an extensive, national network of support and resources that we can leverage.”

Mark Valente, executive vice president of operations for Physiotherapy Associates, added, “Our customers and employees will benefit enormously from the combination of our companies. We are both highly regarded industry leaders that are known for the quality of our clinical care in the communities we serve. By coming together as one company that will offer our expertise and services in cities across the country, we will continue to make a real difference in our patients’ lives, and just as importantly, bring new and exciting opportunities to our employees.”

Calling attention to the fact that more than 70 percent of the outpatient rehabilitation market is comprised of local or regional clinics that are standalone facilities, Jeff Gonyo, a managing director with Wind Point Partners and board member of Physiotherapy Associates said, “We see a tremendous opportunity to make a significant impact in the highly fragmented outpatient rehabilitation services market. By partnering with Water Street to create a leading national company focused on high-quality clinical care at a local level, and bringing Bill Floyd, a top-caliber CEO, into the equation, we are changing the face of this industry.”

Kip Kirkpatrick, a partner with Water Street Healthcare Partners and board member of Physiotherapy Associates, added, “When we approached Stryker Corporation about making Physiotherapy Associates an independent company, we committed to invest in its future. Through this merger, we are creating an industry leader that excels at providing patients with comprehensive and personalized rehabilitation care. Looking ahead, we see even more potential to further build on Physiotherapy Associates’ leadership position by extending its services into even more communities and offering enhanced services to patients.”

About Water Street Healthcare Partners

Water Street Healthcare Partners is a Chicago private-equity firm focused exclusively on building market leadership companies in the healthcare industry. Leveraging its financial and operating expertise, deep industry knowledge, and extensive network of contacts, Water Street proactively sources and invests in middle market companies to accelerate growth and significantly increase value, with a particular expertise in corporate divestitures from the world’s leading healthcare companies, including Johnson & Johnson, Smith & Nephew and Stryker Corporation. Water Street’s team is comprised of highly experienced industry leaders and private-equity professionals who have worked together for more than 10 years and whose investments include: Medex Corporation, AbilityOne Corporation, Kendro Laboratory Products and AccessMediQuip. For more information about Water Street, visit http://www.wshp.com/.

About Wind Point Partners

Wind Point Partners is a private equity investment firm with $2 billion in capital under management. Wind Point focuses on partnering with top caliber management teams to acquire solid middle market businesses with a clear path to value creation. Additional information about Wind Point is available at http://www.wppartners.com/.

Water Street Healthcare Partners

CONTACT: Kelly Zitlow of Water Street Healthcare Partners,+1-847-858-5230, [email protected]; or Rebecca Vanderlake of Wind PointPartners, +1-312-255-4805, [email protected]

Web site: http://www.waterstreetcapital.com/

Bausch & Lomb Introduces Ocuvite(R) DF Eye Vitamin Supplement for Diabetics

Bausch & Lomb today introduced its Ocuvite DF eye vitamin supplement, specifically developed for diabetics to help maintain eye health, at the American Optometric Association’s (AOA) 110th Annual Congress.

Diabetics face high blood sugar levels that can increase free radicals in the body. The oxidative stress associated with free radicals can in turn play a role in damaging the blood vessels of the eye’s retina, a condition called diabetic retinopathy. This condition is the most common cause of diabetes-related vision loss.

Ocuvite DF contains an antioxidant called genistein, which, in combination with other essential nutrients and antioxidants such as alpha-lipoic acid, combats free radicals and reduces oxidative stress.

“Mounting scientific evidence suggests that nutritional supplements may be important in protecting general eye health by addressing the shortfalls in Americans’ nutritional intake, especially when the supplements are a part of a balanced, healthy diet,” said Anthony Cavallerano, OD, FAAO, an optometrist at the VA Boston Health Care System and professor of optometry at the New England College of Optometry. “Ocuvite DF is a welcome addition in that fight.”

Ocuvite DF joins Ocuvite Adult and Ocuvite Adult 50+ eye vitamin and mineral supplement formulations currently on the market. It will be widely available across the United States later this summer.

In addition to the Ocuvite DF introduction, Bausch & Lomb is showcasing several other products at the AOA Optometry’s Meeting™ exhibition, including:

The ReNu MultiPlus® Travel Kit, a two-fluid-ounce version of ReNu MultiPlus multi-purpose solution as well as a new contact lens case; and the Boston Simplus® Travel Kit, a one-fluid-ounce version of Boston Simplus solution plus a new contact lens case. These contact lens solutions comply with the three-ounce Transportation Security Administration (TSA) carry-on limit for liquids. They make air travel more convenient for contact lens wearers, while eliminating the unhealthy practice of transferring sterile multi-purpose solution into a smaller, non-sterile bottle.

New and improved PureVision® contact lenses, offering a 28-percent lower modulus and a new 8.3 mm base curve, plus enhanced comfort via a smoother anterior surface. Their unique aspheric optical design provides next-generation aberration correction for exceptional vision.

Alaway™ (ketotifen fumarate ophthalmic solution antihistamine eye drops) is indicated for up to 12 hours of relief for itchy eyes due to ragweed, pollen, grass, animal hair and dander. Alaway, available over the counter, contains the same active ingredient and strength as Zaditor, the former prescription brand of ketotifen fumarate, and is shown to be therapeutically equivalent with a lower retail cost.

Loteprednol etabonate-based prescription pharmaceuticals, encompassing Lotemax® (loteprednol etabonate ophthalmic suspension 0.5%) to target ocular inflammation associated with dry eye via a unique, site-active mechanism of action; Zylet® (loteprednol etabonate 0.5% and tobramycin 0.3% ophthalmic suspension), combining the proven anti-inflammatory power of loteprednol etabonate with the broad-spectrum anti-infective agent tobramycin; and Alrex® (loteprednol etabonate ophthalmic suspension 0.2%), the first corticosteroid specifically designed for seasonal allergic conjunctivitis.

Bausch & Lomb will also present three posters during the AOA Congress: The Rate of Disinfection Efficacy of Multi-Purpose Contact Lens Care Solutions; Visual Outcomes Associated with Aspheric and Non-Aspheric Silicone Hydrogel Lenses; and PureVision Toric Lenses Piggybacked with Nike MAXSIGHT Amber and Grey-Green Sport Contact Lenses.

The Bausch & Lomb exhibit will run through Saturday, June 30, at the Hynes Convention Center in Boston.

Bausch & Lomb is the eye health company, dedicated to perfecting vision and enhancing life for consumers around the world. Its core businesses include soft and rigid gas permeable contact lenses and lens care products, and ophthalmic surgical and pharmaceutical products. The Bausch & Lomb name is one of the best known and most respected healthcare brands in the world. Founded in 1853, the company is headquartered in Rochester, N.Y. Bausch & Lomb’s 2006 revenues were more than $2.2 billion; it employs more than 13,000 people worldwide and its products are available in more than 100 countries. More information can be found at www.bausch.com.

As with other ophthalmic corticosteroids, Lotemax is contraindicated in most viral diseases of the cornea and conjunctiva and in mycobacterial and fungal diseases of the eye. Prolonged use may result in secondary glaucoma, cataract formation, and secondary ocular infections following suppression of the host response and/or perforation of the globe. The most common adverse events in patients treated with Lotemax were abnormal vision/blurring, burning, chemosis, discharge, and dry eyes.

As with other steroid/anti-infective ophthalmic combination drugs, Zylet is contraindicated in most viral diseases of the cornea and conjunctiva including epithelial herpes simplex keratitis (dendritic keratitis), vaccinia, and varicella and also in mycobacterial infection of the eye and fungal diseases of ocular structures. Zylet is also contraindicated in individuals with known or suspected hypersensitivity to any of the ingredients of this preparation and to other corticosteroids. Prolonged use of corticosteroids may result in glaucoma, as well as increase the hazard of secondary ocular infections. The incidence of adverse events reported by subjects treated with Zylet included injection (approximately 20%) and superficial punctate keratitis (approximately 15%). The development of secondary infection has occurred after use of combinations containing steroids and antimicrobials. NOT FOR INJECTION INTO THE EYE. Steroids should be used with caution in the presence of glaucoma. The use of steroids after cataract surgery may delay healing and increase the incidence of bleb formation. If this product is used for 10 days or longer, intraocular pressure should be monitored even though it may be difficult in children and uncooperative patients.

As with other ophthalmic corticosteroids, Alrex is contraindicated in most viral diseases of the corneas and conjunctiva and in mycobacterial and fungal diseases of the eye. Prolonged use of may result in secondary glaucoma, cataract formation, and secondary ocular infections following suppression of the host response and/or perforation of the globe. The most common adverse events in patients treated with Alrex were abnormal vision/blurring, burning, chemosis, discharge, and dry eyes.

Ocuvite, ReNu MultiPlus, Boston Simplus, PureVision, Alaway, Lotemax, Zylet and Alrex are trademarks of Bausch & Lomb Incorporated. Other brands are trademarks of their respective owners.

USANA Founder Dr. Myron Wentz Receives Albert Einstein Award

Dr. Myron Wentz, founder, chairman, and CEO of USANA Health Sciences, Inc. (NASDAQ: USNA), was honored Monday at a special ceremony in Jerusalem with the Albert Einstein Award for Outstanding Achievement in the Life Sciences.

The Albert Einstein Award, given by Global Capital Associates, salutes leaders whose vision and commitment have contributed to the critical advancement of vital life-saving and life-enhancing technology to benefit mankind. Dr. Wentz received the award in recognition of his many scientific and charitable endeavors.

“I am honored and humbled to receive an award that bears the name of Albert Einstein,” Dr. Wentz said. “As both an extraordinary scientist and dedicated humanitarian, he serves as a great inspiration for my life’s work, helping people lead healthier lives through nutritional science.”

Dr. Wentz is an internationally recognized microbiologist, immunologist and pioneer in the development of human cell culture technology and infectious disease diagnoses. In 1974 he launched Gull Laboratories, which developed groundbreaking viral diagnostic assays, including the first commercially available test for diagnosing infection with the Epstein-Barr virus. Dr. Wentz sold his controlling interests in Gull Laboratories in 1992 and founded USANA Health Sciences, a state-of-the-art manufacturer of science-based nutritional supplements and personal-care products. Most recently, he founded Sanoviv Medical Institute, a holistic medical facility with full hospital accreditation located in Baja California. He holds a Ph.D. in microbiology and immunology from the University of Utah.

Today Dr. Wentz is increasingly focused on his humanitarian and charitable endeavors, recently founding the Wentz Medical Centre and Laboratory in Uganda and the Wentz Medical Centre in Cambodia to serve children in those countries orphaned by diseases such as malaria and HIV. Dr. Wentz was a recipient of the Children’s Champion Award by Children’s Hunger Fund, for which he travels worldwide as a medical missionary.

While Dr. Wentz’ primary focus is on health and disease prevention, his love for music and appreciation for his undergraduate alma mater led him to contribute generously to the construction of the Wentz Concert Hall and Fine Arts Center at North Central College in Naperville, Ill.

About USANA

USANA develops and manufactures high-quality nutritionals, personal-care, and weight-management products that are sold directly to Preferred Customers and Associates throughout the United States, Canada, Australia, New Zealand, Hong Kong, Japan, Taiwan, South Korea, Singapore, Malaysia, Mexico, the Netherlands and the United Kingdom. More information on USANA can be found at http://www.usanahealthsciences.com.